initial commit of ebook 13539HEADmain

22 files changed, 12430 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/13539-8.txt b/old/13539-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..baec0ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4124 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers,
+About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers, About the Heathen.
+
+Author: Dr. John Scudder
+
+Release Date: September 27, 2004 [EBook #13539]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DR. SCUDDER'S
+
+TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,
+
+ABOUT THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+
+1849
+
+
+The following work, so far as the Hindoos are concerned, is principally
+a compilation from the writings of Duff, Dubois, and others.
+
+Should the eyes of any Christian father or mother rest upon it, I would
+ask them if they have not a son or a daughter to dedicate to the
+_missionary_ work. The duty of devoting themselves to this work of
+Christ, or at least, of consecrating to it their money, their efforts,
+and their prayers, is the great duty to be perseveringly and prayerfully
+impressed on the minds of our children. A generation thus trained would,
+with aid from on high, soon effect the moral revolution of the world.
+Blessed will be that father, blessed will be that mother, who shall take
+any part in such a training. And I would add, too, blessed will be that
+pastor, and blessed will be that Sabbath-school teacher, who shall come
+up to their help.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+General Remarks
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+The Color and Ornaments of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+Dress, Houses, Eating, and Salutation of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+Marriage among the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+Death and Funerals among the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+The Gods of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+The Three Hundred and Thirty Millions of the Gods of the Hindoos--The
+Creation of the Universe--The Transmigration of Souls--The different
+Hells
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+Hindoo Castes
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+Hindoo Temples--Cars--Procession of Idols
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+Festivals of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+The worship of the Serpent
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+The River Ganges
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+The Goddess Durga
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+The Goddess Karle
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+Self-tortures of the Hindoos
+
+Chapter XVI.
+
+The Suttee, or Burning of Widows
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+The revengeful Nature of the Hindoo Religion
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+The Deception of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+Superstition of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+Burmah, China, etc., etc.
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+The duty of Praying and Contributing for the Spread of the Gospel
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+Personal Labors among the Heathen
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+Success of the Gospel in India and Ceylon
+
+
+
+
+DR. SCUDDER'S
+
+TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,
+
+ABOUT THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+GENERAL REMARKS
+
+
+My dear children--When I was a little boy, my dear mother taught me,
+with the exception of the last line, the following prayer:
+
+    "Now I lay me down to sleep,
+    I pray the Lord my soul to keep;
+    If I should die before I wake,
+    I pray the Lord my soul to take;
+    And this I ask for Jesus' sake."
+
+Though I am now more than fifty years old, I often like to say this
+prayer before I go to sleep. Have you ever learned it, my dear
+children? If you have not, I hope that you will learn it _now_; and I
+hope, too, that when you say your other prayers at night, you will also
+say this. I think that you would be glad to see how this prayer looks in
+the Tamul language--the language in which I am now preaching the Gospel,
+and in which I hope that some of you will hereafter tell the heathen of
+the Saviour. The following is a translation of it:
+
+[Illustration: The Lord's Prayer in Tamul]
+
+I wish that all the little heathen children knew this prayer; but their
+fathers and mothers do not teach it to them. Their fathers and mothers
+teach them to pray to gods of gold, or brass, or stone. They take them,
+while they are very young, to their temples, and teach them to put up
+their hands before an idol, and say, "Swammie." Swammie means Lord. As
+idolatry is the root of all sin, these children, as you may suppose, in
+early life become very wicked. They disobey their parents, speak bad
+words, call ill names, swear, steal, and tell lies. They also throw
+themselves on the ground in anger, and in their rage they tear their
+hair, or throw dirt over their heads, and do many other wicked things.
+
+Let me give you an instance, to show you how they will speak bad words.
+A few months ago, a little girl about twelve years of age was brought to
+me, with two tumors in her back. To cut them out, I had to make an
+incision about eight inches in length; and as one of these tumors had
+extended under the shoulder-blade she suffered much before the operation
+was finished. While I was operating she cried out, "I will pull out my
+eyes." "I will pull out my tongue." "Kurn kertta tayvun." The
+translation of this is, "The blind-eyed god." By this expression, she
+meant to say, "What kind of a god are you, not to look upon me, and help
+me in my distress?" If this little girl had had a Christian father to
+teach her to love the Saviour, she would not have used such bad
+language. But this father was even more wicked than his daughter,
+inasmuch as those who grow old in sin, are worse than those who have not
+sinned so long. I never saw a more hard-hearted parent. That he was so,
+will appear from his conduct after the operation was finished. He left
+his daughter, and went off to his home, about forty miles distant.
+Before going, he said to his wife, or to one who came with her, "If the
+child gets well, bring her home; if she dies, take her away and bury
+her."
+
+I hope, my dear children, that when you think of the wicked little girl
+just mentioned, you will be warned never to speak bad words. God will be
+very angry with you, if you do. Did you never read what is said in 2
+Kings, 2d chapter and 23d verse, about the little children who mocked
+the prophet Elijah, and spoke bad words to him. O, how sorry must they
+have felt for their conduct, when they saw the paws of those great bears
+lifted up to tear them in pieces, and which did tear them in pieces.
+Besides all this, little children who speak bad words can never go to
+heaven. God will cast them into the great fire. Have you ever spoken bad
+words? If so, God is angry with you, and he will not forgive you unless
+you are sorry that you have done so, and seek his forgiveness through
+the blood of his dear Son.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE COLOR AND ORNAMENTS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear children--If you will take a piece of mahogany in your hands,
+and view its different shades, you will have a pretty good
+representation of the color of a large class of this heathen people--I
+say, of a large class, for there is a great variety of colors. Some
+appear to be almost of a bronze color. Some are quite black. It is
+difficult to account for the different colors which we often see in the
+same family. For instance, one child will be of the reddish hue to which
+I just referred; another will be quite dark. When I was in Ceylon, two
+sisters of this description joined my church. One was called Sevappe, or
+the red one; the other was called Karappe, or the black one.
+
+This people very much resemble the English and Americans in their
+features. Many of them are very beautiful. This remark will apply
+particularly to children, and more especially to the children of
+Brahmins and others, who are delicately brought up. But however
+beautiful any of this people may be, they try to make themselves appear
+more so, by the ornaments which they wear. These ornaments are of very
+different kinds, and are made of gold, silver, brass, precious stones,
+or glass. All are fond of ear-rings. Sometimes four or five are worn in
+each ear, consisting of solid gold, the lower one being the largest, and
+the upper one the smallest. Some men wear a gold ornament attached to
+the middle of the ear, in which a precious stone is inserted. Sometimes
+they wear very large circular ear-rings, made of the wire of copper,
+around which gold is twisted so as to cover every part of it. These are
+frequently ornamented with precious stones. The females, in addition to
+ear-rings, have an ornament which passes through the rim of the ear,
+near the head, half of it being seen above the rim, and half of it below
+it. An ornamental chain is sometimes attached to this, which goes some
+distance back, when it is lost in the hair. They sometimes also wear a
+jewel in the middle of the rim of the ear, and another on that little
+forward point which strikes your finger when you attempt to put it into
+the ear. Nose jewels also are worn. Sometimes three are worn at the
+same time. Holes are made through each side of the lower part of the
+nose, and through the cartilage, or that substance which divides the
+nostrils, through which they are suspended. The higher and wealthier
+females wear a profusion of ornaments of gold and pearls around the
+neck.
+
+A very pretty ornament, about three inches in diameter, having the
+appearance of gold, is also frequently worn by them on that part of the
+head where the females in America put up their hair in a knot. In
+addition to this, the little girls sometimes wear one or two similar but
+smaller ornaments below this, as well as an ornament at the end of the
+long braid of hair which hangs down over the middle of their backs.
+Occasionally the whole, or the greater part of this braid is covered
+with an ornament of the same materials with those just described. They
+also wear an ornament extending from the crown of the head to the
+forehead, just in that spot where the little girls to whom I am writing
+part their hair. Attached to this, I have seen a circular piece of gold
+filled with rubies. Rings are worn on the toes as well as on the
+fingers, and bracelets of gold or silver on the wrists. Anklets similar
+to bracelets, and tinkling ornaments are worn on the ankles. The poor,
+who cannot afford to wear gold or silver bracelets, have them made of
+glass stained with different colors. I have seen nearly a dozen on each
+wrist.
+
+The little boys wear gold or silver bracelets; also gold or silver
+anklets. I just alluded to finger-rings. I have seen a dozen on the same
+hand. In this part of the country, the little opening which is made in
+the ears of the children is gradually distended until it becomes very
+large. At first, the opening is only large enough to admit a wire. After
+this has been worn for a short time, a knife is introduced into the ear
+in the direction of the opening, and an incision made large enough to
+admit a little cotton. This is succeeded by a roll of oiled cloth, and
+by a peculiar shrub, the English name of which, if it has any, I do not
+know. When the hole becomes sufficiently large, a heavy ring of lead,
+about an inch in diameter, is introduced. This soon increases the size
+of the opening to such an extent, that a second, and afterwards a third,
+a fourth, and a fifth ring are added. By these weights, the lower parts
+of the ear are drawn down sometimes very nearly, or quite to the
+shoulders. Not unfrequently the little girls, when they run, are obliged
+to catch hold of these rings to prevent the injury which they would
+receive by their striking against their necks. I need hardly say, that
+in due time, these rings are removed, and ornamented rings are
+substituted.
+
+A different plan is pursued with the Mohammedan little girls. They have
+their ears bored from the top to the bottom of the ear. The openings
+which are at first made are small, and are never enlarged. A ring is
+inserted in each of these openings. I have seen a little girl to-day in
+whose ears I counted twenty-four rings.
+
+Flowers in great profusion are sometimes used to add to the adornment of
+the jewels.
+
+I cannot conclude my account of the jewels of the little girls, without
+giving you a description of the appearance of a little patient of mine
+who came here a few days ago, loaded with trinkets. I will give it in
+the words of my daughter, which she wrote in part while the girl was
+here. "On the 17th, a little dancing-girl came to see us. She was
+adorned with many jewels, some of which were very beautiful. The jewel
+in the top of the ear was a circle, nearly the size of a dollar. It was
+set with rubies. Nine pearls were suspended from it. In the middle of
+the ear was a jewel of a diamond shape, set with rubies and pearls. The
+lowest jewel in the ear was shaped like a bell. It was set with rubies,
+and from it hung a row of pearls. Close by the ear, suspended from the
+hair, was a jewel which reached below her ear. It consisted of six bells
+of gold, one above the other. Around each was a small row of pearls,
+which reached nearly to the bell below, thus forming a jewel resembling
+very many drops of pearls. It is the most beautiful jewel that I ever
+saw. In the right side of her nose was a white stone, set with gold, in
+the shape of a star. From it hung a large pearl. There was a hole bored
+in the partition between the nostrils. This hole had a jewel in it,
+about an inch in length, in the middle of which was a white stone with a
+ruby on each side. It also had a ruby on the top. From the white stone
+hung another, of a similar color, attached to it by a piece of gold. In
+the left side of the nose was a jewel about an inch in diameter. It was
+somewhat in the shape of a half-moon, and was set with rubies, pearls,
+emeralds, etc. etc. This jewel hung below her mouth. On the back of her
+head was a large, round gold piece, three inches in diameter. Another
+piece about two inches in diameter, hung below this. Her hair was
+braided in one braid, and hung down her back. At the bottom of this were
+three large tassels of silk, mounted with gold. Her eyebrows and
+eyelashes were painted with black. Her neck was covered with jewels of
+such beauty, and of such a variety, that it is impossible for me to
+describe them. Around her ankles were large rings which looked like
+braided silver. To these were attached very many little bells, which
+rung as she walked. I believe all dancing-girls wear these rings. We
+felt very sad when we thought that she was dedicated to a life of infamy
+and shame."
+
+There is an ornament worn by the followers of the god Siva, on their
+arms, or necks, or in their hair. It is called the _lingum_. The nature
+of this is so utterly abominable, that I cannot tell you a word about
+it.
+
+Married women wear an ornament peculiar to themselves. It is called the
+tahly. It is a piece of gold, on which is engraven the image of some one
+of their gods. This is fastened around the neck by a short yellow
+string, containing one hundred and eight threads of great fineness.
+Various ceremonies are performed before it is applied, and the gods, of
+whom I will tell you something by and by, with their wives, are called
+upon to give their blessing. When these ceremonies are finished, the
+tahly is brought on a waiter, ornamented with sweet-smelling flowers,
+and is tied by the bridegroom to the neck of the bride. This ornament is
+never taken off, unless her husband dies. In such a case she is deprived
+of it, to wear it no more for ever--deprived of it, after various
+ceremonies, by her nearest female relative, who cuts the thread by which
+it is suspended, and removes it. After this a barber is called, who
+shaves her head, and she becomes, in the eyes of the people, a
+_despised_ widow--no more to wear any ornament about her neck but a
+plain one--no more to stain her face with yellow water, nor to wear on
+her forehead those marks which are considered by the natives as among
+their chief ornaments.
+
+I have now told you something about the jewels of this people. I hope
+that you will never be disposed to imitate them, and load your bodies
+with such useless things. They are not only useless, but tend to
+encourage pride and vanity. All that you need is, the "Pearl of great
+price," even Jesus. Adorn yourself with this Pearl, and you will be
+beautiful indeed--beautiful even in the sight of your heavenly Father.
+Have you this Pearl of great price, my dear children? Tell me, have you
+this Pearl of great price? If you have not, what have you?
+
+I just now alluded to those marks which the natives consider among their
+chief ornaments. These are different among different sects. The
+followers of Siva rub ashes on their foreheads. These ashes are
+generally prepared by burning what in the Tamul language is called
+[Tamul:] _chaarne._ They also apply these ashes in streaks, generally
+three together, on their breasts, and on their arms. Some besmear their
+whole bodies with them.
+
+The followers of Vrishnoo wear a very different ornament from that just
+described. It consists of a perpendicular line drawn on the forehead,
+generally of a red or yellow color, and a white line on each side of it,
+which unite at the bottom with the middle line, and form a trident.
+
+Another ornament consists of a small circle, which is called pottu. This
+is stamped in the middle of the forehead. Sometimes it is red, sometimes
+yellow or black. Large numbers of women, in this part of the country,
+wash their faces with a yellow water, made so by dissolving in it a
+paste made of a yellow root and common shell-lime. The Brahmins
+frequently instead of rubbing ashes, draw a horizontal line over the
+middle of their foreheads, to show that they have bathed and are pure.
+Sometimes the people ornament themselves with a paste of sandal-wood.
+They rub themselves from head to foot with it. This has a very
+odoriferous smell.
+
+When the people are loaded with jewels, and covered with the marks which
+I have just described they think themselves to be highly ornamented But
+after all, "they are like unto whited sepulchres, which indeed appear
+beautiful outward, but are within full of dead men's bones, and of all
+uncleanness." The "Pearl of great price," to which I before alluded,
+the only Pearl which is of any value in the sight of Him who looketh at
+the heart, and not at the outward appearance, they possess not. Millions
+in this Eastern world have never even heard of it. O how incessantly
+ought you to pray that they may come into possession of it. How gladly
+should you give your money to send it to them. I wish, in this place, to
+ask you one question. Who of you expect, by and by, to become
+missionaries to this land, to tell this people of the Pearl of great
+price?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+DRESS, HOUSES, EATING, AND SALUTATION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The dress of the Hindoos is very simple. A single
+piece of cloth uncut, about three yards in length and one in width,
+wrapped round the loins, with a shawl thrown over the shoulders,
+constitutes the usual apparel of the people of respectability. These
+garments are often fringed with red silk or gold. The native ladies
+frequently almost encase themselves in cloth or silk. Under such
+circumstances, their cloths are perhaps twenty yards in length. Most of
+the native gentlemen now wear turbans, an ornament which they have
+borrowed from the Mohammedans This consists of a long piece of very fine
+stuff, sometimes twenty yards in length and one in breadth. With this
+they encircle the head in many folds.
+
+Those who are employed by European or Mohammedan princes, wear a long
+robe of muslin, or very fine cloth. This also, is in imitation of the
+Mohammedans, and was formerly unknown in the country.
+
+The houses of the Hindoos are generally very plainly built. In the
+country, they are commonly made of earth, and thatched with straw. In
+the cities, they are covered with tiles. The kitchen is situated in the
+most retired part of the house. In the houses of the Brahmins, the
+kitchen-door is always barred, to prevent strangers from looking upon
+their earthen vessels; for if they should happen to see them, their look
+would pollute them to such a degree that they must be broken to pieces.
+The hearth is generally placed on the south-west side, which is said to
+be the side of the _god of fire_, because they say that this god
+actually dwells there.
+
+The domestic customs of this people are very different from ours. The
+men and women do not eat together. The husband first eats, then the
+wife. The wife waits upon the husband After she has cooked the rice, she
+brings a brass plate, if they are possessors of one; or if not, a piece
+of a plantain-leaf, and puts it down on the mat before him. She then
+bails out the rice, places it upon the leaf, and afterwards pours the
+currie over it. This being done, the husband proceeds to mix up the
+currie and the rice with his hands, and puts it into his mouth. He never
+uses a knife and fork, as is customary with us. The currie of which I
+have spoken is a sauce of a yellow color, owing to the _munchel_, a
+yellow root which they put in it. This and onions, kottamaly-seeds
+mustard, serakum, pepper, etc., constitute the ingredients of the
+currie. Some add to these ghea, or melted butter, and cocoa-nut milk. By
+the cocoa-nut milk, I do not mean the water of the cocoa-nut.
+This--except in the very young cocoa-nut, when it is a most delicious
+beverage--is never used. The milk is squeezed from the _meat_ of the
+cocoa-nut, after it has been reduced to a pulp by means of an indented
+circular iron which they use for this purpose.
+
+After the husband has eaten, the wife brings water for him to wash his
+hands. This being done, she supplies him with vettalay, paakku,
+shell-lime, and tobacco, which he puts into his mouth as his dessert.
+The vettalay is a very spicy leaf. Why they use paakku, I do not know.
+It is a nut, which they cut into small pieces, but it has not much
+taste. Sometimes the wife brings her husband a segar. This people, I am
+sorry to say, are great smokers and chewers, practices of which I hope
+that you, my dear children, will never be guilty. In Ceylon, it is
+customary for females to smoke. Frequently, after the husband has smoked
+for a while, he hands the segar to his wife. She then puts it into her
+mouth, and smokes.
+
+Several years ago, one of the schoolmasters in that island became a
+Christian. After he had partaken of the Lord's supper, his wife
+considered him so defiled, that she would not put his segar into her
+mouth for a month afterwards. She, however, has since become a
+Christian.
+
+I spoke just now of the plantain-leaf. This leaf is sometimes six feet
+long, and in some places a foot and a half wide. It is an unbroken leaf,
+with a large stem running through the middle of it. It is one of the
+handsomest of leaves. Pieces enough can be torn from a single leaf, to
+take the place of a dozen plates. When quite young, it is an excellent
+application to surfaces which have been blistered.
+
+When this people eat, they do not use tables and chairs. They sit down
+on mats, and double their legs under them, after the manner of our
+friends the tailors in America, when they sew. This is the way in which
+the natives as a general thing, sit in our churches. It is not common to
+have benches or pews for them. Carpenters and other tradesmen also sit
+down either on a board, or on the ground, or on their legs, when they
+work. It would divert you much to see their manoeuvring. If a carpenter,
+for instance, wants to make a little peg, he will take a small piece of
+board, and place it in an erect position between his feet, the soles of
+which are turned inward so as to press upon the board. He then takes
+his chisel in one hand, and his mallet in the other, and cuts off a
+small piece. Afterwards he holds the piece in one hand, and while he
+shapes it with his chisel with the other, he steadies it by pressing it
+against his great toe.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The blacksmiths, with the exception of those who use the sledge-hammer,
+sit as do the carpenters while they hammer the iron. I wish you could
+see them at work with their simple apparatus. They have small anvils,
+which they place in a hole made in a log of wood which is buried in the
+ground. They do not use such bellows as you see in America.
+
+Theirs consist of two leather bags, about a foot wide and a foot and a
+half long, each having a nozzle at one end. The other end is left open
+to admit the air. When they wish to blow the fire, they extend these
+bags to let in the air. They then close them by means of the thumb on
+one side, and the fingers on the other, and press them down towards the
+nozzle of the bellows, which forces the air through them into the fire.
+I should have said before, that the nozzle of the bellows passes through
+a small semicircular mound of dried mud.
+
+I mentioned that the natives do not use tables and chairs in their
+houses. Neither do they, as a general thing, use bedsteads. They have no
+beds. They sleep on mats, which are spread down on the floor. Sometimes
+they use a cotton bolster for their heads. More generally their pillows
+are hard boards, which they put under the mat. In addition to cooking,
+the females have to prepare the rice for this purpose, by taking it out
+of the husk. This they do by beating it in a mortar about two feet high.
+The pestle with which they pound it, is about five feet long, made of
+wood, with an iron rim around the lower part of it. Three women can
+work at these mortars at the same time. Of course they have to be very
+skilful in the use of the pestle, so as not to interfere with each
+others' operations. Sometimes, while thus engaged, the children, who are
+generally at play near their mothers, put their hands on the edge of the
+mortars. In such cases, when the pestle happens to strike the edge,
+their fingers are taken off in a moment.
+
+The Hindoos have many modes of salutation. In some places they raise
+their right hand to the heart. In others, they simply stretch it out
+towards the person who is passing, if they know him, for they never
+salute persons with whom they are not acquainted.
+
+In many places there is no show of salutation. When they meet their
+acquaintances they content themselves by saying a friendly word or two
+in passing, and then pursue their way. They have borrowed the word
+_salam_ from the Mohammedans. They salute both Mohammedans and Europeans
+with this word, at the same time raising their hand to the forehead.
+When they address persons of high rank, they give them their _salam_
+thrice, touching the ground as often with both hands, and then lifting
+them up to their foreheads.
+
+The other castes salute the Brahmins by joining the hands and elevating
+them to the forehead, or sometimes over the head. It is accompanied with
+_andamayya_, which means, Hail, respected lord. The Brahmins stretch out
+their hands and say, _aaseervaathum_--benediction.
+
+Another very respectful kind of salutation consists in lowering both
+hands to the feet of the person to be honored, or even in falling-down
+and embracing them.
+
+Of all the forms of salutation, the most respectful is the
+_shaashtaangkum_, or prostration, in which the feet, the knees, the
+stomach, the head, and the arms, all touch the ground. In doing this,
+they throw themselves at their whole length on the ground, and stretch
+out both arms above their heads. This is practised before priests, and
+in the presence of an assembly, when they appear before it to beg pardon
+for a crime.
+
+Relations, who have long been separated, testify their joy when they
+meet by chucking each other under the chin, and shedding tears of joy.
+I am not aware that grown persons ever kiss each other. Sometimes
+mothers, or other individuals, will put their noses to the cheeks of
+little children, and draw the air through them, just as we do when we
+smell any thing which is agreeable. At other times they will apply the
+thumb and first finger to the cheek of the child, and then apply them to
+their own noses, and, as it were, smell them.
+
+The women, as a mark of respect, turn their backs, or at least their
+faces aside, when they are in the presence of those whom they highly
+esteem. They are never permitted to sit in the presence of men. A
+married woman cannot do this, even in the presence of her husband.
+
+If a person meets another of high rank, he must leave the path, if on
+foot, or alight, if on horseback, and remain standing until he has
+passed. He must at the same time take off his slippers. He also must
+take off his slippers when he enters a house. Should he fail to do this,
+it would be considered a great impropriety.
+
+In addressing a person of note, they mast keep at a certain distance
+from him, and cover their mouths with their hands while they are
+speaking, lest their breath, or a particle of moisture, should escape
+to trouble him.
+
+When the Hindoos visit a person of distinction for the first time,
+civility requires them to take some present as a mark of respect, or to
+show that they come with a friendly intention; especially if they wish
+to ask some favor in return. When they have not the means of making
+large presents, they carry with them sugar, plantains, milk, and other
+things of this kind.
+
+In case of mourning, visits must always be made, though at a distance of
+a hundred miles. Letters of condolence would by no means be received as
+a substitute.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+MARRIAGE AMONG THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--Marriage, to the Hindoos is the greatest event of
+their lives. In the celebration of it, many ceremonies are performed Of
+these I will mention some of the most important. If the father of the
+young girl is a Brahmin, and if he is rich and liberal, he will
+frequently bear all the expenses of the marriage of his daughter. To
+give a daughter in marriage and to sell her, are about the same thing.
+Almost every parent makes his daughter an article of traffic, refusing
+to give her up until the sum of money for which he consented to let her
+go, is paid. Men of distinction generally lay out this money for jewels,
+which they present to their daughters on their wedding-day. You will
+infer from what I have just said, that the parties to be married have
+nothing to do in the choice of each other.
+
+There are properly but four months in the year in which marriages can
+take place, namely March, April, May, and June. This probably arises
+from the circumstance that these are the hottest seasons of the
+year--the seasons when the people have more leisure to attend to them.
+From the harvest, also, which has just been gathered in, they are
+provided with means to perform the various ceremonies.
+
+The marriage ceremony lasts five days. The bride and bridegroom are
+first placed under a puntel, a kind of bower, covered with leaves, in
+front of the house. This is superbly adorned. The married women then
+come forward, and perform the ceremony called _arati_, which is as
+follows. Upon a plate of copper, they place a lamp made of a paste from
+rice flour. It is supplied with oil, and lighted. They then take hold of
+the plate with both hands, and raise it as high as the heads of the
+couple to be married, and describe a number of circles with the plate
+and lamp. This is to prevent the evil of any jealous looks, which
+certain persons might make. The Hindoos believe that great evils arise
+from wicked looks. They consider that even the gods themselves are not
+out of the reach of malicious eyes; and therefore after they have been
+carried through the streets, the ceremony of arati is always performed,
+to efface the evil which they may have suffered from these looks.
+
+It ought to have been mentioned, that before any thing is done, they
+place an image of Pullian under the puntel. This god is much honored
+because he is much feared. And although the great ugliness of his
+appearance has hitherto kept him without a wife, they never fail to pay
+him the greatest attention, lest he should in some way or other injure
+them.
+
+After arati and many other ceremonies are performed, the kankanan, which
+is merely a bit of saffron, is tied to the right wrist of the young
+man, and to the left wrist of the girl. This is done with great
+solemnity. Another remarkable ceremony succeeds this. The young man
+being seated with his face towards the east, his future father-in-law
+supposes that he beholds in him the great Vrishnoo. With this
+impression, he offers him a sacrifice, and then, making him put both of
+his feet in a new dish filled with cow-dung, he first washes them with
+water, then with milk, and again with water, accompanying the whole with
+suitable muntrums or prayers.
+
+After many other ceremonies, he takes the hand of his daughter and puts
+it into that of his son-in-law. He then pours water over them in honor
+of Vrishnoo. This is the most solemn of all the ceremonies, being the
+token of his resigning his daughter to the authority of the young man.
+She must be accompanied with three gifts, namely, one or more cows, some
+property in land, and a _salagrama_, which consists of some little
+amulet stones in high esteem among the Brahmins. This ceremony being
+finished, the tahly is brought to be fastened to the neck of the bride.
+This, as I before said, is presented on a salver, decked and garnished
+with sweet-smelling flowers. Incense is offered to it, and it is
+presented to the assistants each of whom touches it and invokes
+blessings upon it. The bride then turning towards the East, the
+bridegroom takes the tahly, repeats a muntrum or prayer aloud, and ties
+it around her neck.
+
+Fire is then brought in, upon which the bridegroom offers up the
+sacrifice of _homam_, which consists of throwing boiled rice with melted
+butter upon the fire. He then takes his bride by the hand, and they walk
+three times around it, while the incense is blazing.
+
+There is another ceremony, which, perhaps, ought to be mentioned, as it
+is considered by some to be one of much importance. Two baskets of
+bamboo are placed close together, one for the bride, the other for the
+bridegroom. They step into them, and two other baskets being brought,
+filled with ground rice, the husband takes up one with both hands and
+pours the contents over the head of the bride. She does the same to him.
+In the marriage of great princes pearls are sometimes used instead of
+rice.
+
+On the evening of the third day, when the constellations appear, the
+astrologer points out to the married pair a very small star, close to
+the middle or in the tail of _Ursa Major_, which he directs them to
+worship, and which he says is the wife of Vasestha.
+
+While the assembled guests, are dining, the bridegroom and the bride
+also partake, and eat together from the same plate. This is a token of
+the closest union. This is the only instance in which they ever eat
+together.
+
+After all the ceremonies are finished, a procession is made through the
+streets of the village It commonly takes place in the night, by
+torchlight, accompanied with fire-works. The newly married pair are
+seated in one palanquin with their faces towards each other, both richly
+dressed. The bride, in particular, is generally covered with jewels and
+precious stones.
+
+The procession moves slowly; and their friends and relations come out of
+their houses, as they pass; the women hailing the married couple with
+the ceremony of _arati_, and the men with presents of silver, fruits,
+sugar, and betel. I once witnessed one of these marriage processions in
+the streets of Madras at night, but can give you but little idea of its
+magnificence. The lamps used on the occasion could not be numbered. The
+shrubbery, which was drawn on carts or other vehicles, appeared
+exceedingly beautiful, in consequence of the light reflected from the
+lamps. Intermingled with this shrubbery, were to be seen little girls
+elegantly dressed, and adorned with flowers on their heads. Many
+elephants, with their trappings of gold and silver and red, formed a
+part of the procession. Fire-works were also added to make the scene
+more brilliant.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+DEATH AND FUNERALS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The death of a Hindoo is followed by many ridiculous
+ceremonies. I will give you a description of a few, connected with the
+death of one who has moved in one of the higher ranks--of a Brahmin.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+When it is evident that a Brahmin has but a little time to live, a space
+is prepared with earth, well spread with cow-dung, over which a cloth,
+that has never been worn, is spread. The dying man is placed upon this
+at full length. Another cloth is wrapped around his loins. This being
+done, the ceremony of expiating his sins is performed as follows. The
+chief of the funeral brings on one plate some small pieces of silver or
+copper coin, and on another the punchakaryam, etc. A little of this
+punchakaryam is then put into his mouth, and, by virtue of this nauseous
+draught, the body is perfectly purified. Besides this, there is a
+general cleansing, which is accomplished by making the dying man recite
+within himself, if he cannot speak, the proper muntrums, by which he is
+delivered from all his sins. After this, a cow is introduced with her
+calf. Her horns are decorated with rings of gold or brass, and her neck
+with garlands of flowers. A pure cloth is laid over her body. Thus
+decked, she is led up to the sick man, who takes hold of her tail.
+Prayers are now offered up that the cow may conduct him, by a blessed
+path, to the next world. He then makes a gift of a cow to a Brahmin.
+This gift is considered indispensable to enable the soul to go over the
+river of fire, which it is said all must pass after death. Those who
+have made this gift, are met by one of these favored creatures the
+moment they arrive at the bank of the stream, and by her help, they are
+enabled to pass without injury from the flames.
+
+As soon as the breath has left his body, all who are present must weep
+for a reasonable time, and join in lamentations together.
+
+After various ceremonies, the body is washed, and a barber is called to
+shave his head. He is then clad with his finest clothes and adorned with
+jewels. He is rubbed with sandal-wood where the body is uncovered, and
+the accustomed mark is put upon his forehead. Thus dressed he is placed
+on a kind of state bed, where he remains until he is carried to the
+pile.
+
+After every preparation is made to bear away the corpse, the person who
+is to conduct the funeral, with the assistance of some relative or
+friend, strips it of its clothing and jewels, and covers it with a
+handkerchief provided for the occasion. The corpse is then placed on a
+litter. Those who die in a state of marriage, have their faces left
+uncovered. The litter, adorned with flowers and foliage, and sometimes
+decked with valuable stuffs, is borne by four Brahmins. The procession
+is arranged as follows.
+
+The chief of the funeral marches foremost, carrying fire in a vessel.
+The body follows, attended by the relations and friends, without their
+turbans, and with nothing on their heads but a bit of cloth, in token of
+mourning. The women never attend the funeral, but remain in the house,
+where they set up a hideous cry when the corpse is taken out. While
+advancing on the road, the custom is to stop three times on the way,
+and, at each pause, to put into the mouth of the dead a morsel of
+unboiled rice, moistened. The object of stopping is considered to be
+very important. It is not without reason; for they say that persons
+supposed to be dead have been alive, or even when lifeless have been
+restored; and sometimes, also, it has happened that the gods of the
+infernal regions have mistaken their aim, and seized one person instead
+of another. In any view, it is right to afford the opportunity for
+correcting these mistakes, so as not to expose to the flames a person
+who is still alive. Hence the propriety of these pauses, each of which
+continues half of the quarter of an hour.
+
+Having arrived at the place for burning the dead, they dig a trench
+about six or seven feet in length. This is consecrated by the muntrums.
+It is slightly sprinkled with water to lay the dust, and a few pieces of
+money in gold are scattered upon it. Here the pile is erected of dried
+wood, on which the body is laid out at full length. Over the body a
+quantity of twigs are laid, which are sprinkled with punchakaryam The
+chief of the funeral then takes on his shoulders a pitcher of water, and
+goes around the pile three times, letting the water run through a hole
+made in it. After this he breaks the pitcher in pieces near the head of
+the corpse.
+
+At last the torch is brought for setting fire to the pile, and is handed
+to the chief of the funeral. Before he receives it, however, he is
+obliged to make some grimaces to prove his sorrow. He rolls about on the
+ground, beats his breast, and makes the air resound with his cries. The
+assistants also cry, or appear to cry. Fire being applied to the four
+corners of the pile, the crowd retire, except the four Brahmins who
+carried the body; they remain until the whole is consumed.
+
+The funerals of the Sudras differ in some particulars from those of the
+Brahmins. Deafening sounds of drums, trumpets, and other instruments of
+music, not in use among the Brahmins, accompany their funerals. To
+increase the noise, they sometimes shoot off an instrument which
+somewhat resembles a small cannon. I do not now think of any other
+particular worthy of mention.
+
+By the ceremonies which are performed at their funerals, this wretched
+people expect to secure the pardon of all the sins of those who have
+died. Alas, what a delusion! O, that Christians had sent the Gospel to
+this dark land in the days when they sent it to our heathen fathers.
+Then might the Hindoos now be seeking the expiation of their sins,
+through the blood of the ever-blessed Redeemer. Of this Redeemer,
+however, they know nothing. They enter eternity, not that their souls
+may be consumed as their bodies have been, but to endure the flames of
+divine wrath for ever and ever. Alas, alas, that it should be so! O,
+that the generation of Christians now living would lay these things to
+heart, and do what they can, through grace, to rescue those who are yet
+within the reach of hope from so tremendous a doom. What, my dear
+children, will you do for this purpose?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The word heathen is applied to those who worship
+idols, or who do not know any thing about the true God. This is the case
+with this people. They say that there is one supreme being, whom they
+call BRAHM; but he is very different from Jehovah, and is never
+worshipped. Generally, he is fast asleep. In the place of Brahm, they
+worship many gods--gods of all colors: some black, some white, some
+blue, some red--gods of all shapes and sizes: some in the shape of
+beasts, some in the shape of men; some partly in the shape of beasts,
+and partly in the shape of men, having four, or ten, or a hundred, or a
+thousand eyes, heads, and hands. They ride through the air on elephants,
+buffaloes, lions, sheep, deer, goats, peacocks, vultures, geese,
+serpents, and rats. They hold in their hands all kinds of weapons,
+offensive and defensive, thunderbolts javelins, spears, clubs, bows,
+arrows, shields, flags, and shells. They are of all employments. There
+are gods of the heavens above and of the earth below, gods of wisdom and
+of folly, gods of war and of peace, gods of good and of evil, gods of
+pleasure, gods of cruelty and wrath, whose thirst must be satiated with
+torrents of blood. These gods fight and quarrel with one another. They
+lie, steal, commit adultery, murder, and other crimes. They pour out
+their curses when they cannot succeed in their wicked plots, and invent
+all kinds of lying tales to hide their wickedness.
+
+There are three principal gods, who compose what is called the Hindoo
+triad. Their names are Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva. They were somehow
+drawn from Brahm's essence, on one occasion when he was awake. Brumha,
+they say, is the creator of the world, Vrishnoo the preserver, and Siva
+the destroyer. Brumha has no temple erected for his worship, on account
+of a great falsehood which he told. I will tell you what it was. Once,
+as it is said, there was a dispute between him and Vrishnoo, as to who
+is the greatest. While thus disputing, Siva appeared between the two as
+a fire-post and told them that he who would find the bottom or the top
+of the post first, would show that he is the greatest. Vrishnoo
+immediately changed himself into a hog, and began to root up the earth
+with the hope of finding the bottom of the post. Brumha changed himself
+into a swan, flew up towards the top of the post, and cried out, I have
+found it, when he had not. This, you know, my dear children, was a
+falsehood. For this falsehood, it is said, no temple is erected for his
+worship.
+
+Vrishnoo was a thief and a liar. He was once dwelling in the house of a
+dairyman, and he used constantly to be stealing butter and curdled milk
+from the dairyman's wife. She did not know, for a long time, what became
+of her butter and curdled milk; but at last she found out that Vrishnoo
+was the thief. To punish him for his theft, she tied him to a rice
+mortar.
+
+Siva's conduct was very bad. I will tell you but one thing about him. On
+one occasion he was playing at cards with his wife Parvathe. Vrishnoo
+was appointed to determine who was the best player. After playing for a
+little season Parvathe won the game. Siva then beckoned to Vrishnoo to
+declare that he, instead of Parvathe, had won it. This he did. In
+consequence of this falsehood, he was cursed by Parvathe, and changed
+into a snake.
+
+And now, my dear children, why do I tell you about these gods? I tell
+you for the purpose of making you thankful that you were born in a
+Christian land, where you have the Bible to teach you better things. Had
+you not the Bible, you would worship just such wretched beings as these
+poor Hindoos worship. Perhaps you know that our Saxon fathers, before
+they had the Bible, were as great idolaters as are this people. They
+worshipped Thor and Woden and other similar idols, and they were even in
+the habit of offering up human sacrifices Surely, if there is any thing
+which should make you give your hearts to your Saviour and love him
+above all things, it is God's gift of the Bible to you.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE THREE HUNDRED AND THIRTY MILLIONS OF THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS--THE
+CREATION OF THE UNIVERSE--THE TRANSMIGRATION OF SOULS--THE DIFFERENT
+HELLS.
+
+
+My dear children--I told you that in one of those seasons when Brahm was
+awake, Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva were somehow drawn from Brahm's
+essence. The three hundred and thirty millions of the gods of the
+Hindoos were also drawn from this essence; as were all the atoms which
+compose the earth, the sun, moon, and stars. At first, these atoms were
+all in disorder. For the purpose of reducing them to order, Brahm
+created what is called the great mundane egg. Into this egg he himself
+entered, under the form, of Brumha, taking with him all these atoms.
+After remaining in this egg four thousand three hundred millions of
+years, to arrange these atoms, he burst its shell and came out, with a
+thousand heads, a thousand eyes, and a thousand arms. With him, he
+brought out all those harmonized atoms, which, when separated, produced
+this beautiful universe that we see above and around us.
+
+The universe, as it came from the mundane egg, is generally divided into
+fourteen worlds: seven inferior or lower worlds, and seven superior or
+upper worlds. The seven lower worlds are filled with all kinds of wicked
+and loathsome creatures. Our earth, which is the first of the upper
+worlds, it is said, is flat. The following figure will give you some
+idea of it.
+
+[Illustration: Concentric circles with labels on each from outermost to
+innermost: Sea of Sweet Water. Sea of Milk. Sea of Sour Curds. Sea of
+Clarified Butter. Sea of Spirituous Liquors. Sea of Sugar Cane Juice.
+Sea of Salt Water. Earth.]
+
+That part of the earth which is inhabited consists of seven circular
+islands, or continents each of which is surrounded by a different ocean.
+The island in the centre, where we dwell, is surrounded by a sea of salt
+water, the second island is surrounded by a sea of sugar-cane juice, the
+third island is surrounded by a sea of spirituous liquors, the fourth is
+surrounded by a sea of clarified butter, the fifth is surrounded by a
+sea of sour curds, the sixth is surrounded by a sea of milk, the seventh
+is surrounded by a sea of sweet water.
+
+In all the worlds above ours are mansions where the gods reside. In the
+third is the heaven of Indra. This is the heaven to which it is said the
+widow goes, after she has burned herself to death on the funeral pile of
+her husband Its palaces are of the purest gold. And such are the
+quantities of diamonds, and jasper, and sapphire, and emerald, and all
+manner of precious stones there, that it shines with a brightness
+superior to that of twelve thousand suns. Its streets are of the
+clearest crystal, fringed with gold. In the seventh, or the highest of
+the upper worlds, is the heaven where Brumha chiefly resides. This far
+exceeds all the other heavens in point of beauty.
+
+In the inferior worlds it is stated that there are one hundred thousand
+hells. These are provided for such as have been great criminals. The
+Hindoos say, that those who have not been very wicked, can make an
+atonement for their sins in this world. Should they neglect to do this,
+they must suffer for it in another birth. They believe in what is called
+the transmigration of souls, or the passing of the soul, after death,
+into another body. The soul must suffer in the next birth, if not
+purified in this. Hence it is asserted, that if a man is a stealer of
+gold from a Brahmin, he is doomed to have whitlows on his nails; if a
+drinker of spirits, black teeth; if a false detractor, fetid breath; if
+a stealer of grain, the defect of some limb; if a stealer of clothes,
+leprosy; if a horse-stealer, lameness; if a stealer of a lamp, total
+blindness. If he steals grain in the husk, he will be born a rat; if
+yellow mixed metal, a gander; if money, a great stinging gnat; if fruit,
+an ape; if the property of a priest, a crocodile.
+
+Those persons whose sins are too great to be forgiven in this world,
+must be sent to one of the hells to winch I have alluded. Weeping,
+wailing, shrieking, they are dragged to the palace of _Yama_, the king
+of those doleful regions. On arriving there, they behold him clothed
+with terror, two hundred and forty miles in height, his eyes as large as
+a lake of water, his voice as loud as thunder, the hairs of his body as
+long as palm-trees, a flame of fire proceeding from his mouth, the noise
+of his breath like the roaring of a tempest, and in his right hand a
+terrific iron club. Sentence is passed, and the wretched beings are
+doomed to receive punishment according to the nature of their crimes.
+Some are made to tread on burning sands, or sharp-edged stones. Others
+are rolled among thorns and spikes and putrefying flesh. Others are
+dragged along the roughest places by cords passed through the tender
+parts of the body. Some are attacked by jackals, tigers, and elephants.
+Others are pierced with arrows, beaten with clubs, pricked with needles,
+seared with hot irons, and tormented by flies and wasps. Some are
+plunged into pans of liquid fire or boiling oil. Others are dashed from
+lofty trees, many hundred miles high.
+
+The torment of these hells does not continue for ever. After criminals
+have been punished for a longer or shorter time, their souls return to
+the earth again in the bodies of men. Here they may perform such good
+acts as may raise them to one of the heavens of the gods; or commit
+crimes, which may be the means of their being sent again to the abodes
+of misery.
+
+Things will go on in this way until the universe comes to an end, when
+every thing is to disappear, and to be swallowed up in Brahm.
+
+The Hindoos say, that it is now more than one hundred and fifty billions
+of years since the world was created. After it has continued about one
+hundred and fifty billions of years more, it is to come to an end. Then
+Brumha is to die, and to be swallowed up with the universe in the sole
+existing Brahm.
+
+By what you have heard, you will learn that the Hindoos expect, by their
+sufferings, to make an atonement for their sins. But there is no
+atonement for sin, except through the blood of Jesus Christ. We must
+come as lost sinners to our heavenly Father, confess our transgressions
+to him, and plead for his forgiveness, only through the sufferings and
+death which Christ endured. My dear children, have you done this? If
+not, do it speedily, or the regions of the lost must soon be your
+everlasting abode.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+HINDOO CASTES.
+
+
+My dear Children--The people of India are divided into castes, as they
+are called. Their sacred books declare, that after Brumha had peopled
+the heavens above and the worlds below, he created the human race,
+consisting of four classes or castes. From his mouth proceeded the
+Brahmin caste. Those of this class are the highest and noblest beings on
+earth, and hold the office of priests. At the same time there flowed
+from his mouth the _Vedas_, or sacred books, of which the Brahmins are
+the sole teachers To their fellow-men, they were to give such parts of
+these books as they thought best. From Brumha's arm proceeded the
+military caste. The business of this class is to defend their country
+when attacked by enemies. From his breast proceeded the third caste,
+consisting of farmers and merchants. From his feet, the member of
+inferiority, proceeded the Sudras, or servile caste. Carpenters,
+braziers, weavers, dyers, and the manual cultivators of the soil, are
+included in this class.
+
+Caste is not a civil, but a sacred institution. You must get some one
+older than yourself to explain what this means. Caste is a difference of
+_kind_. Hence, a man of one caste can never be changed into a man of
+another caste, any more than a lion can be changed into a mole, or a
+mole into a lion. Each caste has its laws, the breaking of which is
+attended with great disgrace, and even degradation below all the other
+castes. For instance, if a Brahmin should, by eating any forbidden
+thing, break his caste, he would sink below all the other castes. He
+would become an outcast, or pariah. For beneath the fourth, or lowest
+caste, there is a class of people belonging to no caste--a class of
+outcasts, held in the utmost abhorrence.
+
+By the system of castes, the Hindoos have been divided into so many
+selfish sections, each scowling on all the rest with feelings of hatred
+and contempt. The spirit which upholds it, is similar to that spirit
+which says, "Stand by thyself, for I am holier than thou," and, of
+course, is nothing but pride. This is one of the greatest obstacles to
+the spread of Christianity in this dark land, and for the exhibition of
+which we were lately obliged to cut off many of the members of our
+churches.
+
+The Brahmins, in consequence of their being of the highest caste, and of
+their having been taught from their infancy to regard all other classes
+of men with the utmost contempt, are very proud. They make great efforts
+to keep themselves pure, in their sense of the word, both without and
+within. They are exceedingly afraid of being defiled by persons of other
+castes. They have the utmost dread even of being touched by a pariah.
+For them to eat with any of these pariahs, or to go into their houses,
+or to drink water which they have drawn, or from vessels which they have
+handled, is attended with the loss of their caste. A Brahmin who should
+enter their houses, or permit them to enter his, would be cut off from
+his caste, and could not be restored without many troublesome ceremonies
+and great expense. The pariahs are considered to be so low, that if a
+Brahmin were to touch them, even with the end of a long pole, he would
+be looked upon as polluted In some districts they are obliged to make a
+long circuit, when they perceive Brahmins in the way, that their breath
+may not infect them, or their shadow fall upon them as they pass. In
+some places their very approach is sufficient to pollute a whole
+neighborhood.
+
+The Brahmins carry their ideas of purity very far. Should a Sudra happen
+to look upon the vessels in which they cook their food, they would be
+considered as defiled. They can never touch any kind of leather or skin,
+except the skin of the tiger and antelope. The most disagreeable of all
+American fashions, in their eyes, is that of boots and gloves. They
+rarely eat their food from plates; and when they do so, it is only at
+home. They use the leaf of the plantain or other trees as a substitute.
+To offer them any thing to eat on a metal or earthen plate which others
+have used, would be considered a great affront. For the same reason,
+they will neither use a spoon nor a fork when they eat; and they are
+astonished that any one, after having applied them to their mouths, and
+infected them with saliva, should repeat the act a second time. They
+have a great abhorrence of the toothpick, if used a second time. When
+they eat any thing dry, they throw it into their mouths, so that the
+fingers may not approach the lips.
+
+They do not drink as we do, by applying the cup to the lips. This would
+be considered a gross impropriety. They pour the water into their
+months. The reason why they do these things is, because they consider
+the saliva to be the most filthy secretion that comes from the body. It
+is on this account that no one is ever permitted to spit within doors.
+
+The use of animal food they consider to be defiling. Not only will they
+not eat animal food, but they will eat nothing that has the principle of
+life in it. On this account, they cannot eat eggs of any kind. I was
+once breaking an egg in my medicine-room at Panditeripo, while a Brahmin
+was present. He told me that, under such circumstances, he could not
+remain with me any longer. In his view, I was committing a great sin. To
+kill an ox or a cow, is considered by them as a crime which can never be
+atoned for, and to eat their flesh is a defilement which can never be
+washed away. To kill a cow is, by _Hindoo_ law, punishable with death.
+
+The touch of most animals, particularly that of the dog, defiles a
+Brahmin. Should a dog touch them, they would be obliged instantly to
+plunge into water, and wash their clothes, in order to get rid of such a
+stain. Notwithstanding this, the dog is one of the gods worshipped by
+the Hindoos.
+
+The Hindoos consider themselves to be unclean if they have assisted at a
+funeral. When the ceremony is over, they immediately plunge into water
+for the sake of purification. Even the news of the death of a relative,
+a hundred miles off, has the same effect. The person who hears such news
+is considered unclean until he has bathed. In unison with this feeling,
+a person is no sooner dead, than he is hastened away to be buried or
+burned; for, until this is done, those in the house can neither eat nor
+drink, nor go on with their occupations.
+
+A Brahmin who is particular in his delicacy, must be careful what he
+treads upon. He is obliged to wash his body or bathe, if he happens to
+tread on a bone, or a broken pot, a bit of rag, or a leaf from which one
+has been eating. He must also be careful where he sits down. Some
+devotees always carry their seats with them, that is, a tiger or
+antelope's skin, which are always held pure. Some are contented with a
+mat. They may sit down on the ground without defilement, provided it has
+been newly rubbed over with cow-dung. This last specific is used daily
+to purify their houses from the defilement occasioned by comers, and
+goers. When thus applied, diluted with water, it has unquestionably one
+good effect. It completely destroys the fleas and other insects, with
+which they are very much annoyed.
+
+There is one thing more which I wish to mention. It is, that all the
+high castes consider the use of intoxicating drinks to be defiling. I
+hope that you, my dear children, will always have the same opinion, and
+never touch them any sooner than you would touch arsenic or other
+poisons.
+
+A person may be restored to his caste, provided he has not committed an
+unpardonable offence. This is done as follows. After he has gained the
+consent of his relations to be restored he prostrates himself very
+humbly before them, they being assembled for that purpose, and submits
+to the blows or other punishment which they may think proper to inflict,
+or pays the fine which they may have laid upon him. Then, after
+shedding tears of sorrow, and making promises that, by his future
+conduct, he will wipe away the stain of his expulsion from caste, he
+makes the shaashtaangkum before the assembly. This being done, he is
+declared fit to be restored to his tribe.
+
+When a man has been expelled from his caste for some great offence,
+those who restore him sometimes slightly burn his tongue with a piece of
+gold made hot. They likewise apply to different parts of the body redhot
+iron stamps, which leave marks that remain for ever. Sometimes they
+compel the offender to walk on burning embers; and to complete the
+purification, he must drink the punchakaryam, which literally means the
+_five things_; these all come from the cow, and must be mixed together.
+The first three of these I will mention, namely, the milk, butter, and
+curds. The other two, for the sake of delicacy, I must not mention.
+After the ceremony of punchakaryam is finished the person who has been
+expelled from his caste must give a grand feast. This finishes all he
+has to do, and he is then restored to favor.
+
+There are certain offences which, when committed cut off all hope that
+the offender will ever be restored to his caste. For instance, should he
+eat the flesh of the cow, no presents which he might make, nor any fines
+which lie might be disposed to pay, no, not even the punchakaryam
+itself, would be of any avail for his restoration or purification.
+
+I will make a remark here, which I might have made before. It is, that
+in Christian countries, there is a spirit of pride which much resembles
+the spirit of caste. Many are to be found who are very proud that they
+have descended from rich and honorable _ancestors_, and who look down,
+almost with disdain, upon those in other situations. I need hardly tell
+you that this is a very wicked spirit, and entirely opposed to the
+spirit of the Gospel. No matter what may be our high thoughts of
+ourselves, we appear but very low in the sight of Him who created us. We
+are all sinners, and, as such, are offensive in his sight. If we would
+go to heaven, the first thing which we have to do, is to humble
+ourselves for the pride of our hearts, and become as little children
+before him. We must have that spirit of which the apostle speaks, when
+he says, "Let each esteem others better than themselves." With a humble
+spirit we may approach a holy God, with the assurance that he will, for
+Christ's sake, forgive all our sins.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+HINDOO TEMPLES--CARS--PROCESSION OF IDOLS.
+
+
+My dear Children--I will proceed to give you a description of the Hindoo
+temples. These are very numerous. One is to be found in almost every
+village. They are to be found, also, in out-of-the-way places, distant
+from villages, in woods, on the banks and in the middle of rivers; but,
+above all, on mountains and steep rocks.
+
+This latter practice, of building temples on mountains, is very ancient.
+The Israelites were accustomed to choose a mountain when they offered up
+their sacrifices to the Lord. Solomon, before the building of the
+temple, chose Mount Gibeon on which to offer his burnt-offerings; and
+when the ten tribes separated themselves, in the reign of Jeroboam, they
+built their altars on the mountain of Samaria. This practice may have
+come from the circumstance, that Noah offered to God a great sacrifice
+of thanks on one of the highest mountains of Armenia. Probably Mount
+Ararat continued long to be remembered, by him and his descendants, as
+the scene of their deliverance.
+
+Besides the temples of the idols, there are various objects of worship,
+made of earth and stone. Some of the idols are carved. Some consist
+merely of the rough stone. These are to be seen on the high-roads, at
+the entrance into villages, and, above all, under lofty trees. Some of
+these are covered; but generally they are exposed in the open air.
+
+You will read in Genesis, 28th chap, and 18th verse, that Jacob, after
+his dream, rose up early in the morning and took the stone that he had
+put for his pillow, and set it up for a pillar, and poured oil upon the
+top of it. Whether it has happened from this circumstance or not, that
+the heathen universally pour oil over their idols, I cannot tell. All I
+know is, that they do it. No idol can become an object of worship until
+a Brahmin has said his muntrums, or prayers, for the purpose of bringing
+down the god to live, as it is said be does, in the image, and until he
+has drenched it with oil and liquid butter.
+
+The idols, in the great temples, are clothed with rich garments, and
+adorned with jewels, which are enriched with precious stones of immense
+value. Sacrifices are constantly made to these idols, consisting of
+boiled rice, flowers, fruits, etc., but, above all, of lamps, of which
+many thousands are sometimes seen burning. They feed them with butter,
+in preference to oil.
+
+The priests of the temples offer up sacrifices twice every day, morning
+and evening. They begin the ceremony by washing their idol. The water
+which is used is brought from a river or tank. Every morning a
+procession, with music, passes before our door, with this water.
+
+Every priest who offers up sacrifices, must have several lighted lamps
+with a bell, which he holds in his left hand. With his right hand he
+makes an offering to the idol, adorns it with flowers, and rubs its
+forehead and various parts of its body with sandal-wood and holy ashes.
+While all this is going on, he is alone in the temple, the door of which
+is closed. The unholy multitude remain without, silently waiting till
+he has done. What he does, they cannot know, only hearing the sound of
+the bell. When he has done, he comes out and distributes among the
+people a part of the things which have been offered to the idol. These
+are considered as holy. If they consist of rice and fruit, they are
+immediately eaten; if of flowers, the men put them in their turbans, and
+the girls entwine them in their hair.
+
+Next to the priests, the most important persons about the temples are
+the dancing girls. These are persons of the vilest character. They
+perform their religious duties in the temple twice a day. They also
+assist at the public ceremonies, and dance. At the same time they sing
+the most abominable and filthy songs. Of these wicked creatures,
+however, I must not tell you any thing further.
+
+The next order of persons employed in the temples, are players on
+musical instruments. Every temple of note has a band of these musicians
+who, as well as the dancers, are obliged to attend the temple twice a
+day. They are also obliged to assist at all the public festivals. Their
+band generally consists of wind, instruments, resembling clarionets and
+hautboys, to which they add cymbals and drums. They have a bass,
+produced by blowing into a kind of tube, widened below, and which gives
+an uninterrupted sound. Part of the musicians sing hymns in honor of
+their gods.
+
+The expenses of the temples are borne by the voluntary offerings of the
+people, consisting of money, jewels, cattle, provisions, and other
+articles. In order to induce them to make such offerings, the Brahmins
+use all kinds of deception. Sometimes they will put their idols in
+irons, chaining their hands and feet. They exhibit them in this sad
+condition, declaring that they have been brought into it by creditors
+from whom their gods had to borrow money, in times of trouble, to supply
+their wants. They declare that their creditors refuse to set the gods at
+liberty, until the money with the interest is paid. The people, seeing
+the deplorable condition into which they have been brought, come forward
+and pay off the debt; when the chains are taken off, and the god is set
+at liberty.
+
+Another way in which the Brahmins sometimes deceive the people, is as
+follows. They say that the god is afflicted with some dreadful disease,
+brought on by the distress which he has had, because the people do not
+worship him as much as they should. In such cases, the idol is sometimes
+placed at the door of the temple where they rub his forehead and temples
+with various kinds of medicine. They also set before him all sorts of
+medicines, pretending in this way to do all they can to cure him. But as
+all their efforts prove to be vain, and the disease becomes worse, the
+Brahmins send out persons to tell the sad news. The people, believing
+the report, hasten to bring in their gifts and offerings. The god, on
+beholding such proofs of their attachment to him, feels himself cured of
+his disease, and immediately returns to his throne within the temple.
+
+The Brahmins use another kind of deception, in order to procure
+offerings for the temples. They declare that their gods are angry with
+certain individuals who have offended them, and that they have sent some
+evil spirit or devil to take possession of their bodies and torment
+them. Accordingly, persons appear wandering about in different parts of
+the country, showing, by their dreadful convulsions, their writhings
+and twistings, every symptom of being possessed with the devil. The
+people who see them are filled with dismay, fall down before them, and
+offer gifts and sacrifices, for fear of being injured by them. Whatever
+they ask is granted. The people give them to eat and drink abundantly;
+and when they leave a place, accompany them with instruments of music,
+till they arrive at some other place, where the same deception is
+practised.
+
+There are various other ways in which the Brahmins deceive the people;
+but I have told you enough.
+
+At every large temple, there is at least yearly one grand procession.
+The idol is brought out from its inclosure, and placed in a great car or
+chariot, prepared for this express purpose. This stands upon four wheels
+of great strength, not made like ours, of spokes with a rim, but of
+three or four pieces of thick, solid timber, rounded and fitted to each
+other. The car is sometimes forty or fifty feet high, having upon it
+carved images of a most abominable nature. I must not tell you any thing
+about them. The car, when finished, presents somewhat the shape of a
+pyramid.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+On the day of the procession, it is adorned with painted cloth, garlands
+of flowers, green shrubbery, and precious stuffs. The idol is placed in
+the centre, loaded with jewels, etc., to attract the attention of the
+people. Having fastened ropes to this enormous car, eight or nine
+hundred or a thousand people catch hold of the ropes and slowly drag it
+along, accompanied with the awful roaring of their voices. At certain
+periods they stop; when the immense crowds, collected from all parts of
+the country, set up one universal shout, or rather yell. This, with the
+sound of their instruments and numerous drums, produces much uproar and
+confusion. Sometimes the weighty car comes to a stand, from the dampness
+of the ground or from the narrowness of the streets, when the tumult and
+noise are redoubled.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Perhaps you know that on some occasions, when the cars are drawn, people
+throw themselves under the wheels, and are crushed to death. This occurs
+at the drawing of the car of Juggernaut, as you may learn if you will
+read my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen. Here is a
+picture of Juggernaut, and on the last page you may see a picture of his
+car, and two men crushed to death under the wheels. Not long since, five
+persons were thus crushed to death. Many dreadful accidents also take
+place at the drawing of these cars. A few years ago several persons in
+this city had their limbs amputated, in consequence of injuries
+received.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+When I was in America, I showed to many of the dear children an idol
+called Pulliar, which was _formerly_ worshipped by Raamu, one of our
+native helpers, when he was a heathen. I gave a particular description,
+of the I manner in which he daily worshiped it, in the sermon above
+mentioned Here is a picture, which will give you some idea of this god.
+
+You will see that it is partly in the shape of a man, and partly in the
+shape of a beast. You, my dear children, would put no confidence in such
+vain idols; but this people do, as you may know from what I am now going
+to tell you.
+
+Some months ago, a woman was brought to me with a cancer in her breast.
+It had made sad ravages. On the morning after her arrival I took it out.
+Before she was brought to me, her brother went to the temple of the
+goddess Meenaache, to ascertain what was her will respecting his
+bringing her to me, or taking her to a native doctor. In order to
+ascertain it, he had recourse to the following expedient. He prepared
+several bundles of red and white flowers--the red to represent the red
+or Tamil man, the white to represent the white man. These flowers were
+carefully inclosed in leaves, so as to prevent their color being seen,
+and then laid down on the ground, at the entrance of the temple. After
+this, he called a little child to him, and then proceeded to entreat
+Meenaache that, if it were her will that he should bring the sick woman
+to me, she would direct the child to take up one of the parcels
+containing the white flowers. It so happened that the child took up one
+of these parcels. Of course, he brought her to me. Had it taken up a
+parcel containing the red flowers, she would have been taken to a native
+doctor. May we not hope that, not Meenaache, but Jehovah directed him
+to bring her to me, that she might hear of a very different being from
+her goddess, even of Jesus. Of him she has fully heard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+FESTIVALS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The Hindoos have many festivals. These are all
+occasions of joy and gladness. On such days, the people quit their usual
+employments. Friends and relations unite in family parties, and give
+entertainments according to their means. Innocent pastimes and
+amusements of various kinds are resorted too to add to their happiness.
+
+There are eighteen principal festivals yearly, and no month passes
+without one or more of them.
+
+One of the most solemn of these ceremonies is held in the month of
+September, and appears to be principally in honor of Parvathe, the wife
+of Siva. At this time every laborer and every artisan offers sacrifices
+and prayers to his tools. The laborer brings his plough, hoe, and other
+farming utensils. He piles them together, and offers a sacrifice to
+them, consisting of flowers, fruit, rice, and other articles. After
+this, he prostrates himself before them at full length, and then returns
+them to their places.
+
+The mason offers the same adoration and sacrifice to his trowel, rule,
+and other instruments The carpenter adores his hatchet, adze, and plane.
+The barber collects his razors together and worships them with similar
+rites.
+
+The writing-master sacrifices to the iron pen or style, with which he
+writes upon the palm-leaf the tailor to his needles, the weaver to his
+loom, the butcher to his cleaver.
+
+The women, on this day, collect into a heap their baskets, rice-mill,
+rice-pounder, and other household utensils, and, after having offered
+sacrifices to them, fall down in adoration before them. Every person, in
+short, in this solemnity sanctifies and adores the instrument or tool by
+which he gains a living. The tools are considered as so many gods, to
+whom they present their prayers that they will continue to furnish them
+still with the means of getting a livelihood.
+
+This least is concluded by making an idol to represent Parvathe. It is
+made of the paste of grain, and being placed under a sort of canopy, is
+carried through the streets with great pomp, and receives the worship of
+the people.
+
+Another festival of great celebrity is observed in October. At this
+time, each person, for himself, makes offerings of boiled rice and other
+food, to such of their relations as have died, that they may have a good
+meal on that day. They afterwards offer sacrifices of burning lamps, of
+fruit, and of flowers, and also new articles of dress, that their
+ancestors may be freshly clothed.
+
+At this festival, soldiers offer sacrifices to their weapons, in order
+to obtain success in war. On such occasions, a ram is offered in
+sacrifice to their armor.
+
+In November, a festival is observed, which is called the feast of lamps.
+At this season, the Hindoos light lamps, and place them around the doors
+of their houses. This festival was established to commemorate the
+deliverance of the earth from a giant, who had been a great scourge to
+the people. He was slain by Vrishnoo, after a dreadful battle. In many
+places, on this day, a sacrifice is offered to the _dunghill_ which is
+afterwards to enrich the ground. In the villages, each one has his own
+heap, to which he makes his offering of burning lamps, fruit, flowers,
+etc.
+
+The most celebrated of all the festivals, is that which is held in the
+end of December. It is called the feast of Pongul, and is a season of
+rejoicing for two reasons: the first is, because the month of December,
+every day of which is unlucky, is about to end; and the other is,
+because it is to be followed by a month, every day of which is
+fortunate. For the purpose of preventing the evil effects of this month,
+the women every morning scour a place about two feet square before the
+door of the house, upon which they draw white lines, with flour. Upon
+these they place several little balls of cow-dung, sticking in each a
+flower. Each day these little balls, with their flowers, are preserved,
+and on the last day of the month, they are thrown into tanks or
+waste-places.
+
+The first day of this festival is called the Pongul of rejoicing. Near
+relatives are invited to a feast, which passes off with mirth and
+gladness.
+
+The second day is called the Pongul of the sun, and is set apart to
+worship that luminary. Married women, after bathing themselves, proceed
+to boil rice with milk, in the open air. When the milk begins to
+simmer, they make a loud cry, "Pongul, O Pongul." The vessel is then
+taken from the fire, and set before an idol. Part of this rice is
+offered to the image, and, after standing there for some time, it is
+given to the cows. The remainder is given to the people. This is the
+great day for visiting among friends. The salutation begins by the
+question, "Has the milk boiled?" To which the answer is, "It has
+boiled." From this, the festival takes the name of pongul, which
+signifies to boil.
+
+The third day is called the _Pongul of cows._ In a great vessel, filled
+with water, they put saffron and other things. These being well mixed,
+they go around the cows and oxen belonging to the house several times,
+sprinkling them with water. After this, the men prostrate themselves
+before them four times. The cows are then dressed, their horns being
+painted with various colors. Garlands of flowers are also put round
+their necks, and over their backs. To these are added strings of
+cocoa-nuts and other kinds of fruit, which, however, are soon shaken
+off, when they are in motion, and are picked up by children and others,
+who greedily eat what they gather, as something sacred. After being
+driven through the streets, they are suffered, during the day, to feed
+wherever they please, without a keeper. I have, however, told you
+enough. Are you ready to exclaim, Is it possible that a people can be
+guilty of such utter folly? But you, my dear children, would be guilty
+of just such folly, if you had not the Bible. Should not the gratitude,
+then, which you owe to your heavenly Father, for your distinguished
+mercies, constrain you to do all that you can to send this blessed book
+to this dark land?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE WORSHIP OF THE SERPENT.
+
+
+My dear Children--If you have never heard much about the Hindoos, you
+will be astonished to learn how numerous are the objects of their
+worship. They worship many living creatures, such as the ape, the tiger,
+the elephant the horse, the ox, the stag, the sheep, the hog, the dog,
+the cat, the rat, the peacock, the eagle, the cock, the hawk, the
+serpent, the chameleon, the lizard, the tortoise, fishes, and even
+insects. Of these, some receive much more worship than others, such as
+the cow, the ox, and the serpent Cobra Capella. I will speak at present
+only of the worship of the serpent.
+
+Of all the dangerous creatures found in India, there are none that
+occasion so many deaths as serpents. The people are very much exposed to
+their bite, especially at night, when they are walking. They tread upon
+them, and, as they generally do not wear shoes, the snakes turn their
+heads, and strike their fangs into those parts of the feet which are
+nearest to the place where the pressure is made upon their bodies.
+Sometimes the bite is followed with instant death. The Cobra Capella is
+one of the most common snakes, and one of the most poisonous. It is
+said, that it has a thousand heads, one of which holds up the earth. It
+has a peculiar mark on its back, just behind the head. This mark very
+much resembles a pair of spectacles, without the handles. If you should
+go near it, it would raise the fore part of its body about six inches,
+widen out its neck, so as to be about double its common width, and
+prepare to strike you. The reason why the Hindoos offer sacrifices and
+adoration to it above all the other serpents is, because it is so
+frequently met with, and is so much dreaded.
+
+In order to induce the people to worship this dangerous enemy, the
+Hindoos have filled their books with tales concerning it. Figures of it
+are often to be seen in the temples, and on other buildings. They seek
+out their holes, which are generally to be found in the hillocks of
+earth which are thrown up by the white ants; and when they find one,
+they go from time to time and offer milk, plantains, and other good
+things to it.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The Hindoos, as I before observed, have eighteen annual festivals. One
+of these festivals is held for the purpose of worshipping this serpent.
+Temples in many places are erected to it, of which there is one of great
+celebrity in Mysore. When the festival occurs at this temple, great
+crowds of people come together to offer sacrifices to this creeping god.
+Many serpents besides the Cobra Capella live within it, in holes made
+especially for them. All of these are kept and well fed by the Brahmins
+with milk, butter, and plantains. By such means they become very
+numerous, and may be seen swarming from every crevice in the temple. To
+injure or to kill one would be considered a great crime.
+
+Many of the natives call the Cobra Capella nulla paampu, that is, good
+snake. They are afraid to call it a bad snake, lest it should injure
+them. The following is the prayer which is offered before the image of
+this snake. O, divine Cobra, preserve and sustain us. O, Sheoh, partake
+of these offerings, and be gracious unto us.
+
+Can you think of any thing, my dear children more dishonoring to a holy
+God, than such worship? And what have you ever done to prevent it? Have
+you, every morning and evening, prayed that the Gospel might be sent to
+this people? Did you ever give any money to send it to them? Did you
+ever think whether it may not be your duty, by and by, to come to them,
+to tell them of this Gospel?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE RIVER GANGES.
+
+
+My dear Children--If you will look at the map of Asia, and find the
+country of Hindostan, you will see running through it a very celebrated
+river--the river Ganges. It is called the Ganges, after the goddess
+Gunga. The Hindoos say that the goddess Gungu--who was produced from the
+sweat of Vrishnoo's foot, which Brumha caught and preserved in his
+alms-dish--came down from heaven, and divided herself into one hundred
+streams, which are the mouths of the river Ganges. All classes and
+castes worship her. The sight, the name, or the touch of the river
+Ganges is said to take away all sin. To die on the edge of the river, or
+to die partly buried in the stream, drinking its waters, while their
+bodies are besmeared with mud, is supposed to render them very holy. On
+this account, when it is expected that a person will die, he is hurried
+down to the river, whether willing or unwilling. Sometimes the wood
+which the people bring to burn their bodies after death, is piled up
+before their eyes. O, how inhuman is this. After it is supposed that
+they are dead, and they are placed on the pile of wood, if they should
+revive and attempt to rise, it is thought that they are possessed with
+the devil, and they are beaten down with a hatchet or bamboo.
+
+Were you standing on the banks of the Ganges you might, perhaps, in one
+place see two or three young men carrying a sick female to the river. If
+you should ask what they are going to do with her, perhaps they would
+reply, We are going to give her up to Gunga, to purify her soul, that
+she may go to heaven; for she is our mother. In another place you might
+see a father and mother sprinkling a beloved child with muddy water,
+endeavoring to soothe his dying agonies by saying, "It is blessed to die
+by Gunga, my son; to die by Gunga is blessed, my son." In another place
+you might see a man descending from a boat with empty water-pans tied
+around his neck, which pans, when filled, will drag down the poor
+creature to the bottom, to be seen no more. Here is murder in the name
+of religion. He is a devotee, and has purchased heaven, as he supposes,
+by this his last good deed. In another place you might see a person
+seated in the water, accompanied by a priest, who pours down the throat
+of the dying man mud and water, and cries out, "O mother Gunga, receive
+his soul." The dying man may be roused to sensibility by the violence.
+He may entreat his priest to desist; but his entreaties are drowned. He
+persists in pouring the mud and water down his throat, until he is
+gradually stifled, suffocated--suffocated in the name of
+humanity--suffocated in the name of religion.
+
+It happens, sometimes, in cases of sudden and violent attacks of
+disease, that they cannot be conveyed to the river before death. Under
+such circumstances, a bone is preserved, and at a convenient season is
+taken down and thrown into the river. This, it is believed, contributes
+essentially to the salvation of the deceased.
+
+Sometimes strangers are left on the banks to die, without the ceremony
+of drinking Ganges water. Of these, some have been seen creeping along
+with the flesh half eaten off their bones by the birds; others with
+their limbs torn by dogs and jackals, and others partly covered with
+insects.
+
+After a person is taken down to the river, if he should recover, it is
+looked upon by his friends as a great misfortune. He becomes an outcast.
+Even his own children will not eat with him, nor offer him the least
+attention. If they should happen to touch him, they must wash their
+bodies, to cleanse them from the pollution which has been contracted.
+About fifty miles north of Calcutta, are two villages inhabited entirely
+by these poor creatures, who have become outcasts in consequence of
+their recovery after having been taken down to the Ganges.
+
+At the mouth of the river Hoogly, which is one of the branches of the
+Ganges, is the island Sauger, which I saw as we approached Calcutta
+after having been at sea for one hundred and twenty-eight days. Now, my
+dear children, if you come out to India as missionaries, you will have
+to sail nearly one hundred and thirty days before you can reach it.
+Sauger island is the island where, formerly, hundreds of mothers were in
+the habit of throwing their children to the crocodiles, and where these
+mothers were wont to weep and cry if the crocodiles did not devour their
+children before their eyes. Think what a dreadful religion that must
+be, which makes mothers so hard-hearted. Did you ever take any corn or
+Indian meal and throw it to the chickens? And what did these chickens
+do? Did they not come around you and eat it? Well, just in this way the
+crocodiles would come near those mothers, and devour their children.
+Here is a picture of a mother throwing her child to a crocodile.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+I am glad to tell you, that the British have put a stop to the sacrifice
+of children at that place; but mothers continue to destroy their
+children elsewhere, and will continue to destroy them until Christians
+send the Gospel to them. It is not improbable that vast numbers of
+children are annually destroyed in the Ganges. Mothers sacrifice them,
+in consequence of vows which they have made. When the time to sacrifice
+them has come, they take them down to the river, and encourage them to
+go out so far that they are taken away by the stream, or they push them
+off with their own hands.
+
+I just remarked, that mothers will continue to destroy their children
+until the Gospel is sent to them. That the Gospel does prevent such
+things, the following circumstance will show. Several years ago, a
+missionary lady went from New England to India. As she was walking out
+one morning, on the banks of the Ganges, she saw a heathen mother
+weeping. She went up to her, sat down by her side, put her hand into
+hers, and asked what was the matter with her. "I have just been making a
+basket of flags," said she, "and putting my infant in it--pushing it off
+into the river, and drowning it. And my gods are very much pleased with
+me, because I have done it." After this missionary lady had heard all
+she had to say, she told her that her gods were no gods; that the only
+true God delights not in such sacrifices, but turns in horror from them;
+and that, if she would be happy here and hereafter, she must forsake her
+sins, and pray to Jesus Christ, who died to save sinners like herself.
+This conversation was the means of the conversion of that mother, and
+she never again destroyed any of her infants.
+
+Such is the power of the blessed Gospel. And what the Gospel has done
+once, it can do again. If Christians will send it to them, with the
+blessing of God, the time will soon come when heathen mothers will no
+more destroy their children. And have you nothing to do in this great
+work, my dear children? When you grow up, cannot you go and tell them of
+the Saviour? Here is a very pretty hymn about a heathen mother throwing
+her child to a crocodile.
+
+    See that heathen mother stand
+    Where the sacred currents flow,
+    With her own maternal hand,
+    'Mid the waves her infant throw.
+
+    Hark, I hear the piteous scream--
+    Frightful monsters seize their prey,
+    Or the dark and bloody stream
+    Bears the struggling child away.
+
+    Fainter now, and fainter still,
+    Breaks the cry upon the ear;
+    But the mother's heart is steel,
+    She unmoved that cry can hear.
+
+    Send, O send the Bible there,
+    Let its precepts reach the heart;
+    She may then her children spare,
+    Act the mother's tender part.
+
+I have heard of a little boy who learned this hymn. He was deeply
+affected by it, and wanted very much to give something to send the
+Gospel to India. But he had no money. He was, however, willing to labor
+in order to earn some. Hearing that a gentleman wanted the chips removed
+from the ground near his woodpile, he hired himself to him, removed the
+chips, got his money, and, with glistening eyes, went and delivered it
+up, to be sent to the heathen, repeating, as he went,
+
+    Send, O send the Bible there,
+    Let its precepts reach the heart;
+    She may then her children spare,
+    Act the mother's tender part.
+
+About one hundred miles above the mouth of the Hoogly is the city of
+Calcutta, and about five hundred miles above that city is the city of
+Benares. In these cities, as well as in other places, we see how much
+the heathen will contribute to support their wretched religion. A rich
+native in Calcutta has been known to spend more than one hundred
+thousand dollars on a single festival--the festival of the goddess
+Karle--and more than thirty thousand dollars every year afterwards
+during his life, for the same purpose. Not long since, a rich native
+gave at one time to his idols more than one million two hundred thousand
+dollars. And what have Christians ever done to honor their Saviour,
+which will bear a comparison with what the heathen do for their idols?
+Alas, alas, few Christian men or Christian women, in all the church, are
+willing to give even one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Most
+of those who are rich, hoard up their money, instead of spending it for
+the purpose of saving souls. And there are many persons who have never
+given a farthing to send the Gospel to the heathen. O, what will such
+say, when they must meet the heathen at the bar of God?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+THE GODDESS DURGA.
+
+
+My dear Children--From what I said, in my last chapter, about the
+goddess Gunga, you see that the Hindoos worship goddesses as well as
+gods. There is another goddess much worshipped the wife of the god Siva.
+She has appeared in a thousand forms, with a thousand different names.
+Of all these thousand forms, Durga and Karle are the most regarded by
+the people. I will speak of Durga first. Of all the festivals in Eastern
+India, hers is the most celebrated. She has ten hands, in which she
+holds an iron club, a trident, a battle-axe, spears, thunderbolts, etc.
+Thus armed, she is ever ready to fight with her enemies.
+
+Were you to be present in the city of Calcutta in the month of
+September, you might everywhere see the people busy in preparing for the
+yearly festival of this goddess. Images representing her you would find
+in great numbers for sale, as bread or meat is sold. In the houses of
+the rich, images are to be found made of gold, silver, brass, copper,
+crystal, stone, or mixed metal, which are daily worshipped. These are
+called permanent images. Besides these, multitudes of what are called
+temporary images are made--made merely for the occasion and then
+destroyed. They may be made of hay, sticks, clay, wood, or other such
+things. Their size varies from a few inches to twenty feet in height. If
+any persons are too poor to buy one of these images, they can make them
+for themselves. When the festival is near at hand, people are seen in
+every direction taking the images to their houses. After they are thus
+supplied, the festival commences. It lasts fifteen days. The greater
+part of this time is spent in preparing for the three great days of
+worship. Early on the morning of the first of the three great days, the
+Brahmins proceed to consecrate the images, or to give them, as they
+suppose, life and understanding. Until they are consecrated, they are
+not thought to be of any value. They are looked upon as senseless. A
+wealthy family can always receive the services of one or more Brahmins,
+and a few of the poor may unite and secure the services of one of them.
+At length the solemn hour arrives. The Brahmin, with the leaves of a
+sacred tree, comes near the image. With the two forefingers of his
+right hand he touches the breast, the two cheeks, the eyes, and the
+forehead of the image, at each touch saying the prayer, "Let the spirit
+of Durga descend and take possession of this image." By such ceremonies,
+and by repeating various _muntrums_, it is supposed that the Brahmins
+have the power to bring down the goddess to take possession of the
+image. Having been thus consecrated, it is believed to be a proper
+object of worship. Having eyes, it can now behold every act of worship
+which is made; having ears, it can be delighted with music and with
+songs; having a nose, it can smell the sweet perfumes which are offered;
+having a mouth, it can be delighted with the rich food which is prepared
+for it.
+
+After the image is consecrated, the worship begins. The devotee comes
+near the image, and falls down before it. He then twists himself into a
+great variety of shapes. Sometimes he sits on the floor, sometimes he
+stands, sometimes he looks in one direction, sometimes in another. Then
+he sprinkles the idol with holy water, rinses its mouth, washes its
+feet, wipes it with a dry cloth, throws flowers over it, puts jewels on
+it, offers perfumes to it, and finishes by performing shaashtaangkum.
+
+The worship of the idol is succeeded by a season of carousing, joy, and
+festivity. On this occasion, large offerings are made to the idols. A
+rich native has been known to offer eighty thousand pounds of
+sweetmeats, eighty thousand pounds of sugar, a thousand suits of cloth
+garments, a thousand suits of silk, a thousand offerings of rice,
+plantains, and other fruits.
+
+Bloody sacrifices are offered up on such occasions. The king of Nudiya,
+some time ago, offered a large number of sheep, goats, and buffaloes on
+the first day of the feast, and vowed to double the offering every day;
+so that the whole number sacrificed amounted to more than sixty-five
+thousand. You may remember that king Solomon offered up on one occasion
+twenty-two thousand oxen, and a hundred and twenty thousand sheep. If
+all the animals slain throughout Hindostan, at the festival of the
+goddess Durga, were collected together, they would amount to a much
+larger number than Solomon offered.
+
+After the worship and offerings have been continued for three days, the
+festival closes. As the morning of the first day was devoted to the
+consecration of the images, the morning of the fourth is spent in
+unconsecrating them. This work is done by the Brahmins. They profess, by
+various ceremonies, to send back the goddess to her heaven, concluding
+with a farewell address, in which they tell her that they expect her to
+accept of all their services, and return and pay them a visit again in
+the coming year. Then all unite in bidding her a sorrowful adieu, and
+many seem affected even to the shedding of tears.
+
+Soon afterwards the images are carried forth into the streets, placed on
+stages or platforms, and raised on men's shoulders. As the procession
+moves onward through the streets, accompanied with music and songs, amid
+clouds of dust, you might see them waving long hairy brushes to wipe off
+the dust, and to keep off the flies and mosquitoes, which might trouble
+the senseless images. But where are these processions going? To the
+banks of the Ganges. And for what purpose? For the purpose of casting
+the images into the river. When all the ceremonies connected with the
+occasion are finished, those who carry the images suddenly fall upon
+them, break them to pieces, and then throw them with violence into the
+river. After this the people return to their homes.
+
+I have now given you a specimen of the image-worship of the Hindoos; and
+how different is it from the worship which the Bible enjoins. "God is a
+Spirit; and they who worship him, must worship him in spirit and in
+truth." The very reverse of this, as you have seen, marks the worship of
+the heathen. They are not satisfied, unless they can have some object
+before them, to which they can make their offerings and their prayers.
+Thus daily are they engaged in a service which, above all others, is the
+most offensive and provoking to a holy God--a service which has caused
+him to declare, that idolaters shall not enter the kingdom of heaven.
+This, too, is the service in which every person, who has never given
+himself to the Saviour, is engaged; and, of course, in which you are
+engaged if you have not given your hearts to him. Those who think more
+of their money than they think of Christ, just as certainly worship the
+image which is stamped on a dollar or a cent, as the heathen worship
+their idols. Those who love their fathers and mothers, and brothers and
+sisters more than Christ, make these their idols. And are you, my dear
+children, yet out of Christ? If so, you have your idols. And what are
+these idols? Are they the world and its vanities? Then God is as angry
+with you as he is with the heathen, and unless you give up these idols,
+you too must be lost.
+
+In a tract of mine, published by the American Tract Society, entitled,
+"Knocking at the Door"--a tract which I _most earnestly_ entreat you to
+get and read--you will find an account of the death of a young lady, who
+had chosen the world and its vanities as her idols. I was her physician.
+After having attended her for about a month, I perceived, one morning,
+that her disease must soon prove fatal. I told her that she could not
+live. She then exclaimed, "Doctor, can I not live a month?" I informed
+her that she could not. Again she exclaimed, "Can I not live two weeks?"
+She was told that she could not live two weeks. And such a scene of
+horror followed as I never before witnessed, and may God be pleased to
+grant that I may never witness such another. Until laid upon a dying
+bed, I fear that she had neglected to think about her soul's concerns.
+Now she requested to be taken from it, and placed upon her knees, that
+she might call upon God to have mercy upon her. As her case excited much
+attention, some of the youth came to see her. These she warned, in the
+most solemn manner, not to put off repentance, as she had done, to a
+dying hour. Looking up at me, on one occasion, she exclaimed, "Doctor,
+cannot you save me?" Alas, what could I do for the poor sufferer.
+Witness, now, how anxious she was to obtain the favor of that God whom
+she had hitherto neglected. Yes, so anxious that she requested her
+friends not to allow her to sleep, that she might spend every remaining
+breath in calling upon God to have mercy upon her. One very affecting
+circumstance occurred. She requested her trunk either to be brought to
+her bedside, or to be opened. From this a ring, which was set with red
+garnets, was taken out by herself, or by another, and handed to her. She
+then called a young friend to her bedside, put the ring upon her finger,
+and said to her, "Don't you put off repentance, as I have done, until a
+dying hour." That ring is now in my possession. In less than forty-eight
+hours after I told her that she could not live, she passed into
+eternity. Would that I could show you that mournful countenance, which
+continued long after the last spark of life had become extinct; yes,
+even up to the moment when the lid of her coffin for ever hid it from
+our view. Never, never shall I forget it. It was a sad monument of the
+wreck within.
+
+Now, my dear children, you would not like to die as, I fear, this young
+lady died. Well, then, if you would die differently, you must live
+differently. You must live for Christ, if you would die in Christ. And
+are you Christ's, or are you yet gay and thoughtless--as gay and as
+thoughtless as this young lady was, until laid upon her dying bed? If
+you are so, and if you continue to remain in this sad condition, your
+season of sorrow too will certainly come, and it will come when you
+expect it not. As the little insect which flies round and round your
+candle is dazzled with its brightness, and feels nothing but pleasure,
+until it unconsciously strikes the blaze with its little wings, and is
+swallowed up in the flame; so you are dazzled with the pleasures of the
+world, thinking nothing of the flames which may swallow you up in a
+moment, and put a stop to all your joys for ever. O, that the death-bed
+scene of Miss Matthews might have a happy effect upon you. O, that the
+solemn warning which she gave to her young friend, not to put off
+repentance as she had done, until a dying hour, might continue to sound
+in your ears, until you would no longer delay repentance. My dear
+children, this young lady, though dead, yet speaketh. She speaks to you.
+She calls upon you from her tomb--from the eternal world, to delay
+repentance no longer. Will you, then, be so mad as to turn a deaf ear to
+this call? Will you ever take another sip from the cup of unhallowed
+pleasure? Will you ever direct your little feet to the ballroom, or
+other places of sinful amusement? Will you hereafter prefer your worldly
+joys to Christ? O, you must not, you must not. It will not do for you to
+be lost. Who, O who can lie down in everlasting burnings? Who can dwell
+for ever with devouring flames?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE GODDESS KARLE.
+
+
+My dear Children--In the preceding chapter I spoke of Karle. She, as I
+there mentioned, is the wife of Siva, and, like her husband, has the
+power of destruction. From the images made of her, it would appear that
+she is a female, of a black or dark blue color. She has four arms. In
+one hand she holds a sword, and in another a human head. Her hair is
+dishevelled, reaching down to her feet. Her countenance is most
+ferocious. Her tongue comes out of her mouth, and hangs over her chin.
+She has three eyes, red and fiery. Her lips and eyebrows are streaked
+with blood. She has two dead bodies for ear-rings, and wears a girdle
+around her loins--a girdle made of bloody hands, which she cut off from
+the bodies of her enemies. She has a necklace of skulls, which she took
+from the bodies of the giants and others killed by her.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Of all the Hindoo divinities, this goddess is the most cruel and
+revengeful. Such is her thirst for blood, that being unable at one time
+to procure any giants for her prey, in order to quench her thirst, she
+cut her own throat, that the blood issuing thence might spout into her
+mouth. Different acts of worship are performed to appease her. If, for
+example, a devotee should burn his body, by applying a burning lamp to
+it, it would be very pleasing to her. If he should draw some of his
+blood and give it to her, or if he should cut off a piece of his flesh
+and offer it as a burnt-offering, she would be still move pleased. If he
+should present _whole_ burnt-offerings upon the altar, saying, "Hrang,
+brang, Karle, Karle! O, horrid-toothed goddess, eat, eat; destroy all
+the malignant: cut with this axe; bind, bind; seize, seize; drink this
+blood; spheng, spheng; secure, secure; salutation to Karle," she would
+be much delighted. It is said that she will be pleased for three months,
+if the people offer her the blood of a crocodile--for a thousand years,
+if they offer her the blood of one man, and a hundred thousand years, if
+they offer her the blood of three.
+
+This goddess is the patroness of thieves. To her they pay their
+devotions, to obtain help to carry on their wicked delights. Gangs meet
+together, and, after having offered bloody sacrifices, and worshipped
+their weapons, and having drunk some intoxicating liquor, and rubbed
+their bodies with oil, they go forth to rob. They have a prayer, which
+they offer when they worship their weapons. It is as follows: "O,
+instrument formed by the goddess, Karle commands thee to cut a passage
+into the house, to cut through stones, bones, bricks, wood, the earth,
+and mountains, and cause the dust thereof to be carried away by the
+wind." Scattered throughout India, there is a lawless set of men whose
+profession it is to get their food by murder. They are called
+Phansiagars, or Thugs. They owe their origin and laws to Karle. They say
+that she told them to become murderers and plunderers. They are called
+Phansiagars, from the name of the instrument which they use when they
+murder people. Phansiagar means a strangler, and they use a phansi, or
+noose, which they throw over the necks of those whom they intend to
+plunder, and strangle them. These Phansiagars are composed of all
+castes, Hindoos, Mahommedans, pariahs, and chandellars. This arises from
+the circumstance that they never destroy the children of those whom they
+rob and murder. These children they take care of, and bring up to their
+own horrible mode of life. They always murder those whom they rob,
+acting upon the maxim that "dead men tell no tales." A gang of these
+robbers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy persons. These divide
+into small parties. Those whom they murder are travellers, whom they
+happen to meet on the road. Sometimes two or three of a gang will take
+up their station in a choultry, or place where the traveller stops, and
+while he sleeps, they rouse him from his sleep, and cast the noose over
+his head and kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man. One casts the
+noose over his head, and immediately tightens it with all his strength;
+the other strikes him on the joint of his knees as he rises, which
+causes him to fall forwards. After he has fallen, they kick him on the
+temples till he dies, which is usually in a minute. They never commit a
+murder until they have taken every precaution not to be found out. They
+will follow a traveller for weeks, if necessary, before they destroy
+him. After they have murdered him, they gash the body all over and bury
+it. They gash it, that it may not swell, and cause cracks to take place
+in the ground, which might cause the jackals to dig down to the body,
+and thus expose their guilt. If a dog accompanies the person, they
+always kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to the discovery
+of his master. They think it to be a very good act to give a part of the
+plunder, which they get when they murder a person, to their goddess. If
+they fail to put him to death according to their rules, they suppose
+that they have made her angry, and they make offerings to her, that she
+may be appeased. Thus, you see that their religion teaches them to
+commit the blackest of crimes.
+
+The reason why this people gash and bury the bodies of those whom they
+murder, is as follows. They say that the goddess used to save them the
+trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by eating them, thus
+screening the murderers from all chance of being found out. Once, after
+the murder of a traveller, the body was, as usual, left unburied. One of
+the Phansiagars employed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw the
+goddess in the act of feasting upon it. This made her so angry, that she
+vowed never again to devour a body slaughtered by them; they having, by
+this one act of curiosity, forfeited her favor. However, as an
+equivalent for withdrawing her patronage, she plucked one of the fangs
+from her jaw, and gave it to them, saying that they might use it as a
+pickaxe, which would never wear out. She then opened her side and pulled
+out one of her ribs, which she gave them for a knife, whose edge nothing
+could blunt. Having done this, she stooped down and tore off the hem of
+her garment, which she gave to them for a noose, declaring that it
+would never fail to strangle any person about whose throat it might be
+cast. She moreover commanded them to gash and bury the bodies of those
+whom they destroyed.
+
+The Phansiagars bring up their children to their own profession. To
+learn this, the boy is placed under the care of a tutor. Sometimes his
+father is his teacher. By him he is taught that it is just as proper to
+murder a man, as it is to kill a snake which lies in his path and would
+bite him as he passes. He is not permitted at first to see the murders,
+but merely a dead body; his mind being gradually prepared for the sight.
+After this, the dreadful secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him.
+When he expresses a wish to be engaged in this horrid business, they
+tell him all about it. In the meantime he is allowed a small part of the
+plunder, in order that his desire to commit these murders may be
+increased; since it is only by murder that the plunder is obtained. He
+is from time to time allowed to assist in some things, while the murder
+is taking place, or allowed to be present to see how the business is
+managed. It is not, however, until he becomes a man, that he is
+permitted to apply the noose. To attain this privilege, he usually
+devotes eight or ten years. Before he can commit a murder, his tutor
+must present him with a noose. This sets him loose upon the world, as a
+licensed murderer. When the tutor is about to give him the noose, he
+takes him apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use it with skill,
+as it is to be the means of his earning his food, and as his safety will
+depend upon the skill with which it is used. After he receives it, he
+tries his skill in strangling a person the first opportunity that
+offers.
+
+By the course of education which the Phansiagars undergo, they become so
+fond of their dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce them to quit
+it. Some who have been employed in the East India Company's service,
+have always returned to their business when an opportunity offered of a
+successful enterprise.
+
+When the Phansiagars become old, they do not quit the service, but act
+as watchers, and decoy the traveller, by some false tale of distress,
+into some distant place, where he is murdered.
+
+Women are sometimes admitted to the society of these plunderers, and,
+on some occasions, are allowed to apply the noose. They select a
+handsome girl, and place her in a convenient spot, where, by her beauty,
+or by a false story of distress, she may decoy some unsuspecting
+traveller, and be the means of his destruction. Should he be on
+horseback, she will induce him to take her up behind him; after which,
+when an opportunity offers, she throws the noose over his head, leaps
+from the horse, drags him to the ground, and strangles him. I will
+mention an instance. It happened that a horseman of Coorg, in the Madras
+presidency, was passing by a spot where one of these interesting-looking
+girls was stationed. She told him a piteous story of having been robbed
+and badly treated, and begged him to assist her. Feeling sorry for her,
+he offered to take her behind him, on his horse, and thus assist her a
+few miles on her journey. She expressed much gratitude for his kindness,
+and mounted. Soon afterwards she suddenly passed a noose over his head,
+and, drawing it with all her might, endeavored to pull him from his
+saddle. At this moment, a number of Phansiagars started from the
+neighboring thicket and surrounded him. The murderess then slipped from
+the horse; but the Coorg striking his heels into the horse's sides, it
+threw out its hind legs with great violence, and struck to the ground
+the girl, who immediately let go the cord. He then drew his sword, and,
+cutting his way through the robbers, effected his escape. He wounded two
+of them severely. These men were shortly afterwards taken, and, through
+their means, twelve others fell into the hands of the judicial officers
+of the king of Coorg, including the girl who attempted the murder. They
+were all put to death.
+
+And is it possible that such persons can go to heaven? How could such
+ever relish its pure joys? What would they do, could they be admitted
+there? My dear children, it is a charity which has no foundation, to
+suppose that the heathen can go to heaven. I have preached the Gospel to
+tens of thousands of them, but I never saw one who had the least atom of
+a qualification for that holy place. "They have all gone out of the
+way." Every crime which the apostle Paul speaks of in the latter part of
+the first chapter of his epistle to the Romans, they commit, and crimes
+of so dreadful a nature that I cannot mention them--crimes which, should
+they be written in the Bible, would cause the Bible to be a sealed book
+for ever.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+SELF-TORTURES OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--As the heathen have no Bible to direct them, they have
+devised various means by which they expect to obtain the favor of their
+gods, and get to heaven. I will mention some of these.
+
+Some burn a lamp in a temple. They think that this is a very meritorious
+act. Some roll on the ground after the god, as he is carried in a great
+car or chariot around the temple. It is customary for the people to
+build very high cars or chariots, and cover them with very beautiful
+cloths. They also tie the cocoa-nut blossom and plantain-tree within
+them, and attach great ropes to them. When they are ready to drag these
+cars, or chariots, they bring their gods of gold or of brass from the
+temples, and place them on them. Then one, two, three, six, nine
+hundred, and even a thousand persons, when the cars are very large,
+catch hold of these ropes and drag them around the temple. While they
+are doing this, many of the heathen, to fulfil vows which they made when
+in sickness, and at other times of distress, throw themselves on the
+ground, and roll over from side to side, and frequently much injure
+themselves.
+
+Some swing on great hooks, which are passed through the tender parts of
+their backs. Sometimes they swing for half an hour; sometimes an hour.
+The longer they can bear the torture of the swinging, the more
+acceptable they suppose it will be to their goddess. It occasionally
+happens, that the flesh in which the hooks are fastened gives way, in
+which case the poor creature is dashed to the ground. When this occurs,
+the people hold him in the greatest abhorrence. They judge him to be a
+great criminal, and suppose that he has met a violent death in
+consequence of sins which he committed in a former birth.
+
+Not long since, I attended one of these hook-swingings, not far from the
+city of Madura. It took place on the morning of June 8th, 1848, just
+twenty-nine years after I first left America for India. It should have
+taken place on the preceding afternoon; but one of the axle-trees of the
+car, which was to support the machine on which the man was to be
+elevated in the air, was broken. Nothing, of course, could be done until
+it was repaired. The carpenters and others worked with great diligence
+until about eleven o'clock at night, when every thing was prepared for
+the swinging. I expected immediately after this to witness the ceremony.
+It however did not take place until the morning. While waiting for the
+man who was to be swung to make his appearance, I took a pencil and made
+a drawing of the machine to which he was to be fastened. The picture on
+the first page of the book will give you some idea of it.
+
+Yon have, perhaps, often seen a well-sweep. The long beam in the picture
+is swung in the same manner as is the well-sweep, with a single
+exception. In addition to its usual motion, it is made to turn
+horizontally. The cuts which you may have seen, in two or three of my
+little books, differ much from the above; of course different machines
+are used at different times. There are stationary swingings, as well as
+swingings of the kind to which I just alluded.
+
+Between six and seven o'clock in the morning, the man who was to be
+swung made his appearance for a few moments, and then disappeared. The
+hooks by which he was to be swung, as well as the iron rods with which a
+number of devotees were immediately to pierce their sides, were carried
+through the streets, and held up that they might be seen by the people.
+Soon afterwards the man again appeared with the hooks in his back, and
+went up to the end of the beam to which he was to be fastened. This, of
+course, was lowered. Notwithstanding the dense multitudes of people, I
+made my way to the same spot, determined to be satisfied whether or not
+there was any deception in the application of the hooks. There was no
+deception. They passed through the skin, on the sides of the backbone.
+To these hooks were attached yellow ropes, by which he was fastened to
+the beam, as you will perceive in the picture. This being done, the men,
+five or six in number, who had hold of the ropes fastened to the end of
+the beam which you see resting on the ground, and which was then, of
+course, high in the air, drew him up until the beam lay horizontally.
+Then, after making him perform one circular motion around the car, they
+elevated him, as you see in the picture. When thus elevated, it was
+thought that he was forty feet from the ground. All being ready, the
+people seized the ropes which you see in front of the car, and began to
+draw it. Mr. Chandler and myself accompanied it through the streets,
+until it came to the place from which it set out. The distance of ground
+passed over was at least half a mile, and the time in which the journey
+was accomplished exceeded an hour. Of course he was swinging more than
+an hour. As the car passed through the streets, the people threw
+plantains from the tops of the houses to the crowds below.
+
+The man who was swung was adorned with flowers and other ornaments. He
+had a tinselled turban on his head. His body was rubbed over with a
+yellow paste, made, most probably, from the sandal-wood. Around his
+ankles were rings, hung with little bells, which he made to tinkle, as
+he was swinging, by striking his legs together. He wore a dark or black
+pair of pantaloons, which came a little below the knees, and which had
+a border of gold around them. He held a handkerchief in one hand, and a
+knife somewhat resembling a dagger, in the other. These he kept in
+constant motion, by moving his arms. On one occasion, a bunch of
+plantains was tied to one of the long ropes which you see hanging down
+by the side of the swinger. These he drew up, and afterwards scattered
+over the people on a house opposite to him. [Illustration.]
+
+After following the car for a quarter of a mile or more, we went before
+it, and there witnessed another appalling sight. There were five or six
+men, who had the rods of iron which I just mentioned passed through the
+skin of their sides. They were dancing along, and, as they danced, they
+made these rods go backward and forward through the skin.
+
+After the car had reached the place from which it set out, the end of
+the beam from which the man was swinging was then lowered and he was
+untied. Again I looked very carefully at the hooks in the back. The
+people say that no blood is shed by their introduction, and consider
+this to be a miracle. The falsity of this assertion was shown by the
+blood which I saw on the side of one of the wounds.
+
+I have been long in this country, and consequently have become so
+familiarized with heathenism, that my feelings, though deeply wounded at
+this sight, were not so keenly affected as were those of my new
+associate, Mr. Chandler. He has been on heathen ground but a short time.
+When they tied the man to the beam, he was unnerved and wellnigh
+overcome; and he told me, that during all the time he was following the
+car, he felt like shedding tears.
+
+While following the car, the young men of America came into my mind.
+They refuse to come, said I, to help these miserable creatures. O, they
+will not come--they will not come. I thought, that if many of the dear
+children of that land--children to whom I lately preached, as well as
+others, could witness this poor creature swinging from the end of a long
+beam, far above the tops of the trees, and that, too, by hooks passing
+through the tender parts of his back, they would say, we will, by and
+by, become missionaries, and, by the help of God, proclaim to the
+heathen that there is a Saviour.
+
+On the evening of the day on which the swinging takes place, another act
+of great cruelty is practised. Devotees throw themselves from, the top
+of a high wall, or a scaffold of twenty or thirty feet in height, upon a
+bed of iron spikes, or on bags of straw with knives in them. Many are
+often mangled and torn. Others are quickly killed.
+
+At night, many of the devotees sit down in the open air, and pierce the
+skin of their foreheads, by inserting a small rod of iron. To this is
+suspended a lamp, which is kept burning till daylight.
+
+Sometimes bundles of thorns are collected before the temple, among which
+the devotees roll themselves without any covering. These thorns are then
+set on fire, when they briskly dance over the flames.
+
+Other devotees swing before a slow fire; some stand between two fires,
+as you see in this picture.
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+Some have their breasts, arms, and other parts stuck entirely full of
+pins, about the thickness of small nails, or packing needles.
+
+Another very cruel torture is practised. Some of the devotees make a
+vow. With one hand they cover their under lip with wet earth or mud. On
+this, with the other hand, they place some small grains, usually of
+mustard-seed They then stretch themselves flat on their backs, exposed
+to the dews of night, and the blazing and scorching sun by day. Their
+vow is, that from this position they will not stir, that they will not
+move nor turn, nor eat nor drink, till the seeds planted on their lips
+begin to sprout. This usually takes place on the third or fourth day.
+After this they arise, and then think that they are very holy.
+
+There is a class of devotees in this country called Yogis, whose object
+it is to root out every human feeling. Some live in holes and caves.
+Some drag around a heavy chain attached to them. Some make the circuit
+of an empire, creeping on their hands and knees. Some roll their bodies
+from the shores of the Indus to the Ganges.
+
+The Rev. Mr. Heyer, in one of his letters from India, says, that an
+Indian devotee has spent more than nine years on a journey from Benares
+to Cape Comorin, that is, from the 27th to the 7th degree of north
+latitude. The whole journey is made by rolling on the bare ground, from
+side to side. When he comes to a river, of course he cannot roll over
+it. He therefore fords it, or passes over it in a boat, and then rolls
+on the banks of the river just as far as the river is wide. By doing
+this, he supposes that his determination to roll all the way is fully
+carried out.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Some devotees hold up one or both arms, until the muscles become rigid,
+and their limbs become shrivelled into stumps. In the above cut, you
+have a representation of a man with one of these shrivelled arms. See
+how long his finger-nails have grown. One has run through his hand and
+back through his arm. Some stretch themselves on beds of iron spikes.
+Some wear great square irons on their necks. I have seen not only a man,
+but a woman, with these great square irons around their necks, each
+nearly two feet in length and two feet in breadth. These they put on for
+the purpose of fulfilling some vow which they have made. For instance,
+if a mother has a very sick little boy, she will say, "Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy, I will have a square iron put on my neck,
+and wear it all my life." After this vow is made, if the little boy gets
+well, the mother thinks that her Swammie has cured him, and to fulfil
+her engagement she will have one of these irons put on her neck.
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+Other devotees throw themselves from the tops of precipices, and are
+dashed to pieces; some bury themselves alive in holes, which their own
+relatives have dug; some bind themselves with ropes or chains to trees,
+until they die; some keep gazing so long and so constantly at the
+heavens, that the muscles of their neck become contracted, and no
+aliment but liquids can pass into the stomach.
+
+But I will not continue this subject. You perceive, my dear children,
+what a wretched religion that must be which encourages its followers to
+perform such acts. And how vain are all these acts--how utterly
+destitute are they of any merit. Those who practise them are not made
+better by them, and they are just as far from the kingdom of heaven
+after having performed them, as they were before. The Christian religion
+encourages no such things. It tells us to perform no pilgrimages to holy
+places, to inflict no self-tortures. But it has its requirements, and
+these are very simple, and may easily be performed by all who are
+willing to do their duty. These requirements are, repentance, forsaking
+sin, faith in Christ, and a supreme devotedness to his service. Have
+you, my dear children, attended to these requirements? If not, you are
+in a much worse condition than these poor heathen of whom you have been
+reading. They are not as guilty before God as you are. They know not
+their Master's will. Still, they must perish, unless the Gospel is sent
+to them. But though they perish, their punishment will be lighter than
+the punishment of those who refuse to love and obey the Saviour. That
+servant who knows his Lord's will, and prepares not himself, neither
+does according to his will, shall be beaten with many stripes. But he
+that knows not, and does commit things worthy of stripes, shall be
+beaten with few stripes. Should it be your sad lot to perish at last, it
+would be far better for you to go down to hell enveloped in all the
+darkness of a heathen land, than to go down to hell from a land of such
+gospel light and privileges as you enjoy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+THE SUTTEE, OR BURNING OF WIDOWS.
+
+
+My dear children--From what I have already told you, you know that the
+Hindoos are a cruel people. But I have not told you of the extent to
+which they carry their cruelty. Perhaps it is shown to the highest
+degree in their practice of the suttee, or burning of widows. The
+British have abolished this rite throughout their dominions in India.
+They have also made great exertions to have it abolished in the
+territories of the native princes, but I am sorry to say, that in some
+of these territories it is still practised. Within the last three years,
+twenty-three of the princes just alluded to, have issued orders for its
+abolishment throughout their dominions. These orders have probably been
+issued solely in consequence of their fear of the British power, for it
+is a practice which is riveted in the affections of the people. This
+power they know that it will be dangerous to resist.
+
+In my "Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen," I
+mentioned, that the sacred books of the heathen encourage the suttee. I
+also mentioned several instances, in which widows had been burned to
+death with the corpses of their husbands. Even though you may have seen
+that book, it will be well for me to give you two or three other cases,
+to impress your minds more fully with the horrors of the Hindoo
+religion. The first took place in a village of Tanjore. A merchant
+having died, his wife, who was about thirty years old, determined to
+burn herself with his corpse. The news of what she was going to do,
+quickly spread in every direction, and large numbers of people collected
+to witness the burning. After she was adorned with jewels and dressed in
+her best clothing, and after her body was tinged with the yellow
+infusion of sandal-wood and saffron, bearers arrived to take away the
+corpse with the wretched woman. The body of the man was placed on a car,
+ornamented with costly stuffs, flowers, etc. There he was seated like a
+living man, elegantly decorated with all his jewels, and clothed in rich
+attire.
+
+The corpse being carried first, the wife followed in a rich palanquin.
+As she went along, the surrounding multitudes of people stretched out
+their hands towards her to show how much they admired her conduct. The
+women in particular went up to her to wish her joy, apparently desiring
+to receive her blessing, or at least, that she would pronounce over them
+some pleasing word. She tried to satisfy them all, saying to one, that
+she would long continue to enjoy her worldly happiness, and to another,
+that she would be the mother of many beautiful children. Another was
+informed, that she would soon arrive at great honor in the world. These,
+and similar expressions, she made to all who came near her, and they
+departed with the full belief that they would enjoy all the blessings of
+which she had spoken. She also distributed among them some betel-leaves,
+which they gladly received as relics, or something of blessed influence.
+
+During the whole procession, which was very long, her countenance was
+serene and even cheerful, until they came to the pile upon which she was
+to die. Then she suddenly became pensive. She no longer attended to what
+was passing around her. Her looks were wildly fixed upon the pile. Her
+face grew pale. She trembled with fear, and seemed ready to faint away.
+
+The Brahmins, who took the lead in this ceremony, with her relations,
+seeing her sad condition, ran to her, and endeavored to restore her
+spirits, but she seemed not to know what they said, and answered not a
+word.
+
+They made her quit the palanquin, and her nearest relatives took her to
+a pond of water which was near the pile, where they washed her. They
+then attended her to the pile, on which the corpse of her husband had
+already been laid. It was surrounded with Brahmins, each with a lighted
+torch in one hand, and a bowl of melted butter in the other, all ready,
+as soon as the poor victim was placed on the pile, to envelope her in
+fire.
+
+The relatives armed with muskets, sabres, and other weapons, stood
+closely around in a double line, for the purpose, it was said, of making
+her afraid, if she might wish to draw back, or of frightening any body
+who might pity her, and endeavor to rescue her.
+
+At length the time for firing the pile being proclaimed, the young widow
+was stripped of her jewels, and led on towards the pile. She was then
+commanded to walk three times around it, two of her nearest relations
+supporting her by the arms. The first round she accomplished with
+tottering steps; but in the second, her strength forsook her, and she
+fainted away in the arms of those who were holding her. They were
+obliged to drag her between them for the third round. Then senseless,
+she was thrown upon the corpse of her husband. At that instant, the
+multitude made the air to ring with their shouts of gladness, while the
+Brahmins poured the butter on the dry wood, and applied the torches.
+Instantly the whole pile was in a blaze.
+
+As soon as the flames began to rage, the poor woman, now in the midst of
+them, was called upon by name, from all sides; but as insensible as the
+corpse on which she lay, she made no answer. She entered eternity,
+suffocated at once, most probably, by the flames.
+
+The second case of suttee which I shall mention took place at the death
+of the rajah, or king of Tanjore. He left behind him four wives.
+
+The Brahmins having determined that two of these four should be burned
+with the corpse of their husband, and having selected the two whom they
+thought best to sacrifice, they told them of what awaited them. They
+received the information with apparent joy. A refusal would have been
+attended with their utter disgrace.
+
+One day only was necessary to get ready for the funeral ceremonies. They
+were conducted as follows: In a field somewhat distant from the palace,
+the people made a hollow, not very deep, but about twelve or fifteen
+feet square. Within it they made a pyramid of the sweet-smelling
+sandal-wood. On the middle of the pyramid, a scaffold was built in such
+a manner that the posts could easily be taken away, by which means the
+scaffold would fall at once. On the four corners of the platform, large
+jars were placed, filled with melted butter, to besmear the pyramid,
+that it might be the more easily set on fire.
+
+The following was the order of the procession. It was headed by a great
+number of soldiers under arms. They were followed by a multitude of
+musicians, chiefly trumpeters, who made the air reëcho with their
+melancholy sounds. Next came the body of the king upon a splendid
+palanquin, richly adorned. This was surrounded by the nearest relations
+and by the priest of the king. They were all on foot, and without their
+turbans in token of mourning. A large party of Brahmins formed around
+them as an immediate escort. The two wives who were to be burned with
+the corpse came next, each borne on a palanquin. During the journey they
+appeared calm and cheerful. The troops kept off the immense crowds who
+were assembled from every direction.
+
+The two queens, loaded with jewels, were attended by their favorite
+women, with whom they occasionally conversed, and by their relations of
+both sexes. To many of these they had made presents before leaving the
+palace. They were also accompanied by thousands of Brahmins, collected
+from different quarters. These were followed by an innumerable multitude
+of persons of both sexes. When they arrived at the ground where they
+were to be burned, the two victims were made to descend from their
+palanquins, for the purpose of performing the preparatory ceremonies.
+They went through the whole without showing any fear until towards the
+close, when their countenances began to change, and their three circuits
+around the pile were not performed without considerable effort to
+maintain calmness.
+
+In the meantime, the body of the king had been placed on the scaffold
+over the platform. The two queens were also laid down beside the corpse,
+one on the right hand, and the other on the left, and they joined hands
+by stretching them over the body. The astrologer having then declared
+that the happy moment was come for firing the pile, the Brahmins
+repeated several prayers in a loud voice, and sprinkled the pile with
+holy water. When these ceremonies were finished, a signal was given, and
+the pillars which supported the pyramid and the scaffold were suddenly
+taken away. Immediately the women were covered with the falling mass of
+timber, which tumbled over them with a crash. At the same instant the
+pile was fired in all its parts. On one side, the nearest relative of
+the king applied his torch, and on the other side, the priest; while the
+Brahmins, in every quarter, were pouring jars of melted butter on the
+flames, creating so intense a heat as must instantly have consumed the
+victims. Then the multitude shouted for joy, and the relations
+approaching the pile also set up a loud cry, calling them by their
+names. They supposed that they heard a voice in answer pronouncing
+_Enna?_ that is, _What_? but the fall of the platform, and the immediate
+bursting out of the flames, must have stifled them at once.
+
+Such was the miserable cud of these poor unhappy queens--unhappy victims
+of the most cruel religion that ever disgraced the earth.
+
+Not unfrequently the sons take a prominent part in destroying their
+mothers. This will appear from the following case. A Brahmin died, and
+was brought to the place of burning. His wife was fastened to the pile,
+and the fire was kindled, but the night was dark and rainy. When the
+fire began to scorch the poor woman, she contrived to disentangle
+herself from the dead body, and creeping from under the pile, hid
+herself among some brushwood. In a little time it was discovered that
+there was but one body on the pile. The relations immediately took the
+alarm, and searched for the poor creature. The son soon dragged her
+forth, and insisted that she should throw herself on the pile again, or
+drown or hang herself. She pleaded for her life at the hands of her own
+son, and declared that she could not embrace so horrid a death; but she
+pleaded in vain. He urged, that he should lose his caste if she were
+spared, and added, that either he or she must die. Unable to persuade
+her to hang or drown herself, the son and the others present tied her
+hands and feet, and threw her on the funeral pile, where she quickly
+perished.
+
+[Illustration: BURNING OF WIDOWS]
+
+I observed that the rite of suttee is riveted in the affections of this
+people. The following communications from two of the native princes who
+lately consented to put a stop to this rite, will show you that this is
+the case. The rajah of Oorcha declares, that "no subject of his state
+shall in future be permitted to become a suttee, though according to the
+Shasters, it is no doubt very meritorious for a widow to die of grief
+for the death of her husband." The rajah of Sumpthem says, "The practice
+of suttee is so very old, and has been countenanced and encouraged by
+the wise men of so many generations that I have never thought myself
+justified in interposing to prevent it; but my anxiety to meet the
+wishes of the governor-general in this and in all things, is so great,
+that I have waived all other considerations, and forbidden suttee."
+
+If the British were to lose their power in India, the suttee would
+immediately be rëestablished. Power has put it down, but power alone
+will never root it out of the affections of the people. Nothing but the
+Gospel can do this. O that Christians would think of this, and hasten,
+yea, with great haste, to send this blessed Gospel to them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+THE REVENGEFUL NATURE OF THE HINDOO RELIGION.
+
+
+My dear Children--The sacred books of the Hindoos encourage revenge. In
+the Vedas, which are the most sacred books, are laid down forms of
+religious service, or acts of worship, which are designed to injure or
+destroy their enemies. When a person wishes to have his enemy
+destroyed, he goes to a Brahmin or priest, and secures his supposed aid.
+The Brahmin, before he proceeds to his work, clothes himself with a
+black garment. He also makes four images of the foe, and clothes these
+with black garments. He then kindles a sacrificial fire, and after the
+performance of various ceremonies, he takes pieces of some animal which
+has been consecrated for the purpose, and throws them into this fire. On
+every occasion when he makes this burnt-offering, he touches the mouth
+of the image of this enemy, uttering one or other of the forms of prayer
+which are written in the sacred books. Of these, the following are a
+few: "O Agni," god of fire, "thou who art the mouth of all gods, do
+thou destroy the wisdom of my enemy." "O Agni, fill with distraction the
+mind of this my enemy." "O Agni, destroy the senses of this my enemy."
+"O Agni, make dumb the mouth of this my enemy." "O Agni, fasten with a
+peg the tongue of this my enemy." "O Agni, reduce to ashes this my
+enemy."
+
+How different, my dear children, is the religion of Jesus from the
+religion of which I have been giving you a description. No precepts
+teach us that we may injure or destroy our enemies. On the contrary,
+they teach us to love them, and do them good. Let me repeat to you some
+of the words which our Saviour spoke on this point. "Ye have heard that
+it hath been said, Thou shalt love thy neighbor, and hate thine enemy;
+but I say unto you, love your enemies, bless them that curse you, do
+good to them that hate you, and pray for them that despitefully use you
+and persecute you, that ye may be the children of your Father which is
+in heaven; for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the good,
+and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust."
+
+One of the young Hindoos in Dr. Duff's school in Calcutta, when reading
+the above and similar passages, was so struck with the difference
+between these precepts and the precepts of his Shasters, that he could
+not but exclaim "O, how beautiful, how divine. Surely this is the
+truth--this is the truth--this is the truth." The consequence was, that
+he never could rest until he had thrown aside his sacred books and his
+idols, and embraced that Saviour whose precepts appeared to him to be so
+beautiful. And was this heathen so struck with the beauty of the
+precepts of the Bible--so struck, that he had no peace until he gave
+himself to his Saviour? And have you ever, my dear children, been struck
+with the precepts of your Saviour--so struck with them, that you could
+never rest until you had given up your hearts to him? If not, how great
+is the contrast between you and that young Hindoo. He gave his heart to
+the Saviour. You withhold yours. He, through grace, will dwell for ever
+with Christ in heaven. You, if you continue in your present awful
+condition, must be banished from his presence, and cast into hell, where
+you shall be tormented day and night for ever, with the devil and his
+angels. Flee, my dear children, flee to the Saviour now, if you have
+never yet done so. Flee to him, and then you also shall dwell for ever
+with him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+THE DECEPTION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--From what I have previously stated, you are aware that
+the Hindoos are a very deceitful people. Let me give you another
+instance of their deception. A late head catechist of one of my
+missionary brethren was, before his conversion, the priest of a temple.
+A man from whom about one thousand rupees' worth of jewels and similar
+things had been stolen, came to this priest, and promised to reward him
+well, if he would detect the thief, and secure to him the restoration of
+his property. The priest promised to comply with his wishes; and in
+order to effect his purpose, he had drums beaten through the village,
+and proclaimed, that at a certain time he would hold a meeting and
+detect the thief. At the appointed time, a large concourse of people
+assembled, the priest appearing in the midst of them with a cocoa-nut
+bound around with saffron-cords. He then told them, that if, after
+putting down the cocoa-nut, it should move of its own accord towards
+him, they might know that he would be able certainly to detect the
+thief; and added, that after it had thus moved, it would pursue the
+offender, and follow him until it would break his head. He then
+performed certain ceremonies calculated to awaken superstitious feelings
+in the minds of the people, and laid the cocoa-nut down at a little
+distance from him. To the great amazement of all present, it began to
+move towards the priest, and continued to move until it reached his
+feet. This being done, he told the people, that they might conclude from
+what they had seen, that the cocoa-nut would follow the thief until it
+would break his head. He consented, however, to give him a little
+grace--to spare his life until the next day; adding his advice, that the
+thief, whoever he might be, had better come to him privately, and tell
+him where the property was. In the dead of the night, a tap was heard at
+the door of the priest; the thief presented himself, and delivered up
+the property. The priest received a present from the owner of the
+property, and rewarded the thief for his promptness. After this man was
+converted, he was asked how he contrived to make the cocoa-nut move
+towards him. "Why, sir," he answered, "if you will carefully divide a
+cocoa-nut, scoop out the kernel from one-half of it, enclose a strong,
+lively rat, put the parts of the cocoa-nut together, and bind the whole
+with saffron-cords, to prevent the crack being seen, and then place it
+on a declivity previously prepared, it is clear, that if you place
+yourself at the foot of this declivity the rat will twirl the cocoa-nut,
+and cause it to descend until it reaches your feet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+SUPERSTITION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--In my Sermon to Children, before alluded to, I
+mentioned a few particulars to prove that the people of India are very
+superstitious. Let me mention a few more. It is said that no act,
+however good it may be, if performed on Sunday, will succeed. Some will
+not eat at all on Sunday, until they have seen a certain bird--the bird
+on which the god Vrishnoo rides. If a man rubs oil on his head on
+Monday, and bathes, he will commit a sin equal to the sin of destroying
+a temple of Siva. If he has his hair out on Tuesday, he will become
+poor. Even to worship the gods on Wednesday, is bad. If a person takes
+medicine on Thursday, his sickness will be increased. Should he lend any
+thing on Friday, he will lose his property. If he should buy a new cloth
+on Saturday, take it home, and keep it there, death may be the
+consequence. Should he die on this day, some other member of the family
+will die on the following week.
+
+If the foundation of a house is laid in June, the destruction of that
+house will follow. Should a family enter a new house in March, some
+member of the family will die. If a marriage is celebrated in September,
+the husband and wife will fight with each other.
+
+Should a thunderbolt fall on a house, or a vulture alight on it, some
+evil will befall the people living in it. If a crow should strike any
+person on the head with its wings, some of his relations will die.
+Should a cat or a snake cross his path, it would be an indication of
+evil. In the latter case, one of his relations will die. If, when
+returning home, a person should meet him bearing a light, a quarrel will
+be the result.
+
+After a person has left his house, should he meet a single Brahmin, or a
+woman who has had her head shaved, or a dumb or a blind man, or a
+washerman or a barber, the object for which he left would not succeed.
+Or, when going out, should he hit his head against the top of the
+door-frame, or should any one ask him where he was going, or should he
+happen to sneeze, he would consider these things as hinderances to his
+going, and reënter the house.
+
+Should a son or a daughter be born on the new moon in April, they will
+become thieves. If a person is born under the planet Saturn, he will be
+slandered, his riches will be dissipated, and his wife, son, and friends
+will be destroyed. He will also be at variance with others, and endure
+many sufferings. Should he be born under the planet Mars, he will be
+full of anxious thoughts, be imprisoned, and oppressed with fear from
+robbers, fire, etc. He also will lose his lands, trees, and good name.
+
+If a person dreams that a monkey has bitten him, he will die in six
+months; or if he dreams that bedbugs, in large numbers, are creeping
+over his body to bite him, he will die in eight days. Should he dream
+that a dog has bitten him, he will die in three years; or should he
+dream that a dead person has appeared to him and spoken to him, he will
+die immediately.
+
+If a man has a little head, he will become rich. If he has a large head,
+he will be poor. If his forehead is wide, he will live a hundred years.
+If he has a small neck, he will be a murderer. If the second toe is
+long, he will be a bad man. If a woman has curly hair, she will not
+prosper. If her nose is long, she will have a good disposition. If her
+ear is wide, she will tell falsehoods. If she has a mole on her nose,
+she will be subject to anger; if on her lips, she will be learned; if on
+the eyebrows she will be cunning.
+
+I could continue to fill a number of pages with things of the same
+description, but it will be unnecessary. I will merely mention one
+instance more. On a certain night in the month of November, the people
+will not look at the moon. The reason assigned for this, is as follows.
+Once, when the elephant-faced god Pulliar was dancing before the gods,
+the moon happening to see him, laughed at him, and told him that he had
+a large stomach, an ear like a winnowing-fan, etc. This so enraged him,
+that he cursed her. This curse was inflicted on the night above
+mentioned.
+
+How does the wretchedness of a people, both in reference to the things
+of this world and of the world to come, show itself where the Bible is
+unknown. If this blessed book was not an inspired book--if it did no
+more than remove the temporal miseries of men, how invaluable would it
+be! Of how much more value then, is it, in reference to the removal of
+their spiritual miseries?
+
+O, why is it that Christians have not long since sent this Bible to
+them? Why is it that they do not send it to them _now_? This is a
+mystery, which we must leave to be unravelled at the judgment-seat of
+the last day. My dear children, you are to stand before that
+judgment-seat. Shall any of these heathen among whom I dwell, rise up at
+that awful season--stretch out their hands towards you, and say, There
+stand the children who might have sent us the Bible, but they did not
+send it; and now we must be lost--_lost for ever!_
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+BURMAH, CHINA, ETC., ETC.
+
+
+My dear children--If you will look on your map of Asia, you will see,
+adjoining Hindostan, at the east, a country called Burmah. This is
+another land of idols. Here the "Baptist General Convention for Foreign
+Missions" have one of the most interesting and flourishing missions in
+the world. The people of Burmah are, if possible, still further removed
+from divine knowledge than the people of India. They are in reality
+atheists, or, in other words, people who do not believe in a creator or
+preserver of the world. But still they worship gods, who, they say, have
+become so by acts of religious merit. He whom they now worship is called
+Gaudama, or Boodh. He is reputed to be the son of the king of Benares,
+and, if their history be correct, was born six hundred years before
+Christ. The Boodhists are all idolaters. They have many temples erected
+to the honor of Boodh and his image. Before this image they present
+flowers, incense, rice, betel-nuts etc. Like all other idolatrous
+nations, the Burmese are very wicked. They do not respect their females
+as they should do. They treat them as an inferior order of beings. They
+often sell them.
+
+A very singular custom prevails in that country. It consists in paying a
+kind of homage to a white elephant. This elephant is sumptuously dressed
+and fed. It is provided with officers, like a second sovereign, and is
+made to receive presents from foreign ambassadors. It is next in rank to
+the king, and _superior_ to the queen.
+
+Burmah is the country in which Drs. Judson and Price, and Messrs. Hough
+and Wade suffered so much, during the war with England several years
+ago. Messrs. Hough and Wade were the first to suffer. As the ships which
+were to make the attack upon Rangoon approached the city, they were
+seized and cast into prison. Their legs were bound together with ropes,
+and eight or ten Burmans, armed with spears and battle-axes, were
+placed over them, as a guard. They were afterwards put in irons. The
+next morning, as the fleet approached still nearer the city, orders were
+sent to the guard, through the grates of their prison, that the instant
+the shipping should fire upon the town, they were to kill them, together
+with the other prisoners confined with them. The guard, on receiving
+these orders, began to sharpen the instruments with which they intended
+to kill them, and moved them about their heads to show with how much
+skill and pleasure they would attend to their orders. Upon the floor
+where they intended to butcher them, a large quantity of sand was spread
+to receive the blood. The gloom and silence of death reigned among the
+prisoners; the vast ocean of eternity seemed but a step before them. At
+length the fleet arrived, and the firing commenced The first ball which
+was thrown into the town passed, with a tremendous noise, directly over
+their heads. This so frightened the guard, that they seemed unable to
+execute their murderous orders. They shrunk away into one corner of the
+prison, where they remained quiet, until a broadside from one of the
+ships made the prison shake and tremble to its very foundation. This so
+alarmed them, that they burst open the doors of the prison and fled. The
+missionaries, with the other prisoners, were then left alone. Their
+danger, however, was not at an end; but as God had protected them thus
+far, he continued to protect them until they were set at liberty, and
+allowed to preach the Gospel again to those perishing heathen. Drs.
+Judson and Price were also imprisoned, and suffered much; but they, too,
+were preserved and delivered. The accounts of their sufferings are so
+long, that I cannot now relate them all to you. You will find them in
+the life of Mrs. Judson.
+
+After the war was over, the missionaries were permitted to go everywhere
+to proclaim the name of the Saviour; and their efforts have been very
+much blessed, especially among the Karens. It will be impossible for me
+to give you an account of their many labors, and of the many tokens
+which they have received of God's favor towards multitudes who have
+become followers of the Redeemer. Suffice it to say, that more than six
+thousand have been received into the Christian church. One of the native
+teachers not long since baptized, on one occasion, three hundred and
+seventy-two persons.
+
+Adjoining Burmah, is China, a country containing more than three hundred
+millions of people, about twenty times as many as there are in the
+United States of America. It is a country filled with idols. Many of the
+people earn their living by making and selling these idols. There are
+many shops where they are sold, or repaired when they become broken or
+defaced.
+
+The females in that country are in a very degraded state. They are the
+slaves of their husbands, and live and die in the greatest ignorance.
+Any attempt to raise themselves to the level of females in Christian
+lands, is considered as very wicked. The little female child is tortured
+from her birth. You have, perhaps, heard that the women of China have
+small feet. These are made small by a very cruel practice--by putting
+bandages of cloth so tightly around them, that they cannot grow. Many
+women have feet not larger than those of an American infant of one year
+old. Mr. Doty, missionary to China, says, that he was acquainted with a
+little girl whose mother had bound up her feet so tightly, that she
+cried two or three hours every day, on account of the great pain which
+she suffered.
+
+With such little feet, you may well suppose that it would be very
+difficult for the women to walk. It is so. They limp and hobble along,
+just as if their feet had been cut off, and they had to walk on stumps.
+
+The Chinese do not count their daughters among their children. Mr. Doty
+says, he one day asked his Chinese teacher how many children he had. He
+replied, that he had several. "How many of these," he then inquired,
+"are daughters?" "We do not count our daughters among our children," he
+answered. "I have three daughters, but we Chinese count our sons only as
+children."
+
+When this missionary was in a Chinese village where he had never been
+before, a man called to see him, bringing with him two pretty little
+girls, neatly dressed, about six and seven years old. He said that they
+were his daughters and that he wished to sell them. Mr. Doty refused to
+buy them, as it was wicked to buy and sell children; but he told him,
+that if he would commit them to him, he would take them home with him,
+and educate them, and that they might return home after they had grown.
+To this proposal he would not consent but said, that if he would buy
+them, they should be his for ever. He could have bought them both for
+about twenty-six dollars.
+
+The Chinese have many schools, but none for their daughters, as they do
+not teach them, to read. When they are about thirteen years old, they
+shut them up in what are called "women's apartments," where they remain
+until the time of their marriage. Then the parents sell them to those
+who wish to have wives for their sons. In this way, they are frequently
+married to persons whom they never before saw.
+
+Many parents in China destroy their little girls soon after they are
+born, or while they are very small. This they frequently do by throwing
+them into rivers, or into the sea, after they have wrapped them up in
+coarse mats. There is a little Chinese girl, named Ellen, now living in
+Newark, New Jersey, whose father was about to kill her when she was
+three weeks old. An English lady heard of his intentions, and sent a
+person with ten dollars to see if she could not be bought. He was
+offered the ten dollars, but refused to take them. She sent ten dollars
+more. He consented to take the twenty dollars. This little girl was
+brought by this English lady to America, when she was about six years
+old. The friends who have her under their care, are educating her with
+the hope that she may go back to China, to tell its females of the
+Saviour.
+
+Did you ever, my dear girls, think why it is that your parents love you,
+and educate you--why it is that they try to make you happy, instead of
+cramping your feet, shutting you up, and, perhaps, at last selling you?
+It is because they have the Bible. Then, how anxious should you be to
+save what money you can, to buy Bibles to send to those poor heathen.
+
+As I am now speaking of the destruction of infants, I would observe,
+that this crime is common in other heathen countries. It was quite
+common, until lately, in the island of Tahiti, and other places in the
+South Pacific Ocean. When the missionaries of the London Missionary
+Society went there, many years ago, they found the females in a very
+degraded situation. Mr. Nott, one of these missionaries, declared that
+three out of four of the children were murdered as soon as they were
+born. He met a woman soon after this dreadful crime had been abolished
+to whom he said, "How many children have you?" "This one in my arms,"
+was her answer. "And how many did you kill?" She replied, "Eight."
+Another woman, who was asked the same question, said that she had
+destroyed _seventeen_. Infanticide, or, in other words, the destruction
+of infants, says the Rev. Mr. Williams, was carried to an almost
+incredible extent in Tahiti, and some other islands. He writes, "During
+the visit of the deputation, G. Bennet, Esq., was our guest for three or
+four days; and on one occasion, while conversing on this subject, he
+expressed a wish to obtain accurate knowledge of the extent to which
+this cruel practice had prevailed. Three women were sitting in the room
+at the time, making European garments, under Mrs. Williams direction;
+and, after replying to Mr. Bennet's inquiries, I said, 'I have no doubt
+but that each of these women has destroyed some of her children.' Mr.
+Bennet exclaimed, 'Impossible; such motherly, respectable women could
+never have been guilty of so great an atrocity.' 'Well,' I added, 'we
+will ask them.' Addressing the first, I said to her, 'Friend, how many
+children have you destroyed?' She was startled at my question, and at
+first charged me with unkindness, in harrowing up her feelings, by
+bringing the destruction of her babes to her remembrance; but upon
+learning the object of my inquiry, she replied, with a faltering voice,
+'I have destroyed _nine_.' The second, with eyes suffused with tears,
+said, 'I have destroyed _seven_;' and the third informed us that she had
+destroyed _five_. Had the missionaries gone there but a few years
+before, with the blessing of God, they would have prevented all this.
+These mothers were all Christians at the time this conversation was
+held."
+
+"On another occasion," says Mr. Williams, "I was called to visit the
+wife of a chief in dying circumstances. She had professed Christianity
+for many years, had learned to read when about sixty, and was a very
+active teacher in our adult school. In the prospect of death, she sent a
+pressing request that I would visit her immediately; and on my entering
+her apartment she exclaimed, 'O, servant of God, come and tell me what I
+must do.' Perceiving that she suffered great mental distress, I
+inquired the cause of it, when she replied, 'I am about to die.' 'Well,'
+I rejoined, 'if it be so, what creates this agony of mind?' 'O, my sins,
+my sins,' she cried; 'I am about to die.' I then inquired what the
+particular sins were which so greatly distressed her, when she
+exclaimed, 'O, my children, my murdered children! I am about to die, and
+shall meet them all at the judgment-seat of Christ.' Upon this I
+inquired how many children she had destroyed, and to my astonishment she
+replied, 'I have destroyed _sixteen_, and now I am about to die.'" After
+this Mr. Williams tried to comfort her, by telling her that she had done
+this when a heathen, and during the times of ignorance, which God winked
+at. But she received no consolation from this thought, and exclaimed
+again, "O, my children, my children." He then directed her to the
+"faithful saying, which is worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ
+came into the world to save sinners." This gave her a little comfort;
+and after visiting her frequently, and directing her to that blood which
+cleanseth from all sin, he succeeded, with the blessing of God, in
+bringing peace to her mind. She died soon after, rejoicing in the hope
+that her sins, though many, would be forgiven her. Well may you exclaim,
+my dear children,
+
+    "Holy Bible, book divine,
+    Precious treasure, thou art mine."
+
+Infanticide still prevails in India, but as I have given a particular
+description of this crime in my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of
+the Heathen, I will here say nothing farther on the subject.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+THE DUTY OF PRAYING AND CONTRIBUTING FOR THE SPREAD OF THE GOSPEL.
+
+
+My dear children--There is another story connected with India, which I
+might have mentioned in my last chapter while writing about the
+destruction of infants. I will relate it now, in order that you may be
+constrained to pray more frequently for the heathen. Some time ago, the
+wife of a native prince had a little daughter. The father ordered it to
+be put to death, immediately after it was born. Had it been a son, an
+heir to the throne, he would have taken great care of it. A second, a
+third, a fourth, a fifth little daughter was born. All these were also
+put to death by the command of the father. When a sixth little daughter
+was born, the mother's heart yearned over it. "I cannot part with it,"
+said she; "I will have it taken away and hid, so that the king may know
+nothing about it." This was done, but the poor mother never dared to
+send for her little girl. She never saw her again, but died sometime
+after.
+
+Many of the little girls in India are very pretty. They have dark eyes,
+and sweet, expressive countenances. This little child grew to be a very
+beautiful girl; and when she was eleven years old, some of her relations
+ventured to bring her to her father. They thought that he would be
+struck with the sight of his sweet child, and that he would love her for
+the sake of her mother who had died. The little girl fell at his feet
+and clasped his knees, and looked up in his face and said, "My father."
+And what do you think that father did? Do you think that he took her up
+in his arms, and kissed her? No. He seized her by the hair of her head,
+drew his sword from his belt, and with a single blow took off her head.
+
+Now, my dear children, do you not think that you ought to pray for the
+poor heathen--to pray that God will send the Gospel to them? I want to
+tell you of a little boy who heard me preach some time ago about the
+heathen. One night he said his prayers, and went to bed. After he got
+into bed, he said to the nurse, "I have forgotten to pray for the
+heathen, and I must get out of bed and pray for them." The nurse then
+told him that it would not be necessary for him to get up, as he could
+pray for them while in bed. "No," said he, "I must get out of bed and
+pray for them." And the dear little boy would not rest until he got out
+of bed and prayed for them. Now I want all of you, my dear children,
+every morning and evening, to kneel down and pray for the heathen, as
+this little boy did. And I want you to do something more. I want you
+always to be punctual in attending _the usual monthly concerts of
+prayer,_ provided there are no juvenile monthly concerts to which you
+can go. I have long wished to see juvenile monthly concerts of prayer
+established. They would be very interesting if I am to judge from the
+account of one which I some time ago received from a friend of mine, the
+Rev. Mr. V----. I will give you some extracts from his letter. He
+writes, "According to promise, I send you an account of the first
+children's monthly concert, so far as I can learn, held on Long Island.
+As notice was not given either in the church or Sabbath-school, the
+attendance was smaller than it otherwise would have been. Still, about
+sixty interesting children attended. After a few remarks concerning the
+object of the meeting by the superintendent of the Sabbath-school they
+sung with melting eyes the hymn that describes the wretched heathen
+mother casting her lovely babe into the jaws of the monster of the
+Granges. Prayer then was made, of about two or three minutes in length.
+Then I gave some of the most affecting accounts of the cruelties and
+ignorance of the heathen, as related by the devoted Williams, that
+martyr missionary. Their silent attention and subdued countenances told
+that their hearts were with the wretched idolaters. After having thus
+spent about ten minutes, the children sung in a sweet manner, a hymn--a
+prayer for those laboring amid the heathen:
+
+    "When worn by toil, their spirits fail,
+    Bid them the glorious future hail;
+    Bid them the crown of life survey,
+    And onward urge their conquering way."
+
+"After which, two resolutions were passed, unanimously, by the children.
+First, that they will each one attend the monthly concert of prayer
+regularly, when able, and bring with them all their companions whom they
+can persuade to come.
+
+"Secondly, that they, with the children of the various schools of W----,
+will constitute ---- a life member of the W---- Bible Society. Some of
+the smaller children had brought their little Bibles to give them to
+----, that he might carry them to the poor children of the heathen. But
+when informed that the heathen could not understand English, they
+determined to raise money, and send it out to purchase Bibles for the
+children. This interesting meeting was closed by prayer, the doxology,
+and benediction."
+
+But not only can you pray for the heathen, you can give _something_ to
+send the Gospel to them. Do you say that you have no money to give? But
+cannot you earn some? Many young persons have done so. One of whom I
+have read, says, "Besides supporting a school in Ceylon, we are going to
+support five Chinese boys. I earn six cents a week for not using tea,
+one for not using sugar, and three for not using coffee."
+
+Another says, "I, with three others, have been making matches to the
+amount of ten dollars, and should have made more, but the people are
+pretty well supplied. I am going to dig my father's garden, and my
+mother is going to give me a quarter of a dollar for digging it, which I
+shall give to the missionaries. I am going to do all I can, and to earn
+all I can, and save all that I have, to support the missionaries."
+
+Another says, "I am going to leave off buying candy." What is that? Can
+little girls and boys do without sugar-candy? I am afraid that many of
+you, my dear children, would find it difficult to go without it. But let
+me quote all that this child wrote. "I am going to leave off buying
+candy and such little notions, unless it is necessary, and save every
+cent that I can get and give it to the missionaries."
+
+Now, my dear children, I do think that if you would save some of those
+cents which you spend in buying candy, fire-crackers, and similar
+things, and buy Bibles and tracts for the poor heathen, you would do
+much more good with them.
+
+I want to tell you about a little boy who belonged to one of my schools
+in Ceylon, who has, as I hope, gone to heaven through the means of a
+tract which cost only two or three cents, and which was the cause of his
+coming under my care. After he had attended preaching for some time, he
+begged me to admit him to the church. As he was quite young, not eleven
+years old, I was afraid to receive him. This feeling, perhaps, was
+wrong. He never joined the church on earth. He has, however, I hope,
+gone to join the church in heaven. When he was about eleven years of
+age, he was attacked with the cholera and died. In this country, when
+children are very ill, the father or mother will catch up a cocoa-nut or
+a few plantains, and run off to the temple, and say, "Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy or little girl, I will give you this
+cocoa-nut, or these plantains." The mother of this boy saw that he was
+very ill, and she told him that she wished to go to make offerings to
+one of her idols, in order that he might get well. But he requested her
+not to do so. "I do not worship idols," said he; "I worship Christ, my
+Saviour. If he is pleased to spare me a little longer in the world, it
+will be well; if not, I shall go to him." The last words he uttered
+were, "I am going to Christ the Lord."
+
+Now when you think about this little boy, I want you to ask yourselves,
+whether it is not better to give two or three cents to try and save the
+soul of some poor little heathen boy or girl, than to spend them in
+buying candy, and other useless things.
+
+But I must tell you about a little girl whom I saw some time ago, who
+refused to buy candy while there are so many heathen without the Bible.
+Her father is a sea-captain. Being absent from home, he sent her five
+dollars to buy candy, or any thing else which she wished. As this little
+girl had heard about the heathen, she determined to throw all her money
+into the missionary-box, instead of spending it for her own pleasure.
+The mother, on learning her intentions, asked her if she would not like
+to spend a part of it for candy, and similar things. She replied, that
+she would not, and in due time she put her five dollars into the
+missionary-box. Not long after this, she was attacked with a severe
+toothache. The mother proposed that the defective tooth should be
+extracted. The little creature, for she was only about eight years old,
+dreaded the operation, and seemed at first to be backward about having
+it performed. To encourage her to submit to it, her mother offered her
+twenty-five cents. This little girl did not then begin to reason, Now,
+if I can only get those twenty-five cents, I can buy a doll, or I can
+buy some sugar-candy; but she reasoned thus, Now, if I can get those
+twenty-five cents, I can go and put them into the missionary-box. So she
+said to her mother, I will go and have the tooth taken out. The tooth,
+however, ceased to ache, but still she wished to have it extracted. Her
+mother then interfered, and told her that, as it had ceased to ache, it
+might be well for her not to have it drawn until it ached again. The
+little girl, however, persisted, saying, that if it were not taken out,
+she could not get the twenty-five cents to devote to the missionary
+cause. She therefore went to the dentist's, submitted to the operation,
+received her twenty-five cents, and went and threw them into the Lord's
+treasury. Was not that a noble little girl? Doubtless you will all say
+she was.
+
+I must tell you about a noble little boy also. Some time ago, I was
+preaching to the children of Canandaigua, in the western part of New
+York. After I had preached there, I went on to Rochester. Returning from
+that place, I met with a lady in the cars, who told me as follows:
+"After you had preached in Canandaigua," said she, "a young lady there,
+who had lost her mother, and who had six or seven or eight of her
+brothers and sisters under her care, formed them into a missionary
+society." Oh, I wish that all the dear children in America were formed
+into missionary societies. After she had done this, she asked her little
+brother how he was going to get money to put into the missionary-box.
+"By catching mice," said he. His sister gave him two or three cents for
+every mouse he caught. Thus it appears, that this dear little boy was
+going to throw all his earnings into the Lord's treasury.
+
+But let me tell you a little more about the children to whom I before
+alluded. Another says, "In some of the day-schools of this city, the
+girls have formed sewing societies, and make pin-cushions, needle-books,
+emery-bags, and the like, and send the money that is raised from the
+sale of them to the missionaries, to be used for the heathen. There are
+seven Sabbath-schools in this town, and in each of them there is a
+missionary association; so that in all about five hundred dollars are
+sent from the Sabbath-schools every year."
+
+Now, my dear girls, I want you to think of what has now been said about
+the formation of sewing societies; and I want you to ask your mothers
+whether they will not allow you to form such societies, to meet once a
+week, or once in two weeks, or once a month to sew, to get some money to
+send the Gospel to the heathen. Many societies of this kind have been
+formed. After I had preached to the children in one of the churches in
+Third-street, New York, the little girls who attend that church formed
+such a society. The account which I received of it is as follows. "You
+may remember, that in your address to our Sabbath-school, you related
+instances of little girls knitting, sewing, etc., to earn something for
+the missionary-box The examples which you related were not lost to the
+girls of the Sabbath-school. Immediately they began to talk about
+forming themselves into a sewing society, and making small articles, and
+giving the proceeds to the missionary society. They did not stop here,
+but went right to work, and soon formed their society, which they styled
+the Juvenile Sewing Society. They are in a very prosperous and
+flourishing condition at present. I know not the amount of funds they
+possess--they pay a cent a week into their treasury--but they have a
+large assortment of articles already made. I understand, also, they meet
+once a week to sew."
+
+After I had preached at a place called Little Falls, New York, the girls
+formed a sewing society there. The following account of this society I
+received from one of its little members. "When you were here last fall,
+and told us how much good little girls had done in having sewing
+societies, we thought we would see if _we_ could not do some good in the
+world, as well as they; and, since October, we have met weekly, and by
+holding a fair, we have succeeded in raising sixty-two dollars. We
+hope it will be the means of saving some poor heathen children."
+
+Now, as I said before, I want you, my dear girls, to ask your mothers if
+you may not form such societies also. Will you think of it? I hope you
+will.
+
+Another of the children to whom I have twice referred, says, "I can try
+and save their souls, if I am not there. I can work for them, and send
+some money to you to buy them Bibles, and I can pray for them; and if I
+should save some souls, O how would they thank me. But if I did not send
+my money, nor care any thing about them, and I should not go to heaven,
+and they should not, how would they rise up in judgment against me, and
+say, If we had had the privileges that you had, we should not be here.
+O, how thankful we ought to be, that we were not born in heathen lands.
+O, if the poor heathen could only have such privileges as we have, how
+thankful would they be; and if we were born in heathen lands, I have no
+doubt that they would come and tell us about a Saviour."
+
+I have received many letters from children, breathing the same spirit
+which is manifested in the notes I have copied.
+
+One writes, "Last winter I brought in the wood for mother, and she gave
+me fifty cents. I now am very glad that I have not spent it, as I can
+give it to you to buy tracts for the little heathen children of India."
+
+A second writes, "The enclosed fifty cents my grandmother gave me when I
+was a very little boy, for sitting still one hour. Will you please to
+use it to furnish the Bible and missionary to the heathen."
+
+A third writes, "I have always spent my money for candy and other
+trifles, but since I have heard about the darkness and misery of the
+heathen, I intend to save it all, and put it into the missionary-box."
+
+A fourth writes, "The enclosed I earned by knitting. I intended to save
+it, till I had sufficient to carry me a short journey to see some of my
+friends; but when I heard you tell about the little heathen girls, I
+thought I would give it to you, for the poor heathen children."
+
+A fifth writes, "I have enclosed twelve and a half cents, which my
+father gave me to go and see General Tom Thumb. When I heard you
+lecture last evening, I came home and concluded to give it to you, and
+let you buy Bibles for the poor heathen."
+
+A sixth writes, "I remember, before my mother died, she used to tell me
+a great deal about the children of India, and now she is in heaven. I
+think she would like to have me give my heart to the Saviour, and go and
+teach those poor children. I give you some money that was given to me to
+see an exhibition, which I saved to give for such things, rather than
+go."
+
+A seventh writes, "You told us that two cents were the means of
+converting a young man. I would give two cents every week, if it would
+convert souls to Christ."
+
+An eighth writes, "My mother told me, some time ago, that every day I
+recited my lessons without missing a word, she would give me a penny;
+and not being desirous to spend it, I do wish you would take it--fifty
+cents--to the heathen. It may buy some tracts at the bazaar or market."
+
+A ninth writes, "We feel sorry for those poor heathen children. We will
+try to earn some money to buy Bibles for the heathen. Father has
+promised us some land to work next summer, and we think we can raise
+something and sell it to get the money."
+
+A tenth writes, "Since you were here last spring, I have saved what I
+could--one dollar--for the heathen children, and should be glad if I
+could do more."
+
+An eleventh writes, "The money which you will find enclosed, I earned by
+working for my mother on Saturday, which I intended to keep to buy a
+microscope; but when I heard you preach on Sabbath, I concluded to give
+it to buy Bibles for the poor heathen children."
+
+A twelfth writes, "The enclosed, five dollars, was a birthday present
+from my father, but I want to give it to Dr. Scudder, for the poor
+little boys in Ceylon."
+
+A thirteenth writes, "Please accept my mite, by the hand of my brother.
+I have been keeping it for the purpose of buying a geography; but when I
+heard you preach yesterday, I thought I had better send it to you, for
+the poor heathen."
+
+A fourteenth writes, "I would like much to become a missionary, as I am
+named after one; I hope I shall be one. I have been saving a dollar to
+buy myself some books, but concluded to give it to buy some books for
+the heathen."
+
+The last two children, whose letters you have been reading, gave to the
+missionary cause the money which they had been earning to buy books.
+When you have been earning money for the express purpose of giving it to
+the missionary cause, then you should devote it all to that cause; but I
+would advise you not to do as did the two children last mentioned. Had
+my opinion been asked, relative to the disposal of their money, I would
+have recommended them to give _one-tenth,_ or perhaps a little more, of
+the sums they had been earning, to their Saviour, and to keep the rest
+to buy their books. The giving of not less than one-tenth of all you
+earn, for charitable purposes, is the principle which I wish to have
+impressed fully on your minds, and I hope you will grow up under the
+influence of this principle, and _never, never_ depart from it. But
+while I thus speak, you must not suppose that I wish you to confine
+yourselves to the giving of one-tenth, when you can give more; I hope
+you will not give merely this, but one-half, or more, if you can afford
+it. Indeed, if you do not go as missionaries to the heathen, I want you
+to make it your great object _to make money for Christ, and to spend it
+for Christ_. O, if the generation which is grown, were as anxious to
+make money for Christ, and to spend it for Christ, as they are to make
+it for themselves, and to spend it for themselves, or to hoard it up--it
+may be for the everlasting destruction of the souls of their
+heirs--there would be no complaints that money could not be had to send
+the Gospel to the destitute, both at home and abroad.
+
+In my twelfth chapter, I spoke of the liberal donations which the
+heathen of India make for the support of their religion. In the city of
+Calcutta alone, it is supposed that two millions of dollars are spent
+every year on the festival of a single goddess--a festival which lasts
+only a few days. A single native has been known to give, as I before
+said, more than one hundred thousand dollars at one time to this
+festival, and afterwards thirty thousand dollars yearly. How vast, then,
+must be the sums which are spent upon all the different festivals of
+their gods. Would that we could see such liberality among Christians.
+Would that we could see the generality of them willing to give even
+one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Alas, what would the
+heathen say, if they were to learn how much greater are the sums of
+money which they give to their idols, than Christians give to honor
+their Saviour? Would they not exclaim, It is because Christianity is
+false, and heathenism is true, that Christians give so little for
+Christ, while we give so much for our gods? My dear children, I hope
+that you will never allow the heathen to say that the Christian religion
+is false, because you do not give your money for the spread of the
+Gospel. Will you not resolve now, that you will, so long as God prospers
+you in worldly goods, give _at least_ one-tenth of all you earn to the
+Lord? Do, my dear children, do make the resolution now.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+PERSONAL LABORS AMONG THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+My dear children--You have, perhaps, often seen Campbell's missionary
+map of the world. If not, I want you very carefully to look at it. I
+want you to look at the red spots on it, and think how many millions of
+people embrace the religion both of the Greek and Roman Catholic
+churches--a religion which is nothing more nor less than paganism, with
+a few Christian doctrines added to it. After this, I want you to look at
+the green spots, and think of the hundred and twenty millions of
+Mohammedans, who spurn the name of Jesus as a Saviour, and who have set
+up Mahomet as their prophet. I want you also to look at all the dark
+spots, where, with comparatively a few exceptions, the people are in
+pagan darkness, without any knowledge of God and the only Saviour of
+sinners Jesus Christ. And in view of all this darkness--in view of the
+need of more than half a million of ministers of the Gospel to preach
+the news of salvation to them, I want you, my dear boys, to ask
+yourselves whether it may not be your duty, after you grow up, to
+become ministers, and go and preach the Gospel to them. You know that
+you are bound to do all the good to others which you can; and even if
+you do not love the Saviour, you are not released from your obligations
+to do good. I would by no means have you become ministers without giving
+your hearts to Christ; but this you are as much bound to do, as you are
+bound to do all the good you can to others. If you are not Christians, I
+want you, through grace, to become such, and I want many of you to
+become ministers and missionaries. Two of my sons are now missionaries
+in India, and four others, I hope, are preparing to come. And why should
+not you also come here, or go to other heathen lands? If you can be
+excused from coming or going, why may not all who are now little boys
+also be excused? In such a case, there will be no missionaries at all.
+And you know that this would be very wrong. But I do not merely want
+many of you, my dear boys, to become missionaries, I want many of you,
+my dear girls, to become missionaries also. Many little girls and boys
+have expressed a desire to become missionaries. Several little boys who
+wrote to Mr. Hutchings, one of my missionary brethren, and several
+little boys and girls who have written to me, have said that they would
+like to be missionaries.
+
+One writes, "I should like to go and be a missionary, and instruct the
+poor heathen children to love God."
+
+A second says, "I have been selling matches that I made. I got five
+dollars--just as many dollars as I am years old. I think I shall become
+a missionary, and come and help you. I hope I shall see you again when I
+come to Ceylon. Tell the heathen children they must love God, and be
+good children. They must not give the children to the crocodiles, nor
+throw them into the water; and they must not worship wooden and brass
+gods. They must worship the true God, and keep his commandments."
+
+A third says, "I like to send money to help the poor heathen to learn to
+read the Bible, and other good books. I think it will be pleasant to
+sail across the ocean, and teach them to turn from their idols. I would
+teach them not to lay themselves down before the car of Juggernaut, and
+be crushed to death; and I would teach them not to burn themselves to
+death on the funeral pile."
+
+A fourth says, "I mean to save something to send to you, to help support
+one school. Should my life be spared, and the way be opened at some
+future day, I think I should be willing to leave my native home, to go to
+some distant land to tell the heathen of a Saviour, whom I hope I have
+found."
+
+A fifth says, "If you are ever in want of money, just please to send on
+to me, and I will endeavor to raise all that you want. If I live to be a
+man, I hope be a missionary to Ceylon or China."
+
+One little boy wrote to me as follows: "I have for a long time been
+saving three shillings, for the purpose of buying a little racoon, which
+I intended to do on Monday. On Sunday I heard you preach, and thought I
+would give it to you to save some poor heathen soul; and I hope you will
+pray for me, that I may become a minister, and go to India, and preach
+to the heathen."
+
+Another writes, "This is to certify that I, Charles D.H. Frederick,
+pledge myself, if God spares my life, when I get to be a man, and he
+pardons me through Christ Jesus, I will go and preach to the heathen."
+
+A little girl wrote me as follows: "According to my present feelings, I
+should like to engage in so glorious a cause," as the missionary cause,
+"and I hope, when I arrive at an age to be of use to God, and the poor
+heathen, to embrace so glorious a cause."
+
+Another little girl writes, "I felt very bad when I heard you tell about
+the poor heathen who worship the idols. I could not keep from weeping,
+when you told us about the man who came so far to get a teacher to come
+and tell the Gospel to his friends, and was disappointed. I felt very
+bad Sunday evening; and on Monday evening I felt that the Lord had given
+me a new heart. I felt happy, and sang some beautiful verses that I
+learned in one of mother's little books. I have read the Day-springs,
+and thought a great deal about the heathen for two years.
+
+"I used to think a great deal about having nice clothes, before I
+thought so much about the heathen. My mother told me some time ago, that
+she thought she would get me a white dress when I was ten years old. I
+am now ten years old, and this evening mother gave me two dollars to
+get the dress, or dispose of it in any way I thought best; and I wish
+you would take it to have the poor heathen taught about the Saviour. If
+I live, and it is the Lord's will, I hope I shall come and help you
+teach the poor heathen about the Saviour."
+
+There is a little boy in the city of New York, who formerly used to tell
+his mother, that he meant to be a cab-driver, and all she could say to
+him was of no avail in making him think differently. This little boy
+came with his mother to hear me preach about the heathen.
+
+After he had left the church, as he was going home, he burst into tears,
+and exclaimed, "Mother, I mean to be a missionary to the heathen;" and
+so far as I know, he has never talked about being any thing else since.
+And I hope that many of you will never talk about being any thing else
+than missionaries to the heathen.
+
+I am acquainted with a little girl in Ohio, who has resolved to become a
+missionary. She is a niece of Mr. Campbell, late missionary to Africa.
+She was not quite four years old when I saw her. When she was eighteen
+months of age, she saw the picture of a heathen mother throwing her
+child into the mouth of a crocodile She was deeply impressed with the
+sight. When she was two and a half years old, she resolved to be a
+missionary, and follow her uncle to Africa. From this resolution she has
+never drawn hack. When I was at her father's house, she was asked if she
+would not go to India. She replied, that she would not go to India, but
+to Africa. She was asked why she wished to go to Africa. "To teach the
+heathen," was her answer. "Why should you teach the heathen?" "Because
+they worship idols." Her mother told me, that ever since she began to
+get money, she has contributed to the missionary cause; and this money
+has generally, if not always, been earned by some act of self-denial on
+her part. I hope that many of you will feel just as this little girl
+felt, and do just as she did.
+
+When I was in America, I used continually, when preaching, to ask the
+dear children whether they would not become missionaries. I used also to
+beg them to write down what I had asked them. Many complied with my
+request. While I was at the Avon Springs, one of the daughters of a
+physician there, not only wrote it down, but gave me what she had
+written. The following is a copy of what she wrote,
+
+     _August 18, 1844._
+
+    _Dr. Scudder requested me to come to India to help him when I am
+    grown._
+
+    S. P. S.
+
+    _Avon Springs_
+
+Could I raise my voice loud enough to reach America, I would beg of
+_you_ to write down the following sentence: Dr. Scudder asks me, to-day,
+whether I will not hereafter become a missionary to the heathen. Perhaps
+you will write it down _immediately_.
+
+Now, my dear boys, if you will come out to India, or go to Burmah or
+China, to tell the heathen of the Saviour, you may, with the blessing of
+God, do as much good as Swartz and Carey, and others have done. And if
+you, my dear girls, will do the same, you also may do much good. This
+will appear from what I am going to tell you about a little girl in
+Ceylon. This little girl belonged to the boarding-school at Oodooville.
+She early gave her heart to the Saviour, and joined the church when she
+was thirteen years old. I should like to know if there are any of you
+who have not followed her example. If so, this is not right. My dear
+children, it is not right. Shall this little girl, in a heathen land, a
+land filled with idols, give her heart to Christ; and you, in a
+Christian land, a land of Sabbaths, and Sabbath-schools, and Bibles, not
+give your hearts to him? This is not right. You know that it is not
+right.
+
+But let me go on with my account of the little girl. After she had
+joined the church, she wanted to go and see her mother, who was a
+heathen, for the purpose of conversing with her about her soul's
+concerns. Now, in this country, when children who have been absent from
+their parents for any length of time go home, the mother spreads a mat
+down on the floor, and tells them to sit down upon it, adding that she
+will go and cook rice for them. They have no seats to sit on, as you
+have in America. Well, this little girl went home. When her mother saw
+her, she was very glad; and after she had spread a mat for her, and told
+her to sit down, she said that she would go and cook rice for her. The
+little girl told her that she was not hungry, and did not wish to eat,
+but wanted to talk with her. "You cannot talk with me," said her mother,
+"until I have cooked rice for you." "Mother," said the little girl, "you
+worship idols, and I am afraid that you will lose your soul, and I want
+to talk with you about Jesus Christ." The mother became quite angry with
+her, and rebuked her. But still the little girl continued to talk with
+her about her soul. The mother then became so angry, that she told her
+to be silent, or she would punish her. The little girl replied, "Mother,
+though you do whip me, I must talk to you about Jesus Christ," and she
+burst into tears. The mother's heart was broken. She sat down on the
+mat, and her little daughter talked with her, and prayed with her. After
+this the little girl was so troubled, fearing that her mother's soul
+might be lost, that she was heard praying for her during all parts of
+the night. And God heard her prayers. Her mother forsook her idols, and
+became a Christian, and her conversion was followed by the conversion of
+one or two others. Now, my dear little girls, if you will give your
+hearts to the Saviour, and in due time come here, or go to other heathen
+lands, and tell the people of a Saviour, you may, with the help of the
+Holy Spirit, be as useful as this little girl was.
+
+Female missionaries have done much good among the heathen. I mentioned
+an instance on page 88, to prove this. Let me mention another instance
+more.
+
+In the year 1838, an English lady, Miss Aldersey, went to the East, at
+her own expense to promote female education among the Chinese. At that
+time, she could not go to China, as that country was not open to
+missionaries She therefore went to Java, where there was a colony of
+Chinese. Here she hired a house, and collected about twenty-five girls,
+whom she clothed, and boarded, and taught. The Lord blessed her labors,
+and several of these girls were hopefully converted. When their parents
+saw that they would no longer worship idols, they became much opposed to
+the school, and some of them took their daughters from it. In the year
+1842, God opened the door for the entrance of the Gospel into China.
+This missionary then broke up her school in Java, went to that country,
+and resided in the city of Ningpo. Of the girls who had become
+Christians while under her care, two were much persecuted by their
+parents. They were whipped and beaten, with the hope that they would
+again return to their idols; but all the efforts which were made to
+induce them to forsake the Saviour were in vain. They declared that they
+would sooner die than forsake him. When their parents saw that stripes
+and blows were of no avail, they determined to marry them to men who
+were much devoted to their idols. This stratagem, they thought, might
+succeed in destroying all their interest in their new religion. Here,
+however, they were again foiled. The girls became alarmed, and fled from
+their parents. An English gentleman, but who was not a professor of
+religion, felt deeply interested for them, and assisted them to get on
+board a ship going to Batavia. Here they were pursued but escaped from
+the pursuers by going on board of a ship which sailed for Singapore.
+From Singapore they sailed for China, where they were permitted to join
+the old friend who had been the means of their conversion. This lady
+collected a school at Ningpo of more than thirty girls. Thus you see how
+much good female missionaries have done by going to heathen lands. And
+are none of you willing to follow their example? Are none of you willing
+to say, Here am I, Lord, send me?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+SUCCESS OF THE GOSPEL IN INDIA AND CEYLON.
+
+
+My dear Children--I have told you that India is a very dark land, but
+there are a few bright spots in it. Through the blessing of God upon the
+prayers of his people in Christian lands, and upon the prayers and
+labors of his missionary servants, many of the heathen of India and
+Ceylon have forsaken their idols, and are now enlisted under the banner
+of Jehovah Jesus. In the Travancore and Tinnivelly districts to say
+nothing of the success of the Gospel in other places, thousands and tens
+of thousands of the people have embraced Christianity. In hundreds of
+villages where but a few years ago the name of Jesus had never been
+heard, it is now known and adored.
+
+You have often heard of Ceylon. If you will look at the map of
+Hindostan, you will find it close to that country. Here Christianity has
+begun to prevail. This island is two hundred miles long, and in some
+places quite wide. A large part of it is covered with what is called
+jungle. Jungle and wilderness mean the same thing. In this jungle there
+are many wild beasts, such as elephants, bears, wild hogs, and
+buffaloes. In it also, there are men, women, and children, running wild,
+just like the wild beasts. This people are called Verders, or wild
+people. They wear scarcely any clothing. They have no houses. When it
+rains, they creep into holes, or go under overhanging rocks. Their beds
+consist of a few leaves. Sunk almost to the level of the brute, they
+live and die like their shaggy companions of the forest. Even upon these
+the Gospel has tried its power. More than fifty families have settled
+down, forming two pleasant, and now Christian villages. They have
+schoolmasters and Christian teachers.
+
+I must give you a description of two revivals of religion which
+occurred while I was in the island of Ceylon, in the year 1833. Before
+those revivals took place, there was no particular manifestation of much
+seriousness at any of our stations. It was in the month of October of
+that year, that we began to feel that we must labor more, and pray more
+for the conversion of perishing souls. A protracted meeting was spoken
+of, and it was determined that one should be held at our seminary in
+Batticotta--a seminary which was established for the purpose of raising
+up a native ministry. On the morning of the day in which the meeting was
+commenced, Mr. Spaulding and myself went to that station to assist Mr.
+Poor, the principal of the seminary, in laboring with the students. In
+these labors we spent five days. It was good to be there. No sooner had
+we begun our exercises, than a blessing from on high was experienced.
+The windows of heaven were opened, and the Holy Ghost descended. This
+was evident from the spirit of prayer which was poured out upon the
+pious students of the seminary. They were heard "a great while before
+day" pleading, in their social circles, that God would have mercy upon
+their impenitent companions, and bring them into the kingdom of his
+grace. We trust, also, that a spirit of prayer was given to those of us
+who took a prominent part in the meeting. At the termination of our
+exercises, with the exception of a few lads belonging to a Tamul class,
+who had lately been admitted to the seminary, there was not, so far as I
+know, an individual connected with it, who was not humbled at the foot
+of the cross, either to lie there until healed of his wounds, or to
+show, if he perished, that he must perish under circumstances of a very
+aggravated nature.
+
+After we had finished our meeting at Batticotta we went to the female
+seminary at Oodooville, to hold similar meetings. Before we reached that
+station, the church-members there, after having heard what God was doing
+at Batticotta, became very much aroused to pray for the influences of
+the Holy Spirit to descend upon the impenitent in their seminary also.
+Soon after we reached the station, we held a meeting with the girls.
+Some of them were then deeply concerned for the salvation of their
+souls; but it was not until Wednesday afternoon, that we knew how
+powerfully the Spirit of God had been at work. The meeting which we held
+with the seminarists at that time was one of the most solemn meetings
+which I ever attended. One of them, a girl of high caste, and of a very
+good family, said to her companions in that meeting, "My sisters, I have
+been a proud one among you. I hope that if you ever see me proud again,
+you will tell me of it. I used to tell the missionaries, that I had
+given myself to the Saviour, but I had not done it." Another of the
+girls burst into tears, and cried out aloud. As she could not restrain
+her feelings, and did not wish to disturb the assembly, she arose and
+left it. She retired to one of the prayer-rooms adjoining the seminary,
+there to weep alone. She, however, was not left alone. Mr. Poor, one of
+my missionary associates, followed her, and endeavored to administer the
+consolations of the Gospel to her; but she refused to be comforted. All
+her distress seemed to arise from a single source. "I told you a
+falsehood," said she, "last Monday, in saying that I had dedicated
+myself to the Saviour, when I had not." Perhaps she thought at that
+time, that she had thus dedicated herself to the Saviour, but
+afterwards found that she had deceived herself. In this wretched state
+of mind, she continued until half-past ten o'clock that night, when she
+came into Mr. Spaulding's house, where I then was, and wished to know
+what she must do to be saved. She was told, as she had often been told
+before, that she must dedicate herself entirely to her Saviour. She went
+away, and returned the same night at about half-past eleven o'clock,
+saying, that she had found HIM.
+
+    "Friends, is not my case amazing?
+     What a Saviour I have found."
+
+My dear young friends, are there any of you who have never given your
+hearts to Christ? If so, let me entreat you to follow the example of
+that dear little girl of whom I have now been speaking. She found it to
+be necessary to give her heart to the Saviour, and I hope that she did
+give it to him. O that you too might give up your hearts to him. Alas,
+if you do not, you must soon go down to eternal burnings where you will
+be constrained to cry out, Lost, lost, lost for ever! Be careful, my
+dear children, O be careful that this young girl does not rise up
+against you in the last day, and condemn you. She must do so--she will
+do so, if you do not, like her, choose Christ as your portion. But I am
+digressing, and must go back to the point I left.
+
+The next day, one of our missionary sisters, who had lately reached
+Ceylon from America, came to Oodooville, to witness the nature of the
+work which she heard was in progress at that place. As she was entering
+Mr. Spaulding's house, she was met by one of the most consistent
+church-members of the seminary, who declared that she had lost her hope
+of being a Christian. Perhaps this church-member was disposed to write
+bitter things against herself because she did not feel all that warmth
+in religion which marked the conduct of those who, at that time, were
+indulging the hope that they had passed from death to life. After the
+sister to whom I alluded had been in the house a little while, she
+requested Mrs. Spaulding to allow her to have an interview with such of
+the girls as were entertaining a hope of their interest in the Saviour.
+These were twenty-two in number. This interview was granted. As she
+knew nothing about the Tamul language, I acted as her interpreter.
+Through me, she requested the girls to give a statement of their
+feelings. One of them arose, and said, "I feel as happy as an angel. I
+feel joys that I can express to no one but my Saviour; and I am just as
+certain that my sins are forgiven, as if I had sent up a karduthaase,"
+that is, a letter to heaven, "and received an answer to it." Another of
+the girls said, that the missionaries had often talked with her about
+her dedicating herself to the Saviour, but that she did not then know
+what it meant. "I now know," added she, "what it means, for God has
+taught it to me." Another of the girls said, "Though they put me in the
+fire, I will never forsake the Saviour."
+
+Now, my dear children, I must bid you farewell Probably I shall never
+see you, unless you come to this heathen land, until I meet you at the
+judgment-seat of Christ. If you do not become missionaries, most of you
+will probably die, and be buried where you now are. Probably I shall die
+in this heathen land. But we shall not always sleep in our graves. After
+a little season, the archangel's trumpet will sound, and you in
+America, and I in India, shall hear his voice proclaiming, "Awake, ye
+dead, and come to judgment." And we shall all at once rise from our
+graves, and stand before our Judge. And where shall I then see you?
+Shall I see any of you on the left hand of Christ, and hear him say,
+"Depart, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and
+his angels?" O, if I should hear that dreadful sentence pronounced
+against you, how would my heart die within me. How could I bear to hear
+it. Oh, I could not--I could not bear to hear it. My dear children, if
+you are yet out of Christ, I entreat you, _at this very moment_, to lay
+down this book, and throw yourselves at the feet of your Saviour. Tell
+him, that you are lost sinners, deserving to be cast into everlasting
+burnings. Tell him, that though you have been wicked children, you will
+leave off your wickedness, and be his for ever. Plead with him, with as
+much earnestness as a _drowning_ man would plead with you to save him,
+to give you the influences of his Holy Spirit, to create within you a
+clean heart, and renew within you a right spirit, without which you are
+eternally undone; and continue to plead, until he pardons you, and
+receives you as his children. By all the sufferings of the Son of God,
+by all the joys of heaven, by all the torments of hell, by the
+solemnities of your dying bed, by the value of your immortal souls
+_which, if once lost, must be lost for ever_, I beseech you thus
+_immediately_ to throw yourselves at his feet, and plead with him to
+make you his. Neglect this duty--neglect giving yourselves to Christ,
+even for one minute, and it may be, that you will be lost, yea, LOST FOR
+EVER.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little
+Readers, About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13539-8.txt or 13539-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/5/3/13539/
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/13539-8.zip b/old/13539-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0836434
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-8.zip
diff --git a/old/13539-h.zip b/old/13539-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b43e4d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h.zip
diff --git a/old/13539-h/13539-h.htm b/old/13539-h/13539-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a15723a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/13539-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,4182 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+    "text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers, About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    P {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         }
+    HR { width: 33%;
+	margin-top: 1em;
+	margin-bottom: 1em;
+       }
+    BODY{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+    .linenum  {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */
+    .note     {margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} /* footnote */
+    .blkquot  {margin-left: 4em; margin-right: 4em;} /* block indent */
+    .pagenum  {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+    .sidenote {width: 20%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; padding-left: 1em; font-size: smaller; float: right; clear: right;}
+
+    .poem             {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;}
+    .poem br          {display: none;}
+    .poem .stanza     {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+    .poem span        {display: block; margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+    .poem span.i2     {display: block; margin-left: 2em;}
+    .poem span.i4     {display: block; margin-left: 4em;}
+    .poem span.i1     {display: block; margin-left: 1em;}
+    .poem .caesura    {vertical-align: -200%;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+   </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers,
+About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers, About the Heathen.
+
+Author: Dr. John Scudder
+
+Release Date: September 27, 2004 [EBook #13539]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+<h1>DR. SCUDDER'S</h1>
+
+<h1>TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,</h1>
+
+<h1>ABOUT THE HEATHEN.</h1>
+
+<h3>by</h3>
+
+<h2>Dr. John Scudder</h2>
+
+<p style='text-align: center;'>1849
+</p>
+
+<p>The following work, so far as the Hindoos are concerned, is principally
+a compilation from the writings of Duff, Dubois, and others.</p>
+
+<p>Should the eyes of any Christian father or mother rest upon it, I would
+ask them if they have not a son or a daughter to dedicate to the
+<i>missionary</i> work. The duty of devoting themselves to this work of
+Christ, or at least, of consecrating to it their money, their efforts,
+and their prayers, is the great duty to be perseveringly and prayerfully
+impressed on the minds of our children. A generation thus trained would,
+with aid from on high, soon effect the moral revolution of the world.
+Blessed will be that father, blessed will be that mother, who shall take
+any part in such a training. And I would add, too, blessed will be that
+pastor, and blessed will be that Sabbath-school teacher, who shall come
+up to their help.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CONTENTS'></a><h2>CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+
+<div style="margin-left: 25%; margin-right: 25%;">
+<a href='#CHAPTER_I'><b>CHAPTER I.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_I'>General Remarks</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_II'><b>CHAPTER II.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_II'>The Color and Ornaments of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_III'><b>CHAPTER III.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_III'>Dress, Houses, Eating, and Salutation of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_IV'><b>CHAPTER IV.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_IV'>Marriage among the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_V'><b>CHAPTER V.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_V'>Death and Funerals among the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_VI'><b>CHAPTER VI.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_VI'>The Gods of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_VII'><b>CHAPTER VII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_VII'>The Three Hundred and Thirty Millions of the Gods of the Hindoos&mdash;The
+Creation of the Universe&mdash;The Transmigration of Souls&mdash;The different
+Hells</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_VIII'><b>CHAPTER VIII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_VIII'>Hindoo Castes</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_IX'><b>CHAPTER IX.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_IX'>Hindoo Temples&mdash;Cars&mdash;Procession of Idols</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_X'><b>CHAPTER X.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_X'>Festivals of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XI'><b>CHAPTER XI.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XI'>The worship of the Serpent</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XII'><b>CHAPTER XII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XII'>The River Ganges</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XIII'><b>CHAPTER XIII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XIII'>The Goddess Durga</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XIV'><b>CHAPTER XIV.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XIV'>The Goddess Karle</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XV'><b>CHAPTER XV.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XV'>Self-tortures of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XVI'><b>CHAPTER XVI.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XVI'>The Suttee, or Burning of Widows</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XVII'><b>CHAPTER XVII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XVII'>The revengeful Nature of the Hindoo Religion</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XVIII'><b>CHAPTER XVIII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XVIII'>The Deception of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XIX'><b>CHAPTER XIX.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XIX'>Superstition of the Hindoos</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XX'><b>CHAPTER XX.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XX'>Burmah, China, etc., etc.</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XXI'><b>CHAPTER XXI.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XXI'>The duty of Praying and Contributing for the Spread of the Gospel</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XXII'><b>CHAPTER XXII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XXII'>Personal Labors among the Heathen</a></div><br />
+<a href='#CHAPTER_XXIII'><b>CHAPTER XXIII.</b></a><br />
+<div style="margin-left: 4em;"><a href='#CHAPTER_XXIII'>Success of the Gospel in India and Ceylon</a></div><br />
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='DR_SCUDDERS'></a><h1>DR. SCUDDER'S</h1>
+
+<h1>TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,</h1>
+
+<h1>ABOUT THE HEATHEN.</h1>
+
+
+
+
+<a name='CHAPTER_I'></a><h2>CHAPTER I.</h2>
+
+<h3>GENERAL REMARKS</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;When I was a little boy, my dear mother taught me,
+with the exception of the last line, the following prayer:</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>&quot;Now I lay me down to sleep,<br /></span>
+<span>I pray the Lord my soul to keep;<br /></span>
+<span>If I should die before I wake,<br /></span>
+<span>I pray the Lord my soul to take;<br /></span>
+<span>And this I ask for Jesus' sake.&quot;<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>Though I am now more than fifty years old, I often like to say this
+prayer before I go to sleep. Have you ever learned it, my dear
+children? If you have not, I hope that you will learn it <i>now</i>; and I
+hope, too, that when you say your other prayers at night, you will also
+say this. I think that you would be glad to see how this prayer looks in
+the Tamul language&mdash;the language in which I am now preaching the Gospel,
+and in which I hope that some of you will hereafter tell the heathen of
+the Saviour. The following is a translation of it:</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/002.gif' width='574' height='181' alt='The Lord&#39;s Prayer in Tamul' title='The Lord&#39;s Prayer in Tamul'>
+</center>
+
+<p>I wish that all the little heathen children knew this prayer; but their
+fathers and mothers do not teach it to them. Their fathers and mothers
+teach them to pray to gods of gold, or brass, or stone. They take them,
+while they are very young, to their temples, and teach them to put up
+their hands before an idol, and say, &quot;Swammie.&quot; Swammie means Lord. As
+idolatry is the root of all sin, these children, as you may suppose, in
+early life become very wicked. They disobey their parents, speak bad
+words, call ill names, swear, steal, and tell lies. They also throw
+themselves on the ground in anger, and in their rage they tear their
+hair, or throw dirt over their heads, and do many other wicked things.</p>
+
+<p>Let me give you an instance, to show you how they will speak bad words.
+A few months ago, a little girl about twelve years of age was brought to
+me, with two tumors in her back. To cut them out, I had to make an
+incision about eight inches in length; and as one of these tumors had
+extended under the shoulder-blade she suffered much before the operation
+was finished. While I was operating she cried out, &quot;I will pull out my
+eyes.&quot; &quot;I will pull out my tongue.&quot; &quot;Kurn kertta tayvun.&quot; The
+translation of this is, &quot;The blind-eyed god.&quot; By this expression, she
+meant to say, &quot;What kind of a god are you, not to look upon me, and help
+me in my distress?&quot; If this little girl had had a Christian father to
+teach her to love the Saviour, she would not have used such bad
+language. But this father was even more wicked than his daughter,
+inasmuch as those who grow old in sin, are worse than those who have not
+sinned so long. I never saw a more hard-hearted parent. That he was so,
+will appear from his conduct after the operation was finished. He left
+his daughter, and went off to his home, about forty miles distant.
+Before going, he said to his wife, or to one who came with her, &quot;If the
+child gets well, bring her home; if she dies, take her away and bury
+her.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>I hope, my dear children, that when you think of the wicked little girl
+just mentioned, you will be warned never to speak bad words. God will be
+very angry with you, if you do. Did you never read what is said in 2
+Kings, 2d chapter and 23d verse, about the little children who mocked
+the prophet Elijah, and spoke bad words to him. O, how sorry must they
+have felt for their conduct, when they saw the paws of those great bears
+lifted up to tear them in pieces, and which did tear them in pieces.
+Besides all this, little children who speak bad words can never go to
+heaven. God will cast them into the great fire. Have you ever spoken bad
+words? If so, God is angry with you, and he will not forgive you unless
+you are sorry that you have done so, and seek his forgiveness through
+the blood of his dear Son.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_II'></a><h2>CHAPTER II.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE COLOR AND ORNAMENTS OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;If you will take a piece of mahogany in your hands,
+and view its different shades, you will have a pretty good
+representation of the color of a large class of this heathen people&mdash;I
+say, of a large class, for there is a great variety of colors. Some
+appear to be almost of a bronze color. Some are quite black. It is
+difficult to account for the different colors which we often see in the
+same family. For instance, one child will be of the reddish hue to which
+I just referred; another will be quite dark. When I was in Ceylon, two
+sisters of this description joined my church. One was called Sevappe, or
+the red one; the other was called Karappe, or the black one.</p>
+
+<p>This people very much resemble the English and Americans in their
+features. Many of them are very beautiful. This remark will apply
+particularly to children, and more especially to the children of
+Brahmins and others, who are delicately brought up. But however
+beautiful any of this people may be, they try to make themselves appear
+more so, by the ornaments which they wear. These ornaments are of very
+different kinds, and are made of gold, silver, brass, precious stones,
+or glass. All are fond of ear-rings. Sometimes four or five are worn in
+each ear, consisting of solid gold, the lower one being the largest, and
+the upper one the smallest. Some men wear a gold ornament attached to
+the middle of the ear, in which a precious stone is inserted. Sometimes
+they wear very large circular ear-rings, made of the wire of copper,
+around which gold is twisted so as to cover every part of it. These are
+frequently ornamented with precious stones. The females, in addition to
+ear-rings, have an ornament which passes through the rim of the ear,
+near the head, half of it being seen above the rim, and half of it below
+it. An ornamental chain is sometimes attached to this, which goes some
+distance back, when it is lost in the hair. They sometimes also wear a
+jewel in the middle of the rim of the ear, and another on that little
+forward point which strikes your finger when you attempt to put it into
+the ear. Nose jewels also are worn. Sometimes three are worn at the
+same time. Holes are made through each side of the lower part of the
+nose, and through the cartilage, or that substance which divides the
+nostrils, through which they are suspended. The higher and wealthier
+females wear a profusion of ornaments of gold and pearls around the
+neck.</p>
+
+<p>A very pretty ornament, about three inches in diameter, having the
+appearance of gold, is also frequently worn by them on that part of the
+head where the females in America put up their hair in a knot. In
+addition to this, the little girls sometimes wear one or two similar but
+smaller ornaments below this, as well as an ornament at the end of the
+long braid of hair which hangs down over the middle of their backs.
+Occasionally the whole, or the greater part of this braid is covered
+with an ornament of the same materials with those just described. They
+also wear an ornament extending from the crown of the head to the
+forehead, just in that spot where the little girls to whom I am writing
+part their hair. Attached to this, I have seen a circular piece of gold
+filled with rubies. Rings are worn on the toes as well as on the
+fingers, and bracelets of gold or silver on the wrists. Anklets similar
+to bracelets, and tinkling ornaments are worn on the ankles. The poor,
+who cannot afford to wear gold or silver bracelets, have them made of
+glass stained with different colors. I have seen nearly a dozen on each
+wrist.</p>
+
+<p>The little boys wear gold or silver bracelets; also gold or silver
+anklets. I just alluded to finger-rings. I have seen a dozen on the same
+hand. In this part of the country, the little opening which is made in
+the ears of the children is gradually distended until it becomes very
+large. At first, the opening is only large enough to admit a wire. After
+this has been worn for a short time, a knife is introduced into the ear
+in the direction of the opening, and an incision made large enough to
+admit a little cotton. This is succeeded by a roll of oiled cloth, and
+by a peculiar shrub, the English name of which, if it has any, I do not
+know. When the hole becomes sufficiently large, a heavy ring of lead,
+about an inch in diameter, is introduced. This soon increases the size
+of the opening to such an extent, that a second, and afterwards a third,
+a fourth, and a fifth ring are added. By these weights, the lower parts
+of the ear are drawn down sometimes very nearly, or quite to the
+shoulders. Not unfrequently the little girls, when they run, are obliged
+to catch hold of these rings to prevent the injury which they would
+receive by their striking against their necks. I need hardly say, that
+in due time, these rings are removed, and ornamented rings are
+substituted.</p>
+
+<p>A different plan is pursued with the Mohammedan little girls. They have
+their ears bored from the top to the bottom of the ear. The openings
+which are at first made are small, and are never enlarged. A ring is
+inserted in each of these openings. I have seen a little girl to-day in
+whose ears I counted twenty-four rings.</p>
+
+<p>Flowers in great profusion are sometimes used to add to the adornment of
+the jewels.</p>
+
+<p>I cannot conclude my account of the jewels of the little girls, without
+giving you a description of the appearance of a little patient of mine
+who came here a few days ago, loaded with trinkets. I will give it in
+the words of my daughter, which she wrote in part while the girl was
+here. &quot;On the 17th, a little dancing-girl came to see us. She was
+adorned with many jewels, some of which were very beautiful. The jewel
+in the top of the ear was a circle, nearly the size of a dollar. It was
+set with rubies. Nine pearls were suspended from it. In the middle of
+the ear was a jewel of a diamond shape, set with rubies and pearls. The
+lowest jewel in the ear was shaped like a bell. It was set with rubies,
+and from it hung a row of pearls. Close by the ear, suspended from the
+hair, was a jewel which reached below her ear. It consisted of six bells
+of gold, one above the other. Around each was a small row of pearls,
+which reached nearly to the bell below, thus forming a jewel resembling
+very many drops of pearls. It is the most beautiful jewel that I ever
+saw. In the right side of her nose was a white stone, set with gold, in
+the shape of a star. From it hung a large pearl. There was a hole bored
+in the partition between the nostrils. This hole had a jewel in it,
+about an inch in length, in the middle of which was a white stone with a
+ruby on each side. It also had a ruby on the top. From the white stone
+hung another, of a similar color, attached to it by a piece of gold. In
+the left side of the nose was a jewel about an inch in diameter. It was
+somewhat in the shape of a half-moon, and was set with rubies, pearls,
+emeralds, etc. etc. This jewel hung below her mouth. On the back of her
+head was a large, round gold piece, three inches in diameter. Another
+piece about two inches in diameter, hung below this. Her hair was
+braided in one braid, and hung down her back. At the bottom of this were
+three large tassels of silk, mounted with gold. Her eyebrows and
+eyelashes were painted with black. Her neck was covered with jewels of
+such beauty, and of such a variety, that it is impossible for me to
+describe them. Around her ankles were large rings which looked like
+braided silver. To these were attached very many little bells, which
+rung as she walked. I believe all dancing-girls wear these rings. We
+felt very sad when we thought that she was dedicated to a life of infamy
+and shame.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>There is an ornament worn by the followers of the god Siva, on their
+arms, or necks, or in their hair. It is called the <i>lingum</i>. The nature
+of this is so utterly abominable, that I cannot tell you a word about
+it.</p>
+
+<p>Married women wear an ornament peculiar to themselves. It is called the
+tahly. It is a piece of gold, on which is engraven the image of some one
+of their gods. This is fastened around the neck by a short yellow
+string, containing one hundred and eight threads of great fineness.
+Various ceremonies are performed before it is applied, and the gods, of
+whom I will tell you something by and by, with their wives, are called
+upon to give their blessing. When these ceremonies are finished, the
+tahly is brought on a waiter, ornamented with sweet-smelling flowers,
+and is tied by the bridegroom to the neck of the bride. This ornament is
+never taken off, unless her husband dies. In such a case she is deprived
+of it, to wear it no more for ever&mdash;deprived of it, after various
+ceremonies, by her nearest female relative, who cuts the thread by which
+it is suspended, and removes it. After this a barber is called, who
+shaves her head, and she becomes, in the eyes of the people, a
+<i>despised</i> widow&mdash;no more to wear any ornament about her neck but a
+plain one&mdash;no more to stain her face with yellow water, nor to wear on
+her forehead those marks which are considered by the natives as among
+their chief ornaments.</p>
+
+<p>I have now told you something about the jewels of this people. I hope
+that you will never be disposed to imitate them, and load your bodies
+with such useless things. They are not only useless, but tend to
+encourage pride and vanity. All that you need is, the &quot;Pearl of great
+price,&quot; even Jesus. Adorn yourself with this Pearl, and you will be
+beautiful indeed&mdash;beautiful even in the sight of your heavenly Father.
+Have you this Pearl of great price, my dear children? Tell me, have you
+this Pearl of great price? If you have not, what have you?</p>
+
+<p>I just now alluded to those marks which the natives consider among their
+chief ornaments. These are different among different sects. The
+followers of Siva rub ashes on their foreheads. These ashes are
+generally prepared by burning what in the Tamul language is called
+<i>chaarne.</i> They also apply these ashes in streaks, generally
+three together, on their breasts, and on their arms. Some besmear their
+whole bodies with them.</p>
+
+<p>The followers of Vrishnoo wear a very different ornament from that just
+described. It consists of a perpendicular line drawn on the forehead,
+generally of a red or yellow color, and a white line on each side of it,
+which unite at the bottom with the middle line, and form a trident.</p>
+
+<p>Another ornament consists of a small circle, which is called pottu. This
+is stamped in the middle of the forehead. Sometimes it is red, sometimes
+yellow or black. Large numbers of women, in this part of the country,
+wash their faces with a yellow water, made so by dissolving in it a
+paste made of a yellow root and common shell-lime. The Brahmins
+frequently instead of rubbing ashes, draw a horizontal line over the
+middle of their foreheads, to show that they have bathed and are pure.
+Sometimes the people ornament themselves with a paste of sandal-wood.
+They rub themselves from head to foot with it. This has a very
+odoriferous smell.</p>
+
+<p>When the people are loaded with jewels, and covered with the marks which
+I have just described they think themselves to be highly ornamented But
+after all, &quot;they are like unto whited sepulchres, which indeed appear
+beautiful outward, but are within full of dead men's bones, and of all
+uncleanness.&quot; The &quot;Pearl of great price,&quot; to which I before alluded,
+the only Pearl which is of any value in the sight of Him who looketh at
+the heart, and not at the outward appearance, they possess not. Millions
+in this Eastern world have never even heard of it. O how incessantly
+ought you to pray that they may come into possession of it. How gladly
+should you give your money to send it to them. I wish, in this place, to
+ask you one question. Who of you expect, by and by, to become
+missionaries to this land, to tell this people of the Pearl of great
+price?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_III'></a><h2>CHAPTER III.</H2>
+
+<h3>DRESS, HOUSES, EATING, AND SALUTATION OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The dress of the Hindoos is very simple. A single
+piece of cloth uncut, about three yards in length and one in width,
+wrapped round the loins, with a shawl thrown over the shoulders,
+constitutes the usual apparel of the people of respectability. These
+garments are often fringed with red silk or gold. The native ladies
+frequently almost encase themselves in cloth or silk. Under such
+circumstances, their cloths are perhaps twenty yards in length. Most of
+the native gentlemen now wear turbans, an ornament which they have
+borrowed from the Mohammedans This consists of a long piece of very fine
+stuff, sometimes twenty yards in length and one in breadth. With this
+they encircle the head in many folds.</p>
+
+<p>Those who are employed by European or Mohammedan princes, wear a long
+robe of muslin, or very fine cloth. This also, is in imitation of the
+Mohammedans, and was formerly unknown in the country.</p>
+
+<p>The houses of the Hindoos are generally very plainly built. In the
+country, they are commonly made of earth, and thatched with straw. In
+the cities, they are covered with tiles. The kitchen is situated in the
+most retired part of the house. In the houses of the Brahmins, the
+kitchen-door is always barred, to prevent strangers from looking upon
+their earthen vessels; for if they should happen to see them, their look
+would pollute them to such a degree that they must be broken to pieces.
+The hearth is generally placed on the south-west side, which is said to
+be the side of the <i>god of fire</i>, because they say that this god
+actually dwells there.</p>
+
+<p>The domestic customs of this people are very different from ours. The
+men and women do not eat together. The husband first eats, then the
+wife. The wife waits upon the husband After she has cooked the rice, she
+brings a brass plate, if they are possessors of one; or if not, a piece
+of a plantain-leaf, and puts it down on the mat before him. She then
+bails out the rice, places it upon the leaf, and afterwards pours the
+currie over it. This being done, the husband proceeds to mix up the
+currie and the rice with his hands, and puts it into his mouth. He never
+uses a knife and fork, as is customary with us. The currie of which I
+have spoken is a sauce of a yellow color, owing to the <i>munchel</i>, a
+yellow root which they put in it. This and onions, kottamaly-seeds
+mustard, serakum, pepper, etc., constitute the ingredients of the
+currie. Some add to these ghea, or melted butter, and cocoa-nut milk. By
+the cocoa-nut milk, I do not mean the water of the cocoa-nut.
+This&mdash;except in the very young cocoa-nut, when it is a most delicious
+beverage&mdash;is never used. The milk is squeezed from the <i>meat</i> of the
+cocoa-nut, after it has been reduced to a pulp by means of an indented
+circular iron which they use for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>After the husband has eaten, the wife brings water for him to wash his
+hands. This being done, she supplies him with vettalay, paakku,
+shell-lime, and tobacco, which he puts into his mouth as his dessert.
+The vettalay is a very spicy leaf. Why they use paakku, I do not know.
+It is a nut, which they cut into small pieces, but it has not much
+taste. Sometimes the wife brings her husband a segar. This people, I am
+sorry to say, are great smokers and chewers, practices of which I hope
+that you, my dear children, will never be guilty. In Ceylon, it is
+customary for females to smoke. Frequently, after the husband has smoked
+for a while, he hands the segar to his wife. She then puts it into her
+mouth, and smokes.</p>
+
+<p>Several years ago, one of the schoolmasters in that island became a
+Christian. After he had partaken of the Lord's supper, his wife
+considered him so defiled, that she would not put his segar into her
+mouth for a month afterwards. She, however, has since become a
+Christian.</p>
+
+<p>I spoke just now of the plantain-leaf. This leaf is sometimes six feet
+long, and in some places a foot and a half wide. It is an unbroken leaf,
+with a large stem running through the middle of it. It is one of the
+handsomest of leaves. Pieces enough can be torn from a single leaf, to
+take the place of a dozen plates. When quite young, it is an excellent
+application to surfaces which have been blistered.</p>
+
+<p>When this people eat, they do not use tables and chairs. They sit down
+on mats, and double their legs under them, after the manner of our
+friends the tailors in America, when they sew. This is the way in which
+the natives as a general thing, sit in our churches. It is not common to
+have benches or pews for them. Carpenters and other tradesmen also sit
+down either on a board, or on the ground, or on their legs, when they
+work. It would divert you much to see their manoeuvring. If a carpenter,
+for instance, wants to make a little peg, he will take a small piece of
+board, and place it in an erect position between his feet, the soles of
+which are turned inward so as to press upon the board. He then takes
+his chisel in one hand, and his mallet in the other, and cuts off a
+small piece. Afterwards he holds the piece in one hand, and while he
+shapes it with his chisel with the other, he steadies it by pressing it
+against his great toe.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/020.gif' width='570' height='409' alt='' title=''>
+</center>
+
+<p>The blacksmiths, with the exception of those who use the sledge-hammer,
+sit as do the carpenters while they hammer the iron. I wish you could
+see them at work with their simple apparatus. They have small anvils,
+which they place in a hole made in a log of wood which is buried in the
+ground. They do not use such bellows as you see in America.</p>
+
+<p>Theirs consist of two leather bags, about a foot wide and a foot and a
+half long, each having a nozzle at one end. The other end is left open
+to admit the air. When they wish to blow the fire, they extend these
+bags to let in the air. They then close them by means of the thumb on
+one side, and the fingers on the other, and press them down towards the
+nozzle of the bellows, which forces the air through them into the fire.
+I should have said before, that the nozzle of the bellows passes through
+a small semicircular mound of dried mud.</p>
+
+<p>I mentioned that the natives do not use tables and chairs in their
+houses. Neither do they, as a general thing, use bedsteads. They have no
+beds. They sleep on mats, which are spread down on the floor. Sometimes
+they use a cotton bolster for their heads. More generally their pillows
+are hard boards, which they put under the mat. In addition to cooking,
+the females have to prepare the rice for this purpose, by taking it out
+of the husk. This they do by beating it in a mortar about two feet high.
+The pestle with which they pound it, is about five feet long, made of
+wood, with an iron rim around the lower part of it. Three women can
+work at these mortars at the same time. Of course they have to be very
+skilful in the use of the pestle, so as not to interfere with each
+others' operations. Sometimes, while thus engaged, the children, who are
+generally at play near their mothers, put their hands on the edge of the
+mortars. In such cases, when the pestle happens to strike the edge,
+their fingers are taken off in a moment.</p>
+
+<p>The Hindoos have many modes of salutation. In some places they raise
+their right hand to the heart. In others, they simply stretch it out
+towards the person who is passing, if they know him, for they never
+salute persons with whom they are not acquainted.</p>
+
+<p>In many places there is no show of salutation. When they meet their
+acquaintances they content themselves by saying a friendly word or two
+in passing, and then pursue their way. They have borrowed the word
+<i>salam</i> from the Mohammedans. They salute both Mohammedans and Europeans
+with this word, at the same time raising their hand to the forehead.
+When they address persons of high rank, they give them their <i>salam</i>
+thrice, touching the ground as often with both hands, and then lifting
+them up to their foreheads.</p>
+
+<p>The other castes salute the Brahmins by joining the hands and elevating
+them to the forehead, or sometimes over the head. It is accompanied with
+<i>andamayya</i>, which means, Hail, respected lord. The Brahmins stretch out
+their hands and say, <i>aaseervaathum</i>&mdash;benediction.</p>
+
+<p>Another very respectful kind of salutation consists in lowering both
+hands to the feet of the person to be honored, or even in falling-down
+and embracing them.</p>
+
+<p>Of all the forms of salutation, the most respectful is the
+<i>shaashtaangkum</i>, or prostration, in which the feet, the knees, the
+stomach, the head, and the arms, all touch the ground. In doing this,
+they throw themselves at their whole length on the ground, and stretch
+out both arms above their heads. This is practised before priests, and
+in the presence of an assembly, when they appear before it to beg pardon
+for a crime.</p>
+
+<p>Relations, who have long been separated, testify their joy when they
+meet by chucking each other under the chin, and shedding tears of joy.
+I am not aware that grown persons ever kiss each other. Sometimes
+mothers, or other individuals, will put their noses to the cheeks of
+little children, and draw the air through them, just as we do when we
+smell any thing which is agreeable. At other times they will apply the
+thumb and first finger to the cheek of the child, and then apply them to
+their own noses, and, as it were, smell them.</p>
+
+<p>The women, as a mark of respect, turn their backs, or at least their
+faces aside, when they are in the presence of those whom they highly
+esteem. They are never permitted to sit in the presence of men. A
+married woman cannot do this, even in the presence of her husband.</p>
+
+<p>If a person meets another of high rank, he must leave the path, if on
+foot, or alight, if on horseback, and remain standing until he has
+passed. He must at the same time take off his slippers. He also must
+take off his slippers when he enters a house. Should he fail to do this,
+it would be considered a great impropriety.</p>
+
+<p>In addressing a person of note, they mast keep at a certain distance
+from him, and cover their mouths with their hands while they are
+speaking, lest their breath, or a particle of moisture, should escape
+to trouble him.</p>
+
+<p>When the Hindoos visit a person of distinction for the first time,
+civility requires them to take some present as a mark of respect, or to
+show that they come with a friendly intention; especially if they wish
+to ask some favor in return. When they have not the means of making
+large presents, they carry with them sugar, plantains, milk, and other
+things of this kind.</p>
+
+<p>In case of mourning, visits must always be made, though at a distance of
+a hundred miles. Letters of condolence would by no means be received as
+a substitute.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_IV'></a><h2>CHAPTER IV.</H2>
+
+<h3>MARRIAGE AMONG THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;Marriage, to the Hindoos is the greatest event of
+their lives. In the celebration of it, many ceremonies are performed Of
+these I will mention some of the most important. If the father of the
+young girl is a Brahmin, and if he is rich and liberal, he will
+frequently bear all the expenses of the marriage of his daughter. To
+give a daughter in marriage and to sell her, are about the same thing.
+Almost every parent makes his daughter an article of traffic, refusing
+to give her up until the sum of money for which he consented to let her
+go, is paid. Men of distinction generally lay out this money for jewels,
+which they present to their daughters on their wedding-day. You will
+infer from what I have just said, that the parties to be married have
+nothing to do in the choice of each other.</p>
+
+<p>There are properly but four months in the year in which marriages can
+take place, namely March, April, May, and June. This probably arises
+from the circumstance that these are the hottest seasons of the
+year&mdash;the seasons when the people have more leisure to attend to them.
+From the harvest, also, which has just been gathered in, they are
+provided with means to perform the various ceremonies.</p>
+
+<p>The marriage ceremony lasts five days. The bride and bridegroom are
+first placed under a puntel, a kind of bower, covered with leaves, in
+front of the house. This is superbly adorned. The married women then
+come forward, and perform the ceremony called <i>arati</i>, which is as
+follows. Upon a plate of copper, they place a lamp made of a paste from
+rice flour. It is supplied with oil, and lighted. They then take hold of
+the plate with both hands, and raise it as high as the heads of the
+couple to be married, and describe a number of circles with the plate
+and lamp. This is to prevent the evil of any jealous looks, which
+certain persons might make. The Hindoos believe that great evils arise
+from wicked looks. They consider that even the gods themselves are not
+out of the reach of malicious eyes; and therefore after they have been
+carried through the streets, the ceremony of arati is always performed,
+to efface the evil which they may have suffered from these looks.</p>
+
+<p>It ought to have been mentioned, that before any thing is done, they
+place an image of Pullian under the puntel. This god is much honored
+because he is much feared. And although the great ugliness of his
+appearance has hitherto kept him without a wife, they never fail to pay
+him the greatest attention, lest he should in some way or other injure
+them.</p>
+
+<p>After arati and many other ceremonies are performed, the kankanan, which
+is merely a bit of saffron, is tied to the right wrist of the young
+man, and to the left wrist of the girl. This is done with great
+solemnity. Another remarkable ceremony succeeds this. The young man
+being seated with his face towards the east, his future father-in-law
+supposes that he beholds in him the great Vrishnoo. With this
+impression, he offers him a sacrifice, and then, making him put both of
+his feet in a new dish filled with cow-dung, he first washes them with
+water, then with milk, and again with water, accompanying the whole with
+suitable muntrums or prayers.</p>
+
+<p>After many other ceremonies, he takes the hand of his daughter and puts
+it into that of his son-in-law. He then pours water over them in honor
+of Vrishnoo. This is the most solemn of all the ceremonies, being the
+token of his resigning his daughter to the authority of the young man.
+She must be accompanied with three gifts, namely, one or more cows, some
+property in land, and a <i>salagrama</i>, which consists of some little
+amulet stones in high esteem among the Brahmins. This ceremony being
+finished, the tahly is brought to be fastened to the neck of the bride.
+This, as I before said, is presented on a salver, decked and garnished
+with sweet-smelling flowers. Incense is offered to it, and it is
+presented to the assistants each of whom touches it and invokes
+blessings upon it. The bride then turning towards the East, the
+bridegroom takes the tahly, repeats a muntrum or prayer aloud, and ties
+it around her neck.</p>
+
+<p>Fire is then brought in, upon which the bridegroom offers up the
+sacrifice of <i>homam</i>, which consists of throwing boiled rice with melted
+butter upon the fire. He then takes his bride by the hand, and they walk
+three times around it, while the incense is blazing.</p>
+
+<p>There is another ceremony, which, perhaps, ought to be mentioned, as it
+is considered by some to be one of much importance. Two baskets of
+bamboo are placed close together, one for the bride, the other for the
+bridegroom. They step into them, and two other baskets being brought,
+filled with ground rice, the husband takes up one with both hands and
+pours the contents over the head of the bride. She does the same to him.
+In the marriage of great princes pearls are sometimes used instead of
+rice.</p>
+
+<p>On the evening of the third day, when the constellations appear, the
+astrologer points out to the married pair a very small star, close to
+the middle or in the tail of <i>Ursa Major</i>, which he directs them to
+worship, and which he says is the wife of Vasestha.</p>
+
+<p>While the assembled guests, are dining, the bridegroom and the bride
+also partake, and eat together from the same plate. This is a token of
+the closest union. This is the only instance in which they ever eat
+together.</p>
+
+<p>After all the ceremonies are finished, a procession is made through the
+streets of the village It commonly takes place in the night, by
+torchlight, accompanied with fire-works. The newly married pair are
+seated in one palanquin with their faces towards each other, both richly
+dressed. The bride, in particular, is generally covered with jewels and
+precious stones.</p>
+
+<p>The procession moves slowly; and their friends and relations come out of
+their houses, as they pass; the women hailing the married couple with
+the ceremony of <i>arati</i>, and the men with presents of silver, fruits,
+sugar, and betel. I once witnessed one of these marriage processions in
+the streets of Madras at night, but can give you but little idea of its
+magnificence. The lamps used on the occasion could not be numbered. The
+shrubbery, which was drawn on carts or other vehicles, appeared
+exceedingly beautiful, in consequence of the light reflected from the
+lamps. Intermingled with this shrubbery, were to be seen little girls
+elegantly dressed, and adorned with flowers on their heads. Many
+elephants, with their trappings of gold and silver and red, formed a
+part of the procession. Fire-works were also added to make the scene
+more brilliant.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_V'></a><h2>CHAPTER V.</H2>
+
+<h3>DEATH AND FUNERALS OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The death of a Hindoo is followed by many ridiculous
+ceremonies. I will give you a description of a few, connected with the
+death of one who has moved in one of the higher ranks&mdash;of a Brahmin.</p>
+
+<p>When it is evident that a Brahmin has but a little time to live, a space
+is prepared with earth, well spread with cow-dung, over which a cloth,
+that has never been worn, is spread. The dying man is placed upon this
+at full length. Another cloth is wrapped around his loins. This being
+done, the ceremony of expiating his sins is performed as follows. The
+chief of the funeral brings on one plate some small pieces of silver or
+copper coin, and on another the punchakaryam, etc. A little of this
+punchakaryam is then put into his mouth, and, by virtue of this nauseous
+draught, the body is perfectly purified. Besides this, there is a
+general cleansing, which is accomplished by making the dying man recite
+within himself, if he cannot speak, the proper muntrums, by which he is
+delivered from all his sins. After this, a cow is introduced with her
+calf. Her horns are decorated with rings of gold or brass, and her neck
+with garlands of flowers. A pure cloth is laid over her body. Thus
+decked, she is led up to the sick man, who takes hold of her tail.
+Prayers are now offered up that the cow may conduct him, by a blessed
+path, to the next world. He then makes a gift of a cow to a Brahmin.
+This gift is considered indispensable to enable the soul to go over the
+river of fire, which it is said all must pass after death. Those who
+have made this gift, are met by one of these favored creatures the
+moment they arrive at the bank of the stream, and by her help, they are
+enabled to pass without injury from the flames.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the breath has left his body, all who are present must weep
+for a reasonable time, and join in lamentations together.</p>
+
+<p>After various ceremonies, the body is washed, and a barber is called to
+shave his head. He is then clad with his finest clothes and adorned with
+jewels. He is rubbed with sandal-wood where the body is uncovered, and
+the accustomed mark is put upon his forehead. Thus dressed he is placed
+on a kind of state bed, where he remains until he is carried to the
+pile.</p>
+
+<p>After every preparation is made to bear away the corpse, the person who
+is to conduct the funeral, with the assistance of some relative or
+friend, strips it of its clothing and jewels, and covers it with a
+handkerchief provided for the occasion. The corpse is then placed on a
+litter. Those who die in a state of marriage, have their faces left
+uncovered. The litter, adorned with flowers and foliage, and sometimes
+decked with valuable stuffs, is borne by four Brahmins. The procession
+is arranged as follows.</p>
+
+<p>The chief of the funeral marches foremost, carrying fire in a vessel.
+The body follows, attended by the relations and friends, without their
+turbans, and with nothing on their heads but a bit of cloth, in token of
+mourning. The women never attend the funeral, but remain in the house,
+where they set up a hideous cry when the corpse is taken out. While
+advancing on the road, the custom is to stop three times on the way,
+and, at each pause, to put into the mouth of the dead a morsel of
+unboiled rice, moistened. The object of stopping is considered to be
+very important. It is not without reason; for they say that persons
+supposed to be dead have been alive, or even when lifeless have been
+restored; and sometimes, also, it has happened that the gods of the
+infernal regions have mistaken their aim, and seized one person instead
+of another. In any view, it is right to afford the opportunity for
+correcting these mistakes, so as not to expose to the flames a person
+who is still alive. Hence the propriety of these pauses, each of which
+continues half of the quarter of an hour.</p>
+
+<p>Having arrived at the place for burning the dead, they dig a trench
+about six or seven feet in length. This is consecrated by the muntrums.
+It is slightly sprinkled with water to lay the dust, and a few pieces of
+money in gold are scattered upon it. Here the pile is erected of dried
+wood, on which the body is laid out at full length. Over the body a
+quantity of twigs are laid, which are sprinkled with punchakaryam The
+chief of the funeral then takes on his shoulders a pitcher of water, and
+goes around the pile three times, letting the water run through a hole
+made in it. After this he breaks the pitcher in pieces near the head of
+the corpse.</p>
+
+<p>At last the torch is brought for setting fire to the pile, and is handed
+to the chief of the funeral. Before he receives it, however, he is
+obliged to make some grimaces to prove his sorrow. He rolls about on the
+ground, beats his breast, and makes the air resound with his cries. The
+assistants also cry, or appear to cry. Fire being applied to the four
+corners of the pile, the crowd retire, except the four Brahmins who
+carried the body; they remain until the whole is consumed.</p>
+
+<p>The funerals of the Sudras differ in some particulars from those of the
+Brahmins. Deafening sounds of drums, trumpets, and other instruments of
+music, not in use among the Brahmins, accompany their funerals. To
+increase the noise, they sometimes shoot off an instrument which
+somewhat resembles a small cannon. I do not now think of any other
+particular worthy of mention.</p>
+
+<p>By the ceremonies which are performed at their funerals, this wretched
+people expect to secure the pardon of all the sins of those who have
+died. Alas, what a delusion! O, that Christians had sent the Gospel to
+this dark land in the days when they sent it to our heathen fathers.
+Then might the Hindoos now be seeking the expiation of their sins,
+through the blood of the ever-blessed Redeemer. Of this Redeemer,
+however, they know nothing. They enter eternity, not that their souls
+may be consumed as their bodies have been, but to endure the flames of
+divine wrath for ever and ever. Alas, alas, that it should be so! O,
+that the generation of Christians now living would lay these things to
+heart, and do what they can, through grace, to rescue those who are yet
+within the reach of hope from so tremendous a doom. What, my dear
+children, will you do for this purpose?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_VI'></a><h2>CHAPTER VI.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The word heathen is applied to those who worship
+idols, or who do not know any thing about the true God. This is the case
+with this people. They say that there is one supreme being, whom they
+call BRAHM; but he is very different from Jehovah, and is never
+worshipped. Generally, he is fast asleep. In the place of Brahm, they
+worship many gods&mdash;gods of all colors: some black, some white, some
+blue, some red&mdash;gods of all shapes and sizes: some in the shape of
+beasts, some in the shape of men; some partly in the shape of beasts,
+and partly in the shape of men, having four, or ten, or a hundred, or a
+thousand eyes, heads, and hands. They ride through the air on elephants,
+buffaloes, lions, sheep, deer, goats, peacocks, vultures, geese,
+serpents, and rats. They hold in their hands all kinds of weapons,
+offensive and defensive, thunderbolts javelins, spears, clubs, bows,
+arrows, shields, flags, and shells. They are of all employments. There
+are gods of the heavens above and of the earth below, gods of wisdom and
+of folly, gods of war and of peace, gods of good and of evil, gods of
+pleasure, gods of cruelty and wrath, whose thirst must be satiated with
+torrents of blood. These gods fight and quarrel with one another. They
+lie, steal, commit adultery, murder, and other crimes. They pour out
+their curses when they cannot succeed in their wicked plots, and invent
+all kinds of lying tales to hide their wickedness.</p>
+
+<p>There are three principal gods, who compose what is called the Hindoo
+triad. Their names are Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva. They were somehow
+drawn from Brahm's essence, on one occasion when he was awake. Brumha,
+they say, is the creator of the world, Vrishnoo the preserver, and Siva
+the destroyer. Brumha has no temple erected for his worship, on account
+of a great falsehood which he told. I will tell you what it was. Once,
+as it is said, there was a dispute between him and Vrishnoo, as to who
+is the greatest. While thus disputing, Siva appeared between the two as
+a fire-post and told them that he who would find the bottom or the top
+of the post first, would show that he is the greatest. Vrishnoo
+immediately changed himself into a hog, and began to root up the earth
+with the hope of finding the bottom of the post. Brumha changed himself
+into a swan, flew up towards the top of the post, and cried out, I have
+found it, when he had not. This, you know, my dear children, was a
+falsehood. For this falsehood, it is said, no temple is erected for his
+worship.</p>
+
+<p>Vrishnoo was a thief and a liar. He was once dwelling in the house of a
+dairyman, and he used constantly to be stealing butter and curdled milk
+from the dairyman's wife. She did not know, for a long time, what became
+of her butter and curdled milk; but at last she found out that Vrishnoo
+was the thief. To punish him for his theft, she tied him to a rice
+mortar.</p>
+
+<p>Siva's conduct was very bad. I will tell you but one thing about him. On
+one occasion he was playing at cards with his wife Parvathe. Vrishnoo
+was appointed to determine who was the best player. After playing for a
+little season Parvathe won the game. Siva then beckoned to Vrishnoo to
+declare that he, instead of Parvathe, had won it. This he did. In
+consequence of this falsehood, he was cursed by Parvathe, and changed
+into a snake.</p>
+
+<p>And now, my dear children, why do I tell you about these gods? I tell
+you for the purpose of making you thankful that you were born in a
+Christian land, where you have the Bible to teach you better things. Had
+you not the Bible, you would worship just such wretched beings as these
+poor Hindoos worship. Perhaps you know that our Saxon fathers, before
+they had the Bible, were as great idolaters as are this people. They
+worshipped Thor and Woden and other similar idols, and they were even in
+the habit of offering up human sacrifices Surely, if there is any thing
+which should make you give your hearts to your Saviour and love him
+above all things, it is God's gift of the Bible to you.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_VII'></a><h2>CHAPTER VII.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE THREE HUNDRED AND THIRTY MILLIONS OF THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS&mdash;THE
+CREATION OF THE UNIVERSE&mdash;THE TRANSMIGRATION OF SOULS&mdash;THE DIFFERENT
+HELLS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;I told you that in one of those seasons when Brahm was
+awake, Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva were somehow drawn from Brahm's
+essence. The three hundred and thirty millions of the gods of the
+Hindoos were also drawn from this essence; as were all the atoms which
+compose the earth, the sun, moon, and stars. At first, these atoms were
+all in disorder. For the purpose of reducing them to order, Brahm
+created what is called the great mundane egg. Into this egg he himself
+entered, under the form, of Brumha, taking with him all these atoms.
+After remaining in this egg four thousand three hundred millions of
+years, to arrange these atoms, he burst its shell and came out, with a
+thousand heads, a thousand eyes, and a thousand arms. With him, he
+brought out all those harmonized atoms, which, when separated, produced
+this beautiful universe that we see above and around us.</p>
+
+<p>The universe, as it came from the mundane egg, is generally divided into
+fourteen worlds: seven inferior or lower worlds, and seven superior or
+upper worlds. The seven lower worlds are filled with all kinds of wicked
+and loathsome creatures. Our earth, which is the first of the upper
+worlds, it is said, is flat. The following figure will give you some
+idea of it.</p>
+<br />
+<center>
+<img src='images/048.gif' width='587' height='584' alt='Concentric circles with labels on each from outermost to
+innermost: Sea of Sweet Water. Sea of Milk. Sea of Sour Curds. Sea of
+Clarified Butter. Sea of Spirituous Liquors. Sea of Sugar Cane Juice.
+Sea of Salt Water. Earth.' title='Concentric circles with labels on each from outermost to
+innermost: Sea of Sweet Water. Sea of Milk. Sea of Sour Curds. Sea of
+Clarified Butter. Sea of Spirituous Liquors. Sea of Sugar Cane Juice.
+Sea of Salt Water. Earth.'>
+</center>
+<br />
+
+<p>That part of the earth which is inhabited consists of seven circular
+islands, or continents each of which is surrounded by a different ocean.
+The island in the centre, where we dwell, is surrounded by a sea of salt
+water, the second island is surrounded by a sea of sugar-cane juice, the
+third island is surrounded by a sea of spirituous liquors, the fourth is
+surrounded by a sea of clarified butter, the fifth is surrounded by a
+sea of sour curds, the sixth is surrounded by a sea of milk, the seventh
+is surrounded by a sea of sweet water.</p>
+
+<p>In all the worlds above ours are mansions where the gods reside. In the
+third is the heaven of Indra. This is the heaven to which it is said the
+widow goes, after she has burned herself to death on the funeral pile of
+her husband Its palaces are of the purest gold. And such are the
+quantities of diamonds, and jasper, and sapphire, and emerald, and all
+manner of precious stones there, that it shines with a brightness
+superior to that of twelve thousand suns. Its streets are of the
+clearest crystal, fringed with gold. In the seventh, or the highest of
+the upper worlds, is the heaven where Brumha chiefly resides. This far
+exceeds all the other heavens in point of beauty.</p>
+
+<p>In the inferior worlds it is stated that there are one hundred thousand
+hells. These are provided for such as have been great criminals. The
+Hindoos say, that those who have not been very wicked, can make an
+atonement for their sins in this world. Should they neglect to do this,
+they must suffer for it in another birth. They believe in what is called
+the transmigration of souls, or the passing of the soul, after death,
+into another body. The soul must suffer in the next birth, if not
+purified in this. Hence it is asserted, that if a man is a stealer of
+gold from a Brahmin, he is doomed to have whitlows on his nails; if a
+drinker of spirits, black teeth; if a false detractor, fetid breath; if
+a stealer of grain, the defect of some limb; if a stealer of clothes,
+leprosy; if a horse-stealer, lameness; if a stealer of a lamp, total
+blindness. If he steals grain in the husk, he will be born a rat; if
+yellow mixed metal, a gander; if money, a great stinging gnat; if fruit,
+an ape; if the property of a priest, a crocodile.</p>
+
+<p>Those persons whose sins are too great to be forgiven in this world,
+must be sent to one of the hells to winch I have alluded. Weeping,
+wailing, shrieking, they are dragged to the palace of <i>Yama</i>, the king
+of those doleful regions. On arriving there, they behold him clothed
+with terror, two hundred and forty miles in height, his eyes as large as
+a lake of water, his voice as loud as thunder, the hairs of his body as
+long as palm-trees, a flame of fire proceeding from his mouth, the noise
+of his breath like the roaring of a tempest, and in his right hand a
+terrific iron club. Sentence is passed, and the wretched beings are
+doomed to receive punishment according to the nature of their crimes.
+Some are made to tread on burning sands, or sharp-edged stones. Others
+are rolled among thorns and spikes and putrefying flesh. Others are
+dragged along the roughest places by cords passed through the tender
+parts of the body. Some are attacked by jackals, tigers, and elephants.
+Others are pierced with arrows, beaten with clubs, pricked with needles,
+seared with hot irons, and tormented by flies and wasps. Some are
+plunged into pans of liquid fire or boiling oil. Others are dashed from
+lofty trees, many hundred miles high.</p>
+
+<p>The torment of these hells does not continue for ever. After criminals
+have been punished for a longer or shorter time, their souls return to
+the earth again in the bodies of men. Here they may perform such good
+acts as may raise them to one of the heavens of the gods; or commit
+crimes, which may be the means of their being sent again to the abodes
+of misery.</p>
+
+<p>Things will go on in this way until the universe comes to an end, when
+every thing is to disappear, and to be swallowed up in Brahm.</p>
+
+<p>The Hindoos say, that it is now more than one hundred and fifty billions
+of years since the world was created. After it has continued about one
+hundred and fifty billions of years more, it is to come to an end. Then
+Brumha is to die, and to be swallowed up with the universe in the sole
+existing Brahm.</p>
+
+<p>By what you have heard, you will learn that the Hindoos expect, by their
+sufferings, to make an atonement for their sins. But there is no
+atonement for sin, except through the blood of Jesus Christ. We must
+come as lost sinners to our heavenly Father, confess our transgressions
+to him, and plead for his forgiveness, only through the sufferings and
+death which Christ endured. My dear children, have you done this? If
+not, do it speedily, or the regions of the lost must soon be your
+everlasting abode.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_VIII'></a><h2>CHAPTER VIII.</H2>
+
+<h3>HINDOO CASTES.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The people of India are divided into castes, as they
+are called. Their sacred books declare, that after Brumha had peopled
+the heavens above and the worlds below, he created the human race,
+consisting of four classes or castes. From his mouth proceeded the
+Brahmin caste. Those of this class are the highest and noblest beings on
+earth, and hold the office of priests. At the same time there flowed
+from his mouth the <i>Vedas</i>, or sacred books, of which the Brahmins are
+the sole teachers To their fellow-men, they were to give such parts of
+these books as they thought best. From Brumha's arm proceeded the
+military caste. The business of this class is to defend their country
+when attacked by enemies. From his breast proceeded the third caste,
+consisting of farmers and merchants. From his feet, the member of
+inferiority, proceeded the Sudras, or servile caste. Carpenters,
+braziers, weavers, dyers, and the manual cultivators of the soil, are
+included in this class.</p>
+
+<p>Caste is not a civil, but a sacred institution. You must get some one
+older than yourself to explain what this means. Caste is a difference of
+<i>kind</i>. Hence, a man of one caste can never be changed into a man of
+another caste, any more than a lion can be changed into a mole, or a
+mole into a lion. Each caste has its laws, the breaking of which is
+attended with great disgrace, and even degradation below all the other
+castes. For instance, if a Brahmin should, by eating any forbidden
+thing, break his caste, he would sink below all the other castes. He
+would become an outcast, or pariah. For beneath the fourth, or lowest
+caste, there is a class of people belonging to no caste&mdash;a class of
+outcasts, held in the utmost abhorrence.</p>
+
+<p>By the system of castes, the Hindoos have been divided into so many
+selfish sections, each scowling on all the rest with feelings of hatred
+and contempt. The spirit which upholds it, is similar to that spirit
+which says, &quot;Stand by thyself, for I am holier than thou,&quot; and, of
+course, is nothing but pride. This is one of the greatest obstacles to
+the spread of Christianity in this dark land, and for the exhibition of
+which we were lately obliged to cut off many of the members of our
+churches.</p>
+
+<p>The Brahmins, in consequence of their being of the highest caste, and of
+their having been taught from their infancy to regard all other classes
+of men with the utmost contempt, are very proud. They make great efforts
+to keep themselves pure, in their sense of the word, both without and
+within. They are exceedingly afraid of being defiled by persons of other
+castes. They have the utmost dread even of being touched by a pariah.
+For them to eat with any of these pariahs, or to go into their houses,
+or to drink water which they have drawn, or from vessels which they have
+handled, is attended with the loss of their caste. A Brahmin who should
+enter their houses, or permit them to enter his, would be cut off from
+his caste, and could not be restored without many troublesome ceremonies
+and great expense. The pariahs are considered to be so low, that if a
+Brahmin were to touch them, even with the end of a long pole, he would
+be looked upon as polluted In some districts they are obliged to make a
+long circuit, when they perceive Brahmins in the way, that their breath
+may not infect them, or their shadow fall upon them as they pass. In
+some places their very approach is sufficient to pollute a whole
+neighborhood.</p>
+
+<p>The Brahmins carry their ideas of purity very far. Should a Sudra happen
+to look upon the vessels in which they cook their food, they would be
+considered as defiled. They can never touch any kind of leather or skin,
+except the skin of the tiger and antelope. The most disagreeable of all
+American fashions, in their eyes, is that of boots and gloves. They
+rarely eat their food from plates; and when they do so, it is only at
+home. They use the leaf of the plantain or other trees as a substitute.
+To offer them any thing to eat on a metal or earthen plate which others
+have used, would be considered a great affront. For the same reason,
+they will neither use a spoon nor a fork when they eat; and they are
+astonished that any one, after having applied them to their mouths, and
+infected them with saliva, should repeat the act a second time. They
+have a great abhorrence of the toothpick, if used a second time. When
+they eat any thing dry, they throw it into their mouths, so that the
+fingers may not approach the lips.</p>
+
+<p>They do not drink as we do, by applying the cup to the lips. This would
+be considered a gross impropriety. They pour the water into their
+months. The reason why they do these things is, because they consider
+the saliva to be the most filthy secretion that comes from the body. It
+is on this account that no one is ever permitted to spit within doors.</p>
+
+<p>The use of animal food they consider to be defiling. Not only will they
+not eat animal food, but they will eat nothing that has the principle of
+life in it. On this account, they cannot eat eggs of any kind. I was
+once breaking an egg in my medicine-room at Panditeripo, while a Brahmin
+was present. He told me that, under such circumstances, he could not
+remain with me any longer. In his view, I was committing a great sin. To
+kill an ox or a cow, is considered by them as a crime which can never be
+atoned for, and to eat their flesh is a defilement which can never be
+washed away. To kill a cow is, by <i>Hindoo</i> law, punishable with death.</p>
+
+<p>The touch of most animals, particularly that of the dog, defiles a
+Brahmin. Should a dog touch them, they would be obliged instantly to
+plunge into water, and wash their clothes, in order to get rid of such a
+stain. Notwithstanding this, the dog is one of the gods worshipped by
+the Hindoos.</p>
+
+<p>The Hindoos consider themselves to be unclean if they have assisted at a
+funeral. When the ceremony is over, they immediately plunge into water
+for the sake of purification. Even the news of the death of a relative,
+a hundred miles off, has the same effect. The person who hears such news
+is considered unclean until he has bathed. In unison with this feeling,
+a person is no sooner dead, than he is hastened away to be buried or
+burned; for, until this is done, those in the house can neither eat nor
+drink, nor go on with their occupations.</p>
+
+<p>A Brahmin who is particular in his delicacy, must be careful what he
+treads upon. He is obliged to wash his body or bathe, if he happens to
+tread on a bone, or a broken pot, a bit of rag, or a leaf from which one
+has been eating. He must also be careful where he sits down. Some
+devotees always carry their seats with them, that is, a tiger or
+antelope's skin, which are always held pure. Some are contented with a
+mat. They may sit down on the ground without defilement, provided it has
+been newly rubbed over with cow-dung. This last specific is used daily
+to purify their houses from the defilement occasioned by comers, and
+goers. When thus applied, diluted with water, it has unquestionably one
+good effect. It completely destroys the fleas and other insects, with
+which they are very much annoyed.</p>
+
+<p>There is one thing more which I wish to mention. It is, that all the
+high castes consider the use of intoxicating drinks to be defiling. I
+hope that you, my dear children, will always have the same opinion, and
+never touch them any sooner than you would touch arsenic or other
+poisons.</p>
+
+<p>A person may be restored to his caste, provided he has not committed an
+unpardonable offence. This is done as follows. After he has gained the
+consent of his relations to be restored he prostrates himself very
+humbly before them, they being assembled for that purpose, and submits
+to the blows or other punishment which they may think proper to inflict,
+or pays the fine which they may have laid upon him. Then, after
+shedding tears of sorrow, and making promises that, by his future
+conduct, he will wipe away the stain of his expulsion from caste, he
+makes the shaashtaangkum before the assembly. This being done, he is
+declared fit to be restored to his tribe.</p>
+
+<p>When a man has been expelled from his caste for some great offence,
+those who restore him sometimes slightly burn his tongue with a piece of
+gold made hot. They likewise apply to different parts of the body redhot
+iron stamps, which leave marks that remain for ever. Sometimes they
+compel the offender to walk on burning embers; and to complete the
+purification, he must drink the punchakaryam, which literally means the
+<i>five things</i>; these all come from the cow, and must be mixed together.
+The first three of these I will mention, namely, the milk, butter, and
+curds. The other two, for the sake of delicacy, I must not mention.
+After the ceremony of punchakaryam is finished the person who has been
+expelled from his caste must give a grand feast. This finishes all he
+has to do, and he is then restored to favor.</p>
+
+<p>There are certain offences which, when committed cut off all hope that
+the offender will ever be restored to his caste. For instance, should he
+eat the flesh of the cow, no presents which he might make, nor any fines
+which lie might be disposed to pay, no, not even the punchakaryam
+itself, would be of any avail for his restoration or purification.</p>
+
+<p>I will make a remark here, which I might have made before. It is, that
+in Christian countries, there is a spirit of pride which much resembles
+the spirit of caste. Many are to be found who are very proud that they
+have descended from rich and honorable <i>ancestors</i>, and who look down,
+almost with disdain, upon those in other situations. I need hardly tell
+you that this is a very wicked spirit, and entirely opposed to the
+spirit of the Gospel. No matter what may be our high thoughts of
+ourselves, we appear but very low in the sight of Him who created us. We
+are all sinners, and, as such, are offensive in his sight. If we would
+go to heaven, the first thing which we have to do, is to humble
+ourselves for the pride of our hearts, and become as little children
+before him. We must have that spirit of which the apostle speaks, when
+he says, &quot;Let each esteem others better than themselves.&quot; With a humble
+spirit we may approach a holy God, with the assurance that he will, for
+Christ's sake, forgive all our sins.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_IX'></a><h2>CHAPTER IX.</H2>
+
+<h3>HINDOO TEMPLES&mdash;CARS&mdash;PROCESSION OF IDOLS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;I will proceed to give you a description of the Hindoo
+temples. These are very numerous. One is to be found in almost every
+village. They are to be found, also, in out-of-the-way places, distant
+from villages, in woods, on the banks and in the middle of rivers; but,
+above all, on mountains and steep rocks.</p>
+
+<p>This latter practice, of building temples on mountains, is very ancient.
+The Israelites were accustomed to choose a mountain when they offered up
+their sacrifices to the Lord. Solomon, before the building of the
+temple, chose Mount Gibeon on which to offer his burnt-offerings; and
+when the ten tribes separated themselves, in the reign of Jeroboam, they
+built their altars on the mountain of Samaria. This practice may have
+come from the circumstance, that Noah offered to God a great sacrifice
+of thanks on one of the highest mountains of Armenia. Probably Mount
+Ararat continued long to be remembered, by him and his descendants, as
+the scene of their deliverance.</p>
+
+<p>Besides the temples of the idols, there are various objects of worship,
+made of earth and stone. Some of the idols are carved. Some consist
+merely of the rough stone. These are to be seen on the high-roads, at
+the entrance into villages, and, above all, under lofty trees. Some of
+these are covered; but generally they are exposed in the open air.</p>
+
+<p>You will read in Genesis, 28th chap, and 18th verse, that Jacob, after
+his dream, rose up early in the morning and took the stone that he had
+put for his pillow, and set it up for a pillar, and poured oil upon the
+top of it. Whether it has happened from this circumstance or not, that
+the heathen universally pour oil over their idols, I cannot tell. All I
+know is, that they do it. No idol can become an object of worship until
+a Brahmin has said his muntrums, or prayers, for the purpose of bringing
+down the god to live, as it is said be does, in the image, and until he
+has drenched it with oil and liquid butter.</p>
+
+<p>The idols, in the great temples, are clothed with rich garments, and
+adorned with jewels, which are enriched with precious stones of immense
+value. Sacrifices are constantly made to these idols, consisting of
+boiled rice, flowers, fruits, etc., but, above all, of lamps, of which
+many thousands are sometimes seen burning. They feed them with butter,
+in preference to oil.</p>
+
+<p>The priests of the temples offer up sacrifices twice every day, morning
+and evening. They begin the ceremony by washing their idol. The water
+which is used is brought from a river or tank. Every morning a
+procession, with music, passes before our door, with this water.</p>
+
+<p>Every priest who offers up sacrifices, must have several lighted lamps
+with a bell, which he holds in his left hand. With his right hand he
+makes an offering to the idol, adorns it with flowers, and rubs its
+forehead and various parts of its body with sandal-wood and holy ashes.
+While all this is going on, he is alone in the temple, the door of which
+is closed. The unholy multitude remain without, silently waiting till
+he has done. What he does, they cannot know, only hearing the sound of
+the bell. When he has done, he comes out and distributes among the
+people a part of the things which have been offered to the idol. These
+are considered as holy. If they consist of rice and fruit, they are
+immediately eaten; if of flowers, the men put them in their turbans, and
+the girls entwine them in their hair.</p>
+
+<p>Next to the priests, the most important persons about the temples are
+the dancing girls. These are persons of the vilest character. They
+perform their religious duties in the temple twice a day. They also
+assist at the public ceremonies, and dance. At the same time they sing
+the most abominable and filthy songs. Of these wicked creatures,
+however, I must not tell you any thing further.</p>
+
+<p>The next order of persons employed in the temples, are players on
+musical instruments. Every temple of note has a band of these musicians
+who, as well as the dancers, are obliged to attend the temple twice a
+day. They are also obliged to assist at all the public festivals. Their
+band generally consists of wind, instruments, resembling clarionets and
+hautboys, to which they add cymbals and drums. They have a bass,
+produced by blowing into a kind of tube, widened below, and which gives
+an uninterrupted sound. Part of the musicians sing hymns in honor of
+their gods.</p>
+
+<p>The expenses of the temples are borne by the voluntary offerings of the
+people, consisting of money, jewels, cattle, provisions, and other
+articles. In order to induce them to make such offerings, the Brahmins
+use all kinds of deception. Sometimes they will put their idols in
+irons, chaining their hands and feet. They exhibit them in this sad
+condition, declaring that they have been brought into it by creditors
+from whom their gods had to borrow money, in times of trouble, to supply
+their wants. They declare that their creditors refuse to set the gods at
+liberty, until the money with the interest is paid. The people, seeing
+the deplorable condition into which they have been brought, come forward
+and pay off the debt; when the chains are taken off, and the god is set
+at liberty.</p>
+
+<p>Another way in which the Brahmins sometimes deceive the people, is as
+follows. They say that the god is afflicted with some dreadful disease,
+brought on by the distress which he has had, because the people do not
+worship him as much as they should. In such cases, the idol is sometimes
+placed at the door of the temple where they rub his forehead and temples
+with various kinds of medicine. They also set before him all sorts of
+medicines, pretending in this way to do all they can to cure him. But as
+all their efforts prove to be vain, and the disease becomes worse, the
+Brahmins send out persons to tell the sad news. The people, believing
+the report, hasten to bring in their gifts and offerings. The god, on
+beholding such proofs of their attachment to him, feels himself cured of
+his disease, and immediately returns to his throne within the temple.</p>
+
+<p>The Brahmins use another kind of deception, in order to procure
+offerings for the temples. They declare that their gods are angry with
+certain individuals who have offended them, and that they have sent some
+evil spirit or devil to take possession of their bodies and torment
+them. Accordingly, persons appear wandering about in different parts of
+the country, showing, by their dreadful convulsions, their writhings
+and twistings, every symptom of being possessed with the devil. The
+people who see them are filled with dismay, fall down before them, and
+offer gifts and sacrifices, for fear of being injured by them. Whatever
+they ask is granted. The people give them to eat and drink abundantly;
+and when they leave a place, accompany them with instruments of music,
+till they arrive at some other place, where the same deception is
+practised.</p>
+
+<p>There are various other ways in which the Brahmins deceive the people;
+but I have told you enough.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/069.gif' width='567' height='495' alt='Temple' title='Temple'>
+</center>
+
+<p>At every large temple, there is at least yearly one grand procession.
+The idol is brought out from its inclosure, and placed in a great car or
+chariot, prepared for this express purpose. This stands upon four wheels
+of great strength, not made like ours, of spokes with a rim, but of
+three or four pieces of thick, solid timber, rounded and fitted to each
+other. The car is sometimes forty or fifty feet high, having upon it
+carved images of a most abominable nature. I must not tell you any thing
+about them. The car, when finished, presents somewhat the shape of a
+pyramid.</p>
+
+<img src='images/070.gif' width='330' height='431' align='right' alt='Idol' title='Idol'>
+
+<p>On the day of the procession, it is adorned with painted cloth, garlands
+of flowers, green shrubbery, and precious stuffs. The idol is placed in
+the centre, loaded with jewels, etc., to attract the attention of the
+people. Having fastened ropes to this enormous car, eight or nine
+hundred or a thousand people catch hold of the ropes and slowly drag it
+along, accompanied with the awful roaring of their voices. At certain
+periods they stop; when the immense crowds, collected from all parts of
+the country, set up one universal shout, or rather yell. This, with the
+sound of their instruments and numerous drums, produces much uproar and
+confusion. Sometimes the weighty car comes to a stand, from the dampness
+of the ground or from the narrowness of the streets, when the tumult and
+noise are redoubled.</p>
+
+<img src='images/071.gif' width='340' height='475' align='left' alt='Pulliar' title='Pulliar'>
+
+<p>Perhaps you know that on some occasions, when the cars are drawn, people
+throw themselves under the wheels, and are crushed to death. This occurs
+at the drawing of the car of Juggernaut, as you may learn if you will
+read my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen. Here is a
+picture of Juggernaut, and on the last page you may see a picture of his
+car, and two men crushed to death under the wheels. Not long since, five
+persons were thus crushed to death. Many dreadful accidents also take
+place at the drawing of these cars. A few years ago several persons in
+this city had their limbs amputated, in consequence of injuries
+received.</p>
+
+<p>When I was in America, I showed to many of the dear children an idol
+called Pulliar, which was <i>formerly</i> worshipped by Raamu, one of our
+native helpers, when he was a heathen. I gave a particular description,
+of the I manner in which he daily worshiped it, in the sermon above
+mentioned Here is a picture, which will give you some idea of this god.</p>
+
+<p>You will see that it is partly in the shape of a man, and partly in the
+shape of a beast. You, my dear children, would put no confidence in such
+vain idols; but this people do, as you may know from what I am now going
+to tell you.</p>
+
+<p>Some months ago, a woman was brought to me with a cancer in her breast.
+It had made sad ravages. On the morning after her arrival I took it out.
+Before she was brought to me, her brother went to the temple of the
+goddess Meenaache, to ascertain what was her will respecting his
+bringing her to me, or taking her to a native doctor. In order to
+ascertain it, he had recourse to the following expedient. He prepared
+several bundles of red and white flowers&mdash;the red to represent the red
+or Tamil man, the white to represent the white man. These flowers were
+carefully inclosed in leaves, so as to prevent their color being seen,
+and then laid down on the ground, at the entrance of the temple. After
+this, he called a little child to him, and then proceeded to entreat
+Meenaache that, if it were her will that he should bring the sick woman
+to me, she would direct the child to take up one of the parcels
+containing the white flowers. It so happened that the child took up one
+of these parcels. Of course, he brought her to me. Had it taken up a
+parcel containing the red flowers, she would have been taken to a native
+doctor. May we not hope that, not Meenaache, but Jehovah directed him
+to bring her to me, that she might hear of a very different being from
+her goddess, even of Jesus. Of him she has fully heard.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_X'></a><h2>CHAPTER X.</H2>
+
+<h3>FESTIVALS OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The Hindoos have many festivals. These are all
+occasions of joy and gladness. On such days, the people quit their usual
+employments. Friends and relations unite in family parties, and give
+entertainments according to their means. Innocent pastimes and
+amusements of various kinds are resorted too to add to their happiness.</p>
+
+<p>There are eighteen principal festivals yearly, and no month passes
+without one or more of them.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most solemn of these ceremonies is held in the month of
+September, and appears to be principally in honor of Parvathe, the wife
+of Siva. At this time every laborer and every artisan offers sacrifices
+and prayers to his tools. The laborer brings his plough, hoe, and other
+farming utensils. He piles them together, and offers a sacrifice to
+them, consisting of flowers, fruit, rice, and other articles. After
+this, he prostrates himself before them at full length, and then returns
+them to their places.</p>
+
+<p>The mason offers the same adoration and sacrifice to his trowel, rule,
+and other instruments The carpenter adores his hatchet, adze, and plane.
+The barber collects his razors together and worships them with similar
+rites.</p>
+
+<p>The writing-master sacrifices to the iron pen or style, with which he
+writes upon the palm-leaf the tailor to his needles, the weaver to his
+loom, the butcher to his cleaver.</p>
+
+<p>The women, on this day, collect into a heap their baskets, rice-mill,
+rice-pounder, and other household utensils, and, after having offered
+sacrifices to them, fall down in adoration before them. Every person, in
+short, in this solemnity sanctifies and adores the instrument or tool by
+which he gains a living. The tools are considered as so many gods, to
+whom they present their prayers that they will continue to furnish them
+still with the means of getting a livelihood.</p>
+
+<p>This least is concluded by making an idol to represent Parvathe. It is
+made of the paste of grain, and being placed under a sort of canopy, is
+carried through the streets with great pomp, and receives the worship of
+the people.</p>
+
+<p>Another festival of great celebrity is observed in October. At this
+time, each person, for himself, makes offerings of boiled rice and other
+food, to such of their relations as have died, that they may have a good
+meal on that day. They afterwards offer sacrifices of burning lamps, of
+fruit, and of flowers, and also new articles of dress, that their
+ancestors may be freshly clothed.</p>
+
+<p>At this festival, soldiers offer sacrifices to their weapons, in order
+to obtain success in war. On such occasions, a ram is offered in
+sacrifice to their armor.</p>
+
+<p>In November, a festival is observed, which is called the feast of lamps.
+At this season, the Hindoos light lamps, and place them around the doors
+of their houses. This festival was established to commemorate the
+deliverance of the earth from a giant, who had been a great scourge to
+the people. He was slain by Vrishnoo, after a dreadful battle. In many
+places, on this day, a sacrifice is offered to the <i>dunghill</i> which is
+afterwards to enrich the ground. In the villages, each one has his own
+heap, to which he makes his offering of burning lamps, fruit, flowers,
+etc.</p>
+
+<p>The most celebrated of all the festivals, is that which is held in the
+end of December. It is called the feast of Pongul, and is a season of
+rejoicing for two reasons: the first is, because the month of December,
+every day of which is unlucky, is about to end; and the other is,
+because it is to be followed by a month, every day of which is
+fortunate. For the purpose of preventing the evil effects of this month,
+the women every morning scour a place about two feet square before the
+door of the house, upon which they draw white lines, with flour. Upon
+these they place several little balls of cow-dung, sticking in each a
+flower. Each day these little balls, with their flowers, are preserved,
+and on the last day of the month, they are thrown into tanks or
+waste-places.</p>
+
+<p>The first day of this festival is called the Pongul of rejoicing. Near
+relatives are invited to a feast, which passes off with mirth and
+gladness.</p>
+
+<p>The second day is called the Pongul of the sun, and is set apart to
+worship that luminary. Married women, after bathing themselves, proceed
+to boil rice with milk, in the open air. When the milk begins to
+simmer, they make a loud cry, &quot;Pongul, O Pongul.&quot; The vessel is then
+taken from the fire, and set before an idol. Part of this rice is
+offered to the image, and, after standing there for some time, it is
+given to the cows. The remainder is given to the people. This is the
+great day for visiting among friends. The salutation begins by the
+question, &quot;Has the milk boiled?&quot; To which the answer is, &quot;It has
+boiled.&quot; From this, the festival takes the name of pongul, which
+signifies to boil.</p>
+
+<p>The third day is called the <i>Pongul of cows.</i> In a great vessel, filled
+with water, they put saffron and other things. These being well mixed,
+they go around the cows and oxen belonging to the house several times,
+sprinkling them with water. After this, the men prostrate themselves
+before them four times. The cows are then dressed, their horns being
+painted with various colors. Garlands of flowers are also put round
+their necks, and over their backs. To these are added strings of
+cocoa-nuts and other kinds of fruit, which, however, are soon shaken
+off, when they are in motion, and are picked up by children and others,
+who greedily eat what they gather, as something sacred. After being
+driven through the streets, they are suffered, during the day, to feed
+wherever they please, without a keeper. I have, however, told you
+enough. Are you ready to exclaim, Is it possible that a people can be
+guilty of such utter folly? But you, my dear children, would be guilty
+of just such folly, if you had not the Bible. Should not the gratitude,
+then, which you owe to your heavenly Father, for your distinguished
+mercies, constrain you to do all that you can to send this blessed book
+to this dark land?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XI'></a><h2>CHAPTER XI.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE WORSHIP OF THE SERPENT.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;If you have never heard much about the Hindoos, you
+will be astonished to learn how numerous are the objects of their
+worship. They worship many living creatures, such as the ape, the tiger,
+the elephant the horse, the ox, the stag, the sheep, the hog, the dog,
+the cat, the rat, the peacock, the eagle, the cock, the hawk, the
+serpent, the chameleon, the lizard, the tortoise, fishes, and even
+insects. Of these, some receive much more worship than others, such as
+the cow, the ox, and the serpent Cobra Capella. I will speak at present
+only of the worship of the serpent.</p>
+
+<p>Of all the dangerous creatures found in India, there are none that
+occasion so many deaths as serpents. The people are very much exposed to
+their bite, especially at night, when they are walking. They tread upon
+them, and, as they generally do not wear shoes, the snakes turn their
+heads, and strike their fangs into those parts of the feet which are
+nearest to the place where the pressure is made upon their bodies.
+Sometimes the bite is followed with instant death. The Cobra Capella is
+one of the most common snakes, and one of the most poisonous. It is
+said, that it has a thousand heads, one of which holds up the earth. It
+has a peculiar mark on its back, just behind the head. This mark very
+much resembles a pair of spectacles, without the handles. If you should
+go near it, it would raise the fore part of its body about six inches,
+widen out its neck, so as to be about double its common width, and
+prepare to strike you. The reason why the Hindoos offer sacrifices and
+adoration to it above all the other serpents is, because it is so
+frequently met with, and is so much dreaded.</p>
+
+<p>In order to induce the people to worship this dangerous enemy, the
+Hindoos have filled their books with tales concerning it. Figures of it
+are often to be seen in the temples, and on other buildings. They seek
+out their holes, which are generally to be found in the hillocks of
+earth which are thrown up by the white ants; and when they find one,
+they go from time to time and offer milk, plantains, and other good
+things to it.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/081.gif' width='557' height='504' alt='' title=''>
+</center>
+
+<p>The Hindoos, as I before observed, have eighteen annual festivals. One
+of these festivals is held for the purpose of worshipping this serpent.
+Temples in many places are erected to it, of which there is one of great
+celebrity in Mysore. When the festival occurs at this temple, great
+crowds of people come together to offer sacrifices to this creeping god.
+Many serpents besides the Cobra Capella live within it, in holes made
+especially for them. All of these are kept and well fed by the Brahmins
+with milk, butter, and plantains. By such means they become very
+numerous, and may be seen swarming from every crevice in the temple. To
+injure or to kill one would be considered a great crime.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the natives call the Cobra Capella nulla paampu, that is, good
+snake. They are afraid to call it a bad snake, lest it should injure
+them. The following is the prayer which is offered before the image of
+this snake. O, divine Cobra, preserve and sustain us. O, Sheoh, partake
+of these offerings, and be gracious unto us.</p>
+
+<p>Can you think of any thing, my dear children more dishonoring to a holy
+God, than such worship? And what have you ever done to prevent it? Have
+you, every morning and evening, prayed that the Gospel might be sent to
+this people? Did you ever give any money to send it to them? Did you
+ever think whether it may not be your duty, by and by, to come to them,
+to tell them of this Gospel?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XII.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE RIVER GANGES.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;If you will look at the map of Asia, and find the
+country of Hindostan, you will see running through it a very celebrated
+river&mdash;the river Ganges. It is called the Ganges, after the goddess
+Gunga. The Hindoos say that the goddess Gungu&mdash;who was produced from the
+sweat of Vrishnoo's foot, which Brumha caught and preserved in his
+alms-dish&mdash;came down from heaven, and divided herself into one hundred
+streams, which are the mouths of the river Ganges. All classes and
+castes worship her. The sight, the name, or the touch of the river
+Ganges is said to take away all sin. To die on the edge of the river, or
+to die partly buried in the stream, drinking its waters, while their
+bodies are besmeared with mud, is supposed to render them very holy. On
+this account, when it is expected that a person will die, he is hurried
+down to the river, whether willing or unwilling. Sometimes the wood
+which the people bring to burn their bodies after death, is piled up
+before their eyes. O, how inhuman is this. After it is supposed that
+they are dead, and they are placed on the pile of wood, if they should
+revive and attempt to rise, it is thought that they are possessed with
+the devil, and they are beaten down with a hatchet or bamboo.</p>
+
+<p>Were you standing on the banks of the Ganges you might, perhaps, in one
+place see two or three young men carrying a sick female to the river. If
+you should ask what they are going to do with her, perhaps they would
+reply, We are going to give her up to Gunga, to purify her soul, that
+she may go to heaven; for she is our mother. In another place you might
+see a father and mother sprinkling a beloved child with muddy water,
+endeavoring to soothe his dying agonies by saying, &quot;It is blessed to die
+by Gunga, my son; to die by Gunga is blessed, my son.&quot; In another place
+you might see a man descending from a boat with empty water-pans tied
+around his neck, which pans, when filled, will drag down the poor
+creature to the bottom, to be seen no more. Here is murder in the name
+of religion. He is a devotee, and has purchased heaven, as he supposes,
+by this his last good deed. In another place you might see a person
+seated in the water, accompanied by a priest, who pours down the throat
+of the dying man mud and water, and cries out, &quot;O mother Gunga, receive
+his soul.&quot; The dying man may be roused to sensibility by the violence.
+He may entreat his priest to desist; but his entreaties are drowned. He
+persists in pouring the mud and water down his throat, until he is
+gradually stifled, suffocated&mdash;suffocated in the name of
+humanity&mdash;suffocated in the name of religion.</p>
+
+<p>It happens, sometimes, in cases of sudden and violent attacks of
+disease, that they cannot be conveyed to the river before death. Under
+such circumstances, a bone is preserved, and at a convenient season is
+taken down and thrown into the river. This, it is believed, contributes
+essentially to the salvation of the deceased.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes strangers are left on the banks to die, without the ceremony
+of drinking Ganges water. Of these, some have been seen creeping along
+with the flesh half eaten off their bones by the birds; others with
+their limbs torn by dogs and jackals, and others partly covered with
+insects.</p>
+
+<p>After a person is taken down to the river, if he should recover, it is
+looked upon by his friends as a great misfortune. He becomes an outcast.
+Even his own children will not eat with him, nor offer him the least
+attention. If they should happen to touch him, they must wash their
+bodies, to cleanse them from the pollution which has been contracted.
+About fifty miles north of Calcutta, are two villages inhabited entirely
+by these poor creatures, who have become outcasts in consequence of
+their recovery after having been taken down to the Ganges.</p>
+
+<p>At the mouth of the river Hoogly, which is one of the branches of the
+Ganges, is the island Sauger, which I saw as we approached Calcutta
+after having been at sea for one hundred and twenty-eight days. Now, my
+dear children, if you come out to India as missionaries, you will have
+to sail nearly one hundred and thirty days before you can reach it.
+Sauger island is the island where, formerly, hundreds of mothers were in
+the habit of throwing their children to the crocodiles, and where these
+mothers were wont to weep and cry if the crocodiles did not devour their
+children before their eyes. Think what a dreadful religion that must
+be, which makes mothers so hard-hearted. Did you ever take any corn or
+Indian meal and throw it to the chickens? And what did these chickens
+do? Did they not come around you and eat it? Well, just in this way the
+crocodiles would come near those mothers, and devour their children.
+Here is a picture of a mother throwing her child to a crocodile.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/087.gif' width='534' height='478' alt='' title=''>
+</center>
+
+<p>I am glad to tell you, that the British have put a stop to the sacrifice
+of children at that place; but mothers continue to destroy their
+children elsewhere, and will continue to destroy them until Christians
+send the Gospel to them. It is not improbable that vast numbers of
+children are annually destroyed in the Ganges. Mothers sacrifice them,
+in consequence of vows which they have made. When the time to sacrifice
+them has come, they take them down to the river, and encourage them to
+go out so far that they are taken away by the stream, or they push them
+off with their own hands.</p>
+
+<p>I just remarked, that mothers will continue to destroy their children
+until the Gospel is sent to them. That the Gospel does prevent such
+things, the following circumstance will show. Several years ago, a
+missionary lady went from New England to India. As she was walking out
+one morning, on the banks of the Ganges, she saw a heathen mother
+weeping. She went up to her, sat down by her side, put her hand into
+hers, and asked what was the matter with her. &quot;I have just been making a
+basket of flags,&quot; said she, &quot;and putting my infant in it&mdash;pushing it off
+into the river, and drowning it. And my gods are very much pleased with
+me, because I have done it.&quot; After this missionary lady had heard all
+she had to say, she told her that her gods were no gods; that the only
+true God delights not in such sacrifices, but turns in horror from them;
+and that, if she would be happy here and hereafter, she must forsake her
+sins, and pray to Jesus Christ, who died to save sinners like herself.
+This conversation was the means of the conversion of that mother, and
+she never again destroyed any of her infants.</p>
+
+<p>Such is the power of the blessed Gospel. And what the Gospel has done
+once, it can do again. If Christians will send it to them, with the
+blessing of God, the time will soon come when heathen mothers will no
+more destroy their children. And have you nothing to do in this great
+work, my dear children? When you grow up, cannot you go and tell them of
+the Saviour? Here is a very pretty hymn about a heathen mother throwing
+her child to a crocodile.</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>See that heathen mother stand<br /></span>
+<span>Where the sacred currents flow,<br /></span>
+<span>With her own maternal hand,<br /></span>
+<span>'Mid the waves her infant throw.<br /></span>
+</div><div class='stanza'>
+<span>Hark, I hear the piteous scream&mdash;<br /></span>
+<span>Frightful monsters seize their prey,<br /></span>
+<span>Or the dark and bloody stream<br /></span>
+<span>Bears the struggling child away.<br /></span>
+</div><div class='stanza'>
+<span>Fainter now, and fainter still,<br /></span>
+<span>Breaks the cry upon the ear;<br /></span>
+<span>But the mother's heart is steel,<br /></span>
+<span>She unmoved that cry can hear.<br /></span>
+</div><div class='stanza'>
+<span>Send, O send the Bible there,<br /></span>
+<span>Let its precepts reach the heart;<br /></span>
+<span>She may then her children spare,<br /></span>
+<span>Act the mother's tender part.<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>I have heard of a little boy who learned this hymn. He was deeply
+affected by it, and wanted very much to give something to send the
+Gospel to India. But he had no money. He was, however, willing to labor
+in order to earn some. Hearing that a gentleman wanted the chips removed
+from the ground near his woodpile, he hired himself to him, removed the
+chips, got his money, and, with glistening eyes, went and delivered it
+up, to be sent to the heathen, repeating, as he went,</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>Send, O send the Bible there,<br /></span>
+<span>Let its precepts reach the heart;<br /></span>
+<span>She may then her children spare,<br /></span>
+<span>Act the mother's tender part.<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>About one hundred miles above the mouth of the Hoogly is the city of
+Calcutta, and about five hundred miles above that city is the city of
+Benares. In these cities, as well as in other places, we see how much
+the heathen will contribute to support their wretched religion. A rich
+native in Calcutta has been known to spend more than one hundred
+thousand dollars on a single festival&mdash;the festival of the goddess
+Karle&mdash;and more than thirty thousand dollars every year afterwards
+during his life, for the same purpose. Not long since, a rich native
+gave at one time to his idols more than one million two hundred thousand
+dollars. And what have Christians ever done to honor their Saviour,
+which will bear a comparison with what the heathen do for their idols?
+Alas, alas, few Christian men or Christian women, in all the church, are
+willing to give even one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Most
+of those who are rich, hoard up their money, instead of spending it for
+the purpose of saving souls. And there are many persons who have never
+given a farthing to send the Gospel to the heathen. O, what will such
+say, when they must meet the heathen at the bar of God?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XIII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XIII.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE GODDESS DURGA.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;From what I said, in my last chapter, about the
+goddess Gunga, you see that the Hindoos worship goddesses as well as
+gods. There is another goddess much worshipped the wife of the god Siva.
+She has appeared in a thousand forms, with a thousand different names.
+Of all these thousand forms, Durga and Karle are the most regarded by
+the people. I will speak of Durga first. Of all the festivals in Eastern
+India, hers is the most celebrated. She has ten hands, in which she
+holds an iron club, a trident, a battle-axe, spears, thunderbolts, etc.
+Thus armed, she is ever ready to fight with her enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Were you to be present in the city of Calcutta in the month of
+September, you might everywhere see the people busy in preparing for the
+yearly festival of this goddess. Images representing her you would find
+in great numbers for sale, as bread or meat is sold. In the houses of
+the rich, images are to be found made of gold, silver, brass, copper,
+crystal, stone, or mixed metal, which are daily worshipped. These are
+called permanent images. Besides these, multitudes of what are called
+temporary images are made&mdash;made merely for the occasion and then
+destroyed. They may be made of hay, sticks, clay, wood, or other such
+things. Their size varies from a few inches to twenty feet in height. If
+any persons are too poor to buy one of these images, they can make them
+for themselves. When the festival is near at hand, people are seen in
+every direction taking the images to their houses. After they are thus
+supplied, the festival commences. It lasts fifteen days. The greater
+part of this time is spent in preparing for the three great days of
+worship. Early on the morning of the first of the three great days, the
+Brahmins proceed to consecrate the images, or to give them, as they
+suppose, life and understanding. Until they are consecrated, they are
+not thought to be of any value. They are looked upon as senseless. A
+wealthy family can always receive the services of one or more Brahmins,
+and a few of the poor may unite and secure the services of one of them.
+At length the solemn hour arrives. The Brahmin, with the leaves of a
+sacred tree, comes near the image. With the two forefingers of his
+right hand he touches the breast, the two cheeks, the eyes, and the
+forehead of the image, at each touch saying the prayer, &quot;Let the spirit
+of Durga descend and take possession of this image.&quot; By such ceremonies,
+and by repeating various <i>muntrums</i>, it is supposed that the Brahmins
+have the power to bring down the goddess to take possession of the
+image. Having been thus consecrated, it is believed to be a proper
+object of worship. Having eyes, it can now behold every act of worship
+which is made; having ears, it can be delighted with music and with
+songs; having a nose, it can smell the sweet perfumes which are offered;
+having a mouth, it can be delighted with the rich food which is prepared
+for it.</p>
+
+<p>After the image is consecrated, the worship begins. The devotee comes
+near the image, and falls down before it. He then twists himself into a
+great variety of shapes. Sometimes he sits on the floor, sometimes he
+stands, sometimes he looks in one direction, sometimes in another. Then
+he sprinkles the idol with holy water, rinses its mouth, washes its
+feet, wipes it with a dry cloth, throws flowers over it, puts jewels on
+it, offers perfumes to it, and finishes by performing shaashtaangkum.</p>
+
+<p>The worship of the idol is succeeded by a season of carousing, joy, and
+festivity. On this occasion, large offerings are made to the idols. A
+rich native has been known to offer eighty thousand pounds of
+sweetmeats, eighty thousand pounds of sugar, a thousand suits of cloth
+garments, a thousand suits of silk, a thousand offerings of rice,
+plantains, and other fruits.</p>
+
+<p>Bloody sacrifices are offered up on such occasions. The king of Nudiya,
+some time ago, offered a large number of sheep, goats, and buffaloes on
+the first day of the feast, and vowed to double the offering every day;
+so that the whole number sacrificed amounted to more than sixty-five
+thousand. You may remember that king Solomon offered up on one occasion
+twenty-two thousand oxen, and a hundred and twenty thousand sheep. If
+all the animals slain throughout Hindostan, at the festival of the
+goddess Durga, were collected together, they would amount to a much
+larger number than Solomon offered.</p>
+
+<p>After the worship and offerings have been continued for three days, the
+festival closes. As the morning of the first day was devoted to the
+consecration of the images, the morning of the fourth is spent in
+unconsecrating them. This work is done by the Brahmins. They profess, by
+various ceremonies, to send back the goddess to her heaven, concluding
+with a farewell address, in which they tell her that they expect her to
+accept of all their services, and return and pay them a visit again in
+the coming year. Then all unite in bidding her a sorrowful adieu, and
+many seem affected even to the shedding of tears.</p>
+
+<p>Soon afterwards the images are carried forth into the streets, placed on
+stages or platforms, and raised on men's shoulders. As the procession
+moves onward through the streets, accompanied with music and songs, amid
+clouds of dust, you might see them waving long hairy brushes to wipe off
+the dust, and to keep off the flies and mosquitoes, which might trouble
+the senseless images. But where are these processions going? To the
+banks of the Ganges. And for what purpose? For the purpose of casting
+the images into the river. When all the ceremonies connected with the
+occasion are finished, those who carry the images suddenly fall upon
+them, break them to pieces, and then throw them with violence into the
+river. After this the people return to their homes.</p>
+
+<p>I have now given you a specimen of the image-worship of the Hindoos; and
+how different is it from the worship which the Bible enjoins. &quot;God is a
+Spirit; and they who worship him, must worship him in spirit and in
+truth.&quot; The very reverse of this, as you have seen, marks the worship of
+the heathen. They are not satisfied, unless they can have some object
+before them, to which they can make their offerings and their prayers.
+Thus daily are they engaged in a service which, above all others, is the
+most offensive and provoking to a holy God&mdash;a service which has caused
+him to declare, that idolaters shall not enter the kingdom of heaven.
+This, too, is the service in which every person, who has never given
+himself to the Saviour, is engaged; and, of course, in which you are
+engaged if you have not given your hearts to him. Those who think more
+of their money than they think of Christ, just as certainly worship the
+image which is stamped on a dollar or a cent, as the heathen worship
+their idols. Those who love their fathers and mothers, and brothers and
+sisters more than Christ, make these their idols. And are you, my dear
+children, yet out of Christ? If so, you have your idols. And what are
+these idols? Are they the world and its vanities? Then God is as angry
+with you as he is with the heathen, and unless you give up these idols,
+you too must be lost.</p>
+
+<p>In a tract of mine, published by the American Tract Society, entitled,
+&quot;Knocking at the Door&quot;&mdash;a tract which I <i>most earnestly</i> entreat you to
+get and read&mdash;you will find an account of the death of a young lady, who
+had chosen the world and its vanities as her idols. I was her physician.
+After having attended her for about a month, I perceived, one morning,
+that her disease must soon prove fatal. I told her that she could not
+live. She then exclaimed, &quot;Doctor, can I not live a month?&quot; I informed
+her that she could not. Again she exclaimed, &quot;Can I not live two weeks?&quot;
+She was told that she could not live two weeks. And such a scene of
+horror followed as I never before witnessed, and may God be pleased to
+grant that I may never witness such another. Until laid upon a dying
+bed, I fear that she had neglected to think about her soul's concerns.
+Now she requested to be taken from it, and placed upon her knees, that
+she might call upon God to have mercy upon her. As her case excited much
+attention, some of the youth came to see her. These she warned, in the
+most solemn manner, not to put off repentance, as she had done, to a
+dying hour. Looking up at me, on one occasion, she exclaimed, &quot;Doctor,
+cannot you save me?&quot; Alas, what could I do for the poor sufferer.
+Witness, now, how anxious she was to obtain the favor of that God whom
+she had hitherto neglected. Yes, so anxious that she requested her
+friends not to allow her to sleep, that she might spend every remaining
+breath in calling upon God to have mercy upon her. One very affecting
+circumstance occurred. She requested her trunk either to be brought to
+her bedside, or to be opened. From this a ring, which was set with red
+garnets, was taken out by herself, or by another, and handed to her. She
+then called a young friend to her bedside, put the ring upon her finger,
+and said to her, &quot;Don't you put off repentance, as I have done, until a
+dying hour.&quot; That ring is now in my possession. In less than forty-eight
+hours after I told her that she could not live, she passed into
+eternity. Would that I could show you that mournful countenance, which
+continued long after the last spark of life had become extinct; yes,
+even up to the moment when the lid of her coffin for ever hid it from
+our view. Never, never shall I forget it. It was a sad monument of the
+wreck within.</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear children, you would not like to die as, I fear, this young
+lady died. Well, then, if you would die differently, you must live
+differently. You must live for Christ, if you would die in Christ. And
+are you Christ's, or are you yet gay and thoughtless&mdash;as gay and as
+thoughtless as this young lady was, until laid upon her dying bed? If
+you are so, and if you continue to remain in this sad condition, your
+season of sorrow too will certainly come, and it will come when you
+expect it not. As the little insect which flies round and round your
+candle is dazzled with its brightness, and feels nothing but pleasure,
+until it unconsciously strikes the blaze with its little wings, and is
+swallowed up in the flame; so you are dazzled with the pleasures of the
+world, thinking nothing of the flames which may swallow you up in a
+moment, and put a stop to all your joys for ever. O, that the death-bed
+scene of Miss Matthews might have a happy effect upon you. O, that the
+solemn warning which she gave to her young friend, not to put off
+repentance as she had done, until a dying hour, might continue to sound
+in your ears, until you would no longer delay repentance. My dear
+children, this young lady, though dead, yet speaketh. She speaks to you.
+She calls upon you from her tomb&mdash;from the eternal world, to delay
+repentance no longer. Will you, then, be so mad as to turn a deaf ear to
+this call? Will you ever take another sip from the cup of unhallowed
+pleasure? Will you ever direct your little feet to the ballroom, or
+other places of sinful amusement? Will you hereafter prefer your worldly
+joys to Christ? O, you must not, you must not. It will not do for you to
+be lost. Who, O who can lie down in everlasting burnings? Who can dwell
+for ever with devouring flames?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XIV'></a><h2>CHAPTER XIV.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE GODDESS KARLE.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;In the preceding chapter I spoke of Karle. She, as I
+there mentioned, is the wife of Siva, and, like her husband, has the
+power of destruction. From the images made of her, it would appear that
+she is a female, of a black or dark blue color. She has four arms. In
+one hand she holds a sword, and in another a human head. Her hair is
+dishevelled, reaching down to her feet. Her countenance is most
+ferocious. Her tongue comes out of her mouth, and hangs over her chin.
+She has three eyes, red and fiery. Her lips and eyebrows are streaked
+with blood. She has two dead bodies for ear-rings, and wears a girdle
+around her loins&mdash;a girdle made of bloody hands, which she cut off from
+the bodies of her enemies. She has a necklace of skulls, which she took
+from the bodies of the giants and others killed by her.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/103.gif' width='557' height='471' alt='' title=''>
+</center>
+
+<p>Of all the Hindoo divinities, this goddess is the most cruel and
+revengeful. Such is her thirst for blood, that being unable at one time
+to procure any giants for her prey, in order to quench her thirst, she
+cut her own throat, that the blood issuing thence might spout into her
+mouth. Different acts of worship are performed to appease her. If, for
+example, a devotee should burn his body, by applying a burning lamp to
+it, it would be very pleasing to her. If he should draw some of his
+blood and give it to her, or if he should cut off a piece of his flesh
+and offer it as a burnt-offering, she would be still move pleased. If he
+should present <i>whole</i> burnt-offerings upon the altar, saying, &quot;Hrang,
+brang, Karle, Karle! O, horrid-toothed goddess, eat, eat; destroy all
+the malignant: cut with this axe; bind, bind; seize, seize; drink this
+blood; spheng, spheng; secure, secure; salutation to Karle,&quot; she would
+be much delighted. It is said that she will be pleased for three months,
+if the people offer her the blood of a crocodile&mdash;for a thousand years,
+if they offer her the blood of one man, and a hundred thousand years, if
+they offer her the blood of three.</p>
+
+<p>This goddess is the patroness of thieves. To her they pay their
+devotions, to obtain help to carry on their wicked delights. Gangs meet
+together, and, after having offered bloody sacrifices, and worshipped
+their weapons, and having drunk some intoxicating liquor, and rubbed
+their bodies with oil, they go forth to rob. They have a prayer, which
+they offer when they worship their weapons. It is as follows: &quot;O,
+instrument formed by the goddess, Karle commands thee to cut a passage
+into the house, to cut through stones, bones, bricks, wood, the earth,
+and mountains, and cause the dust thereof to be carried away by the
+wind.&quot; Scattered throughout India, there is a lawless set of men whose
+profession it is to get their food by murder. They are called
+Phansiagars, or Thugs. They owe their origin and laws to Karle. They say
+that she told them to become murderers and plunderers. They are called
+Phansiagars, from the name of the instrument which they use when they
+murder people. Phansiagar means a strangler, and they use a phansi, or
+noose, which they throw over the necks of those whom they intend to
+plunder, and strangle them. These Phansiagars are composed of all
+castes, Hindoos, Mahommedans, pariahs, and chandellars. This arises from
+the circumstance that they never destroy the children of those whom they
+rob and murder. These children they take care of, and bring up to their
+own horrible mode of life. They always murder those whom they rob,
+acting upon the maxim that &quot;dead men tell no tales.&quot; A gang of these
+robbers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy persons. These divide
+into small parties. Those whom they murder are travellers, whom they
+happen to meet on the road. Sometimes two or three of a gang will take
+up their station in a choultry, or place where the traveller stops, and
+while he sleeps, they rouse him from his sleep, and cast the noose over
+his head and kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man. One casts the
+noose over his head, and immediately tightens it with all his strength;
+the other strikes him on the joint of his knees as he rises, which
+causes him to fall forwards. After he has fallen, they kick him on the
+temples till he dies, which is usually in a minute. They never commit a
+murder until they have taken every precaution not to be found out. They
+will follow a traveller for weeks, if necessary, before they destroy
+him. After they have murdered him, they gash the body all over and bury
+it. They gash it, that it may not swell, and cause cracks to take place
+in the ground, which might cause the jackals to dig down to the body,
+and thus expose their guilt. If a dog accompanies the person, they
+always kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to the discovery
+of his master. They think it to be a very good act to give a part of the
+plunder, which they get when they murder a person, to their goddess. If
+they fail to put him to death according to their rules, they suppose
+that they have made her angry, and they make offerings to her, that she
+may be appeased. Thus, you see that their religion teaches them to
+commit the blackest of crimes.</p>
+
+<p>The reason why this people gash and bury the bodies of those whom they
+murder, is as follows. They say that the goddess used to save them the
+trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by eating them, thus
+screening the murderers from all chance of being found out. Once, after
+the murder of a traveller, the body was, as usual, left unburied. One of
+the Phansiagars employed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw the
+goddess in the act of feasting upon it. This made her so angry, that she
+vowed never again to devour a body slaughtered by them; they having, by
+this one act of curiosity, forfeited her favor. However, as an
+equivalent for withdrawing her patronage, she plucked one of the fangs
+from her jaw, and gave it to them, saying that they might use it as a
+pickaxe, which would never wear out. She then opened her side and pulled
+out one of her ribs, which she gave them for a knife, whose edge nothing
+could blunt. Having done this, she stooped down and tore off the hem of
+her garment, which she gave to them for a noose, declaring that it
+would never fail to strangle any person about whose throat it might be
+cast. She moreover commanded them to gash and bury the bodies of those
+whom they destroyed.</p>
+
+<p>The Phansiagars bring up their children to their own profession. To
+learn this, the boy is placed under the care of a tutor. Sometimes his
+father is his teacher. By him he is taught that it is just as proper to
+murder a man, as it is to kill a snake which lies in his path and would
+bite him as he passes. He is not permitted at first to see the murders,
+but merely a dead body; his mind being gradually prepared for the sight.
+After this, the dreadful secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him.
+When he expresses a wish to be engaged in this horrid business, they
+tell him all about it. In the meantime he is allowed a small part of the
+plunder, in order that his desire to commit these murders may be
+increased; since it is only by murder that the plunder is obtained. He
+is from time to time allowed to assist in some things, while the murder
+is taking place, or allowed to be present to see how the business is
+managed. It is not, however, until he becomes a man, that he is
+permitted to apply the noose. To attain this privilege, he usually
+devotes eight or ten years. Before he can commit a murder, his tutor
+must present him with a noose. This sets him loose upon the world, as a
+licensed murderer. When the tutor is about to give him the noose, he
+takes him apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use it with skill,
+as it is to be the means of his earning his food, and as his safety will
+depend upon the skill with which it is used. After he receives it, he
+tries his skill in strangling a person the first opportunity that
+offers.</p>
+
+<p>By the course of education which the Phansiagars undergo, they become so
+fond of their dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce them to quit
+it. Some who have been employed in the East India Company's service,
+have always returned to their business when an opportunity offered of a
+successful enterprise.</p>
+
+<p>When the Phansiagars become old, they do not quit the service, but act
+as watchers, and decoy the traveller, by some false tale of distress,
+into some distant place, where he is murdered.</p>
+
+<p>Women are sometimes admitted to the society of these plunderers, and,
+on some occasions, are allowed to apply the noose. They select a
+handsome girl, and place her in a convenient spot, where, by her beauty,
+or by a false story of distress, she may decoy some unsuspecting
+traveller, and be the means of his destruction. Should he be on
+horseback, she will induce him to take her up behind him; after which,
+when an opportunity offers, she throws the noose over his head, leaps
+from the horse, drags him to the ground, and strangles him. I will
+mention an instance. It happened that a horseman of Coorg, in the Madras
+presidency, was passing by a spot where one of these interesting-looking
+girls was stationed. She told him a piteous story of having been robbed
+and badly treated, and begged him to assist her. Feeling sorry for her,
+he offered to take her behind him, on his horse, and thus assist her a
+few miles on her journey. She expressed much gratitude for his kindness,
+and mounted. Soon afterwards she suddenly passed a noose over his head,
+and, drawing it with all her might, endeavored to pull him from his
+saddle. At this moment, a number of Phansiagars started from the
+neighboring thicket and surrounded him. The murderess then slipped from
+the horse; but the Coorg striking his heels into the horse's sides, it
+threw out its hind legs with great violence, and struck to the ground
+the girl, who immediately let go the cord. He then drew his sword, and,
+cutting his way through the robbers, effected his escape. He wounded two
+of them severely. These men were shortly afterwards taken, and, through
+their means, twelve others fell into the hands of the judicial officers
+of the king of Coorg, including the girl who attempted the murder. They
+were all put to death.</p>
+
+<p>And is it possible that such persons can go to heaven? How could such
+ever relish its pure joys? What would they do, could they be admitted
+there? My dear children, it is a charity which has no foundation, to
+suppose that the heathen can go to heaven. I have preached the Gospel to
+tens of thousands of them, but I never saw one who had the least atom of
+a qualification for that holy place. &quot;They have all gone out of the
+way.&quot; Every crime which the apostle Paul speaks of in the latter part of
+the first chapter of his epistle to the Romans, they commit, and crimes
+of so dreadful a nature that I cannot mention them&mdash;crimes which, should
+they be written in the Bible, would cause the Bible to be a sealed book
+for ever.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XV'></a><h2>CHAPTER XV.</H2>
+
+<h3>SELF-TORTURES OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;As the heathen have no Bible to direct them, they have
+devised various means by which they expect to obtain the favor of their
+gods, and get to heaven. I will mention some of these.</p>
+
+<p>Some burn a lamp in a temple. They think that this is a very meritorious
+act. Some roll on the ground after the god, as he is carried in a great
+car or chariot around the temple. It is customary for the people to
+build very high cars or chariots, and cover them with very beautiful
+cloths. They also tie the cocoa-nut blossom and plantain-tree within
+them, and attach great ropes to them. When they are ready to drag these
+cars, or chariots, they bring their gods of gold or of brass from the
+temples, and place them on them. Then one, two, three, six, nine
+hundred, and even a thousand persons, when the cars are very large,
+catch hold of these ropes and drag them around the temple. While they
+are doing this, many of the heathen, to fulfil vows which they made when
+in sickness, and at other times of distress, throw themselves on the
+ground, and roll over from side to side, and frequently much injure
+themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Some swing on great hooks, which are passed through the tender parts of
+their backs. Sometimes they swing for half an hour; sometimes an hour.
+The longer they can bear the torture of the swinging, the more
+acceptable they suppose it will be to their goddess. It occasionally
+happens, that the flesh in which the hooks are fastened gives way, in
+which case the poor creature is dashed to the ground. When this occurs,
+the people hold him in the greatest abhorrence. They judge him to be a
+great criminal, and suppose that he has met a violent death in
+consequence of sins which he committed in a former birth.</p>
+
+<p>Not long since, I attended one of these hook-swingings, not far from the
+city of Madura. It took place on the morning of June 8th, 1848, just
+twenty-nine years after I first left America for India. It should have
+taken place on the preceding afternoon; but one of the axle-trees of the
+car, which was to support the machine on which the man was to be
+elevated in the air, was broken. Nothing, of course, could be done until
+it was repaired. The carpenters and others worked with great diligence
+until about eleven o'clock at night, when every thing was prepared for
+the swinging. I expected immediately after this to witness the ceremony.
+It however did not take place until the morning. While waiting for the
+man who was to be swung to make his appearance, I took a pencil and made
+a drawing of the machine to which he was to be fastened. The picture on
+the first page of the book will give you some idea of it.</p>
+
+<p>Yon have, perhaps, often seen a well-sweep. The long beam in the picture
+is swung in the same manner as is the well-sweep, with a single
+exception. In addition to its usual motion, it is made to turn
+horizontally. The cuts which you may have seen, in two or three of my
+little books, differ much from the above; of course different machines
+are used at different times. There are stationary swingings, as well as
+swingings of the kind to which I just alluded.</p>
+
+<img src='images/117.gif' width='310' height='481' align='right' alt='.' title=''>
+
+<p>Between six and seven o'clock in the morning, the man who was to be
+swung made his appearance for a few moments, and then disappeared. The
+hooks by which he was to be swung, as well as the iron rods with which a
+number of devotees were immediately to pierce their sides, were carried
+through the streets, and held up that they might be seen by the people.
+Soon afterwards the man again appeared with the hooks in his back, and
+went up to the end of the beam to which he was to be fastened. This, of
+course, was lowered. Notwithstanding the dense multitudes of people, I
+made my way to the same spot, determined to be satisfied whether or not
+there was any deception in the application of the hooks. There was no
+deception. They passed through the skin, on the sides of the backbone.
+To these hooks were attached yellow ropes, by which he was fastened to
+the beam, as you will perceive in the picture. This being done, the men,
+five or six in number, who had hold of the ropes fastened to the end of
+the beam which you see resting on the ground, and which was then, of
+course, high in the air, drew him up until the beam lay horizontally.
+Then, after making him perform one circular motion around the car, they
+elevated him, as you see in the picture. When thus elevated, it was
+thought that he was forty feet from the ground. All being ready, the
+people seized the ropes which you see in front of the car, and began to
+draw it. Mr. Chandler and myself accompanied it through the streets,
+until it came to the place from which it set out. The distance of ground
+passed over was at least half a mile, and the time in which the journey
+was accomplished exceeded an hour. Of course he was swinging more than
+an hour. As the car passed through the streets, the people threw
+plantains from the tops of the houses to the crowds below.</p>
+
+<p>The man who was swung was adorned with flowers and other ornaments. He
+had a tinselled turban on his head. His body was rubbed over with a
+yellow paste, made, most probably, from the sandal-wood. Around his
+ankles were rings, hung with little bells, which he made to tinkle, as
+he was swinging, by striking his legs together. He wore a dark or black
+pair of pantaloons, which came a little below the knees, and which had
+a border of gold around them. He held a handkerchief in one hand, and a
+knife somewhat resembling a dagger, in the other. These he kept in
+constant motion, by moving his arms. On one occasion, a bunch of
+plantains was tied to one of the long ropes which you see hanging down
+by the side of the swinger. These he drew up, and afterwards scattered
+over the people on a house opposite to him.</p>
+
+<img src='images/120.gif' width='478' height='600' align='left' alt='' title=''>
+
+<p>After following the car for a quarter of a mile or more, we went before
+it, and there witnessed another appalling sight. There were five or six
+men, who had the rods of iron which I just mentioned passed through the
+skin of their sides. They were dancing along, and, as they danced, they
+made these rods go backward and forward through the skin.</p>
+
+<p>After the car had reached the place from which it set out, the end of
+the beam from which the man was swinging was then lowered and he was
+untied. Again I looked very carefully at the hooks in the back. The
+people say that no blood is shed by their introduction, and consider
+this to be a miracle. The falsity of this assertion was shown by the
+blood which I saw on the side of one of the wounds.</p>
+
+<p>I have been long in this country, and consequently have become so
+familiarized with heathenism, that my feelings, though deeply wounded at
+this sight, were not so keenly affected as were those of my new
+associate, Mr. Chandler. He has been on heathen ground but a short time.
+When they tied the man to the beam, he was unnerved and wellnigh
+overcome; and he told me, that during all the time he was following the
+car, he felt like shedding tears.</p>
+
+<p>While following the car, the young men of America came into my mind.
+They refuse to come, said I, to help these miserable creatures. O, they
+will not come&mdash;they will not come. I thought, that if many of the dear
+children of that land&mdash;children to whom I lately preached, as well as
+others, could witness this poor creature swinging from the end of a long
+beam, far above the tops of the trees, and that, too, by hooks passing
+through the tender parts of his back, they would say, we will, by and
+by, become missionaries, and, by the help of God, proclaim to the
+heathen that there is a Saviour.</p>
+
+<p>On the evening of the day on which the swinging takes place, another act
+of great cruelty is practised. Devotees throw themselves from, the top
+of a high wall, or a scaffold of twenty or thirty feet in height, upon a
+bed of iron spikes, or on bags of straw with knives in them. Many are
+often mangled and torn. Others are quickly killed.</p>
+
+<p>At night, many of the devotees sit down in the open air, and pierce the
+skin of their foreheads, by inserting a small rod of iron. To this is
+suspended a lamp, which is kept burning till daylight.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes bundles of thorns are collected before the temple, among which
+the devotees roll themselves without any covering. These thorns are then
+set on fire, when they briskly dance over the flames.</p>
+
+<p>Other devotees swing before a slow fire; some stand between two fires,
+as you see in this picture.</p>
+
+<p>Some have their breasts, arms, and other parts stuck entirely full of
+pins, about the thickness of small nails, or packing needles.</p>
+
+<img src='images/122.gif' width='442' height='478' align='right' alt='' title=''>
+
+<p>Another very cruel torture is practised. Some of the devotees make a
+vow. With one hand they cover their under lip with wet earth or mud. On
+this, with the other hand, they place some small grains, usually of
+mustard-seed They then stretch themselves flat on their backs, exposed
+to the dews of night, and the blazing and scorching sun by day. Their
+vow is, that from this position they will not stir, that they will not
+move nor turn, nor eat nor drink, till the seeds planted on their lips
+begin to sprout. This usually takes place on the third or fourth day.
+After this they arise, and then think that they are very holy.</p>
+
+<p>There is a class of devotees in this country called Yogis, whose object
+it is to root out every human feeling. Some live in holes and caves.
+Some drag around a heavy chain attached to them. Some make the circuit
+of an empire, creeping on their hands and knees. Some roll their bodies
+from the shores of the Indus to the Ganges.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>The Rev. Mr. Heyer, in one of his letters from India, says, that an
+Indian devotee has spent more than nine years on a journey from Benares
+to Cape Comorin, that is, from the 27th to the 7th degree of north
+latitude. The whole journey is made by rolling on the bare ground, from
+side to side. When he comes to a river, of course he cannot roll over
+it. He therefore fords it, or passes over it in a boat, and then rolls
+on the banks of the river just as far as the river is wide. By doing
+this, he supposes that his determination to roll all the way is fully
+carried out.</p>
+
+<img src='images/123b.gif' width='247' height='541' align='left' alt='' title=''>
+
+<p>Some devotees hold up one or both arms, until the muscles become rigid,
+and their limbs become shrivelled into stumps. In the above cut, you
+have a representation of a man with one of these shrivelled arms. See
+how long his finger-nails have grown. One has run through his hand and
+back through his arm. Some stretch themselves on beds of iron spikes.
+Some wear great square irons on their necks. I have seen not only a man,
+but a woman, with these great square irons around their necks, each
+nearly two feet in length and two feet in breadth. These they put on for
+the purpose of fulfilling some vow which they have made. For instance,
+if a mother has a very sick little boy, she will say, &quot;Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy, I will have a square iron put on my neck,
+and wear it all my life.&quot; After this vow is made, if the little boy gets
+well, the mother thinks that her Swammie has cured him, and to fulfil
+her engagement she will have one of these irons put on her neck.</p>
+
+<img src='images/123a.gif' width='369' height='195' align='right' alt='' title=''>
+
+
+
+<p>Other devotees throw themselves from the tops of precipices, and are
+dashed to pieces; some bury themselves alive in holes, which their own
+relatives have dug; some bind themselves with ropes or chains to trees,
+until they die; some keep gazing so long and so constantly at the
+heavens, that the muscles of their neck become contracted, and no
+aliment but liquids can pass into the stomach.</p>
+
+<p>But I will not continue this subject. You perceive, my dear children,
+what a wretched religion that must be which encourages its followers to
+perform such acts. And how vain are all these acts&mdash;how utterly
+destitute are they of any merit. Those who practise them are not made
+better by them, and they are just as far from the kingdom of heaven
+after having performed them, as they were before. The Christian religion
+encourages no such things. It tells us to perform no pilgrimages to holy
+places, to inflict no self-tortures. But it has its requirements, and
+these are very simple, and may easily be performed by all who are
+willing to do their duty. These requirements are, repentance, forsaking
+sin, faith in Christ, and a supreme devotedness to his service. Have
+you, my dear children, attended to these requirements? If not, you are
+in a much worse condition than these poor heathen of whom you have been
+reading. They are not as guilty before God as you are. They know not
+their Master's will. Still, they must perish, unless the Gospel is sent
+to them. But though they perish, their punishment will be lighter than
+the punishment of those who refuse to love and obey the Saviour. That
+servant who knows his Lord's will, and prepares not himself, neither
+does according to his will, shall be beaten with many stripes. But he
+that knows not, and does commit things worthy of stripes, shall be
+beaten with few stripes. Should it be your sad lot to perish at last, it
+would be far better for you to go down to hell enveloped in all the
+darkness of a heathen land, than to go down to hell from a land of such
+gospel light and privileges as you enjoy.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XVI'></a><h2>CHAPTER XVI.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE SUTTEE, OR BURNING OF WIDOWS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;From what I have already told you, you know that the
+Hindoos are a cruel people. But I have not told you of the extent to
+which they carry their cruelty. Perhaps it is shown to the highest
+degree in their practice of the suttee, or burning of widows. The
+British have abolished this rite throughout their dominions in India.
+They have also made great exertions to have it abolished in the
+territories of the native princes, but I am sorry to say, that in some
+of these territories it is still practised. Within the last three years,
+twenty-three of the princes just alluded to, have issued orders for its
+abolishment throughout their dominions. These orders have probably been
+issued solely in consequence of their fear of the British power, for it
+is a practice which is riveted in the affections of the people. This
+power they know that it will be dangerous to resist.</p>
+
+<p>In my &quot;Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen,&quot; I
+mentioned, that the sacred books of the heathen encourage the suttee. I
+also mentioned several instances, in which widows had been burned to
+death with the corpses of their husbands. Even though you may have seen
+that book, it will be well for me to give you two or three other cases,
+to impress your minds more fully with the horrors of the Hindoo
+religion. The first took place in a village of Tanjore. A merchant
+having died, his wife, who was about thirty years old, determined to
+burn herself with his corpse. The news of what she was going to do,
+quickly spread in every direction, and large numbers of people collected
+to witness the burning. After she was adorned with jewels and dressed in
+her best clothing, and after her body was tinged with the yellow
+infusion of sandal-wood and saffron, bearers arrived to take away the
+corpse with the wretched woman. The body of the man was placed on a car,
+ornamented with costly stuffs, flowers, etc. There he was seated like a
+living man, elegantly decorated with all his jewels, and clothed in rich
+attire.</p>
+
+<p>The corpse being carried first, the wife followed in a rich palanquin.
+As she went along, the surrounding multitudes of people stretched out
+their hands towards her to show how much they admired her conduct. The
+women in particular went up to her to wish her joy, apparently desiring
+to receive her blessing, or at least, that she would pronounce over them
+some pleasing word. She tried to satisfy them all, saying to one, that
+she would long continue to enjoy her worldly happiness, and to another,
+that she would be the mother of many beautiful children. Another was
+informed, that she would soon arrive at great honor in the world. These,
+and similar expressions, she made to all who came near her, and they
+departed with the full belief that they would enjoy all the blessings of
+which she had spoken. She also distributed among them some betel-leaves,
+which they gladly received as relics, or something of blessed influence.</p>
+
+<p>During the whole procession, which was very long, her countenance was
+serene and even cheerful, until they came to the pile upon which she was
+to die. Then she suddenly became pensive. She no longer attended to what
+was passing around her. Her looks were wildly fixed upon the pile. Her
+face grew pale. She trembled with fear, and seemed ready to faint away.</p>
+
+<p>The Brahmins, who took the lead in this ceremony, with her relations,
+seeing her sad condition, ran to her, and endeavored to restore her
+spirits, but she seemed not to know what they said, and answered not a
+word.</p>
+
+<p>They made her quit the palanquin, and her nearest relatives took her to
+a pond of water which was near the pile, where they washed her. They
+then attended her to the pile, on which the corpse of her husband had
+already been laid. It was surrounded with Brahmins, each with a lighted
+torch in one hand, and a bowl of melted butter in the other, all ready,
+as soon as the poor victim was placed on the pile, to envelope her in
+fire.</p>
+
+<p>The relatives armed with muskets, sabres, and other weapons, stood
+closely around in a double line, for the purpose, it was said, of making
+her afraid, if she might wish to draw back, or of frightening any body
+who might pity her, and endeavor to rescue her.</p>
+
+<p>At length the time for firing the pile being proclaimed, the young widow
+was stripped of her jewels, and led on towards the pile. She was then
+commanded to walk three times around it, two of her nearest relations
+supporting her by the arms. The first round she accomplished with
+tottering steps; but in the second, her strength forsook her, and she
+fainted away in the arms of those who were holding her. They were
+obliged to drag her between them for the third round. Then senseless,
+she was thrown upon the corpse of her husband. At that instant, the
+multitude made the air to ring with their shouts of gladness, while the
+Brahmins poured the butter on the dry wood, and applied the torches.
+Instantly the whole pile was in a blaze.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the flames began to rage, the poor woman, now in the midst of
+them, was called upon by name, from all sides; but as insensible as the
+corpse on which she lay, she made no answer. She entered eternity,
+suffocated at once, most probably, by the flames.</p>
+
+<p>The second case of suttee which I shall mention took place at the death
+of the rajah, or king of Tanjore. He left behind him four wives.</p>
+
+<p>The Brahmins having determined that two of these four should be burned
+with the corpse of their husband, and having selected the two whom they
+thought best to sacrifice, they told them of what awaited them. They
+received the information with apparent joy. A refusal would have been
+attended with their utter disgrace.</p>
+
+<p>One day only was necessary to get ready for the funeral ceremonies. They
+were conducted as follows: In a field somewhat distant from the palace,
+the people made a hollow, not very deep, but about twelve or fifteen
+feet square. Within it they made a pyramid of the sweet-smelling
+sandal-wood. On the middle of the pyramid, a scaffold was built in such
+a manner that the posts could easily be taken away, by which means the
+scaffold would fall at once. On the four corners of the platform, large
+jars were placed, filled with melted butter, to besmear the pyramid,
+that it might be the more easily set on fire.</p>
+
+<p>The following was the order of the procession. It was headed by a great
+number of soldiers under arms. They were followed by a multitude of
+musicians, chiefly trumpeters, who made the air re&euml;cho with their
+melancholy sounds. Next came the body of the king upon a splendid
+palanquin, richly adorned. This was surrounded by the nearest relations
+and by the priest of the king. They were all on foot, and without their
+turbans in token of mourning. A large party of Brahmins formed around
+them as an immediate escort. The two wives who were to be burned with
+the corpse came next, each borne on a palanquin. During the journey they
+appeared calm and cheerful. The troops kept off the immense crowds who
+were assembled from every direction.</p>
+
+<p>The two queens, loaded with jewels, were attended by their favorite
+women, with whom they occasionally conversed, and by their relations of
+both sexes. To many of these they had made presents before leaving the
+palace. They were also accompanied by thousands of Brahmins, collected
+from different quarters. These were followed by an innumerable multitude
+of persons of both sexes. When they arrived at the ground where they
+were to be burned, the two victims were made to descend from their
+palanquins, for the purpose of performing the preparatory ceremonies.
+They went through the whole without showing any fear until towards the
+close, when their countenances began to change, and their three circuits
+around the pile were not performed without considerable effort to
+maintain calmness.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime, the body of the king had been placed on the scaffold
+over the platform. The two queens were also laid down beside the corpse,
+one on the right hand, and the other on the left, and they joined hands
+by stretching them over the body. The astrologer having then declared
+that the happy moment was come for firing the pile, the Brahmins
+repeated several prayers in a loud voice, and sprinkled the pile with
+holy water. When these ceremonies were finished, a signal was given, and
+the pillars which supported the pyramid and the scaffold were suddenly
+taken away. Immediately the women were covered with the falling mass of
+timber, which tumbled over them with a crash. At the same instant the
+pile was fired in all its parts. On one side, the nearest relative of
+the king applied his torch, and on the other side, the priest; while the
+Brahmins, in every quarter, were pouring jars of melted butter on the
+flames, creating so intense a heat as must instantly have consumed the
+victims. Then the multitude shouted for joy, and the relations
+approaching the pile also set up a loud cry, calling them by their
+names. They supposed that they heard a voice in answer pronouncing
+<i>Enna?</i> that is, <i>What</i>? but the fall of the platform, and the immediate
+bursting out of the flames, must have stifled them at once.</p>
+
+<p>Such was the miserable cud of these poor unhappy queens&mdash;unhappy victims
+of the most cruel religion that ever disgraced the earth.</p>
+
+<p>Not unfrequently the sons take a prominent part in destroying their
+mothers. This will appear from the following case. A Brahmin died, and
+was brought to the place of burning. His wife was fastened to the pile,
+and the fire was kindled, but the night was dark and rainy. When the
+fire began to scorch the poor woman, she contrived to disentangle
+herself from the dead body, and creeping from under the pile, hid
+herself among some brushwood. In a little time it was discovered that
+there was but one body on the pile. The relations immediately took the
+alarm, and searched for the poor creature. The son soon dragged her
+forth, and insisted that she should throw herself on the pile again, or
+drown or hang herself. She pleaded for her life at the hands of her own
+son, and declared that she could not embrace so horrid a death; but she
+pleaded in vain. He urged, that he should lose his caste if she were
+spared, and added, that either he or she must die. Unable to persuade
+her to hang or drown herself, the son and the others present tied her
+hands and feet, and threw her on the funeral pile, where she quickly
+perished.</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/135.gif' width='574' height='481' alt='BURNING OF WIDOWS' title='BURNING OF WIDOWS'>
+</center>
+
+<p>I observed that the rite of suttee is riveted in the affections of this
+people. The following communications from two of the native princes who
+lately consented to put a stop to this rite, will show you that this is
+the case. The rajah of Oorcha declares, that &quot;no subject of his state
+shall in future be permitted to become a suttee, though according to the
+Shasters, it is no doubt very meritorious for a widow to die of grief
+for the death of her husband.&quot; The rajah of Sumpthem says, &quot;The practice
+of suttee is so very old, and has been countenanced and encouraged by
+the wise men of so many generations that I have never thought myself
+justified in interposing to prevent it; but my anxiety to meet the
+wishes of the governor-general in this and in all things, is so great,
+that I have waived all other considerations, and forbidden suttee.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>If the British were to lose their power in India, the suttee would
+immediately be r&euml;established. Power has put it down, but power alone
+will never root it out of the affections of the people. Nothing but the
+Gospel can do this. O that Christians would think of this, and hasten,
+yea, with great haste, to send this blessed Gospel to them.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XVII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XVII.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE REVENGEFUL NATURE OF THE HINDOO RELIGION.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;The sacred books of the Hindoos encourage revenge. In
+the Vedas, which are the most sacred books, are laid down forms of
+religious service, or acts of worship, which are designed to injure or
+destroy their enemies. When a person wishes to have his enemy
+destroyed, he goes to a Brahmin or priest, and secures his supposed aid.
+The Brahmin, before he proceeds to his work, clothes himself with a
+black garment. He also makes four images of the foe, and clothes these
+with black garments. He then kindles a sacrificial fire, and after the
+performance of various ceremonies, he takes pieces of some animal which
+has been consecrated for the purpose, and throws them into this fire. On
+every occasion when he makes this burnt-offering, he touches the mouth
+of the image of this enemy, uttering one or other of the forms of prayer
+which are written in the sacred books. Of these, the following are a
+few: &quot;O Agni,&quot; god of fire, &quot;thou who art the mouth of all gods, do
+thou destroy the wisdom of my enemy.&quot; &quot;O Agni, fill with distraction the
+mind of this my enemy.&quot; &quot;O Agni, destroy the senses of this my enemy.&quot;
+&quot;O Agni, make dumb the mouth of this my enemy.&quot; &quot;O Agni, fasten with a
+peg the tongue of this my enemy.&quot; &quot;O Agni, reduce to ashes this my
+enemy.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>How different, my dear children, is the religion of Jesus from the
+religion of which I have been giving you a description. No precepts
+teach us that we may injure or destroy our enemies. On the contrary,
+they teach us to love them, and do them good. Let me repeat to you some
+of the words which our Saviour spoke on this point. &quot;Ye have heard that
+it hath been said, Thou shalt love thy neighbor, and hate thine enemy;
+but I say unto you, love your enemies, bless them that curse you, do
+good to them that hate you, and pray for them that despitefully use you
+and persecute you, that ye may be the children of your Father which is
+in heaven; for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the good,
+and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>One of the young Hindoos in Dr. Duff's school in Calcutta, when reading
+the above and similar passages, was so struck with the difference
+between these precepts and the precepts of his Shasters, that he could
+not but exclaim &quot;O, how beautiful, how divine. Surely this is the
+truth&mdash;this is the truth&mdash;this is the truth.&quot; The consequence was, that
+he never could rest until he had thrown aside his sacred books and his
+idols, and embraced that Saviour whose precepts appeared to him to be so
+beautiful. And was this heathen so struck with the beauty of the
+precepts of the Bible&mdash;so struck, that he had no peace until he gave
+himself to his Saviour? And have you ever, my dear children, been struck
+with the precepts of your Saviour&mdash;so struck with them, that you could
+never rest until you had given up your hearts to him? If not, how great
+is the contrast between you and that young Hindoo. He gave his heart to
+the Saviour. You withhold yours. He, through grace, will dwell for ever
+with Christ in heaven. You, if you continue in your present awful
+condition, must be banished from his presence, and cast into hell, where
+you shall be tormented day and night for ever, with the devil and his
+angels. Flee, my dear children, flee to the Saviour now, if you have
+never yet done so. Flee to him, and then you also shall dwell for ever
+with him.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XVIII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XVIII.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE DECEPTION OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;From what I have previously stated, you are aware that
+the Hindoos are a very deceitful people. Let me give you another
+instance of their deception. A late head catechist of one of my
+missionary brethren was, before his conversion, the priest of a temple.
+A man from whom about one thousand rupees' worth of jewels and similar
+things had been stolen, came to this priest, and promised to reward him
+well, if he would detect the thief, and secure to him the restoration of
+his property. The priest promised to comply with his wishes; and in
+order to effect his purpose, he had drums beaten through the village,
+and proclaimed, that at a certain time he would hold a meeting and
+detect the thief. At the appointed time, a large concourse of people
+assembled, the priest appearing in the midst of them with a cocoa-nut
+bound around with saffron-cords. He then told them, that if, after
+putting down the cocoa-nut, it should move of its own accord towards
+him, they might know that he would be able certainly to detect the
+thief; and added, that after it had thus moved, it would pursue the
+offender, and follow him until it would break his head. He then
+performed certain ceremonies calculated to awaken superstitious feelings
+in the minds of the people, and laid the cocoa-nut down at a little
+distance from him. To the great amazement of all present, it began to
+move towards the priest, and continued to move until it reached his
+feet. This being done, he told the people, that they might conclude from
+what they had seen, that the cocoa-nut would follow the thief until it
+would break his head. He consented, however, to give him a little
+grace&mdash;to spare his life until the next day; adding his advice, that the
+thief, whoever he might be, had better come to him privately, and tell
+him where the property was. In the dead of the night, a tap was heard at
+the door of the priest; the thief presented himself, and delivered up
+the property. The priest received a present from the owner of the
+property, and rewarded the thief for his promptness. After this man was
+converted, he was asked how he contrived to make the cocoa-nut move
+towards him. &quot;Why, sir,&quot; he answered, &quot;if you will carefully divide a
+cocoa-nut, scoop out the kernel from one-half of it, enclose a strong,
+lively rat, put the parts of the cocoa-nut together, and bind the whole
+with saffron-cords, to prevent the crack being seen, and then place it
+on a declivity previously prepared, it is clear, that if you place
+yourself at the foot of this declivity the rat will twirl the cocoa-nut,
+and cause it to descend until it reaches your feet.&quot;</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XIX'></a><h2>CHAPTER XIX.</H2>
+
+<h3>SUPERSTITION OF THE HINDOOS.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;In my Sermon to Children, before alluded to, I
+mentioned a few particulars to prove that the people of India are very
+superstitious. Let me mention a few more. It is said that no act,
+however good it may be, if performed on Sunday, will succeed. Some will
+not eat at all on Sunday, until they have seen a certain bird&mdash;the bird
+on which the god Vrishnoo rides. If a man rubs oil on his head on
+Monday, and bathes, he will commit a sin equal to the sin of destroying
+a temple of Siva. If he has his hair out on Tuesday, he will become
+poor. Even to worship the gods on Wednesday, is bad. If a person takes
+medicine on Thursday, his sickness will be increased. Should he lend any
+thing on Friday, he will lose his property. If he should buy a new cloth
+on Saturday, take it home, and keep it there, death may be the
+consequence. Should he die on this day, some other member of the family
+will die on the following week.</p>
+
+<p>If the foundation of a house is laid in June, the destruction of that
+house will follow. Should a family enter a new house in March, some
+member of the family will die. If a marriage is celebrated in September,
+the husband and wife will fight with each other.</p>
+
+<p>Should a thunderbolt fall on a house, or a vulture alight on it, some
+evil will befall the people living in it. If a crow should strike any
+person on the head with its wings, some of his relations will die.
+Should a cat or a snake cross his path, it would be an indication of
+evil. In the latter case, one of his relations will die. If, when
+returning home, a person should meet him bearing a light, a quarrel will
+be the result.</p>
+
+<p>After a person has left his house, should he meet a single Brahmin, or a
+woman who has had her head shaved, or a dumb or a blind man, or a
+washerman or a barber, the object for which he left would not succeed.
+Or, when going out, should he hit his head against the top of the
+door-frame, or should any one ask him where he was going, or should he
+happen to sneeze, he would consider these things as hinderances to his
+going, and re&euml;nter the house.</p>
+
+<p>Should a son or a daughter be born on the new moon in April, they will
+become thieves. If a person is born under the planet Saturn, he will be
+slandered, his riches will be dissipated, and his wife, son, and friends
+will be destroyed. He will also be at variance with others, and endure
+many sufferings. Should he be born under the planet Mars, he will be
+full of anxious thoughts, be imprisoned, and oppressed with fear from
+robbers, fire, etc. He also will lose his lands, trees, and good name.</p>
+
+<p>If a person dreams that a monkey has bitten him, he will die in six
+months; or if he dreams that bedbugs, in large numbers, are creeping
+over his body to bite him, he will die in eight days. Should he dream
+that a dog has bitten him, he will die in three years; or should he
+dream that a dead person has appeared to him and spoken to him, he will
+die immediately.</p>
+
+<p>If a man has a little head, he will become rich. If he has a large head,
+he will be poor. If his forehead is wide, he will live a hundred years.
+If he has a small neck, he will be a murderer. If the second toe is
+long, he will be a bad man. If a woman has curly hair, she will not
+prosper. If her nose is long, she will have a good disposition. If her
+ear is wide, she will tell falsehoods. If she has a mole on her nose,
+she will be subject to anger; if on her lips, she will be learned; if on
+the eyebrows she will be cunning.</p>
+
+<p>I could continue to fill a number of pages with things of the same
+description, but it will be unnecessary. I will merely mention one
+instance more. On a certain night in the month of November, the people
+will not look at the moon. The reason assigned for this, is as follows.
+Once, when the elephant-faced god Pulliar was dancing before the gods,
+the moon happening to see him, laughed at him, and told him that he had
+a large stomach, an ear like a winnowing-fan, etc. This so enraged him,
+that he cursed her. This curse was inflicted on the night above
+mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>How does the wretchedness of a people, both in reference to the things
+of this world and of the world to come, show itself where the Bible is
+unknown. If this blessed book was not an inspired book&mdash;if it did no
+more than remove the temporal miseries of men, how invaluable would it
+be! Of how much more value then, is it, in reference to the removal of
+their spiritual miseries?</p>
+
+<p>O, why is it that Christians have not long since sent this Bible to
+them? Why is it that they do not send it to them <i>now</i>? This is a
+mystery, which we must leave to be unravelled at the judgment-seat of
+the last day. My dear children, you are to stand before that
+judgment-seat. Shall any of these heathen among whom I dwell, rise up at
+that awful season&mdash;stretch out their hands towards you, and say, There
+stand the children who might have sent us the Bible, but they did not
+send it; and now we must be lost&mdash;<i>lost for ever!</i></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XX'></a><h2>CHAPTER XX.</H2>
+
+<h3>BURMAH, CHINA, ETC., ETC.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;If you will look on your map of Asia, you will see,
+adjoining Hindostan, at the east, a country called Burmah. This is
+another land of idols. Here the &quot;Baptist General Convention for Foreign
+Missions&quot; have one of the most interesting and flourishing missions in
+the world. The people of Burmah are, if possible, still further removed
+from divine knowledge than the people of India. They are in reality
+atheists, or, in other words, people who do not believe in a creator or
+preserver of the world. But still they worship gods, who, they say, have
+become so by acts of religious merit. He whom they now worship is called
+Gaudama, or Boodh. He is reputed to be the son of the king of Benares,
+and, if their history be correct, was born six hundred years before
+Christ. The Boodhists are all idolaters. They have many temples erected
+to the honor of Boodh and his image. Before this image they present
+flowers, incense, rice, betel-nuts etc. Like all other idolatrous
+nations, the Burmese are very wicked. They do not respect their females
+as they should do. They treat them as an inferior order of beings. They
+often sell them.</p>
+
+<p>A very singular custom prevails in that country. It consists in paying a
+kind of homage to a white elephant. This elephant is sumptuously dressed
+and fed. It is provided with officers, like a second sovereign, and is
+made to receive presents from foreign ambassadors. It is next in rank to
+the king, and <i>superior</i> to the queen.</p>
+
+<p>Burmah is the country in which Drs. Judson and Price, and Messrs. Hough
+and Wade suffered so much, during the war with England several years
+ago. Messrs. Hough and Wade were the first to suffer. As the ships which
+were to make the attack upon Rangoon approached the city, they were
+seized and cast into prison. Their legs were bound together with ropes,
+and eight or ten Burmans, armed with spears and battle-axes, were
+placed over them, as a guard. They were afterwards put in irons. The
+next morning, as the fleet approached still nearer the city, orders were
+sent to the guard, through the grates of their prison, that the instant
+the shipping should fire upon the town, they were to kill them, together
+with the other prisoners confined with them. The guard, on receiving
+these orders, began to sharpen the instruments with which they intended
+to kill them, and moved them about their heads to show with how much
+skill and pleasure they would attend to their orders. Upon the floor
+where they intended to butcher them, a large quantity of sand was spread
+to receive the blood. The gloom and silence of death reigned among the
+prisoners; the vast ocean of eternity seemed but a step before them. At
+length the fleet arrived, and the firing commenced The first ball which
+was thrown into the town passed, with a tremendous noise, directly over
+their heads. This so frightened the guard, that they seemed unable to
+execute their murderous orders. They shrunk away into one corner of the
+prison, where they remained quiet, until a broadside from one of the
+ships made the prison shake and tremble to its very foundation. This so
+alarmed them, that they burst open the doors of the prison and fled. The
+missionaries, with the other prisoners, were then left alone. Their
+danger, however, was not at an end; but as God had protected them thus
+far, he continued to protect them until they were set at liberty, and
+allowed to preach the Gospel again to those perishing heathen. Drs.
+Judson and Price were also imprisoned, and suffered much; but they, too,
+were preserved and delivered. The accounts of their sufferings are so
+long, that I cannot now relate them all to you. You will find them in
+the life of Mrs. Judson.</p>
+
+<p>After the war was over, the missionaries were permitted to go everywhere
+to proclaim the name of the Saviour; and their efforts have been very
+much blessed, especially among the Karens. It will be impossible for me
+to give you an account of their many labors, and of the many tokens
+which they have received of God's favor towards multitudes who have
+become followers of the Redeemer. Suffice it to say, that more than six
+thousand have been received into the Christian church. One of the native
+teachers not long since baptized, on one occasion, three hundred and
+seventy-two persons.</p>
+
+<p>Adjoining Burmah, is China, a country containing more than three hundred
+millions of people, about twenty times as many as there are in the
+United States of America. It is a country filled with idols. Many of the
+people earn their living by making and selling these idols. There are
+many shops where they are sold, or repaired when they become broken or
+defaced.</p>
+
+<p>The females in that country are in a very degraded state. They are the
+slaves of their husbands, and live and die in the greatest ignorance.
+Any attempt to raise themselves to the level of females in Christian
+lands, is considered as very wicked. The little female child is tortured
+from her birth. You have, perhaps, heard that the women of China have
+small feet. These are made small by a very cruel practice&mdash;by putting
+bandages of cloth so tightly around them, that they cannot grow. Many
+women have feet not larger than those of an American infant of one year
+old. Mr. Doty, missionary to China, says, that he was acquainted with a
+little girl whose mother had bound up her feet so tightly, that she
+cried two or three hours every day, on account of the great pain which
+she suffered.</p>
+
+<p>With such little feet, you may well suppose that it would be very
+difficult for the women to walk. It is so. They limp and hobble along,
+just as if their feet had been cut off, and they had to walk on stumps.</p>
+
+<p>The Chinese do not count their daughters among their children. Mr. Doty
+says, he one day asked his Chinese teacher how many children he had. He
+replied, that he had several. &quot;How many of these,&quot; he then inquired,
+&quot;are daughters?&quot; &quot;We do not count our daughters among our children,&quot; he
+answered. &quot;I have three daughters, but we Chinese count our sons only as
+children.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>When this missionary was in a Chinese village where he had never been
+before, a man called to see him, bringing with him two pretty little
+girls, neatly dressed, about six and seven years old. He said that they
+were his daughters and that he wished to sell them. Mr. Doty refused to
+buy them, as it was wicked to buy and sell children; but he told him,
+that if he would commit them to him, he would take them home with him,
+and educate them, and that they might return home after they had grown.
+To this proposal he would not consent but said, that if he would buy
+them, they should be his for ever. He could have bought them both for
+about twenty-six dollars.</p>
+
+<p>The Chinese have many schools, but none for their daughters, as they do
+not teach them, to read. When they are about thirteen years old, they
+shut them up in what are called &quot;women's apartments,&quot; where they remain
+until the time of their marriage. Then the parents sell them to those
+who wish to have wives for their sons. In this way, they are frequently
+married to persons whom they never before saw.</p>
+
+<p>Many parents in China destroy their little girls soon after they are
+born, or while they are very small. This they frequently do by throwing
+them into rivers, or into the sea, after they have wrapped them up in
+coarse mats. There is a little Chinese girl, named Ellen, now living in
+Newark, New Jersey, whose father was about to kill her when she was
+three weeks old. An English lady heard of his intentions, and sent a
+person with ten dollars to see if she could not be bought. He was
+offered the ten dollars, but refused to take them. She sent ten dollars
+more. He consented to take the twenty dollars. This little girl was
+brought by this English lady to America, when she was about six years
+old. The friends who have her under their care, are educating her with
+the hope that she may go back to China, to tell its females of the
+Saviour.</p>
+
+<p>Did you ever, my dear girls, think why it is that your parents love you,
+and educate you&mdash;why it is that they try to make you happy, instead of
+cramping your feet, shutting you up, and, perhaps, at last selling you?
+It is because they have the Bible. Then, how anxious should you be to
+save what money you can, to buy Bibles to send to those poor heathen.</p>
+
+<p>As I am now speaking of the destruction of infants, I would observe,
+that this crime is common in other heathen countries. It was quite
+common, until lately, in the island of Tahiti, and other places in the
+South Pacific Ocean. When the missionaries of the London Missionary
+Society went there, many years ago, they found the females in a very
+degraded situation. Mr. Nott, one of these missionaries, declared that
+three out of four of the children were murdered as soon as they were
+born. He met a woman soon after this dreadful crime had been abolished
+to whom he said, &quot;How many children have you?&quot; &quot;This one in my arms,&quot;
+was her answer. &quot;And how many did you kill?&quot; She replied, &quot;Eight.&quot;
+Another woman, who was asked the same question, said that she had
+destroyed <i>seventeen</i>. Infanticide, or, in other words, the destruction
+of infants, says the Rev. Mr. Williams, was carried to an almost
+incredible extent in Tahiti, and some other islands. He writes, &quot;During
+the visit of the deputation, G. Bennet, Esq., was our guest for three or
+four days; and on one occasion, while conversing on this subject, he
+expressed a wish to obtain accurate knowledge of the extent to which
+this cruel practice had prevailed. Three women were sitting in the room
+at the time, making European garments, under Mrs. Williams direction;
+and, after replying to Mr. Bennet's inquiries, I said, 'I have no doubt
+but that each of these women has destroyed some of her children.' Mr.
+Bennet exclaimed, 'Impossible; such motherly, respectable women could
+never have been guilty of so great an atrocity.' 'Well,' I added, 'we
+will ask them.' Addressing the first, I said to her, 'Friend, how many
+children have you destroyed?' She was startled at my question, and at
+first charged me with unkindness, in harrowing up her feelings, by
+bringing the destruction of her babes to her remembrance; but upon
+learning the object of my inquiry, she replied, with a faltering voice,
+'I have destroyed <i>nine</i>.' The second, with eyes suffused with tears,
+said, 'I have destroyed <i>seven</i>;' and the third informed us that she had
+destroyed <i>five</i>. Had the missionaries gone there but a few years
+before, with the blessing of God, they would have prevented all this.
+These mothers were all Christians at the time this conversation was
+held.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>&quot;On another occasion,&quot; says Mr. Williams, &quot;I was called to visit the
+wife of a chief in dying circumstances. She had professed Christianity
+for many years, had learned to read when about sixty, and was a very
+active teacher in our adult school. In the prospect of death, she sent a
+pressing request that I would visit her immediately; and on my entering
+her apartment she exclaimed, 'O, servant of God, come and tell me what I
+must do.' Perceiving that she suffered great mental distress, I
+inquired the cause of it, when she replied, 'I am about to die.' 'Well,'
+I rejoined, 'if it be so, what creates this agony of mind?' 'O, my sins,
+my sins,' she cried; 'I am about to die.' I then inquired what the
+particular sins were which so greatly distressed her, when she
+exclaimed, 'O, my children, my murdered children! I am about to die, and
+shall meet them all at the judgment-seat of Christ.' Upon this I
+inquired how many children she had destroyed, and to my astonishment she
+replied, 'I have destroyed <i>sixteen</i>, and now I am about to die.'&quot; After
+this Mr. Williams tried to comfort her, by telling her that she had done
+this when a heathen, and during the times of ignorance, which God winked
+at. But she received no consolation from this thought, and exclaimed
+again, &quot;O, my children, my children.&quot; He then directed her to the
+&quot;faithful saying, which is worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ
+came into the world to save sinners.&quot; This gave her a little comfort;
+and after visiting her frequently, and directing her to that blood which
+cleanseth from all sin, he succeeded, with the blessing of God, in
+bringing peace to her mind. She died soon after, rejoicing in the hope
+that her sins, though many, would be forgiven her. Well may you exclaim,
+my dear children,</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>&quot;Holy Bible, book divine,<br /></span>
+<span>Precious treasure, thou art mine.&quot;<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>Infanticide still prevails in India, but as I have given a particular
+description of this crime in my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of
+the Heathen, I will here say nothing farther on the subject.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XXI'></a><h2>CHAPTER XXI.</H2>
+
+<h3>THE DUTY OF PRAYING AND CONTRIBUTING FOR THE SPREAD OF THE GOSPEL.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;There is another story connected with India, which I
+might have mentioned in my last chapter while writing about the
+destruction of infants. I will relate it now, in order that you may be
+constrained to pray more frequently for the heathen. Some time ago, the
+wife of a native prince had a little daughter. The father ordered it to
+be put to death, immediately after it was born. Had it been a son, an
+heir to the throne, he would have taken great care of it. A second, a
+third, a fourth, a fifth little daughter was born. All these were also
+put to death by the command of the father. When a sixth little daughter
+was born, the mother's heart yearned over it. &quot;I cannot part with it,&quot;
+said she; &quot;I will have it taken away and hid, so that the king may know
+nothing about it.&quot; This was done, but the poor mother never dared to
+send for her little girl. She never saw her again, but died sometime
+after.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the little girls in India are very pretty. They have dark eyes,
+and sweet, expressive countenances. This little child grew to be a very
+beautiful girl; and when she was eleven years old, some of her relations
+ventured to bring her to her father. They thought that he would be
+struck with the sight of his sweet child, and that he would love her for
+the sake of her mother who had died. The little girl fell at his feet
+and clasped his knees, and looked up in his face and said, &quot;My father.&quot;
+And what do you think that father did? Do you think that he took her up
+in his arms, and kissed her? No. He seized her by the hair of her head,
+drew his sword from his belt, and with a single blow took off her head.</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear children, do you not think that you ought to pray for the
+poor heathen&mdash;to pray that God will send the Gospel to them? I want to
+tell you of a little boy who heard me preach some time ago about the
+heathen. One night he said his prayers, and went to bed. After he got
+into bed, he said to the nurse, &quot;I have forgotten to pray for the
+heathen, and I must get out of bed and pray for them.&quot; The nurse then
+told him that it would not be necessary for him to get up, as he could
+pray for them while in bed. &quot;No,&quot; said he, &quot;I must get out of bed and
+pray for them.&quot; And the dear little boy would not rest until he got out
+of bed and prayed for them. Now I want all of you, my dear children,
+every morning and evening, to kneel down and pray for the heathen, as
+this little boy did. And I want you to do something more. I want you
+always to be punctual in attending <i>the usual monthly concerts of
+prayer,</i> provided there are no juvenile monthly concerts to which you
+can go. I have long wished to see juvenile monthly concerts of prayer
+established. They would be very interesting if I am to judge from the
+account of one which I some time ago received from a friend of mine, the
+Rev. Mr. V&mdash;&mdash;. I will give you some extracts from his letter. He
+writes, &quot;According to promise, I send you an account of the first
+children's monthly concert, so far as I can learn, held on Long Island.
+As notice was not given either in the church or Sabbath-school, the
+attendance was smaller than it otherwise would have been. Still, about
+sixty interesting children attended. After a few remarks concerning the
+object of the meeting by the superintendent of the Sabbath-school they
+sung with melting eyes the hymn that describes the wretched heathen
+mother casting her lovely babe into the jaws of the monster of the
+Granges. Prayer then was made, of about two or three minutes in length.
+Then I gave some of the most affecting accounts of the cruelties and
+ignorance of the heathen, as related by the devoted Williams, that
+martyr missionary. Their silent attention and subdued countenances told
+that their hearts were with the wretched idolaters. After having thus
+spent about ten minutes, the children sung in a sweet manner, a hymn&mdash;a
+prayer for those laboring amid the heathen:&quot;</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>&quot;When worn by toil, their spirits fail,<br /></span>
+<span>Bid them the glorious future hail;<br /></span>
+<span>Bid them the crown of life survey,<br /></span>
+<span>And onward urge their conquering way.&quot;<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>&quot;After which, two resolutions were passed, unanimously, by the children.
+First, that they will each one attend the monthly concert of prayer
+regularly, when able, and bring with them all their companions whom they
+can persuade to come.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;Secondly, that they, with the children of the various schools of W&mdash;&mdash;,
+will constitute&mdash;&mdash; a life member of the W&mdash;&mdash; Bible Society. Some of
+the smaller children had brought their little Bibles to give them to
+----, that he might carry them to the poor children of the heathen. But
+when informed that the heathen could not understand English, they
+determined to raise money, and send it out to purchase Bibles for the
+children. This interesting meeting was closed by prayer, the doxology,
+and benediction.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>But not only can you pray for the heathen, you can give <i>something</i> to
+send the Gospel to them. Do you say that you have no money to give? But
+cannot you earn some? Many young persons have done so. One of whom I
+have read, says, &quot;Besides supporting a school in Ceylon, we are going to
+support five Chinese boys. I earn six cents a week for not using tea,
+one for not using sugar, and three for not using coffee.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Another says, &quot;I, with three others, have been making matches to the
+amount of ten dollars, and should have made more, but the people are
+pretty well supplied. I am going to dig my father's garden, and my
+mother is going to give me a quarter of a dollar for digging it, which I
+shall give to the missionaries. I am going to do all I can, and to earn
+all I can, and save all that I have, to support the missionaries.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Another says, &quot;I am going to leave off buying candy.&quot; What is that? Can
+little girls and boys do without sugar-candy? I am afraid that many of
+you, my dear children, would find it difficult to go without it. But let
+me quote all that this child wrote. &quot;I am going to leave off buying
+candy and such little notions, unless it is necessary, and save every
+cent that I can get and give it to the missionaries.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear children, I do think that if you would save some of those
+cents which you spend in buying candy, fire-crackers, and similar
+things, and buy Bibles and tracts for the poor heathen, you would do
+much more good with them.</p>
+
+<p>I want to tell you about a little boy who belonged to one of my schools
+in Ceylon, who has, as I hope, gone to heaven through the means of a
+tract which cost only two or three cents, and which was the cause of his
+coming under my care. After he had attended preaching for some time, he
+begged me to admit him to the church. As he was quite young, not eleven
+years old, I was afraid to receive him. This feeling, perhaps, was
+wrong. He never joined the church on earth. He has, however, I hope,
+gone to join the church in heaven. When he was about eleven years of
+age, he was attacked with the cholera and died. In this country, when
+children are very ill, the father or mother will catch up a cocoa-nut or
+a few plantains, and run off to the temple, and say, &quot;Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy or little girl, I will give you this
+cocoa-nut, or these plantains.&quot; The mother of this boy saw that he was
+very ill, and she told him that she wished to go to make offerings to
+one of her idols, in order that he might get well. But he requested her
+not to do so. &quot;I do not worship idols,&quot; said he; &quot;I worship Christ, my
+Saviour. If he is pleased to spare me a little longer in the world, it
+will be well; if not, I shall go to him.&quot; The last words he uttered
+were, &quot;I am going to Christ the Lord.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Now when you think about this little boy, I want you to ask yourselves,
+whether it is not better to give two or three cents to try and save the
+soul of some poor little heathen boy or girl, than to spend them in
+buying candy, and other useless things.</p>
+
+<p>But I must tell you about a little girl whom I saw some time ago, who
+refused to buy candy while there are so many heathen without the Bible.
+Her father is a sea-captain. Being absent from home, he sent her five
+dollars to buy candy, or any thing else which she wished. As this little
+girl had heard about the heathen, she determined to throw all her money
+into the missionary-box, instead of spending it for her own pleasure.
+The mother, on learning her intentions, asked her if she would not like
+to spend a part of it for candy, and similar things. She replied, that
+she would not, and in due time she put her five dollars into the
+missionary-box. Not long after this, she was attacked with a severe
+toothache. The mother proposed that the defective tooth should be
+extracted. The little creature, for she was only about eight years old,
+dreaded the operation, and seemed at first to be backward about having
+it performed. To encourage her to submit to it, her mother offered her
+twenty-five cents. This little girl did not then begin to reason, Now,
+if I can only get those twenty-five cents, I can buy a doll, or I can
+buy some sugar-candy; but she reasoned thus, Now, if I can get those
+twenty-five cents, I can go and put them into the missionary-box. So she
+said to her mother, I will go and have the tooth taken out. The tooth,
+however, ceased to ache, but still she wished to have it extracted. Her
+mother then interfered, and told her that, as it had ceased to ache, it
+might be well for her not to have it drawn until it ached again. The
+little girl, however, persisted, saying, that if it were not taken out,
+she could not get the twenty-five cents to devote to the missionary
+cause. She therefore went to the dentist's, submitted to the operation,
+received her twenty-five cents, and went and threw them into the Lord's
+treasury. Was not that a noble little girl? Doubtless you will all say
+she was.</p>
+
+<p>I must tell you about a noble little boy also. Some time ago, I was
+preaching to the children of Canandaigua, in the western part of New
+York. After I had preached there, I went on to Rochester. Returning from
+that place, I met with a lady in the cars, who told me as follows:
+&quot;After you had preached in Canandaigua,&quot; said she, &quot;a young lady there,
+who had lost her mother, and who had six or seven or eight of her
+brothers and sisters under her care, formed them into a missionary
+society.&quot; Oh, I wish that all the dear children in America were formed
+into missionary societies. After she had done this, she asked her little
+brother how he was going to get money to put into the missionary-box.
+&quot;By catching mice,&quot; said he. His sister gave him two or three cents for
+every mouse he caught. Thus it appears, that this dear little boy was
+going to throw all his earnings into the Lord's treasury.</p>
+
+<p>But let me tell you a little more about the children to whom I before
+alluded. Another says, &quot;In some of the day-schools of this city, the
+girls have formed sewing societies, and make pin-cushions, needle-books,
+emery-bags, and the like, and send the money that is raised from the
+sale of them to the missionaries, to be used for the heathen. There are
+seven Sabbath-schools in this town, and in each of them there is a
+missionary association; so that in all about five hundred dollars are
+sent from the Sabbath-schools every year.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear girls, I want you to think of what has now been said about
+the formation of sewing societies; and I want you to ask your mothers
+whether they will not allow you to form such societies, to meet once a
+week, or once in two weeks, or once a month to sew, to get some money to
+send the Gospel to the heathen. Many societies of this kind have been
+formed. After I had preached to the children in one of the churches in
+Third-street, New York, the little girls who attend that church formed
+such a society. The account which I received of it is as follows. &quot;You
+may remember, that in your address to our Sabbath-school, you related
+instances of little girls knitting, sewing, etc., to earn something for
+the missionary-box The examples which you related were not lost to the
+girls of the Sabbath-school. Immediately they began to talk about
+forming themselves into a sewing society, and making small articles, and
+giving the proceeds to the missionary society. They did not stop here,
+but went right to work, and soon formed their society, which they styled
+the Juvenile Sewing Society. They are in a very prosperous and
+flourishing condition at present. I know not the amount of funds they
+possess&mdash;they pay a cent a week into their treasury&mdash;but they have a
+large assortment of articles already made. I understand, also, they meet
+once a week to sew.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>After I had preached at a place called Little Falls, New York, the girls
+formed a sewing society there. The following account of this society I
+received from one of its little members. &quot;When you were here last fall,
+and told us how much good little girls had done in having sewing
+societies, we thought we would see if <i>we</i> could not do some good in the
+world, as well as they; and, since October, we have met weekly, and by
+holding a fair, we have succeeded in raising sixty-two dollars. We
+hope it will be the means of saving some poor heathen children.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Now, as I said before, I want you, my dear girls, to ask your mothers if
+you may not form such societies also. Will you think of it? I hope you
+will.</p>
+
+<p>Another of the children to whom I have twice referred, says, &quot;I can try
+and save their souls, if I am not there. I can work for them, and send
+some money to you to buy them Bibles, and I can pray for them; and if I
+should save some souls, O how would they thank me. But if I did not send
+my money, nor care any thing about them, and I should not go to heaven,
+and they should not, how would they rise up in judgment against me, and
+say, If we had had the privileges that you had, we should not be here.
+O, how thankful we ought to be, that we were not born in heathen lands.
+O, if the poor heathen could only have such privileges as we have, how
+thankful would they be; and if we were born in heathen lands, I have no
+doubt that they would come and tell us about a Saviour.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>I have received many letters from children, breathing the same spirit
+which is manifested in the notes I have copied.</p>
+
+<p>One writes, &quot;Last winter I brought in the wood for mother, and she gave
+me fifty cents. I now am very glad that I have not spent it, as I can
+give it to you to buy tracts for the little heathen children of India.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A second writes, &quot;The enclosed fifty cents my grandmother gave me when I
+was a very little boy, for sitting still one hour. Will you please to
+use it to furnish the Bible and missionary to the heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A third writes, &quot;I have always spent my money for candy and other
+trifles, but since I have heard about the darkness and misery of the
+heathen, I intend to save it all, and put it into the missionary-box.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A fourth writes, &quot;The enclosed I earned by knitting. I intended to save
+it, till I had sufficient to carry me a short journey to see some of my
+friends; but when I heard you tell about the little heathen girls, I
+thought I would give it to you, for the poor heathen children.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A fifth writes, &quot;I have enclosed twelve and a half cents, which my
+father gave me to go and see General Tom Thumb. When I heard you
+lecture last evening, I came home and concluded to give it to you, and
+let you buy Bibles for the poor heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A sixth writes, &quot;I remember, before my mother died, she used to tell me
+a great deal about the children of India, and now she is in heaven. I
+think she would like to have me give my heart to the Saviour, and go and
+teach those poor children. I give you some money that was given to me to
+see an exhibition, which I saved to give for such things, rather than
+go.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A seventh writes, &quot;You told us that two cents were the means of
+converting a young man. I would give two cents every week, if it would
+convert souls to Christ.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>An eighth writes, &quot;My mother told me, some time ago, that every day I
+recited my lessons without missing a word, she would give me a penny;
+and not being desirous to spend it, I do wish you would take it&mdash;fifty
+cents&mdash;to the heathen. It may buy some tracts at the bazaar or market.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A ninth writes, &quot;We feel sorry for those poor heathen children. We will
+try to earn some money to buy Bibles for the heathen. Father has
+promised us some land to work next summer, and we think we can raise
+something and sell it to get the money.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A tenth writes, &quot;Since you were here last spring, I have saved what I
+could&mdash;one dollar&mdash;for the heathen children, and should be glad if I
+could do more.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>An eleventh writes, &quot;The money which you will find enclosed, I earned by
+working for my mother on Saturday, which I intended to keep to buy a
+microscope; but when I heard you preach on Sabbath, I concluded to give
+it to buy Bibles for the poor heathen children.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A twelfth writes, &quot;The enclosed, five dollars, was a birthday present
+from my father, but I want to give it to Dr. Scudder, for the poor
+little boys in Ceylon.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A thirteenth writes, &quot;Please accept my mite, by the hand of my brother.
+I have been keeping it for the purpose of buying a geography; but when I
+heard you preach yesterday, I thought I had better send it to you, for
+the poor heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A fourteenth writes, &quot;I would like much to become a missionary, as I am
+named after one; I hope I shall be one. I have been saving a dollar to
+buy myself some books, but concluded to give it to buy some books for
+the heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>The last two children, whose letters you have been reading, gave to the
+missionary cause the money which they had been earning to buy books.
+When you have been earning money for the express purpose of giving it to
+the missionary cause, then you should devote it all to that cause; but I
+would advise you not to do as did the two children last mentioned. Had
+my opinion been asked, relative to the disposal of their money, I would
+have recommended them to give <i>one-tenth,</i> or perhaps a little more, of
+the sums they had been earning, to their Saviour, and to keep the rest
+to buy their books. The giving of not less than one-tenth of all you
+earn, for charitable purposes, is the principle which I wish to have
+impressed fully on your minds, and I hope you will grow up under the
+influence of this principle, and <i>never, never</i> depart from it. But
+while I thus speak, you must not suppose that I wish you to confine
+yourselves to the giving of one-tenth, when you can give more; I hope
+you will not give merely this, but one-half, or more, if you can afford
+it. Indeed, if you do not go as missionaries to the heathen, I want you
+to make it your great object <i>to make money for Christ, and to spend it
+for Christ</i>. O, if the generation which is grown, were as anxious to
+make money for Christ, and to spend it for Christ, as they are to make
+it for themselves, and to spend it for themselves, or to hoard it up&mdash;it
+may be for the everlasting destruction of the souls of their
+heirs&mdash;there would be no complaints that money could not be had to send
+the Gospel to the destitute, both at home and abroad.</p>
+
+<p>In my twelfth chapter, I spoke of the liberal donations which the
+heathen of India make for the support of their religion. In the city of
+Calcutta alone, it is supposed that two millions of dollars are spent
+every year on the festival of a single goddess&mdash;a festival which lasts
+only a few days. A single native has been known to give, as I before
+said, more than one hundred thousand dollars at one time to this
+festival, and afterwards thirty thousand dollars yearly. How vast, then,
+must be the sums which are spent upon all the different festivals of
+their gods. Would that we could see such liberality among Christians.
+Would that we could see the generality of them willing to give even
+one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Alas, what would the
+heathen say, if they were to learn how much greater are the sums of
+money which they give to their idols, than Christians give to honor
+their Saviour? Would they not exclaim, It is because Christianity is
+false, and heathenism is true, that Christians give so little for
+Christ, while we give so much for our gods? My dear children, I hope
+that you will never allow the heathen to say that the Christian religion
+is false, because you do not give your money for the spread of the
+Gospel. Will you not resolve now, that you will, so long as God prospers
+you in worldly goods, give <i>at least</i> one-tenth of all you earn to the
+Lord? Do, my dear children, do make the resolution now.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XXII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XXII.</H2>
+
+<h3>PERSONAL LABORS AMONG THE HEATHEN.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear children&mdash;You have, perhaps, often seen Campbell's missionary
+map of the world. If not, I want you very carefully to look at it. I
+want you to look at the red spots on it, and think how many millions of
+people embrace the religion both of the Greek and Roman Catholic
+churches&mdash;a religion which is nothing more nor less than paganism, with
+a few Christian doctrines added to it. After this, I want you to look at
+the green spots, and think of the hundred and twenty millions of
+Mohammedans, who spurn the name of Jesus as a Saviour, and who have set
+up Mahomet as their prophet. I want you also to look at all the dark
+spots, where, with comparatively a few exceptions, the people are in
+pagan darkness, without any knowledge of God and the only Saviour of
+sinners Jesus Christ. And in view of all this darkness&mdash;in view of the
+need of more than half a million of ministers of the Gospel to preach
+the news of salvation to them, I want you, my dear boys, to ask
+yourselves whether it may not be your duty, after you grow up, to
+become ministers, and go and preach the Gospel to them. You know that
+you are bound to do all the good to others which you can; and even if
+you do not love the Saviour, you are not released from your obligations
+to do good. I would by no means have you become ministers without giving
+your hearts to Christ; but this you are as much bound to do, as you are
+bound to do all the good you can to others. If you are not Christians, I
+want you, through grace, to become such, and I want many of you to
+become ministers and missionaries. Two of my sons are now missionaries
+in India, and four others, I hope, are preparing to come. And why should
+not you also come here, or go to other heathen lands? If you can be
+excused from coming or going, why may not all who are now little boys
+also be excused? In such a case, there will be no missionaries at all.
+And you know that this would be very wrong. But I do not merely want
+many of you, my dear boys, to become missionaries, I want many of you,
+my dear girls, to become missionaries also. Many little girls and boys
+have expressed a desire to become missionaries. Several little boys who
+wrote to Mr. Hutchings, one of my missionary brethren, and several
+little boys and girls who have written to me, have said that they would
+like to be missionaries.</p>
+
+<p>One writes, &quot;I should like to go and be a missionary, and instruct the
+poor heathen children to love God.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A second says, &quot;I have been selling matches that I made. I got five
+dollars&mdash;just as many dollars as I am years old. I think I shall become
+a missionary, and come and help you. I hope I shall see you again when I
+come to Ceylon. Tell the heathen children they must love God, and be
+good children. They must not give the children to the crocodiles, nor
+throw them into the water; and they must not worship wooden and brass
+gods. They must worship the true God, and keep his commandments.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A third says, &quot;I like to send money to help the poor heathen to learn to
+read the Bible, and other good books. I think it will be pleasant to
+sail across the ocean, and teach them to turn from their idols. I would
+teach them not to lay themselves down before the car of Juggernaut, and
+be crushed to death; and I would teach them not to burn themselves to
+death on the funeral pile.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A fourth says, &quot;I mean to save something to send to you, to help support
+one school. Should my life be spared, and the way be opened at some
+future day, I think I should be willing to leave my native home, to go to
+some distant land to tell the heathen of a Saviour, whom I hope I have
+found.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A fifth says, &quot;If you are ever in want of money, just please to send on
+to me, and I will endeavor to raise all that you want. If I live to be a
+man, I hope be a missionary to Ceylon or China.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>One little boy wrote to me as follows: &quot;I have for a long time been
+saving three shillings, for the purpose of buying a little racoon, which
+I intended to do on Monday. On Sunday I heard you preach, and thought I
+would give it to you to save some poor heathen soul; and I hope you will
+pray for me, that I may become a minister, and go to India, and preach
+to the heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Another writes, &quot;This is to certify that I, Charles D.H. Frederick,
+pledge myself, if God spares my life, when I get to be a man, and he
+pardons me through Christ Jesus, I will go and preach to the heathen.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>A little girl wrote me as follows: &quot;According to my present feelings, I
+should like to engage in so glorious a cause,&quot; as the missionary cause,
+&quot;and I hope, when I arrive at an age to be of use to God, and the poor
+heathen, to embrace so glorious a cause.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Another little girl writes, &quot;I felt very bad when I heard you tell about
+the poor heathen who worship the idols. I could not keep from weeping,
+when you told us about the man who came so far to get a teacher to come
+and tell the Gospel to his friends, and was disappointed. I felt very
+bad Sunday evening; and on Monday evening I felt that the Lord had given
+me a new heart. I felt happy, and sang some beautiful verses that I
+learned in one of mother's little books. I have read the Day-springs,
+and thought a great deal about the heathen for two years.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;I used to think a great deal about having nice clothes, before I
+thought so much about the heathen. My mother told me some time ago, that
+she thought she would get me a white dress when I was ten years old. I
+am now ten years old, and this evening mother gave me two dollars to
+get the dress, or dispose of it in any way I thought best; and I wish
+you would take it to have the poor heathen taught about the Saviour. If
+I live, and it is the Lord's will, I hope I shall come and help you
+teach the poor heathen about the Saviour.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>There is a little boy in the city of New York, who formerly used to tell
+his mother, that he meant to be a cab-driver, and all she could say to
+him was of no avail in making him think differently. This little boy
+came with his mother to hear me preach about the heathen.</p>
+
+<p>After he had left the church, as he was going home, he burst into tears,
+and exclaimed, &quot;Mother, I mean to be a missionary to the heathen;&quot; and
+so far as I know, he has never talked about being any thing else since.
+And I hope that many of you will never talk about being any thing else
+than missionaries to the heathen.</p>
+
+<p>I am acquainted with a little girl in Ohio, who has resolved to become a
+missionary. She is a niece of Mr. Campbell, late missionary to Africa.
+She was not quite four years old when I saw her. When she was eighteen
+months of age, she saw the picture of a heathen mother throwing her
+child into the mouth of a crocodile She was deeply impressed with the
+sight. When she was two and a half years old, she resolved to be a
+missionary, and follow her uncle to Africa. From this resolution she has
+never drawn hack. When I was at her father's house, she was asked if she
+would not go to India. She replied, that she would not go to India, but
+to Africa. She was asked why she wished to go to Africa. &quot;To teach the
+heathen,&quot; was her answer. &quot;Why should you teach the heathen?&quot; &quot;Because
+they worship idols.&quot; Her mother told me, that ever since she began to
+get money, she has contributed to the missionary cause; and this money
+has generally, if not always, been earned by some act of self-denial on
+her part. I hope that many of you will feel just as this little girl
+felt, and do just as she did.</p>
+
+<p>When I was in America, I used continually, when preaching, to ask the
+dear children whether they would not become missionaries. I used also to
+beg them to write down what I had asked them. Many complied with my
+request. While I was at the Avon Springs, one of the daughters of a
+physician there, not only wrote it down, but gave me what she had
+written. The following is a copy of what she wrote,</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src='images/184.gif' width='574' height='274' alt='<p><i>August 18, 1844.
+
+ Dr. Scudder requested me to come to India to help him when I am
+    grown. S. P. S. Avon Springs' title=''>
+</center>
+
+<p>Could I raise my voice loud enough to reach America, I would beg of
+<i>you</i> to write down the following sentence: Dr. Scudder asks me, to-day,
+whether I will not hereafter become a missionary to the heathen. Perhaps
+you will write it down <i>immediately</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear boys, if you will come out to India, or go to Burmah or
+China, to tell the heathen of the Saviour, you may, with the blessing of
+God, do as much good as Swartz and Carey, and others have done. And if
+you, my dear girls, will do the same, you also may do much good. This
+will appear from what I am going to tell you about a little girl in
+Ceylon. This little girl belonged to the boarding-school at Oodooville.
+She early gave her heart to the Saviour, and joined the church when she
+was thirteen years old. I should like to know if there are any of you
+who have not followed her example. If so, this is not right. My dear
+children, it is not right. Shall this little girl, in a heathen land, a
+land filled with idols, give her heart to Christ; and you, in a
+Christian land, a land of Sabbaths, and Sabbath-schools, and Bibles, not
+give your hearts to him? This is not right. You know that it is not
+right.</p>
+
+<p>But let me go on with my account of the little girl. After she had
+joined the church, she wanted to go and see her mother, who was a
+heathen, for the purpose of conversing with her about her soul's
+concerns. Now, in this country, when children who have been absent from
+their parents for any length of time go home, the mother spreads a mat
+down on the floor, and tells them to sit down upon it, adding that she
+will go and cook rice for them. They have no seats to sit on, as you
+have in America. Well, this little girl went home. When her mother saw
+her, she was very glad; and after she had spread a mat for her, and told
+her to sit down, she said that she would go and cook rice for her. The
+little girl told her that she was not hungry, and did not wish to eat,
+but wanted to talk with her. &quot;You cannot talk with me,&quot; said her mother,
+&quot;until I have cooked rice for you.&quot; &quot;Mother,&quot; said the little girl, &quot;you
+worship idols, and I am afraid that you will lose your soul, and I want
+to talk with you about Jesus Christ.&quot; The mother became quite angry with
+her, and rebuked her. But still the little girl continued to talk with
+her about her soul. The mother then became so angry, that she told her
+to be silent, or she would punish her. The little girl replied, &quot;Mother,
+though you do whip me, I must talk to you about Jesus Christ,&quot; and she
+burst into tears. The mother's heart was broken. She sat down on the
+mat, and her little daughter talked with her, and prayed with her. After
+this the little girl was so troubled, fearing that her mother's soul
+might be lost, that she was heard praying for her during all parts of
+the night. And God heard her prayers. Her mother forsook her idols, and
+became a Christian, and her conversion was followed by the conversion of
+one or two others. Now, my dear little girls, if you will give your
+hearts to the Saviour, and in due time come here, or go to other heathen
+lands, and tell the people of a Saviour, you may, with the help of the
+Holy Spirit, be as useful as this little girl was.</p>
+
+<p>Female missionaries have done much good among the heathen. I mentioned
+an instance on page 88, to prove this. Let me mention another instance
+more.</p>
+
+<p>In the year 1838, an English lady, Miss Aldersey, went to the East, at
+her own expense to promote female education among the Chinese. At that
+time, she could not go to China, as that country was not open to
+missionaries She therefore went to Java, where there was a colony of
+Chinese. Here she hired a house, and collected about twenty-five girls,
+whom she clothed, and boarded, and taught. The Lord blessed her labors,
+and several of these girls were hopefully converted. When their parents
+saw that they would no longer worship idols, they became much opposed to
+the school, and some of them took their daughters from it. In the year
+1842, God opened the door for the entrance of the Gospel into China.
+This missionary then broke up her school in Java, went to that country,
+and resided in the city of Ningpo. Of the girls who had become
+Christians while under her care, two were much persecuted by their
+parents. They were whipped and beaten, with the hope that they would
+again return to their idols; but all the efforts which were made to
+induce them to forsake the Saviour were in vain. They declared that they
+would sooner die than forsake him. When their parents saw that stripes
+and blows were of no avail, they determined to marry them to men who
+were much devoted to their idols. This stratagem, they thought, might
+succeed in destroying all their interest in their new religion. Here,
+however, they were again foiled. The girls became alarmed, and fled from
+their parents. An English gentleman, but who was not a professor of
+religion, felt deeply interested for them, and assisted them to get on
+board a ship going to Batavia. Here they were pursued but escaped from
+the pursuers by going on board of a ship which sailed for Singapore.
+From Singapore they sailed for China, where they were permitted to join
+the old friend who had been the means of their conversion. This lady
+collected a school at Ningpo of more than thirty girls. Thus you see how
+much good female missionaries have done by going to heathen lands. And
+are none of you willing to follow their example? Are none of you willing
+to say, Here am I, Lord, send me?</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style='width: 65%;' />
+<a name='CHAPTER_XXIII'></a><h2>CHAPTER XXIII.</H2>
+
+<h3>SUCCESS OF THE GOSPEL IN INDIA AND CEYLON.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>My dear Children&mdash;I have told you that India is a very dark land, but
+there are a few bright spots in it. Through the blessing of God upon the
+prayers of his people in Christian lands, and upon the prayers and
+labors of his missionary servants, many of the heathen of India and
+Ceylon have forsaken their idols, and are now enlisted under the banner
+of Jehovah Jesus. In the Travancore and Tinnivelly districts to say
+nothing of the success of the Gospel in other places, thousands and tens
+of thousands of the people have embraced Christianity. In hundreds of
+villages where but a few years ago the name of Jesus had never been
+heard, it is now known and adored.</p>
+
+<p>You have often heard of Ceylon. If you will look at the map of
+Hindostan, you will find it close to that country. Here Christianity has
+begun to prevail. This island is two hundred miles long, and in some
+places quite wide. A large part of it is covered with what is called
+jungle. Jungle and wilderness mean the same thing. In this jungle there
+are many wild beasts, such as elephants, bears, wild hogs, and
+buffaloes. In it also, there are men, women, and children, running wild,
+just like the wild beasts. This people are called Verders, or wild
+people. They wear scarcely any clothing. They have no houses. When it
+rains, they creep into holes, or go under overhanging rocks. Their beds
+consist of a few leaves. Sunk almost to the level of the brute, they
+live and die like their shaggy companions of the forest. Even upon these
+the Gospel has tried its power. More than fifty families have settled
+down, forming two pleasant, and now Christian villages. They have
+schoolmasters and Christian teachers.</p>
+
+<p>I must give you a description of two revivals of religion which
+occurred while I was in the island of Ceylon, in the year 1833. Before
+those revivals took place, there was no particular manifestation of much
+seriousness at any of our stations. It was in the month of October of
+that year, that we began to feel that we must labor more, and pray more
+for the conversion of perishing souls. A protracted meeting was spoken
+of, and it was determined that one should be held at our seminary in
+Batticotta&mdash;a seminary which was established for the purpose of raising
+up a native ministry. On the morning of the day in which the meeting was
+commenced, Mr. Spaulding and myself went to that station to assist Mr.
+Poor, the principal of the seminary, in laboring with the students. In
+these labors we spent five days. It was good to be there. No sooner had
+we begun our exercises, than a blessing from on high was experienced.
+The windows of heaven were opened, and the Holy Ghost descended. This
+was evident from the spirit of prayer which was poured out upon the
+pious students of the seminary. They were heard &quot;a great while before
+day&quot; pleading, in their social circles, that God would have mercy upon
+their impenitent companions, and bring them into the kingdom of his
+grace. We trust, also, that a spirit of prayer was given to those of us
+who took a prominent part in the meeting. At the termination of our
+exercises, with the exception of a few lads belonging to a Tamul class,
+who had lately been admitted to the seminary, there was not, so far as I
+know, an individual connected with it, who was not humbled at the foot
+of the cross, either to lie there until healed of his wounds, or to
+show, if he perished, that he must perish under circumstances of a very
+aggravated nature.</p>
+
+<p>After we had finished our meeting at Batticotta we went to the female
+seminary at Oodooville, to hold similar meetings. Before we reached that
+station, the church-members there, after having heard what God was doing
+at Batticotta, became very much aroused to pray for the influences of
+the Holy Spirit to descend upon the impenitent in their seminary also.
+Soon after we reached the station, we held a meeting with the girls.
+Some of them were then deeply concerned for the salvation of their
+souls; but it was not until Wednesday afternoon, that we knew how
+powerfully the Spirit of God had been at work. The meeting which we held
+with the seminarists at that time was one of the most solemn meetings
+which I ever attended. One of them, a girl of high caste, and of a very
+good family, said to her companions in that meeting, &quot;My sisters, I have
+been a proud one among you. I hope that if you ever see me proud again,
+you will tell me of it. I used to tell the missionaries, that I had
+given myself to the Saviour, but I had not done it.&quot; Another of the
+girls burst into tears, and cried out aloud. As she could not restrain
+her feelings, and did not wish to disturb the assembly, she arose and
+left it. She retired to one of the prayer-rooms adjoining the seminary,
+there to weep alone. She, however, was not left alone. Mr. Poor, one of
+my missionary associates, followed her, and endeavored to administer the
+consolations of the Gospel to her; but she refused to be comforted. All
+her distress seemed to arise from a single source. &quot;I told you a
+falsehood,&quot; said she, &quot;last Monday, in saying that I had dedicated
+myself to the Saviour, when I had not.&quot; Perhaps she thought at that
+time, that she had thus dedicated herself to the Saviour, but
+afterwards found that she had deceived herself. In this wretched state
+of mind, she continued until half-past ten o'clock that night, when she
+came into Mr. Spaulding's house, where I then was, and wished to know
+what she must do to be saved. She was told, as she had often been told
+before, that she must dedicate herself entirely to her Saviour. She went
+away, and returned the same night at about half-past eleven o'clock,
+saying, that she had found HIM.</p>
+
+<div class='poem'><div class='stanza'>
+<span>&quot;Friends, is not my case amazing?<br /></span>
+<span class='i1'>What a Saviour I have found.&quot;<br /></span>
+</div></div>
+
+<p>My dear young friends, are there any of you who have never given your
+hearts to Christ? If so, let me entreat you to follow the example of
+that dear little girl of whom I have now been speaking. She found it to
+be necessary to give her heart to the Saviour, and I hope that she did
+give it to him. O that you too might give up your hearts to him. Alas,
+if you do not, you must soon go down to eternal burnings where you will
+be constrained to cry out, Lost, lost, lost for ever! Be careful, my
+dear children, O be careful that this young girl does not rise up
+against you in the last day, and condemn you. She must do so&mdash;she will
+do so, if you do not, like her, choose Christ as your portion. But I am
+digressing, and must go back to the point I left.</p>
+
+<p>The next day, one of our missionary sisters, who had lately reached
+Ceylon from America, came to Oodooville, to witness the nature of the
+work which she heard was in progress at that place. As she was entering
+Mr. Spaulding's house, she was met by one of the most consistent
+church-members of the seminary, who declared that she had lost her hope
+of being a Christian. Perhaps this church-member was disposed to write
+bitter things against herself because she did not feel all that warmth
+in religion which marked the conduct of those who, at that time, were
+indulging the hope that they had passed from death to life. After the
+sister to whom I alluded had been in the house a little while, she
+requested Mrs. Spaulding to allow her to have an interview with such of
+the girls as were entertaining a hope of their interest in the Saviour.
+These were twenty-two in number. This interview was granted. As she
+knew nothing about the Tamul language, I acted as her interpreter.
+Through me, she requested the girls to give a statement of their
+feelings. One of them arose, and said, &quot;I feel as happy as an angel. I
+feel joys that I can express to no one but my Saviour; and I am just as
+certain that my sins are forgiven, as if I had sent up a karduthaase,&quot;
+that is, a letter to heaven, &quot;and received an answer to it.&quot; Another of
+the girls said, that the missionaries had often talked with her about
+her dedicating herself to the Saviour, but that she did not then know
+what it meant. &quot;I now know,&quot; added she, &quot;what it means, for God has
+taught it to me.&quot; Another of the girls said, &quot;Though they put me in the
+fire, I will never forsake the Saviour.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Now, my dear children, I must bid you farewell Probably I shall never
+see you, unless you come to this heathen land, until I meet you at the
+judgment-seat of Christ. If you do not become missionaries, most of you
+will probably die, and be buried where you now are. Probably I shall die
+in this heathen land. But we shall not always sleep in our graves. After
+a little season, the archangel's trumpet will sound, and you in
+America, and I in India, shall hear his voice proclaiming, &quot;Awake, ye
+dead, and come to judgment.&quot; And we shall all at once rise from our
+graves, and stand before our Judge. And where shall I then see you?
+Shall I see any of you on the left hand of Christ, and hear him say,
+&quot;Depart, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and
+his angels?&quot; O, if I should hear that dreadful sentence pronounced
+against you, how would my heart die within me. How could I bear to hear
+it. Oh, I could not&mdash;I could not bear to hear it. My dear children, if
+you are yet out of Christ, I entreat you, <i>at this very moment</i>, to lay
+down this book, and throw yourselves at the feet of your Saviour. Tell
+him, that you are lost sinners, deserving to be cast into everlasting
+burnings. Tell him, that though you have been wicked children, you will
+leave off your wickedness, and be his for ever. Plead with him, with as
+much earnestness as a <i>drowning</i> man would plead with you to save him,
+to give you the influences of his Holy Spirit, to create within you a
+clean heart, and renew within you a right spirit, without which you are
+eternally undone; and continue to plead, until he pardons you, and
+receives you as his children. By all the sufferings of the Son of God,
+by all the joys of heaven, by all the torments of hell, by the
+solemnities of your dying bed, by the value of your immortal souls
+<i>which, if once lost, must be lost for ever</i>, I beseech you thus
+<i>immediately</i> to throw yourselves at his feet, and plead with him to
+make you his. Neglect this duty&mdash;neglect giving yourselves to Christ,
+even for one minute, and it may be, that you will be lost, yea, LOST FOR
+EVER.</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little
+Readers, About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13539-h.htm or 13539-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/5/3/13539/
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
+
+
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/002.gif b/old/13539-h/images/002.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9094cb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/002.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/020.gif b/old/13539-h/images/020.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45f6411
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/020.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/048.gif b/old/13539-h/images/048.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f5bfd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/048.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/069.gif b/old/13539-h/images/069.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1e8da1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/069.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/070.gif b/old/13539-h/images/070.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2ba427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/070.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/071.gif b/old/13539-h/images/071.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1117841
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/071.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/081.gif b/old/13539-h/images/081.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95a0440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/081.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/087.gif b/old/13539-h/images/087.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3202a34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/087.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/103.gif b/old/13539-h/images/103.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..423f004
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/103.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/117.gif b/old/13539-h/images/117.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff0b6e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/117.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/120.gif b/old/13539-h/images/120.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..414f5d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/120.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/122.gif b/old/13539-h/images/122.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5a5694
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/122.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/123a.gif b/old/13539-h/images/123a.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d8de30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/123a.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/123b.gif b/old/13539-h/images/123b.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbc17ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/123b.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/135.gif b/old/13539-h/images/135.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf85ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/135.gif
diff --git a/old/13539-h/images/184.gif b/old/13539-h/images/184.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6239081
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539-h/images/184.gif
diff --git a/old/13539.txt b/old/13539.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc82638
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4124 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers,
+About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers, About the Heathen.
+
+Author: Dr. John Scudder
+
+Release Date: September 27, 2004 [EBook #13539]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DR. SCUDDER'S
+
+TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,
+
+ABOUT THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+
+1849
+
+
+The following work, so far as the Hindoos are concerned, is principally
+a compilation from the writings of Duff, Dubois, and others.
+
+Should the eyes of any Christian father or mother rest upon it, I would
+ask them if they have not a son or a daughter to dedicate to the
+_missionary_ work. The duty of devoting themselves to this work of
+Christ, or at least, of consecrating to it their money, their efforts,
+and their prayers, is the great duty to be perseveringly and prayerfully
+impressed on the minds of our children. A generation thus trained would,
+with aid from on high, soon effect the moral revolution of the world.
+Blessed will be that father, blessed will be that mother, who shall take
+any part in such a training. And I would add, too, blessed will be that
+pastor, and blessed will be that Sabbath-school teacher, who shall come
+up to their help.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+General Remarks
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+The Color and Ornaments of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+Dress, Houses, Eating, and Salutation of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+Marriage among the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+Death and Funerals among the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+The Gods of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+The Three Hundred and Thirty Millions of the Gods of the Hindoos--The
+Creation of the Universe--The Transmigration of Souls--The different
+Hells
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+Hindoo Castes
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+Hindoo Temples--Cars--Procession of Idols
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+Festivals of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+The worship of the Serpent
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+The River Ganges
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+The Goddess Durga
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+The Goddess Karle
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+Self-tortures of the Hindoos
+
+Chapter XVI.
+
+The Suttee, or Burning of Widows
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+The revengeful Nature of the Hindoo Religion
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+The Deception of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+Superstition of the Hindoos
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+Burmah, China, etc., etc.
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+The duty of Praying and Contributing for the Spread of the Gospel
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+Personal Labors among the Heathen
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+Success of the Gospel in India and Ceylon
+
+
+
+
+DR. SCUDDER'S
+
+TALES FOR LITTLE READERS,
+
+ABOUT THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+GENERAL REMARKS
+
+
+My dear children--When I was a little boy, my dear mother taught me,
+with the exception of the last line, the following prayer:
+
+    "Now I lay me down to sleep,
+    I pray the Lord my soul to keep;
+    If I should die before I wake,
+    I pray the Lord my soul to take;
+    And this I ask for Jesus' sake."
+
+Though I am now more than fifty years old, I often like to say this
+prayer before I go to sleep. Have you ever learned it, my dear
+children? If you have not, I hope that you will learn it _now_; and I
+hope, too, that when you say your other prayers at night, you will also
+say this. I think that you would be glad to see how this prayer looks in
+the Tamul language--the language in which I am now preaching the Gospel,
+and in which I hope that some of you will hereafter tell the heathen of
+the Saviour. The following is a translation of it:
+
+[Illustration: The Lord's Prayer in Tamul]
+
+I wish that all the little heathen children knew this prayer; but their
+fathers and mothers do not teach it to them. Their fathers and mothers
+teach them to pray to gods of gold, or brass, or stone. They take them,
+while they are very young, to their temples, and teach them to put up
+their hands before an idol, and say, "Swammie." Swammie means Lord. As
+idolatry is the root of all sin, these children, as you may suppose, in
+early life become very wicked. They disobey their parents, speak bad
+words, call ill names, swear, steal, and tell lies. They also throw
+themselves on the ground in anger, and in their rage they tear their
+hair, or throw dirt over their heads, and do many other wicked things.
+
+Let me give you an instance, to show you how they will speak bad words.
+A few months ago, a little girl about twelve years of age was brought to
+me, with two tumors in her back. To cut them out, I had to make an
+incision about eight inches in length; and as one of these tumors had
+extended under the shoulder-blade she suffered much before the operation
+was finished. While I was operating she cried out, "I will pull out my
+eyes." "I will pull out my tongue." "Kurn kertta tayvun." The
+translation of this is, "The blind-eyed god." By this expression, she
+meant to say, "What kind of a god are you, not to look upon me, and help
+me in my distress?" If this little girl had had a Christian father to
+teach her to love the Saviour, she would not have used such bad
+language. But this father was even more wicked than his daughter,
+inasmuch as those who grow old in sin, are worse than those who have not
+sinned so long. I never saw a more hard-hearted parent. That he was so,
+will appear from his conduct after the operation was finished. He left
+his daughter, and went off to his home, about forty miles distant.
+Before going, he said to his wife, or to one who came with her, "If the
+child gets well, bring her home; if she dies, take her away and bury
+her."
+
+I hope, my dear children, that when you think of the wicked little girl
+just mentioned, you will be warned never to speak bad words. God will be
+very angry with you, if you do. Did you never read what is said in 2
+Kings, 2d chapter and 23d verse, about the little children who mocked
+the prophet Elijah, and spoke bad words to him. O, how sorry must they
+have felt for their conduct, when they saw the paws of those great bears
+lifted up to tear them in pieces, and which did tear them in pieces.
+Besides all this, little children who speak bad words can never go to
+heaven. God will cast them into the great fire. Have you ever spoken bad
+words? If so, God is angry with you, and he will not forgive you unless
+you are sorry that you have done so, and seek his forgiveness through
+the blood of his dear Son.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE COLOR AND ORNAMENTS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear children--If you will take a piece of mahogany in your hands,
+and view its different shades, you will have a pretty good
+representation of the color of a large class of this heathen people--I
+say, of a large class, for there is a great variety of colors. Some
+appear to be almost of a bronze color. Some are quite black. It is
+difficult to account for the different colors which we often see in the
+same family. For instance, one child will be of the reddish hue to which
+I just referred; another will be quite dark. When I was in Ceylon, two
+sisters of this description joined my church. One was called Sevappe, or
+the red one; the other was called Karappe, or the black one.
+
+This people very much resemble the English and Americans in their
+features. Many of them are very beautiful. This remark will apply
+particularly to children, and more especially to the children of
+Brahmins and others, who are delicately brought up. But however
+beautiful any of this people may be, they try to make themselves appear
+more so, by the ornaments which they wear. These ornaments are of very
+different kinds, and are made of gold, silver, brass, precious stones,
+or glass. All are fond of ear-rings. Sometimes four or five are worn in
+each ear, consisting of solid gold, the lower one being the largest, and
+the upper one the smallest. Some men wear a gold ornament attached to
+the middle of the ear, in which a precious stone is inserted. Sometimes
+they wear very large circular ear-rings, made of the wire of copper,
+around which gold is twisted so as to cover every part of it. These are
+frequently ornamented with precious stones. The females, in addition to
+ear-rings, have an ornament which passes through the rim of the ear,
+near the head, half of it being seen above the rim, and half of it below
+it. An ornamental chain is sometimes attached to this, which goes some
+distance back, when it is lost in the hair. They sometimes also wear a
+jewel in the middle of the rim of the ear, and another on that little
+forward point which strikes your finger when you attempt to put it into
+the ear. Nose jewels also are worn. Sometimes three are worn at the
+same time. Holes are made through each side of the lower part of the
+nose, and through the cartilage, or that substance which divides the
+nostrils, through which they are suspended. The higher and wealthier
+females wear a profusion of ornaments of gold and pearls around the
+neck.
+
+A very pretty ornament, about three inches in diameter, having the
+appearance of gold, is also frequently worn by them on that part of the
+head where the females in America put up their hair in a knot. In
+addition to this, the little girls sometimes wear one or two similar but
+smaller ornaments below this, as well as an ornament at the end of the
+long braid of hair which hangs down over the middle of their backs.
+Occasionally the whole, or the greater part of this braid is covered
+with an ornament of the same materials with those just described. They
+also wear an ornament extending from the crown of the head to the
+forehead, just in that spot where the little girls to whom I am writing
+part their hair. Attached to this, I have seen a circular piece of gold
+filled with rubies. Rings are worn on the toes as well as on the
+fingers, and bracelets of gold or silver on the wrists. Anklets similar
+to bracelets, and tinkling ornaments are worn on the ankles. The poor,
+who cannot afford to wear gold or silver bracelets, have them made of
+glass stained with different colors. I have seen nearly a dozen on each
+wrist.
+
+The little boys wear gold or silver bracelets; also gold or silver
+anklets. I just alluded to finger-rings. I have seen a dozen on the same
+hand. In this part of the country, the little opening which is made in
+the ears of the children is gradually distended until it becomes very
+large. At first, the opening is only large enough to admit a wire. After
+this has been worn for a short time, a knife is introduced into the ear
+in the direction of the opening, and an incision made large enough to
+admit a little cotton. This is succeeded by a roll of oiled cloth, and
+by a peculiar shrub, the English name of which, if it has any, I do not
+know. When the hole becomes sufficiently large, a heavy ring of lead,
+about an inch in diameter, is introduced. This soon increases the size
+of the opening to such an extent, that a second, and afterwards a third,
+a fourth, and a fifth ring are added. By these weights, the lower parts
+of the ear are drawn down sometimes very nearly, or quite to the
+shoulders. Not unfrequently the little girls, when they run, are obliged
+to catch hold of these rings to prevent the injury which they would
+receive by their striking against their necks. I need hardly say, that
+in due time, these rings are removed, and ornamented rings are
+substituted.
+
+A different plan is pursued with the Mohammedan little girls. They have
+their ears bored from the top to the bottom of the ear. The openings
+which are at first made are small, and are never enlarged. A ring is
+inserted in each of these openings. I have seen a little girl to-day in
+whose ears I counted twenty-four rings.
+
+Flowers in great profusion are sometimes used to add to the adornment of
+the jewels.
+
+I cannot conclude my account of the jewels of the little girls, without
+giving you a description of the appearance of a little patient of mine
+who came here a few days ago, loaded with trinkets. I will give it in
+the words of my daughter, which she wrote in part while the girl was
+here. "On the 17th, a little dancing-girl came to see us. She was
+adorned with many jewels, some of which were very beautiful. The jewel
+in the top of the ear was a circle, nearly the size of a dollar. It was
+set with rubies. Nine pearls were suspended from it. In the middle of
+the ear was a jewel of a diamond shape, set with rubies and pearls. The
+lowest jewel in the ear was shaped like a bell. It was set with rubies,
+and from it hung a row of pearls. Close by the ear, suspended from the
+hair, was a jewel which reached below her ear. It consisted of six bells
+of gold, one above the other. Around each was a small row of pearls,
+which reached nearly to the bell below, thus forming a jewel resembling
+very many drops of pearls. It is the most beautiful jewel that I ever
+saw. In the right side of her nose was a white stone, set with gold, in
+the shape of a star. From it hung a large pearl. There was a hole bored
+in the partition between the nostrils. This hole had a jewel in it,
+about an inch in length, in the middle of which was a white stone with a
+ruby on each side. It also had a ruby on the top. From the white stone
+hung another, of a similar color, attached to it by a piece of gold. In
+the left side of the nose was a jewel about an inch in diameter. It was
+somewhat in the shape of a half-moon, and was set with rubies, pearls,
+emeralds, etc. etc. This jewel hung below her mouth. On the back of her
+head was a large, round gold piece, three inches in diameter. Another
+piece about two inches in diameter, hung below this. Her hair was
+braided in one braid, and hung down her back. At the bottom of this were
+three large tassels of silk, mounted with gold. Her eyebrows and
+eyelashes were painted with black. Her neck was covered with jewels of
+such beauty, and of such a variety, that it is impossible for me to
+describe them. Around her ankles were large rings which looked like
+braided silver. To these were attached very many little bells, which
+rung as she walked. I believe all dancing-girls wear these rings. We
+felt very sad when we thought that she was dedicated to a life of infamy
+and shame."
+
+There is an ornament worn by the followers of the god Siva, on their
+arms, or necks, or in their hair. It is called the _lingum_. The nature
+of this is so utterly abominable, that I cannot tell you a word about
+it.
+
+Married women wear an ornament peculiar to themselves. It is called the
+tahly. It is a piece of gold, on which is engraven the image of some one
+of their gods. This is fastened around the neck by a short yellow
+string, containing one hundred and eight threads of great fineness.
+Various ceremonies are performed before it is applied, and the gods, of
+whom I will tell you something by and by, with their wives, are called
+upon to give their blessing. When these ceremonies are finished, the
+tahly is brought on a waiter, ornamented with sweet-smelling flowers,
+and is tied by the bridegroom to the neck of the bride. This ornament is
+never taken off, unless her husband dies. In such a case she is deprived
+of it, to wear it no more for ever--deprived of it, after various
+ceremonies, by her nearest female relative, who cuts the thread by which
+it is suspended, and removes it. After this a barber is called, who
+shaves her head, and she becomes, in the eyes of the people, a
+_despised_ widow--no more to wear any ornament about her neck but a
+plain one--no more to stain her face with yellow water, nor to wear on
+her forehead those marks which are considered by the natives as among
+their chief ornaments.
+
+I have now told you something about the jewels of this people. I hope
+that you will never be disposed to imitate them, and load your bodies
+with such useless things. They are not only useless, but tend to
+encourage pride and vanity. All that you need is, the "Pearl of great
+price," even Jesus. Adorn yourself with this Pearl, and you will be
+beautiful indeed--beautiful even in the sight of your heavenly Father.
+Have you this Pearl of great price, my dear children? Tell me, have you
+this Pearl of great price? If you have not, what have you?
+
+I just now alluded to those marks which the natives consider among their
+chief ornaments. These are different among different sects. The
+followers of Siva rub ashes on their foreheads. These ashes are
+generally prepared by burning what in the Tamul language is called
+[Tamul:] _chaarne._ They also apply these ashes in streaks, generally
+three together, on their breasts, and on their arms. Some besmear their
+whole bodies with them.
+
+The followers of Vrishnoo wear a very different ornament from that just
+described. It consists of a perpendicular line drawn on the forehead,
+generally of a red or yellow color, and a white line on each side of it,
+which unite at the bottom with the middle line, and form a trident.
+
+Another ornament consists of a small circle, which is called pottu. This
+is stamped in the middle of the forehead. Sometimes it is red, sometimes
+yellow or black. Large numbers of women, in this part of the country,
+wash their faces with a yellow water, made so by dissolving in it a
+paste made of a yellow root and common shell-lime. The Brahmins
+frequently instead of rubbing ashes, draw a horizontal line over the
+middle of their foreheads, to show that they have bathed and are pure.
+Sometimes the people ornament themselves with a paste of sandal-wood.
+They rub themselves from head to foot with it. This has a very
+odoriferous smell.
+
+When the people are loaded with jewels, and covered with the marks which
+I have just described they think themselves to be highly ornamented But
+after all, "they are like unto whited sepulchres, which indeed appear
+beautiful outward, but are within full of dead men's bones, and of all
+uncleanness." The "Pearl of great price," to which I before alluded,
+the only Pearl which is of any value in the sight of Him who looketh at
+the heart, and not at the outward appearance, they possess not. Millions
+in this Eastern world have never even heard of it. O how incessantly
+ought you to pray that they may come into possession of it. How gladly
+should you give your money to send it to them. I wish, in this place, to
+ask you one question. Who of you expect, by and by, to become
+missionaries to this land, to tell this people of the Pearl of great
+price?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+DRESS, HOUSES, EATING, AND SALUTATION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The dress of the Hindoos is very simple. A single
+piece of cloth uncut, about three yards in length and one in width,
+wrapped round the loins, with a shawl thrown over the shoulders,
+constitutes the usual apparel of the people of respectability. These
+garments are often fringed with red silk or gold. The native ladies
+frequently almost encase themselves in cloth or silk. Under such
+circumstances, their cloths are perhaps twenty yards in length. Most of
+the native gentlemen now wear turbans, an ornament which they have
+borrowed from the Mohammedans This consists of a long piece of very fine
+stuff, sometimes twenty yards in length and one in breadth. With this
+they encircle the head in many folds.
+
+Those who are employed by European or Mohammedan princes, wear a long
+robe of muslin, or very fine cloth. This also, is in imitation of the
+Mohammedans, and was formerly unknown in the country.
+
+The houses of the Hindoos are generally very plainly built. In the
+country, they are commonly made of earth, and thatched with straw. In
+the cities, they are covered with tiles. The kitchen is situated in the
+most retired part of the house. In the houses of the Brahmins, the
+kitchen-door is always barred, to prevent strangers from looking upon
+their earthen vessels; for if they should happen to see them, their look
+would pollute them to such a degree that they must be broken to pieces.
+The hearth is generally placed on the south-west side, which is said to
+be the side of the _god of fire_, because they say that this god
+actually dwells there.
+
+The domestic customs of this people are very different from ours. The
+men and women do not eat together. The husband first eats, then the
+wife. The wife waits upon the husband After she has cooked the rice, she
+brings a brass plate, if they are possessors of one; or if not, a piece
+of a plantain-leaf, and puts it down on the mat before him. She then
+bails out the rice, places it upon the leaf, and afterwards pours the
+currie over it. This being done, the husband proceeds to mix up the
+currie and the rice with his hands, and puts it into his mouth. He never
+uses a knife and fork, as is customary with us. The currie of which I
+have spoken is a sauce of a yellow color, owing to the _munchel_, a
+yellow root which they put in it. This and onions, kottamaly-seeds
+mustard, serakum, pepper, etc., constitute the ingredients of the
+currie. Some add to these ghea, or melted butter, and cocoa-nut milk. By
+the cocoa-nut milk, I do not mean the water of the cocoa-nut.
+This--except in the very young cocoa-nut, when it is a most delicious
+beverage--is never used. The milk is squeezed from the _meat_ of the
+cocoa-nut, after it has been reduced to a pulp by means of an indented
+circular iron which they use for this purpose.
+
+After the husband has eaten, the wife brings water for him to wash his
+hands. This being done, she supplies him with vettalay, paakku,
+shell-lime, and tobacco, which he puts into his mouth as his dessert.
+The vettalay is a very spicy leaf. Why they use paakku, I do not know.
+It is a nut, which they cut into small pieces, but it has not much
+taste. Sometimes the wife brings her husband a segar. This people, I am
+sorry to say, are great smokers and chewers, practices of which I hope
+that you, my dear children, will never be guilty. In Ceylon, it is
+customary for females to smoke. Frequently, after the husband has smoked
+for a while, he hands the segar to his wife. She then puts it into her
+mouth, and smokes.
+
+Several years ago, one of the schoolmasters in that island became a
+Christian. After he had partaken of the Lord's supper, his wife
+considered him so defiled, that she would not put his segar into her
+mouth for a month afterwards. She, however, has since become a
+Christian.
+
+I spoke just now of the plantain-leaf. This leaf is sometimes six feet
+long, and in some places a foot and a half wide. It is an unbroken leaf,
+with a large stem running through the middle of it. It is one of the
+handsomest of leaves. Pieces enough can be torn from a single leaf, to
+take the place of a dozen plates. When quite young, it is an excellent
+application to surfaces which have been blistered.
+
+When this people eat, they do not use tables and chairs. They sit down
+on mats, and double their legs under them, after the manner of our
+friends the tailors in America, when they sew. This is the way in which
+the natives as a general thing, sit in our churches. It is not common to
+have benches or pews for them. Carpenters and other tradesmen also sit
+down either on a board, or on the ground, or on their legs, when they
+work. It would divert you much to see their manoeuvring. If a carpenter,
+for instance, wants to make a little peg, he will take a small piece of
+board, and place it in an erect position between his feet, the soles of
+which are turned inward so as to press upon the board. He then takes
+his chisel in one hand, and his mallet in the other, and cuts off a
+small piece. Afterwards he holds the piece in one hand, and while he
+shapes it with his chisel with the other, he steadies it by pressing it
+against his great toe.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The blacksmiths, with the exception of those who use the sledge-hammer,
+sit as do the carpenters while they hammer the iron. I wish you could
+see them at work with their simple apparatus. They have small anvils,
+which they place in a hole made in a log of wood which is buried in the
+ground. They do not use such bellows as you see in America.
+
+Theirs consist of two leather bags, about a foot wide and a foot and a
+half long, each having a nozzle at one end. The other end is left open
+to admit the air. When they wish to blow the fire, they extend these
+bags to let in the air. They then close them by means of the thumb on
+one side, and the fingers on the other, and press them down towards the
+nozzle of the bellows, which forces the air through them into the fire.
+I should have said before, that the nozzle of the bellows passes through
+a small semicircular mound of dried mud.
+
+I mentioned that the natives do not use tables and chairs in their
+houses. Neither do they, as a general thing, use bedsteads. They have no
+beds. They sleep on mats, which are spread down on the floor. Sometimes
+they use a cotton bolster for their heads. More generally their pillows
+are hard boards, which they put under the mat. In addition to cooking,
+the females have to prepare the rice for this purpose, by taking it out
+of the husk. This they do by beating it in a mortar about two feet high.
+The pestle with which they pound it, is about five feet long, made of
+wood, with an iron rim around the lower part of it. Three women can
+work at these mortars at the same time. Of course they have to be very
+skilful in the use of the pestle, so as not to interfere with each
+others' operations. Sometimes, while thus engaged, the children, who are
+generally at play near their mothers, put their hands on the edge of the
+mortars. In such cases, when the pestle happens to strike the edge,
+their fingers are taken off in a moment.
+
+The Hindoos have many modes of salutation. In some places they raise
+their right hand to the heart. In others, they simply stretch it out
+towards the person who is passing, if they know him, for they never
+salute persons with whom they are not acquainted.
+
+In many places there is no show of salutation. When they meet their
+acquaintances they content themselves by saying a friendly word or two
+in passing, and then pursue their way. They have borrowed the word
+_salam_ from the Mohammedans. They salute both Mohammedans and Europeans
+with this word, at the same time raising their hand to the forehead.
+When they address persons of high rank, they give them their _salam_
+thrice, touching the ground as often with both hands, and then lifting
+them up to their foreheads.
+
+The other castes salute the Brahmins by joining the hands and elevating
+them to the forehead, or sometimes over the head. It is accompanied with
+_andamayya_, which means, Hail, respected lord. The Brahmins stretch out
+their hands and say, _aaseervaathum_--benediction.
+
+Another very respectful kind of salutation consists in lowering both
+hands to the feet of the person to be honored, or even in falling-down
+and embracing them.
+
+Of all the forms of salutation, the most respectful is the
+_shaashtaangkum_, or prostration, in which the feet, the knees, the
+stomach, the head, and the arms, all touch the ground. In doing this,
+they throw themselves at their whole length on the ground, and stretch
+out both arms above their heads. This is practised before priests, and
+in the presence of an assembly, when they appear before it to beg pardon
+for a crime.
+
+Relations, who have long been separated, testify their joy when they
+meet by chucking each other under the chin, and shedding tears of joy.
+I am not aware that grown persons ever kiss each other. Sometimes
+mothers, or other individuals, will put their noses to the cheeks of
+little children, and draw the air through them, just as we do when we
+smell any thing which is agreeable. At other times they will apply the
+thumb and first finger to the cheek of the child, and then apply them to
+their own noses, and, as it were, smell them.
+
+The women, as a mark of respect, turn their backs, or at least their
+faces aside, when they are in the presence of those whom they highly
+esteem. They are never permitted to sit in the presence of men. A
+married woman cannot do this, even in the presence of her husband.
+
+If a person meets another of high rank, he must leave the path, if on
+foot, or alight, if on horseback, and remain standing until he has
+passed. He must at the same time take off his slippers. He also must
+take off his slippers when he enters a house. Should he fail to do this,
+it would be considered a great impropriety.
+
+In addressing a person of note, they mast keep at a certain distance
+from him, and cover their mouths with their hands while they are
+speaking, lest their breath, or a particle of moisture, should escape
+to trouble him.
+
+When the Hindoos visit a person of distinction for the first time,
+civility requires them to take some present as a mark of respect, or to
+show that they come with a friendly intention; especially if they wish
+to ask some favor in return. When they have not the means of making
+large presents, they carry with them sugar, plantains, milk, and other
+things of this kind.
+
+In case of mourning, visits must always be made, though at a distance of
+a hundred miles. Letters of condolence would by no means be received as
+a substitute.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+MARRIAGE AMONG THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--Marriage, to the Hindoos is the greatest event of
+their lives. In the celebration of it, many ceremonies are performed Of
+these I will mention some of the most important. If the father of the
+young girl is a Brahmin, and if he is rich and liberal, he will
+frequently bear all the expenses of the marriage of his daughter. To
+give a daughter in marriage and to sell her, are about the same thing.
+Almost every parent makes his daughter an article of traffic, refusing
+to give her up until the sum of money for which he consented to let her
+go, is paid. Men of distinction generally lay out this money for jewels,
+which they present to their daughters on their wedding-day. You will
+infer from what I have just said, that the parties to be married have
+nothing to do in the choice of each other.
+
+There are properly but four months in the year in which marriages can
+take place, namely March, April, May, and June. This probably arises
+from the circumstance that these are the hottest seasons of the
+year--the seasons when the people have more leisure to attend to them.
+From the harvest, also, which has just been gathered in, they are
+provided with means to perform the various ceremonies.
+
+The marriage ceremony lasts five days. The bride and bridegroom are
+first placed under a puntel, a kind of bower, covered with leaves, in
+front of the house. This is superbly adorned. The married women then
+come forward, and perform the ceremony called _arati_, which is as
+follows. Upon a plate of copper, they place a lamp made of a paste from
+rice flour. It is supplied with oil, and lighted. They then take hold of
+the plate with both hands, and raise it as high as the heads of the
+couple to be married, and describe a number of circles with the plate
+and lamp. This is to prevent the evil of any jealous looks, which
+certain persons might make. The Hindoos believe that great evils arise
+from wicked looks. They consider that even the gods themselves are not
+out of the reach of malicious eyes; and therefore after they have been
+carried through the streets, the ceremony of arati is always performed,
+to efface the evil which they may have suffered from these looks.
+
+It ought to have been mentioned, that before any thing is done, they
+place an image of Pullian under the puntel. This god is much honored
+because he is much feared. And although the great ugliness of his
+appearance has hitherto kept him without a wife, they never fail to pay
+him the greatest attention, lest he should in some way or other injure
+them.
+
+After arati and many other ceremonies are performed, the kankanan, which
+is merely a bit of saffron, is tied to the right wrist of the young
+man, and to the left wrist of the girl. This is done with great
+solemnity. Another remarkable ceremony succeeds this. The young man
+being seated with his face towards the east, his future father-in-law
+supposes that he beholds in him the great Vrishnoo. With this
+impression, he offers him a sacrifice, and then, making him put both of
+his feet in a new dish filled with cow-dung, he first washes them with
+water, then with milk, and again with water, accompanying the whole with
+suitable muntrums or prayers.
+
+After many other ceremonies, he takes the hand of his daughter and puts
+it into that of his son-in-law. He then pours water over them in honor
+of Vrishnoo. This is the most solemn of all the ceremonies, being the
+token of his resigning his daughter to the authority of the young man.
+She must be accompanied with three gifts, namely, one or more cows, some
+property in land, and a _salagrama_, which consists of some little
+amulet stones in high esteem among the Brahmins. This ceremony being
+finished, the tahly is brought to be fastened to the neck of the bride.
+This, as I before said, is presented on a salver, decked and garnished
+with sweet-smelling flowers. Incense is offered to it, and it is
+presented to the assistants each of whom touches it and invokes
+blessings upon it. The bride then turning towards the East, the
+bridegroom takes the tahly, repeats a muntrum or prayer aloud, and ties
+it around her neck.
+
+Fire is then brought in, upon which the bridegroom offers up the
+sacrifice of _homam_, which consists of throwing boiled rice with melted
+butter upon the fire. He then takes his bride by the hand, and they walk
+three times around it, while the incense is blazing.
+
+There is another ceremony, which, perhaps, ought to be mentioned, as it
+is considered by some to be one of much importance. Two baskets of
+bamboo are placed close together, one for the bride, the other for the
+bridegroom. They step into them, and two other baskets being brought,
+filled with ground rice, the husband takes up one with both hands and
+pours the contents over the head of the bride. She does the same to him.
+In the marriage of great princes pearls are sometimes used instead of
+rice.
+
+On the evening of the third day, when the constellations appear, the
+astrologer points out to the married pair a very small star, close to
+the middle or in the tail of _Ursa Major_, which he directs them to
+worship, and which he says is the wife of Vasestha.
+
+While the assembled guests, are dining, the bridegroom and the bride
+also partake, and eat together from the same plate. This is a token of
+the closest union. This is the only instance in which they ever eat
+together.
+
+After all the ceremonies are finished, a procession is made through the
+streets of the village It commonly takes place in the night, by
+torchlight, accompanied with fire-works. The newly married pair are
+seated in one palanquin with their faces towards each other, both richly
+dressed. The bride, in particular, is generally covered with jewels and
+precious stones.
+
+The procession moves slowly; and their friends and relations come out of
+their houses, as they pass; the women hailing the married couple with
+the ceremony of _arati_, and the men with presents of silver, fruits,
+sugar, and betel. I once witnessed one of these marriage processions in
+the streets of Madras at night, but can give you but little idea of its
+magnificence. The lamps used on the occasion could not be numbered. The
+shrubbery, which was drawn on carts or other vehicles, appeared
+exceedingly beautiful, in consequence of the light reflected from the
+lamps. Intermingled with this shrubbery, were to be seen little girls
+elegantly dressed, and adorned with flowers on their heads. Many
+elephants, with their trappings of gold and silver and red, formed a
+part of the procession. Fire-works were also added to make the scene
+more brilliant.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+DEATH AND FUNERALS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The death of a Hindoo is followed by many ridiculous
+ceremonies. I will give you a description of a few, connected with the
+death of one who has moved in one of the higher ranks--of a Brahmin.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+When it is evident that a Brahmin has but a little time to live, a space
+is prepared with earth, well spread with cow-dung, over which a cloth,
+that has never been worn, is spread. The dying man is placed upon this
+at full length. Another cloth is wrapped around his loins. This being
+done, the ceremony of expiating his sins is performed as follows. The
+chief of the funeral brings on one plate some small pieces of silver or
+copper coin, and on another the punchakaryam, etc. A little of this
+punchakaryam is then put into his mouth, and, by virtue of this nauseous
+draught, the body is perfectly purified. Besides this, there is a
+general cleansing, which is accomplished by making the dying man recite
+within himself, if he cannot speak, the proper muntrums, by which he is
+delivered from all his sins. After this, a cow is introduced with her
+calf. Her horns are decorated with rings of gold or brass, and her neck
+with garlands of flowers. A pure cloth is laid over her body. Thus
+decked, she is led up to the sick man, who takes hold of her tail.
+Prayers are now offered up that the cow may conduct him, by a blessed
+path, to the next world. He then makes a gift of a cow to a Brahmin.
+This gift is considered indispensable to enable the soul to go over the
+river of fire, which it is said all must pass after death. Those who
+have made this gift, are met by one of these favored creatures the
+moment they arrive at the bank of the stream, and by her help, they are
+enabled to pass without injury from the flames.
+
+As soon as the breath has left his body, all who are present must weep
+for a reasonable time, and join in lamentations together.
+
+After various ceremonies, the body is washed, and a barber is called to
+shave his head. He is then clad with his finest clothes and adorned with
+jewels. He is rubbed with sandal-wood where the body is uncovered, and
+the accustomed mark is put upon his forehead. Thus dressed he is placed
+on a kind of state bed, where he remains until he is carried to the
+pile.
+
+After every preparation is made to bear away the corpse, the person who
+is to conduct the funeral, with the assistance of some relative or
+friend, strips it of its clothing and jewels, and covers it with a
+handkerchief provided for the occasion. The corpse is then placed on a
+litter. Those who die in a state of marriage, have their faces left
+uncovered. The litter, adorned with flowers and foliage, and sometimes
+decked with valuable stuffs, is borne by four Brahmins. The procession
+is arranged as follows.
+
+The chief of the funeral marches foremost, carrying fire in a vessel.
+The body follows, attended by the relations and friends, without their
+turbans, and with nothing on their heads but a bit of cloth, in token of
+mourning. The women never attend the funeral, but remain in the house,
+where they set up a hideous cry when the corpse is taken out. While
+advancing on the road, the custom is to stop three times on the way,
+and, at each pause, to put into the mouth of the dead a morsel of
+unboiled rice, moistened. The object of stopping is considered to be
+very important. It is not without reason; for they say that persons
+supposed to be dead have been alive, or even when lifeless have been
+restored; and sometimes, also, it has happened that the gods of the
+infernal regions have mistaken their aim, and seized one person instead
+of another. In any view, it is right to afford the opportunity for
+correcting these mistakes, so as not to expose to the flames a person
+who is still alive. Hence the propriety of these pauses, each of which
+continues half of the quarter of an hour.
+
+Having arrived at the place for burning the dead, they dig a trench
+about six or seven feet in length. This is consecrated by the muntrums.
+It is slightly sprinkled with water to lay the dust, and a few pieces of
+money in gold are scattered upon it. Here the pile is erected of dried
+wood, on which the body is laid out at full length. Over the body a
+quantity of twigs are laid, which are sprinkled with punchakaryam The
+chief of the funeral then takes on his shoulders a pitcher of water, and
+goes around the pile three times, letting the water run through a hole
+made in it. After this he breaks the pitcher in pieces near the head of
+the corpse.
+
+At last the torch is brought for setting fire to the pile, and is handed
+to the chief of the funeral. Before he receives it, however, he is
+obliged to make some grimaces to prove his sorrow. He rolls about on the
+ground, beats his breast, and makes the air resound with his cries. The
+assistants also cry, or appear to cry. Fire being applied to the four
+corners of the pile, the crowd retire, except the four Brahmins who
+carried the body; they remain until the whole is consumed.
+
+The funerals of the Sudras differ in some particulars from those of the
+Brahmins. Deafening sounds of drums, trumpets, and other instruments of
+music, not in use among the Brahmins, accompany their funerals. To
+increase the noise, they sometimes shoot off an instrument which
+somewhat resembles a small cannon. I do not now think of any other
+particular worthy of mention.
+
+By the ceremonies which are performed at their funerals, this wretched
+people expect to secure the pardon of all the sins of those who have
+died. Alas, what a delusion! O, that Christians had sent the Gospel to
+this dark land in the days when they sent it to our heathen fathers.
+Then might the Hindoos now be seeking the expiation of their sins,
+through the blood of the ever-blessed Redeemer. Of this Redeemer,
+however, they know nothing. They enter eternity, not that their souls
+may be consumed as their bodies have been, but to endure the flames of
+divine wrath for ever and ever. Alas, alas, that it should be so! O,
+that the generation of Christians now living would lay these things to
+heart, and do what they can, through grace, to rescue those who are yet
+within the reach of hope from so tremendous a doom. What, my dear
+children, will you do for this purpose?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The word heathen is applied to those who worship
+idols, or who do not know any thing about the true God. This is the case
+with this people. They say that there is one supreme being, whom they
+call BRAHM; but he is very different from Jehovah, and is never
+worshipped. Generally, he is fast asleep. In the place of Brahm, they
+worship many gods--gods of all colors: some black, some white, some
+blue, some red--gods of all shapes and sizes: some in the shape of
+beasts, some in the shape of men; some partly in the shape of beasts,
+and partly in the shape of men, having four, or ten, or a hundred, or a
+thousand eyes, heads, and hands. They ride through the air on elephants,
+buffaloes, lions, sheep, deer, goats, peacocks, vultures, geese,
+serpents, and rats. They hold in their hands all kinds of weapons,
+offensive and defensive, thunderbolts javelins, spears, clubs, bows,
+arrows, shields, flags, and shells. They are of all employments. There
+are gods of the heavens above and of the earth below, gods of wisdom and
+of folly, gods of war and of peace, gods of good and of evil, gods of
+pleasure, gods of cruelty and wrath, whose thirst must be satiated with
+torrents of blood. These gods fight and quarrel with one another. They
+lie, steal, commit adultery, murder, and other crimes. They pour out
+their curses when they cannot succeed in their wicked plots, and invent
+all kinds of lying tales to hide their wickedness.
+
+There are three principal gods, who compose what is called the Hindoo
+triad. Their names are Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva. They were somehow
+drawn from Brahm's essence, on one occasion when he was awake. Brumha,
+they say, is the creator of the world, Vrishnoo the preserver, and Siva
+the destroyer. Brumha has no temple erected for his worship, on account
+of a great falsehood which he told. I will tell you what it was. Once,
+as it is said, there was a dispute between him and Vrishnoo, as to who
+is the greatest. While thus disputing, Siva appeared between the two as
+a fire-post and told them that he who would find the bottom or the top
+of the post first, would show that he is the greatest. Vrishnoo
+immediately changed himself into a hog, and began to root up the earth
+with the hope of finding the bottom of the post. Brumha changed himself
+into a swan, flew up towards the top of the post, and cried out, I have
+found it, when he had not. This, you know, my dear children, was a
+falsehood. For this falsehood, it is said, no temple is erected for his
+worship.
+
+Vrishnoo was a thief and a liar. He was once dwelling in the house of a
+dairyman, and he used constantly to be stealing butter and curdled milk
+from the dairyman's wife. She did not know, for a long time, what became
+of her butter and curdled milk; but at last she found out that Vrishnoo
+was the thief. To punish him for his theft, she tied him to a rice
+mortar.
+
+Siva's conduct was very bad. I will tell you but one thing about him. On
+one occasion he was playing at cards with his wife Parvathe. Vrishnoo
+was appointed to determine who was the best player. After playing for a
+little season Parvathe won the game. Siva then beckoned to Vrishnoo to
+declare that he, instead of Parvathe, had won it. This he did. In
+consequence of this falsehood, he was cursed by Parvathe, and changed
+into a snake.
+
+And now, my dear children, why do I tell you about these gods? I tell
+you for the purpose of making you thankful that you were born in a
+Christian land, where you have the Bible to teach you better things. Had
+you not the Bible, you would worship just such wretched beings as these
+poor Hindoos worship. Perhaps you know that our Saxon fathers, before
+they had the Bible, were as great idolaters as are this people. They
+worshipped Thor and Woden and other similar idols, and they were even in
+the habit of offering up human sacrifices Surely, if there is any thing
+which should make you give your hearts to your Saviour and love him
+above all things, it is God's gift of the Bible to you.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE THREE HUNDRED AND THIRTY MILLIONS OF THE GODS OF THE HINDOOS--THE
+CREATION OF THE UNIVERSE--THE TRANSMIGRATION OF SOULS--THE DIFFERENT
+HELLS.
+
+
+My dear children--I told you that in one of those seasons when Brahm was
+awake, Brumha, Vrishnoo, and Siva were somehow drawn from Brahm's
+essence. The three hundred and thirty millions of the gods of the
+Hindoos were also drawn from this essence; as were all the atoms which
+compose the earth, the sun, moon, and stars. At first, these atoms were
+all in disorder. For the purpose of reducing them to order, Brahm
+created what is called the great mundane egg. Into this egg he himself
+entered, under the form, of Brumha, taking with him all these atoms.
+After remaining in this egg four thousand three hundred millions of
+years, to arrange these atoms, he burst its shell and came out, with a
+thousand heads, a thousand eyes, and a thousand arms. With him, he
+brought out all those harmonized atoms, which, when separated, produced
+this beautiful universe that we see above and around us.
+
+The universe, as it came from the mundane egg, is generally divided into
+fourteen worlds: seven inferior or lower worlds, and seven superior or
+upper worlds. The seven lower worlds are filled with all kinds of wicked
+and loathsome creatures. Our earth, which is the first of the upper
+worlds, it is said, is flat. The following figure will give you some
+idea of it.
+
+[Illustration: Concentric circles with labels on each from outermost to
+innermost: Sea of Sweet Water. Sea of Milk. Sea of Sour Curds. Sea of
+Clarified Butter. Sea of Spirituous Liquors. Sea of Sugar Cane Juice.
+Sea of Salt Water. Earth.]
+
+That part of the earth which is inhabited consists of seven circular
+islands, or continents each of which is surrounded by a different ocean.
+The island in the centre, where we dwell, is surrounded by a sea of salt
+water, the second island is surrounded by a sea of sugar-cane juice, the
+third island is surrounded by a sea of spirituous liquors, the fourth is
+surrounded by a sea of clarified butter, the fifth is surrounded by a
+sea of sour curds, the sixth is surrounded by a sea of milk, the seventh
+is surrounded by a sea of sweet water.
+
+In all the worlds above ours are mansions where the gods reside. In the
+third is the heaven of Indra. This is the heaven to which it is said the
+widow goes, after she has burned herself to death on the funeral pile of
+her husband Its palaces are of the purest gold. And such are the
+quantities of diamonds, and jasper, and sapphire, and emerald, and all
+manner of precious stones there, that it shines with a brightness
+superior to that of twelve thousand suns. Its streets are of the
+clearest crystal, fringed with gold. In the seventh, or the highest of
+the upper worlds, is the heaven where Brumha chiefly resides. This far
+exceeds all the other heavens in point of beauty.
+
+In the inferior worlds it is stated that there are one hundred thousand
+hells. These are provided for such as have been great criminals. The
+Hindoos say, that those who have not been very wicked, can make an
+atonement for their sins in this world. Should they neglect to do this,
+they must suffer for it in another birth. They believe in what is called
+the transmigration of souls, or the passing of the soul, after death,
+into another body. The soul must suffer in the next birth, if not
+purified in this. Hence it is asserted, that if a man is a stealer of
+gold from a Brahmin, he is doomed to have whitlows on his nails; if a
+drinker of spirits, black teeth; if a false detractor, fetid breath; if
+a stealer of grain, the defect of some limb; if a stealer of clothes,
+leprosy; if a horse-stealer, lameness; if a stealer of a lamp, total
+blindness. If he steals grain in the husk, he will be born a rat; if
+yellow mixed metal, a gander; if money, a great stinging gnat; if fruit,
+an ape; if the property of a priest, a crocodile.
+
+Those persons whose sins are too great to be forgiven in this world,
+must be sent to one of the hells to winch I have alluded. Weeping,
+wailing, shrieking, they are dragged to the palace of _Yama_, the king
+of those doleful regions. On arriving there, they behold him clothed
+with terror, two hundred and forty miles in height, his eyes as large as
+a lake of water, his voice as loud as thunder, the hairs of his body as
+long as palm-trees, a flame of fire proceeding from his mouth, the noise
+of his breath like the roaring of a tempest, and in his right hand a
+terrific iron club. Sentence is passed, and the wretched beings are
+doomed to receive punishment according to the nature of their crimes.
+Some are made to tread on burning sands, or sharp-edged stones. Others
+are rolled among thorns and spikes and putrefying flesh. Others are
+dragged along the roughest places by cords passed through the tender
+parts of the body. Some are attacked by jackals, tigers, and elephants.
+Others are pierced with arrows, beaten with clubs, pricked with needles,
+seared with hot irons, and tormented by flies and wasps. Some are
+plunged into pans of liquid fire or boiling oil. Others are dashed from
+lofty trees, many hundred miles high.
+
+The torment of these hells does not continue for ever. After criminals
+have been punished for a longer or shorter time, their souls return to
+the earth again in the bodies of men. Here they may perform such good
+acts as may raise them to one of the heavens of the gods; or commit
+crimes, which may be the means of their being sent again to the abodes
+of misery.
+
+Things will go on in this way until the universe comes to an end, when
+every thing is to disappear, and to be swallowed up in Brahm.
+
+The Hindoos say, that it is now more than one hundred and fifty billions
+of years since the world was created. After it has continued about one
+hundred and fifty billions of years more, it is to come to an end. Then
+Brumha is to die, and to be swallowed up with the universe in the sole
+existing Brahm.
+
+By what you have heard, you will learn that the Hindoos expect, by their
+sufferings, to make an atonement for their sins. But there is no
+atonement for sin, except through the blood of Jesus Christ. We must
+come as lost sinners to our heavenly Father, confess our transgressions
+to him, and plead for his forgiveness, only through the sufferings and
+death which Christ endured. My dear children, have you done this? If
+not, do it speedily, or the regions of the lost must soon be your
+everlasting abode.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+HINDOO CASTES.
+
+
+My dear Children--The people of India are divided into castes, as they
+are called. Their sacred books declare, that after Brumha had peopled
+the heavens above and the worlds below, he created the human race,
+consisting of four classes or castes. From his mouth proceeded the
+Brahmin caste. Those of this class are the highest and noblest beings on
+earth, and hold the office of priests. At the same time there flowed
+from his mouth the _Vedas_, or sacred books, of which the Brahmins are
+the sole teachers To their fellow-men, they were to give such parts of
+these books as they thought best. From Brumha's arm proceeded the
+military caste. The business of this class is to defend their country
+when attacked by enemies. From his breast proceeded the third caste,
+consisting of farmers and merchants. From his feet, the member of
+inferiority, proceeded the Sudras, or servile caste. Carpenters,
+braziers, weavers, dyers, and the manual cultivators of the soil, are
+included in this class.
+
+Caste is not a civil, but a sacred institution. You must get some one
+older than yourself to explain what this means. Caste is a difference of
+_kind_. Hence, a man of one caste can never be changed into a man of
+another caste, any more than a lion can be changed into a mole, or a
+mole into a lion. Each caste has its laws, the breaking of which is
+attended with great disgrace, and even degradation below all the other
+castes. For instance, if a Brahmin should, by eating any forbidden
+thing, break his caste, he would sink below all the other castes. He
+would become an outcast, or pariah. For beneath the fourth, or lowest
+caste, there is a class of people belonging to no caste--a class of
+outcasts, held in the utmost abhorrence.
+
+By the system of castes, the Hindoos have been divided into so many
+selfish sections, each scowling on all the rest with feelings of hatred
+and contempt. The spirit which upholds it, is similar to that spirit
+which says, "Stand by thyself, for I am holier than thou," and, of
+course, is nothing but pride. This is one of the greatest obstacles to
+the spread of Christianity in this dark land, and for the exhibition of
+which we were lately obliged to cut off many of the members of our
+churches.
+
+The Brahmins, in consequence of their being of the highest caste, and of
+their having been taught from their infancy to regard all other classes
+of men with the utmost contempt, are very proud. They make great efforts
+to keep themselves pure, in their sense of the word, both without and
+within. They are exceedingly afraid of being defiled by persons of other
+castes. They have the utmost dread even of being touched by a pariah.
+For them to eat with any of these pariahs, or to go into their houses,
+or to drink water which they have drawn, or from vessels which they have
+handled, is attended with the loss of their caste. A Brahmin who should
+enter their houses, or permit them to enter his, would be cut off from
+his caste, and could not be restored without many troublesome ceremonies
+and great expense. The pariahs are considered to be so low, that if a
+Brahmin were to touch them, even with the end of a long pole, he would
+be looked upon as polluted In some districts they are obliged to make a
+long circuit, when they perceive Brahmins in the way, that their breath
+may not infect them, or their shadow fall upon them as they pass. In
+some places their very approach is sufficient to pollute a whole
+neighborhood.
+
+The Brahmins carry their ideas of purity very far. Should a Sudra happen
+to look upon the vessels in which they cook their food, they would be
+considered as defiled. They can never touch any kind of leather or skin,
+except the skin of the tiger and antelope. The most disagreeable of all
+American fashions, in their eyes, is that of boots and gloves. They
+rarely eat their food from plates; and when they do so, it is only at
+home. They use the leaf of the plantain or other trees as a substitute.
+To offer them any thing to eat on a metal or earthen plate which others
+have used, would be considered a great affront. For the same reason,
+they will neither use a spoon nor a fork when they eat; and they are
+astonished that any one, after having applied them to their mouths, and
+infected them with saliva, should repeat the act a second time. They
+have a great abhorrence of the toothpick, if used a second time. When
+they eat any thing dry, they throw it into their mouths, so that the
+fingers may not approach the lips.
+
+They do not drink as we do, by applying the cup to the lips. This would
+be considered a gross impropriety. They pour the water into their
+months. The reason why they do these things is, because they consider
+the saliva to be the most filthy secretion that comes from the body. It
+is on this account that no one is ever permitted to spit within doors.
+
+The use of animal food they consider to be defiling. Not only will they
+not eat animal food, but they will eat nothing that has the principle of
+life in it. On this account, they cannot eat eggs of any kind. I was
+once breaking an egg in my medicine-room at Panditeripo, while a Brahmin
+was present. He told me that, under such circumstances, he could not
+remain with me any longer. In his view, I was committing a great sin. To
+kill an ox or a cow, is considered by them as a crime which can never be
+atoned for, and to eat their flesh is a defilement which can never be
+washed away. To kill a cow is, by _Hindoo_ law, punishable with death.
+
+The touch of most animals, particularly that of the dog, defiles a
+Brahmin. Should a dog touch them, they would be obliged instantly to
+plunge into water, and wash their clothes, in order to get rid of such a
+stain. Notwithstanding this, the dog is one of the gods worshipped by
+the Hindoos.
+
+The Hindoos consider themselves to be unclean if they have assisted at a
+funeral. When the ceremony is over, they immediately plunge into water
+for the sake of purification. Even the news of the death of a relative,
+a hundred miles off, has the same effect. The person who hears such news
+is considered unclean until he has bathed. In unison with this feeling,
+a person is no sooner dead, than he is hastened away to be buried or
+burned; for, until this is done, those in the house can neither eat nor
+drink, nor go on with their occupations.
+
+A Brahmin who is particular in his delicacy, must be careful what he
+treads upon. He is obliged to wash his body or bathe, if he happens to
+tread on a bone, or a broken pot, a bit of rag, or a leaf from which one
+has been eating. He must also be careful where he sits down. Some
+devotees always carry their seats with them, that is, a tiger or
+antelope's skin, which are always held pure. Some are contented with a
+mat. They may sit down on the ground without defilement, provided it has
+been newly rubbed over with cow-dung. This last specific is used daily
+to purify their houses from the defilement occasioned by comers, and
+goers. When thus applied, diluted with water, it has unquestionably one
+good effect. It completely destroys the fleas and other insects, with
+which they are very much annoyed.
+
+There is one thing more which I wish to mention. It is, that all the
+high castes consider the use of intoxicating drinks to be defiling. I
+hope that you, my dear children, will always have the same opinion, and
+never touch them any sooner than you would touch arsenic or other
+poisons.
+
+A person may be restored to his caste, provided he has not committed an
+unpardonable offence. This is done as follows. After he has gained the
+consent of his relations to be restored he prostrates himself very
+humbly before them, they being assembled for that purpose, and submits
+to the blows or other punishment which they may think proper to inflict,
+or pays the fine which they may have laid upon him. Then, after
+shedding tears of sorrow, and making promises that, by his future
+conduct, he will wipe away the stain of his expulsion from caste, he
+makes the shaashtaangkum before the assembly. This being done, he is
+declared fit to be restored to his tribe.
+
+When a man has been expelled from his caste for some great offence,
+those who restore him sometimes slightly burn his tongue with a piece of
+gold made hot. They likewise apply to different parts of the body redhot
+iron stamps, which leave marks that remain for ever. Sometimes they
+compel the offender to walk on burning embers; and to complete the
+purification, he must drink the punchakaryam, which literally means the
+_five things_; these all come from the cow, and must be mixed together.
+The first three of these I will mention, namely, the milk, butter, and
+curds. The other two, for the sake of delicacy, I must not mention.
+After the ceremony of punchakaryam is finished the person who has been
+expelled from his caste must give a grand feast. This finishes all he
+has to do, and he is then restored to favor.
+
+There are certain offences which, when committed cut off all hope that
+the offender will ever be restored to his caste. For instance, should he
+eat the flesh of the cow, no presents which he might make, nor any fines
+which lie might be disposed to pay, no, not even the punchakaryam
+itself, would be of any avail for his restoration or purification.
+
+I will make a remark here, which I might have made before. It is, that
+in Christian countries, there is a spirit of pride which much resembles
+the spirit of caste. Many are to be found who are very proud that they
+have descended from rich and honorable _ancestors_, and who look down,
+almost with disdain, upon those in other situations. I need hardly tell
+you that this is a very wicked spirit, and entirely opposed to the
+spirit of the Gospel. No matter what may be our high thoughts of
+ourselves, we appear but very low in the sight of Him who created us. We
+are all sinners, and, as such, are offensive in his sight. If we would
+go to heaven, the first thing which we have to do, is to humble
+ourselves for the pride of our hearts, and become as little children
+before him. We must have that spirit of which the apostle speaks, when
+he says, "Let each esteem others better than themselves." With a humble
+spirit we may approach a holy God, with the assurance that he will, for
+Christ's sake, forgive all our sins.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+HINDOO TEMPLES--CARS--PROCESSION OF IDOLS.
+
+
+My dear Children--I will proceed to give you a description of the Hindoo
+temples. These are very numerous. One is to be found in almost every
+village. They are to be found, also, in out-of-the-way places, distant
+from villages, in woods, on the banks and in the middle of rivers; but,
+above all, on mountains and steep rocks.
+
+This latter practice, of building temples on mountains, is very ancient.
+The Israelites were accustomed to choose a mountain when they offered up
+their sacrifices to the Lord. Solomon, before the building of the
+temple, chose Mount Gibeon on which to offer his burnt-offerings; and
+when the ten tribes separated themselves, in the reign of Jeroboam, they
+built their altars on the mountain of Samaria. This practice may have
+come from the circumstance, that Noah offered to God a great sacrifice
+of thanks on one of the highest mountains of Armenia. Probably Mount
+Ararat continued long to be remembered, by him and his descendants, as
+the scene of their deliverance.
+
+Besides the temples of the idols, there are various objects of worship,
+made of earth and stone. Some of the idols are carved. Some consist
+merely of the rough stone. These are to be seen on the high-roads, at
+the entrance into villages, and, above all, under lofty trees. Some of
+these are covered; but generally they are exposed in the open air.
+
+You will read in Genesis, 28th chap, and 18th verse, that Jacob, after
+his dream, rose up early in the morning and took the stone that he had
+put for his pillow, and set it up for a pillar, and poured oil upon the
+top of it. Whether it has happened from this circumstance or not, that
+the heathen universally pour oil over their idols, I cannot tell. All I
+know is, that they do it. No idol can become an object of worship until
+a Brahmin has said his muntrums, or prayers, for the purpose of bringing
+down the god to live, as it is said be does, in the image, and until he
+has drenched it with oil and liquid butter.
+
+The idols, in the great temples, are clothed with rich garments, and
+adorned with jewels, which are enriched with precious stones of immense
+value. Sacrifices are constantly made to these idols, consisting of
+boiled rice, flowers, fruits, etc., but, above all, of lamps, of which
+many thousands are sometimes seen burning. They feed them with butter,
+in preference to oil.
+
+The priests of the temples offer up sacrifices twice every day, morning
+and evening. They begin the ceremony by washing their idol. The water
+which is used is brought from a river or tank. Every morning a
+procession, with music, passes before our door, with this water.
+
+Every priest who offers up sacrifices, must have several lighted lamps
+with a bell, which he holds in his left hand. With his right hand he
+makes an offering to the idol, adorns it with flowers, and rubs its
+forehead and various parts of its body with sandal-wood and holy ashes.
+While all this is going on, he is alone in the temple, the door of which
+is closed. The unholy multitude remain without, silently waiting till
+he has done. What he does, they cannot know, only hearing the sound of
+the bell. When he has done, he comes out and distributes among the
+people a part of the things which have been offered to the idol. These
+are considered as holy. If they consist of rice and fruit, they are
+immediately eaten; if of flowers, the men put them in their turbans, and
+the girls entwine them in their hair.
+
+Next to the priests, the most important persons about the temples are
+the dancing girls. These are persons of the vilest character. They
+perform their religious duties in the temple twice a day. They also
+assist at the public ceremonies, and dance. At the same time they sing
+the most abominable and filthy songs. Of these wicked creatures,
+however, I must not tell you any thing further.
+
+The next order of persons employed in the temples, are players on
+musical instruments. Every temple of note has a band of these musicians
+who, as well as the dancers, are obliged to attend the temple twice a
+day. They are also obliged to assist at all the public festivals. Their
+band generally consists of wind, instruments, resembling clarionets and
+hautboys, to which they add cymbals and drums. They have a bass,
+produced by blowing into a kind of tube, widened below, and which gives
+an uninterrupted sound. Part of the musicians sing hymns in honor of
+their gods.
+
+The expenses of the temples are borne by the voluntary offerings of the
+people, consisting of money, jewels, cattle, provisions, and other
+articles. In order to induce them to make such offerings, the Brahmins
+use all kinds of deception. Sometimes they will put their idols in
+irons, chaining their hands and feet. They exhibit them in this sad
+condition, declaring that they have been brought into it by creditors
+from whom their gods had to borrow money, in times of trouble, to supply
+their wants. They declare that their creditors refuse to set the gods at
+liberty, until the money with the interest is paid. The people, seeing
+the deplorable condition into which they have been brought, come forward
+and pay off the debt; when the chains are taken off, and the god is set
+at liberty.
+
+Another way in which the Brahmins sometimes deceive the people, is as
+follows. They say that the god is afflicted with some dreadful disease,
+brought on by the distress which he has had, because the people do not
+worship him as much as they should. In such cases, the idol is sometimes
+placed at the door of the temple where they rub his forehead and temples
+with various kinds of medicine. They also set before him all sorts of
+medicines, pretending in this way to do all they can to cure him. But as
+all their efforts prove to be vain, and the disease becomes worse, the
+Brahmins send out persons to tell the sad news. The people, believing
+the report, hasten to bring in their gifts and offerings. The god, on
+beholding such proofs of their attachment to him, feels himself cured of
+his disease, and immediately returns to his throne within the temple.
+
+The Brahmins use another kind of deception, in order to procure
+offerings for the temples. They declare that their gods are angry with
+certain individuals who have offended them, and that they have sent some
+evil spirit or devil to take possession of their bodies and torment
+them. Accordingly, persons appear wandering about in different parts of
+the country, showing, by their dreadful convulsions, their writhings
+and twistings, every symptom of being possessed with the devil. The
+people who see them are filled with dismay, fall down before them, and
+offer gifts and sacrifices, for fear of being injured by them. Whatever
+they ask is granted. The people give them to eat and drink abundantly;
+and when they leave a place, accompany them with instruments of music,
+till they arrive at some other place, where the same deception is
+practised.
+
+There are various other ways in which the Brahmins deceive the people;
+but I have told you enough.
+
+At every large temple, there is at least yearly one grand procession.
+The idol is brought out from its inclosure, and placed in a great car or
+chariot, prepared for this express purpose. This stands upon four wheels
+of great strength, not made like ours, of spokes with a rim, but of
+three or four pieces of thick, solid timber, rounded and fitted to each
+other. The car is sometimes forty or fifty feet high, having upon it
+carved images of a most abominable nature. I must not tell you any thing
+about them. The car, when finished, presents somewhat the shape of a
+pyramid.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+On the day of the procession, it is adorned with painted cloth, garlands
+of flowers, green shrubbery, and precious stuffs. The idol is placed in
+the centre, loaded with jewels, etc., to attract the attention of the
+people. Having fastened ropes to this enormous car, eight or nine
+hundred or a thousand people catch hold of the ropes and slowly drag it
+along, accompanied with the awful roaring of their voices. At certain
+periods they stop; when the immense crowds, collected from all parts of
+the country, set up one universal shout, or rather yell. This, with the
+sound of their instruments and numerous drums, produces much uproar and
+confusion. Sometimes the weighty car comes to a stand, from the dampness
+of the ground or from the narrowness of the streets, when the tumult and
+noise are redoubled.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Perhaps you know that on some occasions, when the cars are drawn, people
+throw themselves under the wheels, and are crushed to death. This occurs
+at the drawing of the car of Juggernaut, as you may learn if you will
+read my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen. Here is a
+picture of Juggernaut, and on the last page you may see a picture of his
+car, and two men crushed to death under the wheels. Not long since, five
+persons were thus crushed to death. Many dreadful accidents also take
+place at the drawing of these cars. A few years ago several persons in
+this city had their limbs amputated, in consequence of injuries
+received.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+When I was in America, I showed to many of the dear children an idol
+called Pulliar, which was _formerly_ worshipped by Raamu, one of our
+native helpers, when he was a heathen. I gave a particular description,
+of the I manner in which he daily worshiped it, in the sermon above
+mentioned Here is a picture, which will give you some idea of this god.
+
+You will see that it is partly in the shape of a man, and partly in the
+shape of a beast. You, my dear children, would put no confidence in such
+vain idols; but this people do, as you may know from what I am now going
+to tell you.
+
+Some months ago, a woman was brought to me with a cancer in her breast.
+It had made sad ravages. On the morning after her arrival I took it out.
+Before she was brought to me, her brother went to the temple of the
+goddess Meenaache, to ascertain what was her will respecting his
+bringing her to me, or taking her to a native doctor. In order to
+ascertain it, he had recourse to the following expedient. He prepared
+several bundles of red and white flowers--the red to represent the red
+or Tamil man, the white to represent the white man. These flowers were
+carefully inclosed in leaves, so as to prevent their color being seen,
+and then laid down on the ground, at the entrance of the temple. After
+this, he called a little child to him, and then proceeded to entreat
+Meenaache that, if it were her will that he should bring the sick woman
+to me, she would direct the child to take up one of the parcels
+containing the white flowers. It so happened that the child took up one
+of these parcels. Of course, he brought her to me. Had it taken up a
+parcel containing the red flowers, she would have been taken to a native
+doctor. May we not hope that, not Meenaache, but Jehovah directed him
+to bring her to me, that she might hear of a very different being from
+her goddess, even of Jesus. Of him she has fully heard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+FESTIVALS OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--The Hindoos have many festivals. These are all
+occasions of joy and gladness. On such days, the people quit their usual
+employments. Friends and relations unite in family parties, and give
+entertainments according to their means. Innocent pastimes and
+amusements of various kinds are resorted too to add to their happiness.
+
+There are eighteen principal festivals yearly, and no month passes
+without one or more of them.
+
+One of the most solemn of these ceremonies is held in the month of
+September, and appears to be principally in honor of Parvathe, the wife
+of Siva. At this time every laborer and every artisan offers sacrifices
+and prayers to his tools. The laborer brings his plough, hoe, and other
+farming utensils. He piles them together, and offers a sacrifice to
+them, consisting of flowers, fruit, rice, and other articles. After
+this, he prostrates himself before them at full length, and then returns
+them to their places.
+
+The mason offers the same adoration and sacrifice to his trowel, rule,
+and other instruments The carpenter adores his hatchet, adze, and plane.
+The barber collects his razors together and worships them with similar
+rites.
+
+The writing-master sacrifices to the iron pen or style, with which he
+writes upon the palm-leaf the tailor to his needles, the weaver to his
+loom, the butcher to his cleaver.
+
+The women, on this day, collect into a heap their baskets, rice-mill,
+rice-pounder, and other household utensils, and, after having offered
+sacrifices to them, fall down in adoration before them. Every person, in
+short, in this solemnity sanctifies and adores the instrument or tool by
+which he gains a living. The tools are considered as so many gods, to
+whom they present their prayers that they will continue to furnish them
+still with the means of getting a livelihood.
+
+This least is concluded by making an idol to represent Parvathe. It is
+made of the paste of grain, and being placed under a sort of canopy, is
+carried through the streets with great pomp, and receives the worship of
+the people.
+
+Another festival of great celebrity is observed in October. At this
+time, each person, for himself, makes offerings of boiled rice and other
+food, to such of their relations as have died, that they may have a good
+meal on that day. They afterwards offer sacrifices of burning lamps, of
+fruit, and of flowers, and also new articles of dress, that their
+ancestors may be freshly clothed.
+
+At this festival, soldiers offer sacrifices to their weapons, in order
+to obtain success in war. On such occasions, a ram is offered in
+sacrifice to their armor.
+
+In November, a festival is observed, which is called the feast of lamps.
+At this season, the Hindoos light lamps, and place them around the doors
+of their houses. This festival was established to commemorate the
+deliverance of the earth from a giant, who had been a great scourge to
+the people. He was slain by Vrishnoo, after a dreadful battle. In many
+places, on this day, a sacrifice is offered to the _dunghill_ which is
+afterwards to enrich the ground. In the villages, each one has his own
+heap, to which he makes his offering of burning lamps, fruit, flowers,
+etc.
+
+The most celebrated of all the festivals, is that which is held in the
+end of December. It is called the feast of Pongul, and is a season of
+rejoicing for two reasons: the first is, because the month of December,
+every day of which is unlucky, is about to end; and the other is,
+because it is to be followed by a month, every day of which is
+fortunate. For the purpose of preventing the evil effects of this month,
+the women every morning scour a place about two feet square before the
+door of the house, upon which they draw white lines, with flour. Upon
+these they place several little balls of cow-dung, sticking in each a
+flower. Each day these little balls, with their flowers, are preserved,
+and on the last day of the month, they are thrown into tanks or
+waste-places.
+
+The first day of this festival is called the Pongul of rejoicing. Near
+relatives are invited to a feast, which passes off with mirth and
+gladness.
+
+The second day is called the Pongul of the sun, and is set apart to
+worship that luminary. Married women, after bathing themselves, proceed
+to boil rice with milk, in the open air. When the milk begins to
+simmer, they make a loud cry, "Pongul, O Pongul." The vessel is then
+taken from the fire, and set before an idol. Part of this rice is
+offered to the image, and, after standing there for some time, it is
+given to the cows. The remainder is given to the people. This is the
+great day for visiting among friends. The salutation begins by the
+question, "Has the milk boiled?" To which the answer is, "It has
+boiled." From this, the festival takes the name of pongul, which
+signifies to boil.
+
+The third day is called the _Pongul of cows._ In a great vessel, filled
+with water, they put saffron and other things. These being well mixed,
+they go around the cows and oxen belonging to the house several times,
+sprinkling them with water. After this, the men prostrate themselves
+before them four times. The cows are then dressed, their horns being
+painted with various colors. Garlands of flowers are also put round
+their necks, and over their backs. To these are added strings of
+cocoa-nuts and other kinds of fruit, which, however, are soon shaken
+off, when they are in motion, and are picked up by children and others,
+who greedily eat what they gather, as something sacred. After being
+driven through the streets, they are suffered, during the day, to feed
+wherever they please, without a keeper. I have, however, told you
+enough. Are you ready to exclaim, Is it possible that a people can be
+guilty of such utter folly? But you, my dear children, would be guilty
+of just such folly, if you had not the Bible. Should not the gratitude,
+then, which you owe to your heavenly Father, for your distinguished
+mercies, constrain you to do all that you can to send this blessed book
+to this dark land?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE WORSHIP OF THE SERPENT.
+
+
+My dear Children--If you have never heard much about the Hindoos, you
+will be astonished to learn how numerous are the objects of their
+worship. They worship many living creatures, such as the ape, the tiger,
+the elephant the horse, the ox, the stag, the sheep, the hog, the dog,
+the cat, the rat, the peacock, the eagle, the cock, the hawk, the
+serpent, the chameleon, the lizard, the tortoise, fishes, and even
+insects. Of these, some receive much more worship than others, such as
+the cow, the ox, and the serpent Cobra Capella. I will speak at present
+only of the worship of the serpent.
+
+Of all the dangerous creatures found in India, there are none that
+occasion so many deaths as serpents. The people are very much exposed to
+their bite, especially at night, when they are walking. They tread upon
+them, and, as they generally do not wear shoes, the snakes turn their
+heads, and strike their fangs into those parts of the feet which are
+nearest to the place where the pressure is made upon their bodies.
+Sometimes the bite is followed with instant death. The Cobra Capella is
+one of the most common snakes, and one of the most poisonous. It is
+said, that it has a thousand heads, one of which holds up the earth. It
+has a peculiar mark on its back, just behind the head. This mark very
+much resembles a pair of spectacles, without the handles. If you should
+go near it, it would raise the fore part of its body about six inches,
+widen out its neck, so as to be about double its common width, and
+prepare to strike you. The reason why the Hindoos offer sacrifices and
+adoration to it above all the other serpents is, because it is so
+frequently met with, and is so much dreaded.
+
+In order to induce the people to worship this dangerous enemy, the
+Hindoos have filled their books with tales concerning it. Figures of it
+are often to be seen in the temples, and on other buildings. They seek
+out their holes, which are generally to be found in the hillocks of
+earth which are thrown up by the white ants; and when they find one,
+they go from time to time and offer milk, plantains, and other good
+things to it.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The Hindoos, as I before observed, have eighteen annual festivals. One
+of these festivals is held for the purpose of worshipping this serpent.
+Temples in many places are erected to it, of which there is one of great
+celebrity in Mysore. When the festival occurs at this temple, great
+crowds of people come together to offer sacrifices to this creeping god.
+Many serpents besides the Cobra Capella live within it, in holes made
+especially for them. All of these are kept and well fed by the Brahmins
+with milk, butter, and plantains. By such means they become very
+numerous, and may be seen swarming from every crevice in the temple. To
+injure or to kill one would be considered a great crime.
+
+Many of the natives call the Cobra Capella nulla paampu, that is, good
+snake. They are afraid to call it a bad snake, lest it should injure
+them. The following is the prayer which is offered before the image of
+this snake. O, divine Cobra, preserve and sustain us. O, Sheoh, partake
+of these offerings, and be gracious unto us.
+
+Can you think of any thing, my dear children more dishonoring to a holy
+God, than such worship? And what have you ever done to prevent it? Have
+you, every morning and evening, prayed that the Gospel might be sent to
+this people? Did you ever give any money to send it to them? Did you
+ever think whether it may not be your duty, by and by, to come to them,
+to tell them of this Gospel?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE RIVER GANGES.
+
+
+My dear Children--If you will look at the map of Asia, and find the
+country of Hindostan, you will see running through it a very celebrated
+river--the river Ganges. It is called the Ganges, after the goddess
+Gunga. The Hindoos say that the goddess Gungu--who was produced from the
+sweat of Vrishnoo's foot, which Brumha caught and preserved in his
+alms-dish--came down from heaven, and divided herself into one hundred
+streams, which are the mouths of the river Ganges. All classes and
+castes worship her. The sight, the name, or the touch of the river
+Ganges is said to take away all sin. To die on the edge of the river, or
+to die partly buried in the stream, drinking its waters, while their
+bodies are besmeared with mud, is supposed to render them very holy. On
+this account, when it is expected that a person will die, he is hurried
+down to the river, whether willing or unwilling. Sometimes the wood
+which the people bring to burn their bodies after death, is piled up
+before their eyes. O, how inhuman is this. After it is supposed that
+they are dead, and they are placed on the pile of wood, if they should
+revive and attempt to rise, it is thought that they are possessed with
+the devil, and they are beaten down with a hatchet or bamboo.
+
+Were you standing on the banks of the Ganges you might, perhaps, in one
+place see two or three young men carrying a sick female to the river. If
+you should ask what they are going to do with her, perhaps they would
+reply, We are going to give her up to Gunga, to purify her soul, that
+she may go to heaven; for she is our mother. In another place you might
+see a father and mother sprinkling a beloved child with muddy water,
+endeavoring to soothe his dying agonies by saying, "It is blessed to die
+by Gunga, my son; to die by Gunga is blessed, my son." In another place
+you might see a man descending from a boat with empty water-pans tied
+around his neck, which pans, when filled, will drag down the poor
+creature to the bottom, to be seen no more. Here is murder in the name
+of religion. He is a devotee, and has purchased heaven, as he supposes,
+by this his last good deed. In another place you might see a person
+seated in the water, accompanied by a priest, who pours down the throat
+of the dying man mud and water, and cries out, "O mother Gunga, receive
+his soul." The dying man may be roused to sensibility by the violence.
+He may entreat his priest to desist; but his entreaties are drowned. He
+persists in pouring the mud and water down his throat, until he is
+gradually stifled, suffocated--suffocated in the name of
+humanity--suffocated in the name of religion.
+
+It happens, sometimes, in cases of sudden and violent attacks of
+disease, that they cannot be conveyed to the river before death. Under
+such circumstances, a bone is preserved, and at a convenient season is
+taken down and thrown into the river. This, it is believed, contributes
+essentially to the salvation of the deceased.
+
+Sometimes strangers are left on the banks to die, without the ceremony
+of drinking Ganges water. Of these, some have been seen creeping along
+with the flesh half eaten off their bones by the birds; others with
+their limbs torn by dogs and jackals, and others partly covered with
+insects.
+
+After a person is taken down to the river, if he should recover, it is
+looked upon by his friends as a great misfortune. He becomes an outcast.
+Even his own children will not eat with him, nor offer him the least
+attention. If they should happen to touch him, they must wash their
+bodies, to cleanse them from the pollution which has been contracted.
+About fifty miles north of Calcutta, are two villages inhabited entirely
+by these poor creatures, who have become outcasts in consequence of
+their recovery after having been taken down to the Ganges.
+
+At the mouth of the river Hoogly, which is one of the branches of the
+Ganges, is the island Sauger, which I saw as we approached Calcutta
+after having been at sea for one hundred and twenty-eight days. Now, my
+dear children, if you come out to India as missionaries, you will have
+to sail nearly one hundred and thirty days before you can reach it.
+Sauger island is the island where, formerly, hundreds of mothers were in
+the habit of throwing their children to the crocodiles, and where these
+mothers were wont to weep and cry if the crocodiles did not devour their
+children before their eyes. Think what a dreadful religion that must
+be, which makes mothers so hard-hearted. Did you ever take any corn or
+Indian meal and throw it to the chickens? And what did these chickens
+do? Did they not come around you and eat it? Well, just in this way the
+crocodiles would come near those mothers, and devour their children.
+Here is a picture of a mother throwing her child to a crocodile.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+I am glad to tell you, that the British have put a stop to the sacrifice
+of children at that place; but mothers continue to destroy their
+children elsewhere, and will continue to destroy them until Christians
+send the Gospel to them. It is not improbable that vast numbers of
+children are annually destroyed in the Ganges. Mothers sacrifice them,
+in consequence of vows which they have made. When the time to sacrifice
+them has come, they take them down to the river, and encourage them to
+go out so far that they are taken away by the stream, or they push them
+off with their own hands.
+
+I just remarked, that mothers will continue to destroy their children
+until the Gospel is sent to them. That the Gospel does prevent such
+things, the following circumstance will show. Several years ago, a
+missionary lady went from New England to India. As she was walking out
+one morning, on the banks of the Ganges, she saw a heathen mother
+weeping. She went up to her, sat down by her side, put her hand into
+hers, and asked what was the matter with her. "I have just been making a
+basket of flags," said she, "and putting my infant in it--pushing it off
+into the river, and drowning it. And my gods are very much pleased with
+me, because I have done it." After this missionary lady had heard all
+she had to say, she told her that her gods were no gods; that the only
+true God delights not in such sacrifices, but turns in horror from them;
+and that, if she would be happy here and hereafter, she must forsake her
+sins, and pray to Jesus Christ, who died to save sinners like herself.
+This conversation was the means of the conversion of that mother, and
+she never again destroyed any of her infants.
+
+Such is the power of the blessed Gospel. And what the Gospel has done
+once, it can do again. If Christians will send it to them, with the
+blessing of God, the time will soon come when heathen mothers will no
+more destroy their children. And have you nothing to do in this great
+work, my dear children? When you grow up, cannot you go and tell them of
+the Saviour? Here is a very pretty hymn about a heathen mother throwing
+her child to a crocodile.
+
+    See that heathen mother stand
+    Where the sacred currents flow,
+    With her own maternal hand,
+    'Mid the waves her infant throw.
+
+    Hark, I hear the piteous scream--
+    Frightful monsters seize their prey,
+    Or the dark and bloody stream
+    Bears the struggling child away.
+
+    Fainter now, and fainter still,
+    Breaks the cry upon the ear;
+    But the mother's heart is steel,
+    She unmoved that cry can hear.
+
+    Send, O send the Bible there,
+    Let its precepts reach the heart;
+    She may then her children spare,
+    Act the mother's tender part.
+
+I have heard of a little boy who learned this hymn. He was deeply
+affected by it, and wanted very much to give something to send the
+Gospel to India. But he had no money. He was, however, willing to labor
+in order to earn some. Hearing that a gentleman wanted the chips removed
+from the ground near his woodpile, he hired himself to him, removed the
+chips, got his money, and, with glistening eyes, went and delivered it
+up, to be sent to the heathen, repeating, as he went,
+
+    Send, O send the Bible there,
+    Let its precepts reach the heart;
+    She may then her children spare,
+    Act the mother's tender part.
+
+About one hundred miles above the mouth of the Hoogly is the city of
+Calcutta, and about five hundred miles above that city is the city of
+Benares. In these cities, as well as in other places, we see how much
+the heathen will contribute to support their wretched religion. A rich
+native in Calcutta has been known to spend more than one hundred
+thousand dollars on a single festival--the festival of the goddess
+Karle--and more than thirty thousand dollars every year afterwards
+during his life, for the same purpose. Not long since, a rich native
+gave at one time to his idols more than one million two hundred thousand
+dollars. And what have Christians ever done to honor their Saviour,
+which will bear a comparison with what the heathen do for their idols?
+Alas, alas, few Christian men or Christian women, in all the church, are
+willing to give even one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Most
+of those who are rich, hoard up their money, instead of spending it for
+the purpose of saving souls. And there are many persons who have never
+given a farthing to send the Gospel to the heathen. O, what will such
+say, when they must meet the heathen at the bar of God?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+THE GODDESS DURGA.
+
+
+My dear Children--From what I said, in my last chapter, about the
+goddess Gunga, you see that the Hindoos worship goddesses as well as
+gods. There is another goddess much worshipped the wife of the god Siva.
+She has appeared in a thousand forms, with a thousand different names.
+Of all these thousand forms, Durga and Karle are the most regarded by
+the people. I will speak of Durga first. Of all the festivals in Eastern
+India, hers is the most celebrated. She has ten hands, in which she
+holds an iron club, a trident, a battle-axe, spears, thunderbolts, etc.
+Thus armed, she is ever ready to fight with her enemies.
+
+Were you to be present in the city of Calcutta in the month of
+September, you might everywhere see the people busy in preparing for the
+yearly festival of this goddess. Images representing her you would find
+in great numbers for sale, as bread or meat is sold. In the houses of
+the rich, images are to be found made of gold, silver, brass, copper,
+crystal, stone, or mixed metal, which are daily worshipped. These are
+called permanent images. Besides these, multitudes of what are called
+temporary images are made--made merely for the occasion and then
+destroyed. They may be made of hay, sticks, clay, wood, or other such
+things. Their size varies from a few inches to twenty feet in height. If
+any persons are too poor to buy one of these images, they can make them
+for themselves. When the festival is near at hand, people are seen in
+every direction taking the images to their houses. After they are thus
+supplied, the festival commences. It lasts fifteen days. The greater
+part of this time is spent in preparing for the three great days of
+worship. Early on the morning of the first of the three great days, the
+Brahmins proceed to consecrate the images, or to give them, as they
+suppose, life and understanding. Until they are consecrated, they are
+not thought to be of any value. They are looked upon as senseless. A
+wealthy family can always receive the services of one or more Brahmins,
+and a few of the poor may unite and secure the services of one of them.
+At length the solemn hour arrives. The Brahmin, with the leaves of a
+sacred tree, comes near the image. With the two forefingers of his
+right hand he touches the breast, the two cheeks, the eyes, and the
+forehead of the image, at each touch saying the prayer, "Let the spirit
+of Durga descend and take possession of this image." By such ceremonies,
+and by repeating various _muntrums_, it is supposed that the Brahmins
+have the power to bring down the goddess to take possession of the
+image. Having been thus consecrated, it is believed to be a proper
+object of worship. Having eyes, it can now behold every act of worship
+which is made; having ears, it can be delighted with music and with
+songs; having a nose, it can smell the sweet perfumes which are offered;
+having a mouth, it can be delighted with the rich food which is prepared
+for it.
+
+After the image is consecrated, the worship begins. The devotee comes
+near the image, and falls down before it. He then twists himself into a
+great variety of shapes. Sometimes he sits on the floor, sometimes he
+stands, sometimes he looks in one direction, sometimes in another. Then
+he sprinkles the idol with holy water, rinses its mouth, washes its
+feet, wipes it with a dry cloth, throws flowers over it, puts jewels on
+it, offers perfumes to it, and finishes by performing shaashtaangkum.
+
+The worship of the idol is succeeded by a season of carousing, joy, and
+festivity. On this occasion, large offerings are made to the idols. A
+rich native has been known to offer eighty thousand pounds of
+sweetmeats, eighty thousand pounds of sugar, a thousand suits of cloth
+garments, a thousand suits of silk, a thousand offerings of rice,
+plantains, and other fruits.
+
+Bloody sacrifices are offered up on such occasions. The king of Nudiya,
+some time ago, offered a large number of sheep, goats, and buffaloes on
+the first day of the feast, and vowed to double the offering every day;
+so that the whole number sacrificed amounted to more than sixty-five
+thousand. You may remember that king Solomon offered up on one occasion
+twenty-two thousand oxen, and a hundred and twenty thousand sheep. If
+all the animals slain throughout Hindostan, at the festival of the
+goddess Durga, were collected together, they would amount to a much
+larger number than Solomon offered.
+
+After the worship and offerings have been continued for three days, the
+festival closes. As the morning of the first day was devoted to the
+consecration of the images, the morning of the fourth is spent in
+unconsecrating them. This work is done by the Brahmins. They profess, by
+various ceremonies, to send back the goddess to her heaven, concluding
+with a farewell address, in which they tell her that they expect her to
+accept of all their services, and return and pay them a visit again in
+the coming year. Then all unite in bidding her a sorrowful adieu, and
+many seem affected even to the shedding of tears.
+
+Soon afterwards the images are carried forth into the streets, placed on
+stages or platforms, and raised on men's shoulders. As the procession
+moves onward through the streets, accompanied with music and songs, amid
+clouds of dust, you might see them waving long hairy brushes to wipe off
+the dust, and to keep off the flies and mosquitoes, which might trouble
+the senseless images. But where are these processions going? To the
+banks of the Ganges. And for what purpose? For the purpose of casting
+the images into the river. When all the ceremonies connected with the
+occasion are finished, those who carry the images suddenly fall upon
+them, break them to pieces, and then throw them with violence into the
+river. After this the people return to their homes.
+
+I have now given you a specimen of the image-worship of the Hindoos; and
+how different is it from the worship which the Bible enjoins. "God is a
+Spirit; and they who worship him, must worship him in spirit and in
+truth." The very reverse of this, as you have seen, marks the worship of
+the heathen. They are not satisfied, unless they can have some object
+before them, to which they can make their offerings and their prayers.
+Thus daily are they engaged in a service which, above all others, is the
+most offensive and provoking to a holy God--a service which has caused
+him to declare, that idolaters shall not enter the kingdom of heaven.
+This, too, is the service in which every person, who has never given
+himself to the Saviour, is engaged; and, of course, in which you are
+engaged if you have not given your hearts to him. Those who think more
+of their money than they think of Christ, just as certainly worship the
+image which is stamped on a dollar or a cent, as the heathen worship
+their idols. Those who love their fathers and mothers, and brothers and
+sisters more than Christ, make these their idols. And are you, my dear
+children, yet out of Christ? If so, you have your idols. And what are
+these idols? Are they the world and its vanities? Then God is as angry
+with you as he is with the heathen, and unless you give up these idols,
+you too must be lost.
+
+In a tract of mine, published by the American Tract Society, entitled,
+"Knocking at the Door"--a tract which I _most earnestly_ entreat you to
+get and read--you will find an account of the death of a young lady, who
+had chosen the world and its vanities as her idols. I was her physician.
+After having attended her for about a month, I perceived, one morning,
+that her disease must soon prove fatal. I told her that she could not
+live. She then exclaimed, "Doctor, can I not live a month?" I informed
+her that she could not. Again she exclaimed, "Can I not live two weeks?"
+She was told that she could not live two weeks. And such a scene of
+horror followed as I never before witnessed, and may God be pleased to
+grant that I may never witness such another. Until laid upon a dying
+bed, I fear that she had neglected to think about her soul's concerns.
+Now she requested to be taken from it, and placed upon her knees, that
+she might call upon God to have mercy upon her. As her case excited much
+attention, some of the youth came to see her. These she warned, in the
+most solemn manner, not to put off repentance, as she had done, to a
+dying hour. Looking up at me, on one occasion, she exclaimed, "Doctor,
+cannot you save me?" Alas, what could I do for the poor sufferer.
+Witness, now, how anxious she was to obtain the favor of that God whom
+she had hitherto neglected. Yes, so anxious that she requested her
+friends not to allow her to sleep, that she might spend every remaining
+breath in calling upon God to have mercy upon her. One very affecting
+circumstance occurred. She requested her trunk either to be brought to
+her bedside, or to be opened. From this a ring, which was set with red
+garnets, was taken out by herself, or by another, and handed to her. She
+then called a young friend to her bedside, put the ring upon her finger,
+and said to her, "Don't you put off repentance, as I have done, until a
+dying hour." That ring is now in my possession. In less than forty-eight
+hours after I told her that she could not live, she passed into
+eternity. Would that I could show you that mournful countenance, which
+continued long after the last spark of life had become extinct; yes,
+even up to the moment when the lid of her coffin for ever hid it from
+our view. Never, never shall I forget it. It was a sad monument of the
+wreck within.
+
+Now, my dear children, you would not like to die as, I fear, this young
+lady died. Well, then, if you would die differently, you must live
+differently. You must live for Christ, if you would die in Christ. And
+are you Christ's, or are you yet gay and thoughtless--as gay and as
+thoughtless as this young lady was, until laid upon her dying bed? If
+you are so, and if you continue to remain in this sad condition, your
+season of sorrow too will certainly come, and it will come when you
+expect it not. As the little insect which flies round and round your
+candle is dazzled with its brightness, and feels nothing but pleasure,
+until it unconsciously strikes the blaze with its little wings, and is
+swallowed up in the flame; so you are dazzled with the pleasures of the
+world, thinking nothing of the flames which may swallow you up in a
+moment, and put a stop to all your joys for ever. O, that the death-bed
+scene of Miss Matthews might have a happy effect upon you. O, that the
+solemn warning which she gave to her young friend, not to put off
+repentance as she had done, until a dying hour, might continue to sound
+in your ears, until you would no longer delay repentance. My dear
+children, this young lady, though dead, yet speaketh. She speaks to you.
+She calls upon you from her tomb--from the eternal world, to delay
+repentance no longer. Will you, then, be so mad as to turn a deaf ear to
+this call? Will you ever take another sip from the cup of unhallowed
+pleasure? Will you ever direct your little feet to the ballroom, or
+other places of sinful amusement? Will you hereafter prefer your worldly
+joys to Christ? O, you must not, you must not. It will not do for you to
+be lost. Who, O who can lie down in everlasting burnings? Who can dwell
+for ever with devouring flames?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE GODDESS KARLE.
+
+
+My dear Children--In the preceding chapter I spoke of Karle. She, as I
+there mentioned, is the wife of Siva, and, like her husband, has the
+power of destruction. From the images made of her, it would appear that
+she is a female, of a black or dark blue color. She has four arms. In
+one hand she holds a sword, and in another a human head. Her hair is
+dishevelled, reaching down to her feet. Her countenance is most
+ferocious. Her tongue comes out of her mouth, and hangs over her chin.
+She has three eyes, red and fiery. Her lips and eyebrows are streaked
+with blood. She has two dead bodies for ear-rings, and wears a girdle
+around her loins--a girdle made of bloody hands, which she cut off from
+the bodies of her enemies. She has a necklace of skulls, which she took
+from the bodies of the giants and others killed by her.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Of all the Hindoo divinities, this goddess is the most cruel and
+revengeful. Such is her thirst for blood, that being unable at one time
+to procure any giants for her prey, in order to quench her thirst, she
+cut her own throat, that the blood issuing thence might spout into her
+mouth. Different acts of worship are performed to appease her. If, for
+example, a devotee should burn his body, by applying a burning lamp to
+it, it would be very pleasing to her. If he should draw some of his
+blood and give it to her, or if he should cut off a piece of his flesh
+and offer it as a burnt-offering, she would be still move pleased. If he
+should present _whole_ burnt-offerings upon the altar, saying, "Hrang,
+brang, Karle, Karle! O, horrid-toothed goddess, eat, eat; destroy all
+the malignant: cut with this axe; bind, bind; seize, seize; drink this
+blood; spheng, spheng; secure, secure; salutation to Karle," she would
+be much delighted. It is said that she will be pleased for three months,
+if the people offer her the blood of a crocodile--for a thousand years,
+if they offer her the blood of one man, and a hundred thousand years, if
+they offer her the blood of three.
+
+This goddess is the patroness of thieves. To her they pay their
+devotions, to obtain help to carry on their wicked delights. Gangs meet
+together, and, after having offered bloody sacrifices, and worshipped
+their weapons, and having drunk some intoxicating liquor, and rubbed
+their bodies with oil, they go forth to rob. They have a prayer, which
+they offer when they worship their weapons. It is as follows: "O,
+instrument formed by the goddess, Karle commands thee to cut a passage
+into the house, to cut through stones, bones, bricks, wood, the earth,
+and mountains, and cause the dust thereof to be carried away by the
+wind." Scattered throughout India, there is a lawless set of men whose
+profession it is to get their food by murder. They are called
+Phansiagars, or Thugs. They owe their origin and laws to Karle. They say
+that she told them to become murderers and plunderers. They are called
+Phansiagars, from the name of the instrument which they use when they
+murder people. Phansiagar means a strangler, and they use a phansi, or
+noose, which they throw over the necks of those whom they intend to
+plunder, and strangle them. These Phansiagars are composed of all
+castes, Hindoos, Mahommedans, pariahs, and chandellars. This arises from
+the circumstance that they never destroy the children of those whom they
+rob and murder. These children they take care of, and bring up to their
+own horrible mode of life. They always murder those whom they rob,
+acting upon the maxim that "dead men tell no tales." A gang of these
+robbers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy persons. These divide
+into small parties. Those whom they murder are travellers, whom they
+happen to meet on the road. Sometimes two or three of a gang will take
+up their station in a choultry, or place where the traveller stops, and
+while he sleeps, they rouse him from his sleep, and cast the noose over
+his head and kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man. One casts the
+noose over his head, and immediately tightens it with all his strength;
+the other strikes him on the joint of his knees as he rises, which
+causes him to fall forwards. After he has fallen, they kick him on the
+temples till he dies, which is usually in a minute. They never commit a
+murder until they have taken every precaution not to be found out. They
+will follow a traveller for weeks, if necessary, before they destroy
+him. After they have murdered him, they gash the body all over and bury
+it. They gash it, that it may not swell, and cause cracks to take place
+in the ground, which might cause the jackals to dig down to the body,
+and thus expose their guilt. If a dog accompanies the person, they
+always kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to the discovery
+of his master. They think it to be a very good act to give a part of the
+plunder, which they get when they murder a person, to their goddess. If
+they fail to put him to death according to their rules, they suppose
+that they have made her angry, and they make offerings to her, that she
+may be appeased. Thus, you see that their religion teaches them to
+commit the blackest of crimes.
+
+The reason why this people gash and bury the bodies of those whom they
+murder, is as follows. They say that the goddess used to save them the
+trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by eating them, thus
+screening the murderers from all chance of being found out. Once, after
+the murder of a traveller, the body was, as usual, left unburied. One of
+the Phansiagars employed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw the
+goddess in the act of feasting upon it. This made her so angry, that she
+vowed never again to devour a body slaughtered by them; they having, by
+this one act of curiosity, forfeited her favor. However, as an
+equivalent for withdrawing her patronage, she plucked one of the fangs
+from her jaw, and gave it to them, saying that they might use it as a
+pickaxe, which would never wear out. She then opened her side and pulled
+out one of her ribs, which she gave them for a knife, whose edge nothing
+could blunt. Having done this, she stooped down and tore off the hem of
+her garment, which she gave to them for a noose, declaring that it
+would never fail to strangle any person about whose throat it might be
+cast. She moreover commanded them to gash and bury the bodies of those
+whom they destroyed.
+
+The Phansiagars bring up their children to their own profession. To
+learn this, the boy is placed under the care of a tutor. Sometimes his
+father is his teacher. By him he is taught that it is just as proper to
+murder a man, as it is to kill a snake which lies in his path and would
+bite him as he passes. He is not permitted at first to see the murders,
+but merely a dead body; his mind being gradually prepared for the sight.
+After this, the dreadful secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him.
+When he expresses a wish to be engaged in this horrid business, they
+tell him all about it. In the meantime he is allowed a small part of the
+plunder, in order that his desire to commit these murders may be
+increased; since it is only by murder that the plunder is obtained. He
+is from time to time allowed to assist in some things, while the murder
+is taking place, or allowed to be present to see how the business is
+managed. It is not, however, until he becomes a man, that he is
+permitted to apply the noose. To attain this privilege, he usually
+devotes eight or ten years. Before he can commit a murder, his tutor
+must present him with a noose. This sets him loose upon the world, as a
+licensed murderer. When the tutor is about to give him the noose, he
+takes him apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use it with skill,
+as it is to be the means of his earning his food, and as his safety will
+depend upon the skill with which it is used. After he receives it, he
+tries his skill in strangling a person the first opportunity that
+offers.
+
+By the course of education which the Phansiagars undergo, they become so
+fond of their dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce them to quit
+it. Some who have been employed in the East India Company's service,
+have always returned to their business when an opportunity offered of a
+successful enterprise.
+
+When the Phansiagars become old, they do not quit the service, but act
+as watchers, and decoy the traveller, by some false tale of distress,
+into some distant place, where he is murdered.
+
+Women are sometimes admitted to the society of these plunderers, and,
+on some occasions, are allowed to apply the noose. They select a
+handsome girl, and place her in a convenient spot, where, by her beauty,
+or by a false story of distress, she may decoy some unsuspecting
+traveller, and be the means of his destruction. Should he be on
+horseback, she will induce him to take her up behind him; after which,
+when an opportunity offers, she throws the noose over his head, leaps
+from the horse, drags him to the ground, and strangles him. I will
+mention an instance. It happened that a horseman of Coorg, in the Madras
+presidency, was passing by a spot where one of these interesting-looking
+girls was stationed. She told him a piteous story of having been robbed
+and badly treated, and begged him to assist her. Feeling sorry for her,
+he offered to take her behind him, on his horse, and thus assist her a
+few miles on her journey. She expressed much gratitude for his kindness,
+and mounted. Soon afterwards she suddenly passed a noose over his head,
+and, drawing it with all her might, endeavored to pull him from his
+saddle. At this moment, a number of Phansiagars started from the
+neighboring thicket and surrounded him. The murderess then slipped from
+the horse; but the Coorg striking his heels into the horse's sides, it
+threw out its hind legs with great violence, and struck to the ground
+the girl, who immediately let go the cord. He then drew his sword, and,
+cutting his way through the robbers, effected his escape. He wounded two
+of them severely. These men were shortly afterwards taken, and, through
+their means, twelve others fell into the hands of the judicial officers
+of the king of Coorg, including the girl who attempted the murder. They
+were all put to death.
+
+And is it possible that such persons can go to heaven? How could such
+ever relish its pure joys? What would they do, could they be admitted
+there? My dear children, it is a charity which has no foundation, to
+suppose that the heathen can go to heaven. I have preached the Gospel to
+tens of thousands of them, but I never saw one who had the least atom of
+a qualification for that holy place. "They have all gone out of the
+way." Every crime which the apostle Paul speaks of in the latter part of
+the first chapter of his epistle to the Romans, they commit, and crimes
+of so dreadful a nature that I cannot mention them--crimes which, should
+they be written in the Bible, would cause the Bible to be a sealed book
+for ever.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+SELF-TORTURES OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--As the heathen have no Bible to direct them, they have
+devised various means by which they expect to obtain the favor of their
+gods, and get to heaven. I will mention some of these.
+
+Some burn a lamp in a temple. They think that this is a very meritorious
+act. Some roll on the ground after the god, as he is carried in a great
+car or chariot around the temple. It is customary for the people to
+build very high cars or chariots, and cover them with very beautiful
+cloths. They also tie the cocoa-nut blossom and plantain-tree within
+them, and attach great ropes to them. When they are ready to drag these
+cars, or chariots, they bring their gods of gold or of brass from the
+temples, and place them on them. Then one, two, three, six, nine
+hundred, and even a thousand persons, when the cars are very large,
+catch hold of these ropes and drag them around the temple. While they
+are doing this, many of the heathen, to fulfil vows which they made when
+in sickness, and at other times of distress, throw themselves on the
+ground, and roll over from side to side, and frequently much injure
+themselves.
+
+Some swing on great hooks, which are passed through the tender parts of
+their backs. Sometimes they swing for half an hour; sometimes an hour.
+The longer they can bear the torture of the swinging, the more
+acceptable they suppose it will be to their goddess. It occasionally
+happens, that the flesh in which the hooks are fastened gives way, in
+which case the poor creature is dashed to the ground. When this occurs,
+the people hold him in the greatest abhorrence. They judge him to be a
+great criminal, and suppose that he has met a violent death in
+consequence of sins which he committed in a former birth.
+
+Not long since, I attended one of these hook-swingings, not far from the
+city of Madura. It took place on the morning of June 8th, 1848, just
+twenty-nine years after I first left America for India. It should have
+taken place on the preceding afternoon; but one of the axle-trees of the
+car, which was to support the machine on which the man was to be
+elevated in the air, was broken. Nothing, of course, could be done until
+it was repaired. The carpenters and others worked with great diligence
+until about eleven o'clock at night, when every thing was prepared for
+the swinging. I expected immediately after this to witness the ceremony.
+It however did not take place until the morning. While waiting for the
+man who was to be swung to make his appearance, I took a pencil and made
+a drawing of the machine to which he was to be fastened. The picture on
+the first page of the book will give you some idea of it.
+
+Yon have, perhaps, often seen a well-sweep. The long beam in the picture
+is swung in the same manner as is the well-sweep, with a single
+exception. In addition to its usual motion, it is made to turn
+horizontally. The cuts which you may have seen, in two or three of my
+little books, differ much from the above; of course different machines
+are used at different times. There are stationary swingings, as well as
+swingings of the kind to which I just alluded.
+
+Between six and seven o'clock in the morning, the man who was to be
+swung made his appearance for a few moments, and then disappeared. The
+hooks by which he was to be swung, as well as the iron rods with which a
+number of devotees were immediately to pierce their sides, were carried
+through the streets, and held up that they might be seen by the people.
+Soon afterwards the man again appeared with the hooks in his back, and
+went up to the end of the beam to which he was to be fastened. This, of
+course, was lowered. Notwithstanding the dense multitudes of people, I
+made my way to the same spot, determined to be satisfied whether or not
+there was any deception in the application of the hooks. There was no
+deception. They passed through the skin, on the sides of the backbone.
+To these hooks were attached yellow ropes, by which he was fastened to
+the beam, as you will perceive in the picture. This being done, the men,
+five or six in number, who had hold of the ropes fastened to the end of
+the beam which you see resting on the ground, and which was then, of
+course, high in the air, drew him up until the beam lay horizontally.
+Then, after making him perform one circular motion around the car, they
+elevated him, as you see in the picture. When thus elevated, it was
+thought that he was forty feet from the ground. All being ready, the
+people seized the ropes which you see in front of the car, and began to
+draw it. Mr. Chandler and myself accompanied it through the streets,
+until it came to the place from which it set out. The distance of ground
+passed over was at least half a mile, and the time in which the journey
+was accomplished exceeded an hour. Of course he was swinging more than
+an hour. As the car passed through the streets, the people threw
+plantains from the tops of the houses to the crowds below.
+
+The man who was swung was adorned with flowers and other ornaments. He
+had a tinselled turban on his head. His body was rubbed over with a
+yellow paste, made, most probably, from the sandal-wood. Around his
+ankles were rings, hung with little bells, which he made to tinkle, as
+he was swinging, by striking his legs together. He wore a dark or black
+pair of pantaloons, which came a little below the knees, and which had
+a border of gold around them. He held a handkerchief in one hand, and a
+knife somewhat resembling a dagger, in the other. These he kept in
+constant motion, by moving his arms. On one occasion, a bunch of
+plantains was tied to one of the long ropes which you see hanging down
+by the side of the swinger. These he drew up, and afterwards scattered
+over the people on a house opposite to him. [Illustration.]
+
+After following the car for a quarter of a mile or more, we went before
+it, and there witnessed another appalling sight. There were five or six
+men, who had the rods of iron which I just mentioned passed through the
+skin of their sides. They were dancing along, and, as they danced, they
+made these rods go backward and forward through the skin.
+
+After the car had reached the place from which it set out, the end of
+the beam from which the man was swinging was then lowered and he was
+untied. Again I looked very carefully at the hooks in the back. The
+people say that no blood is shed by their introduction, and consider
+this to be a miracle. The falsity of this assertion was shown by the
+blood which I saw on the side of one of the wounds.
+
+I have been long in this country, and consequently have become so
+familiarized with heathenism, that my feelings, though deeply wounded at
+this sight, were not so keenly affected as were those of my new
+associate, Mr. Chandler. He has been on heathen ground but a short time.
+When they tied the man to the beam, he was unnerved and wellnigh
+overcome; and he told me, that during all the time he was following the
+car, he felt like shedding tears.
+
+While following the car, the young men of America came into my mind.
+They refuse to come, said I, to help these miserable creatures. O, they
+will not come--they will not come. I thought, that if many of the dear
+children of that land--children to whom I lately preached, as well as
+others, could witness this poor creature swinging from the end of a long
+beam, far above the tops of the trees, and that, too, by hooks passing
+through the tender parts of his back, they would say, we will, by and
+by, become missionaries, and, by the help of God, proclaim to the
+heathen that there is a Saviour.
+
+On the evening of the day on which the swinging takes place, another act
+of great cruelty is practised. Devotees throw themselves from, the top
+of a high wall, or a scaffold of twenty or thirty feet in height, upon a
+bed of iron spikes, or on bags of straw with knives in them. Many are
+often mangled and torn. Others are quickly killed.
+
+At night, many of the devotees sit down in the open air, and pierce the
+skin of their foreheads, by inserting a small rod of iron. To this is
+suspended a lamp, which is kept burning till daylight.
+
+Sometimes bundles of thorns are collected before the temple, among which
+the devotees roll themselves without any covering. These thorns are then
+set on fire, when they briskly dance over the flames.
+
+Other devotees swing before a slow fire; some stand between two fires,
+as you see in this picture.
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+Some have their breasts, arms, and other parts stuck entirely full of
+pins, about the thickness of small nails, or packing needles.
+
+Another very cruel torture is practised. Some of the devotees make a
+vow. With one hand they cover their under lip with wet earth or mud. On
+this, with the other hand, they place some small grains, usually of
+mustard-seed They then stretch themselves flat on their backs, exposed
+to the dews of night, and the blazing and scorching sun by day. Their
+vow is, that from this position they will not stir, that they will not
+move nor turn, nor eat nor drink, till the seeds planted on their lips
+begin to sprout. This usually takes place on the third or fourth day.
+After this they arise, and then think that they are very holy.
+
+There is a class of devotees in this country called Yogis, whose object
+it is to root out every human feeling. Some live in holes and caves.
+Some drag around a heavy chain attached to them. Some make the circuit
+of an empire, creeping on their hands and knees. Some roll their bodies
+from the shores of the Indus to the Ganges.
+
+The Rev. Mr. Heyer, in one of his letters from India, says, that an
+Indian devotee has spent more than nine years on a journey from Benares
+to Cape Comorin, that is, from the 27th to the 7th degree of north
+latitude. The whole journey is made by rolling on the bare ground, from
+side to side. When he comes to a river, of course he cannot roll over
+it. He therefore fords it, or passes over it in a boat, and then rolls
+on the banks of the river just as far as the river is wide. By doing
+this, he supposes that his determination to roll all the way is fully
+carried out.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Some devotees hold up one or both arms, until the muscles become rigid,
+and their limbs become shrivelled into stumps. In the above cut, you
+have a representation of a man with one of these shrivelled arms. See
+how long his finger-nails have grown. One has run through his hand and
+back through his arm. Some stretch themselves on beds of iron spikes.
+Some wear great square irons on their necks. I have seen not only a man,
+but a woman, with these great square irons around their necks, each
+nearly two feet in length and two feet in breadth. These they put on for
+the purpose of fulfilling some vow which they have made. For instance,
+if a mother has a very sick little boy, she will say, "Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy, I will have a square iron put on my neck,
+and wear it all my life." After this vow is made, if the little boy gets
+well, the mother thinks that her Swammie has cured him, and to fulfil
+her engagement she will have one of these irons put on her neck.
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+[Illustration:]
+
+Other devotees throw themselves from the tops of precipices, and are
+dashed to pieces; some bury themselves alive in holes, which their own
+relatives have dug; some bind themselves with ropes or chains to trees,
+until they die; some keep gazing so long and so constantly at the
+heavens, that the muscles of their neck become contracted, and no
+aliment but liquids can pass into the stomach.
+
+But I will not continue this subject. You perceive, my dear children,
+what a wretched religion that must be which encourages its followers to
+perform such acts. And how vain are all these acts--how utterly
+destitute are they of any merit. Those who practise them are not made
+better by them, and they are just as far from the kingdom of heaven
+after having performed them, as they were before. The Christian religion
+encourages no such things. It tells us to perform no pilgrimages to holy
+places, to inflict no self-tortures. But it has its requirements, and
+these are very simple, and may easily be performed by all who are
+willing to do their duty. These requirements are, repentance, forsaking
+sin, faith in Christ, and a supreme devotedness to his service. Have
+you, my dear children, attended to these requirements? If not, you are
+in a much worse condition than these poor heathen of whom you have been
+reading. They are not as guilty before God as you are. They know not
+their Master's will. Still, they must perish, unless the Gospel is sent
+to them. But though they perish, their punishment will be lighter than
+the punishment of those who refuse to love and obey the Saviour. That
+servant who knows his Lord's will, and prepares not himself, neither
+does according to his will, shall be beaten with many stripes. But he
+that knows not, and does commit things worthy of stripes, shall be
+beaten with few stripes. Should it be your sad lot to perish at last, it
+would be far better for you to go down to hell enveloped in all the
+darkness of a heathen land, than to go down to hell from a land of such
+gospel light and privileges as you enjoy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+THE SUTTEE, OR BURNING OF WIDOWS.
+
+
+My dear children--From what I have already told you, you know that the
+Hindoos are a cruel people. But I have not told you of the extent to
+which they carry their cruelty. Perhaps it is shown to the highest
+degree in their practice of the suttee, or burning of widows. The
+British have abolished this rite throughout their dominions in India.
+They have also made great exertions to have it abolished in the
+territories of the native princes, but I am sorry to say, that in some
+of these territories it is still practised. Within the last three years,
+twenty-three of the princes just alluded to, have issued orders for its
+abolishment throughout their dominions. These orders have probably been
+issued solely in consequence of their fear of the British power, for it
+is a practice which is riveted in the affections of the people. This
+power they know that it will be dangerous to resist.
+
+In my "Sermon to Children, on the Condition of the Heathen," I
+mentioned, that the sacred books of the heathen encourage the suttee. I
+also mentioned several instances, in which widows had been burned to
+death with the corpses of their husbands. Even though you may have seen
+that book, it will be well for me to give you two or three other cases,
+to impress your minds more fully with the horrors of the Hindoo
+religion. The first took place in a village of Tanjore. A merchant
+having died, his wife, who was about thirty years old, determined to
+burn herself with his corpse. The news of what she was going to do,
+quickly spread in every direction, and large numbers of people collected
+to witness the burning. After she was adorned with jewels and dressed in
+her best clothing, and after her body was tinged with the yellow
+infusion of sandal-wood and saffron, bearers arrived to take away the
+corpse with the wretched woman. The body of the man was placed on a car,
+ornamented with costly stuffs, flowers, etc. There he was seated like a
+living man, elegantly decorated with all his jewels, and clothed in rich
+attire.
+
+The corpse being carried first, the wife followed in a rich palanquin.
+As she went along, the surrounding multitudes of people stretched out
+their hands towards her to show how much they admired her conduct. The
+women in particular went up to her to wish her joy, apparently desiring
+to receive her blessing, or at least, that she would pronounce over them
+some pleasing word. She tried to satisfy them all, saying to one, that
+she would long continue to enjoy her worldly happiness, and to another,
+that she would be the mother of many beautiful children. Another was
+informed, that she would soon arrive at great honor in the world. These,
+and similar expressions, she made to all who came near her, and they
+departed with the full belief that they would enjoy all the blessings of
+which she had spoken. She also distributed among them some betel-leaves,
+which they gladly received as relics, or something of blessed influence.
+
+During the whole procession, which was very long, her countenance was
+serene and even cheerful, until they came to the pile upon which she was
+to die. Then she suddenly became pensive. She no longer attended to what
+was passing around her. Her looks were wildly fixed upon the pile. Her
+face grew pale. She trembled with fear, and seemed ready to faint away.
+
+The Brahmins, who took the lead in this ceremony, with her relations,
+seeing her sad condition, ran to her, and endeavored to restore her
+spirits, but she seemed not to know what they said, and answered not a
+word.
+
+They made her quit the palanquin, and her nearest relatives took her to
+a pond of water which was near the pile, where they washed her. They
+then attended her to the pile, on which the corpse of her husband had
+already been laid. It was surrounded with Brahmins, each with a lighted
+torch in one hand, and a bowl of melted butter in the other, all ready,
+as soon as the poor victim was placed on the pile, to envelope her in
+fire.
+
+The relatives armed with muskets, sabres, and other weapons, stood
+closely around in a double line, for the purpose, it was said, of making
+her afraid, if she might wish to draw back, or of frightening any body
+who might pity her, and endeavor to rescue her.
+
+At length the time for firing the pile being proclaimed, the young widow
+was stripped of her jewels, and led on towards the pile. She was then
+commanded to walk three times around it, two of her nearest relations
+supporting her by the arms. The first round she accomplished with
+tottering steps; but in the second, her strength forsook her, and she
+fainted away in the arms of those who were holding her. They were
+obliged to drag her between them for the third round. Then senseless,
+she was thrown upon the corpse of her husband. At that instant, the
+multitude made the air to ring with their shouts of gladness, while the
+Brahmins poured the butter on the dry wood, and applied the torches.
+Instantly the whole pile was in a blaze.
+
+As soon as the flames began to rage, the poor woman, now in the midst of
+them, was called upon by name, from all sides; but as insensible as the
+corpse on which she lay, she made no answer. She entered eternity,
+suffocated at once, most probably, by the flames.
+
+The second case of suttee which I shall mention took place at the death
+of the rajah, or king of Tanjore. He left behind him four wives.
+
+The Brahmins having determined that two of these four should be burned
+with the corpse of their husband, and having selected the two whom they
+thought best to sacrifice, they told them of what awaited them. They
+received the information with apparent joy. A refusal would have been
+attended with their utter disgrace.
+
+One day only was necessary to get ready for the funeral ceremonies. They
+were conducted as follows: In a field somewhat distant from the palace,
+the people made a hollow, not very deep, but about twelve or fifteen
+feet square. Within it they made a pyramid of the sweet-smelling
+sandal-wood. On the middle of the pyramid, a scaffold was built in such
+a manner that the posts could easily be taken away, by which means the
+scaffold would fall at once. On the four corners of the platform, large
+jars were placed, filled with melted butter, to besmear the pyramid,
+that it might be the more easily set on fire.
+
+The following was the order of the procession. It was headed by a great
+number of soldiers under arms. They were followed by a multitude of
+musicians, chiefly trumpeters, who made the air reecho with their
+melancholy sounds. Next came the body of the king upon a splendid
+palanquin, richly adorned. This was surrounded by the nearest relations
+and by the priest of the king. They were all on foot, and without their
+turbans in token of mourning. A large party of Brahmins formed around
+them as an immediate escort. The two wives who were to be burned with
+the corpse came next, each borne on a palanquin. During the journey they
+appeared calm and cheerful. The troops kept off the immense crowds who
+were assembled from every direction.
+
+The two queens, loaded with jewels, were attended by their favorite
+women, with whom they occasionally conversed, and by their relations of
+both sexes. To many of these they had made presents before leaving the
+palace. They were also accompanied by thousands of Brahmins, collected
+from different quarters. These were followed by an innumerable multitude
+of persons of both sexes. When they arrived at the ground where they
+were to be burned, the two victims were made to descend from their
+palanquins, for the purpose of performing the preparatory ceremonies.
+They went through the whole without showing any fear until towards the
+close, when their countenances began to change, and their three circuits
+around the pile were not performed without considerable effort to
+maintain calmness.
+
+In the meantime, the body of the king had been placed on the scaffold
+over the platform. The two queens were also laid down beside the corpse,
+one on the right hand, and the other on the left, and they joined hands
+by stretching them over the body. The astrologer having then declared
+that the happy moment was come for firing the pile, the Brahmins
+repeated several prayers in a loud voice, and sprinkled the pile with
+holy water. When these ceremonies were finished, a signal was given, and
+the pillars which supported the pyramid and the scaffold were suddenly
+taken away. Immediately the women were covered with the falling mass of
+timber, which tumbled over them with a crash. At the same instant the
+pile was fired in all its parts. On one side, the nearest relative of
+the king applied his torch, and on the other side, the priest; while the
+Brahmins, in every quarter, were pouring jars of melted butter on the
+flames, creating so intense a heat as must instantly have consumed the
+victims. Then the multitude shouted for joy, and the relations
+approaching the pile also set up a loud cry, calling them by their
+names. They supposed that they heard a voice in answer pronouncing
+_Enna?_ that is, _What_? but the fall of the platform, and the immediate
+bursting out of the flames, must have stifled them at once.
+
+Such was the miserable cud of these poor unhappy queens--unhappy victims
+of the most cruel religion that ever disgraced the earth.
+
+Not unfrequently the sons take a prominent part in destroying their
+mothers. This will appear from the following case. A Brahmin died, and
+was brought to the place of burning. His wife was fastened to the pile,
+and the fire was kindled, but the night was dark and rainy. When the
+fire began to scorch the poor woman, she contrived to disentangle
+herself from the dead body, and creeping from under the pile, hid
+herself among some brushwood. In a little time it was discovered that
+there was but one body on the pile. The relations immediately took the
+alarm, and searched for the poor creature. The son soon dragged her
+forth, and insisted that she should throw herself on the pile again, or
+drown or hang herself. She pleaded for her life at the hands of her own
+son, and declared that she could not embrace so horrid a death; but she
+pleaded in vain. He urged, that he should lose his caste if she were
+spared, and added, that either he or she must die. Unable to persuade
+her to hang or drown herself, the son and the others present tied her
+hands and feet, and threw her on the funeral pile, where she quickly
+perished.
+
+[Illustration: BURNING OF WIDOWS]
+
+I observed that the rite of suttee is riveted in the affections of this
+people. The following communications from two of the native princes who
+lately consented to put a stop to this rite, will show you that this is
+the case. The rajah of Oorcha declares, that "no subject of his state
+shall in future be permitted to become a suttee, though according to the
+Shasters, it is no doubt very meritorious for a widow to die of grief
+for the death of her husband." The rajah of Sumpthem says, "The practice
+of suttee is so very old, and has been countenanced and encouraged by
+the wise men of so many generations that I have never thought myself
+justified in interposing to prevent it; but my anxiety to meet the
+wishes of the governor-general in this and in all things, is so great,
+that I have waived all other considerations, and forbidden suttee."
+
+If the British were to lose their power in India, the suttee would
+immediately be reestablished. Power has put it down, but power alone
+will never root it out of the affections of the people. Nothing but the
+Gospel can do this. O that Christians would think of this, and hasten,
+yea, with great haste, to send this blessed Gospel to them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+THE REVENGEFUL NATURE OF THE HINDOO RELIGION.
+
+
+My dear Children--The sacred books of the Hindoos encourage revenge. In
+the Vedas, which are the most sacred books, are laid down forms of
+religious service, or acts of worship, which are designed to injure or
+destroy their enemies. When a person wishes to have his enemy
+destroyed, he goes to a Brahmin or priest, and secures his supposed aid.
+The Brahmin, before he proceeds to his work, clothes himself with a
+black garment. He also makes four images of the foe, and clothes these
+with black garments. He then kindles a sacrificial fire, and after the
+performance of various ceremonies, he takes pieces of some animal which
+has been consecrated for the purpose, and throws them into this fire. On
+every occasion when he makes this burnt-offering, he touches the mouth
+of the image of this enemy, uttering one or other of the forms of prayer
+which are written in the sacred books. Of these, the following are a
+few: "O Agni," god of fire, "thou who art the mouth of all gods, do
+thou destroy the wisdom of my enemy." "O Agni, fill with distraction the
+mind of this my enemy." "O Agni, destroy the senses of this my enemy."
+"O Agni, make dumb the mouth of this my enemy." "O Agni, fasten with a
+peg the tongue of this my enemy." "O Agni, reduce to ashes this my
+enemy."
+
+How different, my dear children, is the religion of Jesus from the
+religion of which I have been giving you a description. No precepts
+teach us that we may injure or destroy our enemies. On the contrary,
+they teach us to love them, and do them good. Let me repeat to you some
+of the words which our Saviour spoke on this point. "Ye have heard that
+it hath been said, Thou shalt love thy neighbor, and hate thine enemy;
+but I say unto you, love your enemies, bless them that curse you, do
+good to them that hate you, and pray for them that despitefully use you
+and persecute you, that ye may be the children of your Father which is
+in heaven; for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the good,
+and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust."
+
+One of the young Hindoos in Dr. Duff's school in Calcutta, when reading
+the above and similar passages, was so struck with the difference
+between these precepts and the precepts of his Shasters, that he could
+not but exclaim "O, how beautiful, how divine. Surely this is the
+truth--this is the truth--this is the truth." The consequence was, that
+he never could rest until he had thrown aside his sacred books and his
+idols, and embraced that Saviour whose precepts appeared to him to be so
+beautiful. And was this heathen so struck with the beauty of the
+precepts of the Bible--so struck, that he had no peace until he gave
+himself to his Saviour? And have you ever, my dear children, been struck
+with the precepts of your Saviour--so struck with them, that you could
+never rest until you had given up your hearts to him? If not, how great
+is the contrast between you and that young Hindoo. He gave his heart to
+the Saviour. You withhold yours. He, through grace, will dwell for ever
+with Christ in heaven. You, if you continue in your present awful
+condition, must be banished from his presence, and cast into hell, where
+you shall be tormented day and night for ever, with the devil and his
+angels. Flee, my dear children, flee to the Saviour now, if you have
+never yet done so. Flee to him, and then you also shall dwell for ever
+with him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+THE DECEPTION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--From what I have previously stated, you are aware that
+the Hindoos are a very deceitful people. Let me give you another
+instance of their deception. A late head catechist of one of my
+missionary brethren was, before his conversion, the priest of a temple.
+A man from whom about one thousand rupees' worth of jewels and similar
+things had been stolen, came to this priest, and promised to reward him
+well, if he would detect the thief, and secure to him the restoration of
+his property. The priest promised to comply with his wishes; and in
+order to effect his purpose, he had drums beaten through the village,
+and proclaimed, that at a certain time he would hold a meeting and
+detect the thief. At the appointed time, a large concourse of people
+assembled, the priest appearing in the midst of them with a cocoa-nut
+bound around with saffron-cords. He then told them, that if, after
+putting down the cocoa-nut, it should move of its own accord towards
+him, they might know that he would be able certainly to detect the
+thief; and added, that after it had thus moved, it would pursue the
+offender, and follow him until it would break his head. He then
+performed certain ceremonies calculated to awaken superstitious feelings
+in the minds of the people, and laid the cocoa-nut down at a little
+distance from him. To the great amazement of all present, it began to
+move towards the priest, and continued to move until it reached his
+feet. This being done, he told the people, that they might conclude from
+what they had seen, that the cocoa-nut would follow the thief until it
+would break his head. He consented, however, to give him a little
+grace--to spare his life until the next day; adding his advice, that the
+thief, whoever he might be, had better come to him privately, and tell
+him where the property was. In the dead of the night, a tap was heard at
+the door of the priest; the thief presented himself, and delivered up
+the property. The priest received a present from the owner of the
+property, and rewarded the thief for his promptness. After this man was
+converted, he was asked how he contrived to make the cocoa-nut move
+towards him. "Why, sir," he answered, "if you will carefully divide a
+cocoa-nut, scoop out the kernel from one-half of it, enclose a strong,
+lively rat, put the parts of the cocoa-nut together, and bind the whole
+with saffron-cords, to prevent the crack being seen, and then place it
+on a declivity previously prepared, it is clear, that if you place
+yourself at the foot of this declivity the rat will twirl the cocoa-nut,
+and cause it to descend until it reaches your feet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+SUPERSTITION OF THE HINDOOS.
+
+
+My dear Children--In my Sermon to Children, before alluded to, I
+mentioned a few particulars to prove that the people of India are very
+superstitious. Let me mention a few more. It is said that no act,
+however good it may be, if performed on Sunday, will succeed. Some will
+not eat at all on Sunday, until they have seen a certain bird--the bird
+on which the god Vrishnoo rides. If a man rubs oil on his head on
+Monday, and bathes, he will commit a sin equal to the sin of destroying
+a temple of Siva. If he has his hair out on Tuesday, he will become
+poor. Even to worship the gods on Wednesday, is bad. If a person takes
+medicine on Thursday, his sickness will be increased. Should he lend any
+thing on Friday, he will lose his property. If he should buy a new cloth
+on Saturday, take it home, and keep it there, death may be the
+consequence. Should he die on this day, some other member of the family
+will die on the following week.
+
+If the foundation of a house is laid in June, the destruction of that
+house will follow. Should a family enter a new house in March, some
+member of the family will die. If a marriage is celebrated in September,
+the husband and wife will fight with each other.
+
+Should a thunderbolt fall on a house, or a vulture alight on it, some
+evil will befall the people living in it. If a crow should strike any
+person on the head with its wings, some of his relations will die.
+Should a cat or a snake cross his path, it would be an indication of
+evil. In the latter case, one of his relations will die. If, when
+returning home, a person should meet him bearing a light, a quarrel will
+be the result.
+
+After a person has left his house, should he meet a single Brahmin, or a
+woman who has had her head shaved, or a dumb or a blind man, or a
+washerman or a barber, the object for which he left would not succeed.
+Or, when going out, should he hit his head against the top of the
+door-frame, or should any one ask him where he was going, or should he
+happen to sneeze, he would consider these things as hinderances to his
+going, and reenter the house.
+
+Should a son or a daughter be born on the new moon in April, they will
+become thieves. If a person is born under the planet Saturn, he will be
+slandered, his riches will be dissipated, and his wife, son, and friends
+will be destroyed. He will also be at variance with others, and endure
+many sufferings. Should he be born under the planet Mars, he will be
+full of anxious thoughts, be imprisoned, and oppressed with fear from
+robbers, fire, etc. He also will lose his lands, trees, and good name.
+
+If a person dreams that a monkey has bitten him, he will die in six
+months; or if he dreams that bedbugs, in large numbers, are creeping
+over his body to bite him, he will die in eight days. Should he dream
+that a dog has bitten him, he will die in three years; or should he
+dream that a dead person has appeared to him and spoken to him, he will
+die immediately.
+
+If a man has a little head, he will become rich. If he has a large head,
+he will be poor. If his forehead is wide, he will live a hundred years.
+If he has a small neck, he will be a murderer. If the second toe is
+long, he will be a bad man. If a woman has curly hair, she will not
+prosper. If her nose is long, she will have a good disposition. If her
+ear is wide, she will tell falsehoods. If she has a mole on her nose,
+she will be subject to anger; if on her lips, she will be learned; if on
+the eyebrows she will be cunning.
+
+I could continue to fill a number of pages with things of the same
+description, but it will be unnecessary. I will merely mention one
+instance more. On a certain night in the month of November, the people
+will not look at the moon. The reason assigned for this, is as follows.
+Once, when the elephant-faced god Pulliar was dancing before the gods,
+the moon happening to see him, laughed at him, and told him that he had
+a large stomach, an ear like a winnowing-fan, etc. This so enraged him,
+that he cursed her. This curse was inflicted on the night above
+mentioned.
+
+How does the wretchedness of a people, both in reference to the things
+of this world and of the world to come, show itself where the Bible is
+unknown. If this blessed book was not an inspired book--if it did no
+more than remove the temporal miseries of men, how invaluable would it
+be! Of how much more value then, is it, in reference to the removal of
+their spiritual miseries?
+
+O, why is it that Christians have not long since sent this Bible to
+them? Why is it that they do not send it to them _now_? This is a
+mystery, which we must leave to be unravelled at the judgment-seat of
+the last day. My dear children, you are to stand before that
+judgment-seat. Shall any of these heathen among whom I dwell, rise up at
+that awful season--stretch out their hands towards you, and say, There
+stand the children who might have sent us the Bible, but they did not
+send it; and now we must be lost--_lost for ever!_
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+BURMAH, CHINA, ETC., ETC.
+
+
+My dear children--If you will look on your map of Asia, you will see,
+adjoining Hindostan, at the east, a country called Burmah. This is
+another land of idols. Here the "Baptist General Convention for Foreign
+Missions" have one of the most interesting and flourishing missions in
+the world. The people of Burmah are, if possible, still further removed
+from divine knowledge than the people of India. They are in reality
+atheists, or, in other words, people who do not believe in a creator or
+preserver of the world. But still they worship gods, who, they say, have
+become so by acts of religious merit. He whom they now worship is called
+Gaudama, or Boodh. He is reputed to be the son of the king of Benares,
+and, if their history be correct, was born six hundred years before
+Christ. The Boodhists are all idolaters. They have many temples erected
+to the honor of Boodh and his image. Before this image they present
+flowers, incense, rice, betel-nuts etc. Like all other idolatrous
+nations, the Burmese are very wicked. They do not respect their females
+as they should do. They treat them as an inferior order of beings. They
+often sell them.
+
+A very singular custom prevails in that country. It consists in paying a
+kind of homage to a white elephant. This elephant is sumptuously dressed
+and fed. It is provided with officers, like a second sovereign, and is
+made to receive presents from foreign ambassadors. It is next in rank to
+the king, and _superior_ to the queen.
+
+Burmah is the country in which Drs. Judson and Price, and Messrs. Hough
+and Wade suffered so much, during the war with England several years
+ago. Messrs. Hough and Wade were the first to suffer. As the ships which
+were to make the attack upon Rangoon approached the city, they were
+seized and cast into prison. Their legs were bound together with ropes,
+and eight or ten Burmans, armed with spears and battle-axes, were
+placed over them, as a guard. They were afterwards put in irons. The
+next morning, as the fleet approached still nearer the city, orders were
+sent to the guard, through the grates of their prison, that the instant
+the shipping should fire upon the town, they were to kill them, together
+with the other prisoners confined with them. The guard, on receiving
+these orders, began to sharpen the instruments with which they intended
+to kill them, and moved them about their heads to show with how much
+skill and pleasure they would attend to their orders. Upon the floor
+where they intended to butcher them, a large quantity of sand was spread
+to receive the blood. The gloom and silence of death reigned among the
+prisoners; the vast ocean of eternity seemed but a step before them. At
+length the fleet arrived, and the firing commenced The first ball which
+was thrown into the town passed, with a tremendous noise, directly over
+their heads. This so frightened the guard, that they seemed unable to
+execute their murderous orders. They shrunk away into one corner of the
+prison, where they remained quiet, until a broadside from one of the
+ships made the prison shake and tremble to its very foundation. This so
+alarmed them, that they burst open the doors of the prison and fled. The
+missionaries, with the other prisoners, were then left alone. Their
+danger, however, was not at an end; but as God had protected them thus
+far, he continued to protect them until they were set at liberty, and
+allowed to preach the Gospel again to those perishing heathen. Drs.
+Judson and Price were also imprisoned, and suffered much; but they, too,
+were preserved and delivered. The accounts of their sufferings are so
+long, that I cannot now relate them all to you. You will find them in
+the life of Mrs. Judson.
+
+After the war was over, the missionaries were permitted to go everywhere
+to proclaim the name of the Saviour; and their efforts have been very
+much blessed, especially among the Karens. It will be impossible for me
+to give you an account of their many labors, and of the many tokens
+which they have received of God's favor towards multitudes who have
+become followers of the Redeemer. Suffice it to say, that more than six
+thousand have been received into the Christian church. One of the native
+teachers not long since baptized, on one occasion, three hundred and
+seventy-two persons.
+
+Adjoining Burmah, is China, a country containing more than three hundred
+millions of people, about twenty times as many as there are in the
+United States of America. It is a country filled with idols. Many of the
+people earn their living by making and selling these idols. There are
+many shops where they are sold, or repaired when they become broken or
+defaced.
+
+The females in that country are in a very degraded state. They are the
+slaves of their husbands, and live and die in the greatest ignorance.
+Any attempt to raise themselves to the level of females in Christian
+lands, is considered as very wicked. The little female child is tortured
+from her birth. You have, perhaps, heard that the women of China have
+small feet. These are made small by a very cruel practice--by putting
+bandages of cloth so tightly around them, that they cannot grow. Many
+women have feet not larger than those of an American infant of one year
+old. Mr. Doty, missionary to China, says, that he was acquainted with a
+little girl whose mother had bound up her feet so tightly, that she
+cried two or three hours every day, on account of the great pain which
+she suffered.
+
+With such little feet, you may well suppose that it would be very
+difficult for the women to walk. It is so. They limp and hobble along,
+just as if their feet had been cut off, and they had to walk on stumps.
+
+The Chinese do not count their daughters among their children. Mr. Doty
+says, he one day asked his Chinese teacher how many children he had. He
+replied, that he had several. "How many of these," he then inquired,
+"are daughters?" "We do not count our daughters among our children," he
+answered. "I have three daughters, but we Chinese count our sons only as
+children."
+
+When this missionary was in a Chinese village where he had never been
+before, a man called to see him, bringing with him two pretty little
+girls, neatly dressed, about six and seven years old. He said that they
+were his daughters and that he wished to sell them. Mr. Doty refused to
+buy them, as it was wicked to buy and sell children; but he told him,
+that if he would commit them to him, he would take them home with him,
+and educate them, and that they might return home after they had grown.
+To this proposal he would not consent but said, that if he would buy
+them, they should be his for ever. He could have bought them both for
+about twenty-six dollars.
+
+The Chinese have many schools, but none for their daughters, as they do
+not teach them, to read. When they are about thirteen years old, they
+shut them up in what are called "women's apartments," where they remain
+until the time of their marriage. Then the parents sell them to those
+who wish to have wives for their sons. In this way, they are frequently
+married to persons whom they never before saw.
+
+Many parents in China destroy their little girls soon after they are
+born, or while they are very small. This they frequently do by throwing
+them into rivers, or into the sea, after they have wrapped them up in
+coarse mats. There is a little Chinese girl, named Ellen, now living in
+Newark, New Jersey, whose father was about to kill her when she was
+three weeks old. An English lady heard of his intentions, and sent a
+person with ten dollars to see if she could not be bought. He was
+offered the ten dollars, but refused to take them. She sent ten dollars
+more. He consented to take the twenty dollars. This little girl was
+brought by this English lady to America, when she was about six years
+old. The friends who have her under their care, are educating her with
+the hope that she may go back to China, to tell its females of the
+Saviour.
+
+Did you ever, my dear girls, think why it is that your parents love you,
+and educate you--why it is that they try to make you happy, instead of
+cramping your feet, shutting you up, and, perhaps, at last selling you?
+It is because they have the Bible. Then, how anxious should you be to
+save what money you can, to buy Bibles to send to those poor heathen.
+
+As I am now speaking of the destruction of infants, I would observe,
+that this crime is common in other heathen countries. It was quite
+common, until lately, in the island of Tahiti, and other places in the
+South Pacific Ocean. When the missionaries of the London Missionary
+Society went there, many years ago, they found the females in a very
+degraded situation. Mr. Nott, one of these missionaries, declared that
+three out of four of the children were murdered as soon as they were
+born. He met a woman soon after this dreadful crime had been abolished
+to whom he said, "How many children have you?" "This one in my arms,"
+was her answer. "And how many did you kill?" She replied, "Eight."
+Another woman, who was asked the same question, said that she had
+destroyed _seventeen_. Infanticide, or, in other words, the destruction
+of infants, says the Rev. Mr. Williams, was carried to an almost
+incredible extent in Tahiti, and some other islands. He writes, "During
+the visit of the deputation, G. Bennet, Esq., was our guest for three or
+four days; and on one occasion, while conversing on this subject, he
+expressed a wish to obtain accurate knowledge of the extent to which
+this cruel practice had prevailed. Three women were sitting in the room
+at the time, making European garments, under Mrs. Williams direction;
+and, after replying to Mr. Bennet's inquiries, I said, 'I have no doubt
+but that each of these women has destroyed some of her children.' Mr.
+Bennet exclaimed, 'Impossible; such motherly, respectable women could
+never have been guilty of so great an atrocity.' 'Well,' I added, 'we
+will ask them.' Addressing the first, I said to her, 'Friend, how many
+children have you destroyed?' She was startled at my question, and at
+first charged me with unkindness, in harrowing up her feelings, by
+bringing the destruction of her babes to her remembrance; but upon
+learning the object of my inquiry, she replied, with a faltering voice,
+'I have destroyed _nine_.' The second, with eyes suffused with tears,
+said, 'I have destroyed _seven_;' and the third informed us that she had
+destroyed _five_. Had the missionaries gone there but a few years
+before, with the blessing of God, they would have prevented all this.
+These mothers were all Christians at the time this conversation was
+held."
+
+"On another occasion," says Mr. Williams, "I was called to visit the
+wife of a chief in dying circumstances. She had professed Christianity
+for many years, had learned to read when about sixty, and was a very
+active teacher in our adult school. In the prospect of death, she sent a
+pressing request that I would visit her immediately; and on my entering
+her apartment she exclaimed, 'O, servant of God, come and tell me what I
+must do.' Perceiving that she suffered great mental distress, I
+inquired the cause of it, when she replied, 'I am about to die.' 'Well,'
+I rejoined, 'if it be so, what creates this agony of mind?' 'O, my sins,
+my sins,' she cried; 'I am about to die.' I then inquired what the
+particular sins were which so greatly distressed her, when she
+exclaimed, 'O, my children, my murdered children! I am about to die, and
+shall meet them all at the judgment-seat of Christ.' Upon this I
+inquired how many children she had destroyed, and to my astonishment she
+replied, 'I have destroyed _sixteen_, and now I am about to die.'" After
+this Mr. Williams tried to comfort her, by telling her that she had done
+this when a heathen, and during the times of ignorance, which God winked
+at. But she received no consolation from this thought, and exclaimed
+again, "O, my children, my children." He then directed her to the
+"faithful saying, which is worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ
+came into the world to save sinners." This gave her a little comfort;
+and after visiting her frequently, and directing her to that blood which
+cleanseth from all sin, he succeeded, with the blessing of God, in
+bringing peace to her mind. She died soon after, rejoicing in the hope
+that her sins, though many, would be forgiven her. Well may you exclaim,
+my dear children,
+
+    "Holy Bible, book divine,
+    Precious treasure, thou art mine."
+
+Infanticide still prevails in India, but as I have given a particular
+description of this crime in my Sermon to Children, on the Condition of
+the Heathen, I will here say nothing farther on the subject.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+THE DUTY OF PRAYING AND CONTRIBUTING FOR THE SPREAD OF THE GOSPEL.
+
+
+My dear children--There is another story connected with India, which I
+might have mentioned in my last chapter while writing about the
+destruction of infants. I will relate it now, in order that you may be
+constrained to pray more frequently for the heathen. Some time ago, the
+wife of a native prince had a little daughter. The father ordered it to
+be put to death, immediately after it was born. Had it been a son, an
+heir to the throne, he would have taken great care of it. A second, a
+third, a fourth, a fifth little daughter was born. All these were also
+put to death by the command of the father. When a sixth little daughter
+was born, the mother's heart yearned over it. "I cannot part with it,"
+said she; "I will have it taken away and hid, so that the king may know
+nothing about it." This was done, but the poor mother never dared to
+send for her little girl. She never saw her again, but died sometime
+after.
+
+Many of the little girls in India are very pretty. They have dark eyes,
+and sweet, expressive countenances. This little child grew to be a very
+beautiful girl; and when she was eleven years old, some of her relations
+ventured to bring her to her father. They thought that he would be
+struck with the sight of his sweet child, and that he would love her for
+the sake of her mother who had died. The little girl fell at his feet
+and clasped his knees, and looked up in his face and said, "My father."
+And what do you think that father did? Do you think that he took her up
+in his arms, and kissed her? No. He seized her by the hair of her head,
+drew his sword from his belt, and with a single blow took off her head.
+
+Now, my dear children, do you not think that you ought to pray for the
+poor heathen--to pray that God will send the Gospel to them? I want to
+tell you of a little boy who heard me preach some time ago about the
+heathen. One night he said his prayers, and went to bed. After he got
+into bed, he said to the nurse, "I have forgotten to pray for the
+heathen, and I must get out of bed and pray for them." The nurse then
+told him that it would not be necessary for him to get up, as he could
+pray for them while in bed. "No," said he, "I must get out of bed and
+pray for them." And the dear little boy would not rest until he got out
+of bed and prayed for them. Now I want all of you, my dear children,
+every morning and evening, to kneel down and pray for the heathen, as
+this little boy did. And I want you to do something more. I want you
+always to be punctual in attending _the usual monthly concerts of
+prayer,_ provided there are no juvenile monthly concerts to which you
+can go. I have long wished to see juvenile monthly concerts of prayer
+established. They would be very interesting if I am to judge from the
+account of one which I some time ago received from a friend of mine, the
+Rev. Mr. V----. I will give you some extracts from his letter. He
+writes, "According to promise, I send you an account of the first
+children's monthly concert, so far as I can learn, held on Long Island.
+As notice was not given either in the church or Sabbath-school, the
+attendance was smaller than it otherwise would have been. Still, about
+sixty interesting children attended. After a few remarks concerning the
+object of the meeting by the superintendent of the Sabbath-school they
+sung with melting eyes the hymn that describes the wretched heathen
+mother casting her lovely babe into the jaws of the monster of the
+Granges. Prayer then was made, of about two or three minutes in length.
+Then I gave some of the most affecting accounts of the cruelties and
+ignorance of the heathen, as related by the devoted Williams, that
+martyr missionary. Their silent attention and subdued countenances told
+that their hearts were with the wretched idolaters. After having thus
+spent about ten minutes, the children sung in a sweet manner, a hymn--a
+prayer for those laboring amid the heathen:
+
+    "When worn by toil, their spirits fail,
+    Bid them the glorious future hail;
+    Bid them the crown of life survey,
+    And onward urge their conquering way."
+
+"After which, two resolutions were passed, unanimously, by the children.
+First, that they will each one attend the monthly concert of prayer
+regularly, when able, and bring with them all their companions whom they
+can persuade to come.
+
+"Secondly, that they, with the children of the various schools of W----,
+will constitute ---- a life member of the W---- Bible Society. Some of
+the smaller children had brought their little Bibles to give them to
+----, that he might carry them to the poor children of the heathen. But
+when informed that the heathen could not understand English, they
+determined to raise money, and send it out to purchase Bibles for the
+children. This interesting meeting was closed by prayer, the doxology,
+and benediction."
+
+But not only can you pray for the heathen, you can give _something_ to
+send the Gospel to them. Do you say that you have no money to give? But
+cannot you earn some? Many young persons have done so. One of whom I
+have read, says, "Besides supporting a school in Ceylon, we are going to
+support five Chinese boys. I earn six cents a week for not using tea,
+one for not using sugar, and three for not using coffee."
+
+Another says, "I, with three others, have been making matches to the
+amount of ten dollars, and should have made more, but the people are
+pretty well supplied. I am going to dig my father's garden, and my
+mother is going to give me a quarter of a dollar for digging it, which I
+shall give to the missionaries. I am going to do all I can, and to earn
+all I can, and save all that I have, to support the missionaries."
+
+Another says, "I am going to leave off buying candy." What is that? Can
+little girls and boys do without sugar-candy? I am afraid that many of
+you, my dear children, would find it difficult to go without it. But let
+me quote all that this child wrote. "I am going to leave off buying
+candy and such little notions, unless it is necessary, and save every
+cent that I can get and give it to the missionaries."
+
+Now, my dear children, I do think that if you would save some of those
+cents which you spend in buying candy, fire-crackers, and similar
+things, and buy Bibles and tracts for the poor heathen, you would do
+much more good with them.
+
+I want to tell you about a little boy who belonged to one of my schools
+in Ceylon, who has, as I hope, gone to heaven through the means of a
+tract which cost only two or three cents, and which was the cause of his
+coming under my care. After he had attended preaching for some time, he
+begged me to admit him to the church. As he was quite young, not eleven
+years old, I was afraid to receive him. This feeling, perhaps, was
+wrong. He never joined the church on earth. He has, however, I hope,
+gone to join the church in heaven. When he was about eleven years of
+age, he was attacked with the cholera and died. In this country, when
+children are very ill, the father or mother will catch up a cocoa-nut or
+a few plantains, and run off to the temple, and say, "Now, Swammie, if
+you will cure my little boy or little girl, I will give you this
+cocoa-nut, or these plantains." The mother of this boy saw that he was
+very ill, and she told him that she wished to go to make offerings to
+one of her idols, in order that he might get well. But he requested her
+not to do so. "I do not worship idols," said he; "I worship Christ, my
+Saviour. If he is pleased to spare me a little longer in the world, it
+will be well; if not, I shall go to him." The last words he uttered
+were, "I am going to Christ the Lord."
+
+Now when you think about this little boy, I want you to ask yourselves,
+whether it is not better to give two or three cents to try and save the
+soul of some poor little heathen boy or girl, than to spend them in
+buying candy, and other useless things.
+
+But I must tell you about a little girl whom I saw some time ago, who
+refused to buy candy while there are so many heathen without the Bible.
+Her father is a sea-captain. Being absent from home, he sent her five
+dollars to buy candy, or any thing else which she wished. As this little
+girl had heard about the heathen, she determined to throw all her money
+into the missionary-box, instead of spending it for her own pleasure.
+The mother, on learning her intentions, asked her if she would not like
+to spend a part of it for candy, and similar things. She replied, that
+she would not, and in due time she put her five dollars into the
+missionary-box. Not long after this, she was attacked with a severe
+toothache. The mother proposed that the defective tooth should be
+extracted. The little creature, for she was only about eight years old,
+dreaded the operation, and seemed at first to be backward about having
+it performed. To encourage her to submit to it, her mother offered her
+twenty-five cents. This little girl did not then begin to reason, Now,
+if I can only get those twenty-five cents, I can buy a doll, or I can
+buy some sugar-candy; but she reasoned thus, Now, if I can get those
+twenty-five cents, I can go and put them into the missionary-box. So she
+said to her mother, I will go and have the tooth taken out. The tooth,
+however, ceased to ache, but still she wished to have it extracted. Her
+mother then interfered, and told her that, as it had ceased to ache, it
+might be well for her not to have it drawn until it ached again. The
+little girl, however, persisted, saying, that if it were not taken out,
+she could not get the twenty-five cents to devote to the missionary
+cause. She therefore went to the dentist's, submitted to the operation,
+received her twenty-five cents, and went and threw them into the Lord's
+treasury. Was not that a noble little girl? Doubtless you will all say
+she was.
+
+I must tell you about a noble little boy also. Some time ago, I was
+preaching to the children of Canandaigua, in the western part of New
+York. After I had preached there, I went on to Rochester. Returning from
+that place, I met with a lady in the cars, who told me as follows:
+"After you had preached in Canandaigua," said she, "a young lady there,
+who had lost her mother, and who had six or seven or eight of her
+brothers and sisters under her care, formed them into a missionary
+society." Oh, I wish that all the dear children in America were formed
+into missionary societies. After she had done this, she asked her little
+brother how he was going to get money to put into the missionary-box.
+"By catching mice," said he. His sister gave him two or three cents for
+every mouse he caught. Thus it appears, that this dear little boy was
+going to throw all his earnings into the Lord's treasury.
+
+But let me tell you a little more about the children to whom I before
+alluded. Another says, "In some of the day-schools of this city, the
+girls have formed sewing societies, and make pin-cushions, needle-books,
+emery-bags, and the like, and send the money that is raised from the
+sale of them to the missionaries, to be used for the heathen. There are
+seven Sabbath-schools in this town, and in each of them there is a
+missionary association; so that in all about five hundred dollars are
+sent from the Sabbath-schools every year."
+
+Now, my dear girls, I want you to think of what has now been said about
+the formation of sewing societies; and I want you to ask your mothers
+whether they will not allow you to form such societies, to meet once a
+week, or once in two weeks, or once a month to sew, to get some money to
+send the Gospel to the heathen. Many societies of this kind have been
+formed. After I had preached to the children in one of the churches in
+Third-street, New York, the little girls who attend that church formed
+such a society. The account which I received of it is as follows. "You
+may remember, that in your address to our Sabbath-school, you related
+instances of little girls knitting, sewing, etc., to earn something for
+the missionary-box The examples which you related were not lost to the
+girls of the Sabbath-school. Immediately they began to talk about
+forming themselves into a sewing society, and making small articles, and
+giving the proceeds to the missionary society. They did not stop here,
+but went right to work, and soon formed their society, which they styled
+the Juvenile Sewing Society. They are in a very prosperous and
+flourishing condition at present. I know not the amount of funds they
+possess--they pay a cent a week into their treasury--but they have a
+large assortment of articles already made. I understand, also, they meet
+once a week to sew."
+
+After I had preached at a place called Little Falls, New York, the girls
+formed a sewing society there. The following account of this society I
+received from one of its little members. "When you were here last fall,
+and told us how much good little girls had done in having sewing
+societies, we thought we would see if _we_ could not do some good in the
+world, as well as they; and, since October, we have met weekly, and by
+holding a fair, we have succeeded in raising sixty-two dollars. We
+hope it will be the means of saving some poor heathen children."
+
+Now, as I said before, I want you, my dear girls, to ask your mothers if
+you may not form such societies also. Will you think of it? I hope you
+will.
+
+Another of the children to whom I have twice referred, says, "I can try
+and save their souls, if I am not there. I can work for them, and send
+some money to you to buy them Bibles, and I can pray for them; and if I
+should save some souls, O how would they thank me. But if I did not send
+my money, nor care any thing about them, and I should not go to heaven,
+and they should not, how would they rise up in judgment against me, and
+say, If we had had the privileges that you had, we should not be here.
+O, how thankful we ought to be, that we were not born in heathen lands.
+O, if the poor heathen could only have such privileges as we have, how
+thankful would they be; and if we were born in heathen lands, I have no
+doubt that they would come and tell us about a Saviour."
+
+I have received many letters from children, breathing the same spirit
+which is manifested in the notes I have copied.
+
+One writes, "Last winter I brought in the wood for mother, and she gave
+me fifty cents. I now am very glad that I have not spent it, as I can
+give it to you to buy tracts for the little heathen children of India."
+
+A second writes, "The enclosed fifty cents my grandmother gave me when I
+was a very little boy, for sitting still one hour. Will you please to
+use it to furnish the Bible and missionary to the heathen."
+
+A third writes, "I have always spent my money for candy and other
+trifles, but since I have heard about the darkness and misery of the
+heathen, I intend to save it all, and put it into the missionary-box."
+
+A fourth writes, "The enclosed I earned by knitting. I intended to save
+it, till I had sufficient to carry me a short journey to see some of my
+friends; but when I heard you tell about the little heathen girls, I
+thought I would give it to you, for the poor heathen children."
+
+A fifth writes, "I have enclosed twelve and a half cents, which my
+father gave me to go and see General Tom Thumb. When I heard you
+lecture last evening, I came home and concluded to give it to you, and
+let you buy Bibles for the poor heathen."
+
+A sixth writes, "I remember, before my mother died, she used to tell me
+a great deal about the children of India, and now she is in heaven. I
+think she would like to have me give my heart to the Saviour, and go and
+teach those poor children. I give you some money that was given to me to
+see an exhibition, which I saved to give for such things, rather than
+go."
+
+A seventh writes, "You told us that two cents were the means of
+converting a young man. I would give two cents every week, if it would
+convert souls to Christ."
+
+An eighth writes, "My mother told me, some time ago, that every day I
+recited my lessons without missing a word, she would give me a penny;
+and not being desirous to spend it, I do wish you would take it--fifty
+cents--to the heathen. It may buy some tracts at the bazaar or market."
+
+A ninth writes, "We feel sorry for those poor heathen children. We will
+try to earn some money to buy Bibles for the heathen. Father has
+promised us some land to work next summer, and we think we can raise
+something and sell it to get the money."
+
+A tenth writes, "Since you were here last spring, I have saved what I
+could--one dollar--for the heathen children, and should be glad if I
+could do more."
+
+An eleventh writes, "The money which you will find enclosed, I earned by
+working for my mother on Saturday, which I intended to keep to buy a
+microscope; but when I heard you preach on Sabbath, I concluded to give
+it to buy Bibles for the poor heathen children."
+
+A twelfth writes, "The enclosed, five dollars, was a birthday present
+from my father, but I want to give it to Dr. Scudder, for the poor
+little boys in Ceylon."
+
+A thirteenth writes, "Please accept my mite, by the hand of my brother.
+I have been keeping it for the purpose of buying a geography; but when I
+heard you preach yesterday, I thought I had better send it to you, for
+the poor heathen."
+
+A fourteenth writes, "I would like much to become a missionary, as I am
+named after one; I hope I shall be one. I have been saving a dollar to
+buy myself some books, but concluded to give it to buy some books for
+the heathen."
+
+The last two children, whose letters you have been reading, gave to the
+missionary cause the money which they had been earning to buy books.
+When you have been earning money for the express purpose of giving it to
+the missionary cause, then you should devote it all to that cause; but I
+would advise you not to do as did the two children last mentioned. Had
+my opinion been asked, relative to the disposal of their money, I would
+have recommended them to give _one-tenth,_ or perhaps a little more, of
+the sums they had been earning, to their Saviour, and to keep the rest
+to buy their books. The giving of not less than one-tenth of all you
+earn, for charitable purposes, is the principle which I wish to have
+impressed fully on your minds, and I hope you will grow up under the
+influence of this principle, and _never, never_ depart from it. But
+while I thus speak, you must not suppose that I wish you to confine
+yourselves to the giving of one-tenth, when you can give more; I hope
+you will not give merely this, but one-half, or more, if you can afford
+it. Indeed, if you do not go as missionaries to the heathen, I want you
+to make it your great object _to make money for Christ, and to spend it
+for Christ_. O, if the generation which is grown, were as anxious to
+make money for Christ, and to spend it for Christ, as they are to make
+it for themselves, and to spend it for themselves, or to hoard it up--it
+may be for the everlasting destruction of the souls of their
+heirs--there would be no complaints that money could not be had to send
+the Gospel to the destitute, both at home and abroad.
+
+In my twelfth chapter, I spoke of the liberal donations which the
+heathen of India make for the support of their religion. In the city of
+Calcutta alone, it is supposed that two millions of dollars are spent
+every year on the festival of a single goddess--a festival which lasts
+only a few days. A single native has been known to give, as I before
+said, more than one hundred thousand dollars at one time to this
+festival, and afterwards thirty thousand dollars yearly. How vast, then,
+must be the sums which are spent upon all the different festivals of
+their gods. Would that we could see such liberality among Christians.
+Would that we could see the generality of them willing to give even
+one-tenth of their annual income to the Lord. Alas, what would the
+heathen say, if they were to learn how much greater are the sums of
+money which they give to their idols, than Christians give to honor
+their Saviour? Would they not exclaim, It is because Christianity is
+false, and heathenism is true, that Christians give so little for
+Christ, while we give so much for our gods? My dear children, I hope
+that you will never allow the heathen to say that the Christian religion
+is false, because you do not give your money for the spread of the
+Gospel. Will you not resolve now, that you will, so long as God prospers
+you in worldly goods, give _at least_ one-tenth of all you earn to the
+Lord? Do, my dear children, do make the resolution now.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+PERSONAL LABORS AMONG THE HEATHEN.
+
+
+My dear children--You have, perhaps, often seen Campbell's missionary
+map of the world. If not, I want you very carefully to look at it. I
+want you to look at the red spots on it, and think how many millions of
+people embrace the religion both of the Greek and Roman Catholic
+churches--a religion which is nothing more nor less than paganism, with
+a few Christian doctrines added to it. After this, I want you to look at
+the green spots, and think of the hundred and twenty millions of
+Mohammedans, who spurn the name of Jesus as a Saviour, and who have set
+up Mahomet as their prophet. I want you also to look at all the dark
+spots, where, with comparatively a few exceptions, the people are in
+pagan darkness, without any knowledge of God and the only Saviour of
+sinners Jesus Christ. And in view of all this darkness--in view of the
+need of more than half a million of ministers of the Gospel to preach
+the news of salvation to them, I want you, my dear boys, to ask
+yourselves whether it may not be your duty, after you grow up, to
+become ministers, and go and preach the Gospel to them. You know that
+you are bound to do all the good to others which you can; and even if
+you do not love the Saviour, you are not released from your obligations
+to do good. I would by no means have you become ministers without giving
+your hearts to Christ; but this you are as much bound to do, as you are
+bound to do all the good you can to others. If you are not Christians, I
+want you, through grace, to become such, and I want many of you to
+become ministers and missionaries. Two of my sons are now missionaries
+in India, and four others, I hope, are preparing to come. And why should
+not you also come here, or go to other heathen lands? If you can be
+excused from coming or going, why may not all who are now little boys
+also be excused? In such a case, there will be no missionaries at all.
+And you know that this would be very wrong. But I do not merely want
+many of you, my dear boys, to become missionaries, I want many of you,
+my dear girls, to become missionaries also. Many little girls and boys
+have expressed a desire to become missionaries. Several little boys who
+wrote to Mr. Hutchings, one of my missionary brethren, and several
+little boys and girls who have written to me, have said that they would
+like to be missionaries.
+
+One writes, "I should like to go and be a missionary, and instruct the
+poor heathen children to love God."
+
+A second says, "I have been selling matches that I made. I got five
+dollars--just as many dollars as I am years old. I think I shall become
+a missionary, and come and help you. I hope I shall see you again when I
+come to Ceylon. Tell the heathen children they must love God, and be
+good children. They must not give the children to the crocodiles, nor
+throw them into the water; and they must not worship wooden and brass
+gods. They must worship the true God, and keep his commandments."
+
+A third says, "I like to send money to help the poor heathen to learn to
+read the Bible, and other good books. I think it will be pleasant to
+sail across the ocean, and teach them to turn from their idols. I would
+teach them not to lay themselves down before the car of Juggernaut, and
+be crushed to death; and I would teach them not to burn themselves to
+death on the funeral pile."
+
+A fourth says, "I mean to save something to send to you, to help support
+one school. Should my life be spared, and the way be opened at some
+future day, I think I should be willing to leave my native home, to go to
+some distant land to tell the heathen of a Saviour, whom I hope I have
+found."
+
+A fifth says, "If you are ever in want of money, just please to send on
+to me, and I will endeavor to raise all that you want. If I live to be a
+man, I hope be a missionary to Ceylon or China."
+
+One little boy wrote to me as follows: "I have for a long time been
+saving three shillings, for the purpose of buying a little racoon, which
+I intended to do on Monday. On Sunday I heard you preach, and thought I
+would give it to you to save some poor heathen soul; and I hope you will
+pray for me, that I may become a minister, and go to India, and preach
+to the heathen."
+
+Another writes, "This is to certify that I, Charles D.H. Frederick,
+pledge myself, if God spares my life, when I get to be a man, and he
+pardons me through Christ Jesus, I will go and preach to the heathen."
+
+A little girl wrote me as follows: "According to my present feelings, I
+should like to engage in so glorious a cause," as the missionary cause,
+"and I hope, when I arrive at an age to be of use to God, and the poor
+heathen, to embrace so glorious a cause."
+
+Another little girl writes, "I felt very bad when I heard you tell about
+the poor heathen who worship the idols. I could not keep from weeping,
+when you told us about the man who came so far to get a teacher to come
+and tell the Gospel to his friends, and was disappointed. I felt very
+bad Sunday evening; and on Monday evening I felt that the Lord had given
+me a new heart. I felt happy, and sang some beautiful verses that I
+learned in one of mother's little books. I have read the Day-springs,
+and thought a great deal about the heathen for two years.
+
+"I used to think a great deal about having nice clothes, before I
+thought so much about the heathen. My mother told me some time ago, that
+she thought she would get me a white dress when I was ten years old. I
+am now ten years old, and this evening mother gave me two dollars to
+get the dress, or dispose of it in any way I thought best; and I wish
+you would take it to have the poor heathen taught about the Saviour. If
+I live, and it is the Lord's will, I hope I shall come and help you
+teach the poor heathen about the Saviour."
+
+There is a little boy in the city of New York, who formerly used to tell
+his mother, that he meant to be a cab-driver, and all she could say to
+him was of no avail in making him think differently. This little boy
+came with his mother to hear me preach about the heathen.
+
+After he had left the church, as he was going home, he burst into tears,
+and exclaimed, "Mother, I mean to be a missionary to the heathen;" and
+so far as I know, he has never talked about being any thing else since.
+And I hope that many of you will never talk about being any thing else
+than missionaries to the heathen.
+
+I am acquainted with a little girl in Ohio, who has resolved to become a
+missionary. She is a niece of Mr. Campbell, late missionary to Africa.
+She was not quite four years old when I saw her. When she was eighteen
+months of age, she saw the picture of a heathen mother throwing her
+child into the mouth of a crocodile She was deeply impressed with the
+sight. When she was two and a half years old, she resolved to be a
+missionary, and follow her uncle to Africa. From this resolution she has
+never drawn hack. When I was at her father's house, she was asked if she
+would not go to India. She replied, that she would not go to India, but
+to Africa. She was asked why she wished to go to Africa. "To teach the
+heathen," was her answer. "Why should you teach the heathen?" "Because
+they worship idols." Her mother told me, that ever since she began to
+get money, she has contributed to the missionary cause; and this money
+has generally, if not always, been earned by some act of self-denial on
+her part. I hope that many of you will feel just as this little girl
+felt, and do just as she did.
+
+When I was in America, I used continually, when preaching, to ask the
+dear children whether they would not become missionaries. I used also to
+beg them to write down what I had asked them. Many complied with my
+request. While I was at the Avon Springs, one of the daughters of a
+physician there, not only wrote it down, but gave me what she had
+written. The following is a copy of what she wrote,
+
+     _August 18, 1844._
+
+    _Dr. Scudder requested me to come to India to help him when I am
+    grown._
+
+    S. P. S.
+
+    _Avon Springs_
+
+Could I raise my voice loud enough to reach America, I would beg of
+_you_ to write down the following sentence: Dr. Scudder asks me, to-day,
+whether I will not hereafter become a missionary to the heathen. Perhaps
+you will write it down _immediately_.
+
+Now, my dear boys, if you will come out to India, or go to Burmah or
+China, to tell the heathen of the Saviour, you may, with the blessing of
+God, do as much good as Swartz and Carey, and others have done. And if
+you, my dear girls, will do the same, you also may do much good. This
+will appear from what I am going to tell you about a little girl in
+Ceylon. This little girl belonged to the boarding-school at Oodooville.
+She early gave her heart to the Saviour, and joined the church when she
+was thirteen years old. I should like to know if there are any of you
+who have not followed her example. If so, this is not right. My dear
+children, it is not right. Shall this little girl, in a heathen land, a
+land filled with idols, give her heart to Christ; and you, in a
+Christian land, a land of Sabbaths, and Sabbath-schools, and Bibles, not
+give your hearts to him? This is not right. You know that it is not
+right.
+
+But let me go on with my account of the little girl. After she had
+joined the church, she wanted to go and see her mother, who was a
+heathen, for the purpose of conversing with her about her soul's
+concerns. Now, in this country, when children who have been absent from
+their parents for any length of time go home, the mother spreads a mat
+down on the floor, and tells them to sit down upon it, adding that she
+will go and cook rice for them. They have no seats to sit on, as you
+have in America. Well, this little girl went home. When her mother saw
+her, she was very glad; and after she had spread a mat for her, and told
+her to sit down, she said that she would go and cook rice for her. The
+little girl told her that she was not hungry, and did not wish to eat,
+but wanted to talk with her. "You cannot talk with me," said her mother,
+"until I have cooked rice for you." "Mother," said the little girl, "you
+worship idols, and I am afraid that you will lose your soul, and I want
+to talk with you about Jesus Christ." The mother became quite angry with
+her, and rebuked her. But still the little girl continued to talk with
+her about her soul. The mother then became so angry, that she told her
+to be silent, or she would punish her. The little girl replied, "Mother,
+though you do whip me, I must talk to you about Jesus Christ," and she
+burst into tears. The mother's heart was broken. She sat down on the
+mat, and her little daughter talked with her, and prayed with her. After
+this the little girl was so troubled, fearing that her mother's soul
+might be lost, that she was heard praying for her during all parts of
+the night. And God heard her prayers. Her mother forsook her idols, and
+became a Christian, and her conversion was followed by the conversion of
+one or two others. Now, my dear little girls, if you will give your
+hearts to the Saviour, and in due time come here, or go to other heathen
+lands, and tell the people of a Saviour, you may, with the help of the
+Holy Spirit, be as useful as this little girl was.
+
+Female missionaries have done much good among the heathen. I mentioned
+an instance on page 88, to prove this. Let me mention another instance
+more.
+
+In the year 1838, an English lady, Miss Aldersey, went to the East, at
+her own expense to promote female education among the Chinese. At that
+time, she could not go to China, as that country was not open to
+missionaries She therefore went to Java, where there was a colony of
+Chinese. Here she hired a house, and collected about twenty-five girls,
+whom she clothed, and boarded, and taught. The Lord blessed her labors,
+and several of these girls were hopefully converted. When their parents
+saw that they would no longer worship idols, they became much opposed to
+the school, and some of them took their daughters from it. In the year
+1842, God opened the door for the entrance of the Gospel into China.
+This missionary then broke up her school in Java, went to that country,
+and resided in the city of Ningpo. Of the girls who had become
+Christians while under her care, two were much persecuted by their
+parents. They were whipped and beaten, with the hope that they would
+again return to their idols; but all the efforts which were made to
+induce them to forsake the Saviour were in vain. They declared that they
+would sooner die than forsake him. When their parents saw that stripes
+and blows were of no avail, they determined to marry them to men who
+were much devoted to their idols. This stratagem, they thought, might
+succeed in destroying all their interest in their new religion. Here,
+however, they were again foiled. The girls became alarmed, and fled from
+their parents. An English gentleman, but who was not a professor of
+religion, felt deeply interested for them, and assisted them to get on
+board a ship going to Batavia. Here they were pursued but escaped from
+the pursuers by going on board of a ship which sailed for Singapore.
+From Singapore they sailed for China, where they were permitted to join
+the old friend who had been the means of their conversion. This lady
+collected a school at Ningpo of more than thirty girls. Thus you see how
+much good female missionaries have done by going to heathen lands. And
+are none of you willing to follow their example? Are none of you willing
+to say, Here am I, Lord, send me?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+SUCCESS OF THE GOSPEL IN INDIA AND CEYLON.
+
+
+My dear Children--I have told you that India is a very dark land, but
+there are a few bright spots in it. Through the blessing of God upon the
+prayers of his people in Christian lands, and upon the prayers and
+labors of his missionary servants, many of the heathen of India and
+Ceylon have forsaken their idols, and are now enlisted under the banner
+of Jehovah Jesus. In the Travancore and Tinnivelly districts to say
+nothing of the success of the Gospel in other places, thousands and tens
+of thousands of the people have embraced Christianity. In hundreds of
+villages where but a few years ago the name of Jesus had never been
+heard, it is now known and adored.
+
+You have often heard of Ceylon. If you will look at the map of
+Hindostan, you will find it close to that country. Here Christianity has
+begun to prevail. This island is two hundred miles long, and in some
+places quite wide. A large part of it is covered with what is called
+jungle. Jungle and wilderness mean the same thing. In this jungle there
+are many wild beasts, such as elephants, bears, wild hogs, and
+buffaloes. In it also, there are men, women, and children, running wild,
+just like the wild beasts. This people are called Verders, or wild
+people. They wear scarcely any clothing. They have no houses. When it
+rains, they creep into holes, or go under overhanging rocks. Their beds
+consist of a few leaves. Sunk almost to the level of the brute, they
+live and die like their shaggy companions of the forest. Even upon these
+the Gospel has tried its power. More than fifty families have settled
+down, forming two pleasant, and now Christian villages. They have
+schoolmasters and Christian teachers.
+
+I must give you a description of two revivals of religion which
+occurred while I was in the island of Ceylon, in the year 1833. Before
+those revivals took place, there was no particular manifestation of much
+seriousness at any of our stations. It was in the month of October of
+that year, that we began to feel that we must labor more, and pray more
+for the conversion of perishing souls. A protracted meeting was spoken
+of, and it was determined that one should be held at our seminary in
+Batticotta--a seminary which was established for the purpose of raising
+up a native ministry. On the morning of the day in which the meeting was
+commenced, Mr. Spaulding and myself went to that station to assist Mr.
+Poor, the principal of the seminary, in laboring with the students. In
+these labors we spent five days. It was good to be there. No sooner had
+we begun our exercises, than a blessing from on high was experienced.
+The windows of heaven were opened, and the Holy Ghost descended. This
+was evident from the spirit of prayer which was poured out upon the
+pious students of the seminary. They were heard "a great while before
+day" pleading, in their social circles, that God would have mercy upon
+their impenitent companions, and bring them into the kingdom of his
+grace. We trust, also, that a spirit of prayer was given to those of us
+who took a prominent part in the meeting. At the termination of our
+exercises, with the exception of a few lads belonging to a Tamul class,
+who had lately been admitted to the seminary, there was not, so far as I
+know, an individual connected with it, who was not humbled at the foot
+of the cross, either to lie there until healed of his wounds, or to
+show, if he perished, that he must perish under circumstances of a very
+aggravated nature.
+
+After we had finished our meeting at Batticotta we went to the female
+seminary at Oodooville, to hold similar meetings. Before we reached that
+station, the church-members there, after having heard what God was doing
+at Batticotta, became very much aroused to pray for the influences of
+the Holy Spirit to descend upon the impenitent in their seminary also.
+Soon after we reached the station, we held a meeting with the girls.
+Some of them were then deeply concerned for the salvation of their
+souls; but it was not until Wednesday afternoon, that we knew how
+powerfully the Spirit of God had been at work. The meeting which we held
+with the seminarists at that time was one of the most solemn meetings
+which I ever attended. One of them, a girl of high caste, and of a very
+good family, said to her companions in that meeting, "My sisters, I have
+been a proud one among you. I hope that if you ever see me proud again,
+you will tell me of it. I used to tell the missionaries, that I had
+given myself to the Saviour, but I had not done it." Another of the
+girls burst into tears, and cried out aloud. As she could not restrain
+her feelings, and did not wish to disturb the assembly, she arose and
+left it. She retired to one of the prayer-rooms adjoining the seminary,
+there to weep alone. She, however, was not left alone. Mr. Poor, one of
+my missionary associates, followed her, and endeavored to administer the
+consolations of the Gospel to her; but she refused to be comforted. All
+her distress seemed to arise from a single source. "I told you a
+falsehood," said she, "last Monday, in saying that I had dedicated
+myself to the Saviour, when I had not." Perhaps she thought at that
+time, that she had thus dedicated herself to the Saviour, but
+afterwards found that she had deceived herself. In this wretched state
+of mind, she continued until half-past ten o'clock that night, when she
+came into Mr. Spaulding's house, where I then was, and wished to know
+what she must do to be saved. She was told, as she had often been told
+before, that she must dedicate herself entirely to her Saviour. She went
+away, and returned the same night at about half-past eleven o'clock,
+saying, that she had found HIM.
+
+    "Friends, is not my case amazing?
+     What a Saviour I have found."
+
+My dear young friends, are there any of you who have never given your
+hearts to Christ? If so, let me entreat you to follow the example of
+that dear little girl of whom I have now been speaking. She found it to
+be necessary to give her heart to the Saviour, and I hope that she did
+give it to him. O that you too might give up your hearts to him. Alas,
+if you do not, you must soon go down to eternal burnings where you will
+be constrained to cry out, Lost, lost, lost for ever! Be careful, my
+dear children, O be careful that this young girl does not rise up
+against you in the last day, and condemn you. She must do so--she will
+do so, if you do not, like her, choose Christ as your portion. But I am
+digressing, and must go back to the point I left.
+
+The next day, one of our missionary sisters, who had lately reached
+Ceylon from America, came to Oodooville, to witness the nature of the
+work which she heard was in progress at that place. As she was entering
+Mr. Spaulding's house, she was met by one of the most consistent
+church-members of the seminary, who declared that she had lost her hope
+of being a Christian. Perhaps this church-member was disposed to write
+bitter things against herself because she did not feel all that warmth
+in religion which marked the conduct of those who, at that time, were
+indulging the hope that they had passed from death to life. After the
+sister to whom I alluded had been in the house a little while, she
+requested Mrs. Spaulding to allow her to have an interview with such of
+the girls as were entertaining a hope of their interest in the Saviour.
+These were twenty-two in number. This interview was granted. As she
+knew nothing about the Tamul language, I acted as her interpreter.
+Through me, she requested the girls to give a statement of their
+feelings. One of them arose, and said, "I feel as happy as an angel. I
+feel joys that I can express to no one but my Saviour; and I am just as
+certain that my sins are forgiven, as if I had sent up a karduthaase,"
+that is, a letter to heaven, "and received an answer to it." Another of
+the girls said, that the missionaries had often talked with her about
+her dedicating herself to the Saviour, but that she did not then know
+what it meant. "I now know," added she, "what it means, for God has
+taught it to me." Another of the girls said, "Though they put me in the
+fire, I will never forsake the Saviour."
+
+Now, my dear children, I must bid you farewell Probably I shall never
+see you, unless you come to this heathen land, until I meet you at the
+judgment-seat of Christ. If you do not become missionaries, most of you
+will probably die, and be buried where you now are. Probably I shall die
+in this heathen land. But we shall not always sleep in our graves. After
+a little season, the archangel's trumpet will sound, and you in
+America, and I in India, shall hear his voice proclaiming, "Awake, ye
+dead, and come to judgment." And we shall all at once rise from our
+graves, and stand before our Judge. And where shall I then see you?
+Shall I see any of you on the left hand of Christ, and hear him say,
+"Depart, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and
+his angels?" O, if I should hear that dreadful sentence pronounced
+against you, how would my heart die within me. How could I bear to hear
+it. Oh, I could not--I could not bear to hear it. My dear children, if
+you are yet out of Christ, I entreat you, _at this very moment_, to lay
+down this book, and throw yourselves at the feet of your Saviour. Tell
+him, that you are lost sinners, deserving to be cast into everlasting
+burnings. Tell him, that though you have been wicked children, you will
+leave off your wickedness, and be his for ever. Plead with him, with as
+much earnestness as a _drowning_ man would plead with you to save him,
+to give you the influences of his Holy Spirit, to create within you a
+clean heart, and renew within you a right spirit, without which you are
+eternally undone; and continue to plead, until he pardons you, and
+receives you as his children. By all the sufferings of the Son of God,
+by all the joys of heaven, by all the torments of hell, by the
+solemnities of your dying bed, by the value of your immortal souls
+_which, if once lost, must be lost for ever_, I beseech you thus
+_immediately_ to throw yourselves at his feet, and plead with him to
+make you his. Neglect this duty--neglect giving yourselves to Christ,
+even for one minute, and it may be, that you will be lost, yea, LOST FOR
+EVER.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little
+Readers, About the Heathen., by Dr. John Scudder
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DR. SCUDDER'S TALES ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13539.txt or 13539.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/5/3/13539/
+
+Produced by Stephen Schulze and the PG Online Distributed Proofreaders
+Team
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/13539.zip b/old/13539.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbb26b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13539.zip